Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Vibration Monitoring System

g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
INSTRUCTION, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR BCL 456/A, STEAM TURBINE SNC 1-3)
Volume X
Vibration Monitoring System
NUOVO PIGNONE JOBS

N.P. SERIAL NUMBERS
CUSTOMER
:
:
:
SERVICE
PLANT LOCATION
:
:
PLANT
ITEM N
:
:
MANUFACTURER
110.2313/190.0533
C13466 V01694
COLT ENGINEERING FOR
SUNCOR ENERGY
RECYCLE GAS COMPRESSOR
NORTH OF FORT McMURRAY,
ALBERTA (CANADA)
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATERS
207K-300
GE Oil & Gas

Nuovo Pignone
Via F. Matteucci, 2
50127 Florence - Italy
Telephone (055) 423211
Telefax (055) 4232800
10-08-E
MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01
110.2313/190.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
Status and description of the revisions
Stato di revisione
Data
Eseguito
Controllato
Approvato
Descrizione della revisione
Revision Status
Date
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Description of the revisions
00
05.10.08
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone

Palma
Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S.
01
13.01.08

Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S.
Palma
02

02.11.09 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S
Palma
03

Palma
04

Palma
05

Palma
06

Palma
07

Palma
FIRST ISSUE O.&M.M.

REVISED VOLUME VI ACCORDING
TO INSTRUMENT LIST SOS 9954140
SECOND ISSUE- O.& M.M.
(ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS)
THIRD ISSUE- O.& M.M.
FOURTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
FIFTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
SIXTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
CERTIFIED FINAL MANUAL
This Operating and Maintenance Manual is and contains confidential and proprietary information of
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l, as properly indicated which shall not be used or disclosed to others, except with the
written permission of Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
Within this Manual, subsections of sub supplier documentation are present as originally received.
DATE: 05-10-2008
N.P. JOB: 110.2313/190.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
After Sales Service
Introduction to Nuovo Pignone after-sales service

Nuovo Pignone organization is structured in such a way as to guarantee a comprehensive and
effective after-sales service for its machinery.
Here is briefly described the organization of the company,
manufacturer and on a continuos effort to meet customers needs.
based on its experience as a
Being aware of the importance of maintenance in all operational activities, Nuovo Pignone deals
with its various aspects from the design stage, through:
- the use of design criteria that enhance maintainability,
- the continuos research of innovative solutions to improve availability,
- the selection of components and advanced technologies to enhance equipment maintenance,
- the inspection procedures and topics, to be used in connection with a detailed schedule of
maintenance operations,
- the choice of the spare parts to be kept in stock, optimizing investment cost vs plant
downtime.
In late years Nuovo Pignone after-sales service has also been brought up-to-date to guarantee the
best support to its customers. In more details:
- worldwide,
where Nuovo Pignone has been operating for tens of years, the structure consists of a service
network which is the natural expansion of the "Customer Service Division" in Florence.
There are localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops at strategic points of the world, to
cover areas where plants with Nuovo Pignone machinery are located.
- in Florence, ( Headquarters)
specialized depts. which are active from the receipt of the enquiry, to the issue of the offer and, in
case of an order, to the management of all activities connected with the job, up to its completion.
This organization, available for all customers, ensures a qualified interface to refer to for any
requirements in connection with operation/maintenance of machinery.
The names and address for localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops are available at
GE POWER SYSTEM WEB SITE (URL: http://www.gepower.com) selecting from its home
page the following choices: Business sites/GE Nuovo Pignone/Sales Organization (complete URL:
http://www.gepower.com/geoilandgas/oil_gasbrands/nuovo_pignone/sales_org.html).
In the section Service of this page are available the names and addresses of localized Service
Units divided into geographical areas.
In the above indicated web site, in the section New Units are available the names and addresses
of the Branch Offices Abroad divided into geographical areas.
06-01-E
MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01
After-Sales Service
P. 1-2
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
After Sales Service
Nuovo Pignone has been managing for many years special after sales "Support Packages". These
packages typically include:
- diagnostic analysis of machines in operation
- consultancy in scheduling maintenance based on operational requirements
- field maintenance
- refurbishing of worn components
- original spare parts supplies
- technical expertise in updating machines
Product engineering departments are staffed with experts in analysing machinery operating data,
who provide users with technical consulting services aimed at optimizing use of equipment. The
entire service organization guarantees users get the most suitable maintenance to restore original
design conditions and the total information relevant to all technological innovations introduced in
Nuovo Pignone's products as applicable to the installed machinery.
Full flexibility allows us to adapt each maintenance contract upon User's needs.Service Agreements
in force today, range from "On call" basis to "Global Service"
06-01-E
MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01
After-Sales Service
P. 2-2
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
VOLUMES INDEX
The complete instructions of the compressor unit are subdivided into ten Volumes as
follows:
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
Volume I
- COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST
Volume II
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - STEAM TURBINE
Volume III
- TURBINE DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST
Volume IV
- AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Volume V
- INSTRUMENTATION
Volume VI
- UNIT CONTROL PANEL
Volume VII
- PLC CONTROL SYSTEM
Volume VIII
- OVERSPEED MONITORING SYSTEM
Volume IX
- VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM
Volume X
Each Volume is subdivided into Sections. Each Section can be subdivided into Paragraphs
and/or Parts.
10-08-E
.2313/.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Volume X
Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM

BENTLY NEVADA
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE: RJO 07512
NAME
BOOK N
3500/05 MONITORING SYSTEM

RACK INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 129766-01
3500/05 MONITORING SYSTEM

INSTALLATION AND
OPERATION GUIDE
PART N 163860/01
3500/15 AC AND DC POWER

SUPPLIES - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 129767-01
3500/22M TRANSIENT DATA

INTERFACE MODULE
- OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 161580-01
3500/25 ENHANCED
KEYPHASOR MODULE
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 129770-01
3500/32 AND 3500/34

4 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE
AND TMR RELAY MODULEOPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
PART N 129771-01
10-08-E
.2313/.0533
SECT.
P. 1-2
g GE Oil & Gas
Volume X
Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM

BENTLY NEVADA
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE: RJO 07512
NAME
BOOK N
3500/40 PROXIMITOR
MONITOR MODULE-OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCEMANUAL
PART N 129772-01
3500/42 PROXIMITOR/SEISMIC
MONITOR MODULE - OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 129773-01
3500/65 16 CHANNEL TEMPERATURE

MONITOR OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 172931-01
3500/92 COMMUNICATION
MODULE OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART N 138629-01
10
10-08-E
.2313/.0533
SECT.
P. 2-2
Part number 129766-01

Revision K, August 2002
3500 Monitoring System

Rack Installation and Maintenance
Manual
3500 Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual
Copyright 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Bently Nevada, LLC

All Rights Reserved.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Bently Trademarks
The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada LLC in the United States and other countries:
Actionable Information SM, Actionable Information to the Right

People at the Right Time SM, ADRE, Bently ALIGN, Bently
BALANCE, Bently DOCUVIEW , Bently LUBE, Bently
Nevada, Bently PERFORMANCE, CableLoc, ClickLoc,
Data Manager, Decision SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic
Data Manager, Dynamic Transmitor, Engineer Assist,
FieldMonitor, FluidLoc, flexiTIM, flexiTAM, Helping You
Protect and Manage All Your Machinery, HydroVU, Key ,
Keyphasor, Machine Condition Manager 2000,
MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move
Data, Not People, Move Information, Not Data, NSV,
Preformalign, PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, SE,
Seismoprobe, ServoFluid, Smart Monitor, Snapshot,
System 1, System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX,
Tecknowledgy, TipLoc, TorXimitor, Transient Data
Manager, Trendmaster, TrimLoc, VAM, Velomitor,
XLerometer The Bently Nevada Corporation Orbit Design,
Bently Balance and Design, System 1 Enabled and Design, and
M-Squared and Design are all trademarks or registered marks of
Bently Nevada Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Contacting Bently Nevada

The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada are provided for those times when you cannot
contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
ii
Mailing Address
1631 Bently Parkway South

Minden, NV 89423
USA
Telephone
1 775 782 3611

1 800 227 5514
Fax
1 775 782 9259
Internet
www.bently.com
Additional Information
Note:
This manual does not contain all the information
required to operate and maintain the 3500 Monitoring
System. Refer to the following manuals for other
required information.
3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide ( 129777-01)
guidelines for using the 3500 Rack Configuration software for setting the operating parameters of the module
guidelines for using the 3500 test utilities to verify that the input and output terminals on the
module are operating properly
3500 Monitoring System Computer Hardware and Software Manual (128158-01)

instructions for connecting the rack to 3500 host computer
procedures for verifying communication
procedures for installing software
guidelines for using Data Acquisition / DDE Server and Operator Display Software
procedures and diagrams for setting up network and remote communications
3500 Field Wiring Diagram Package (130432-01)

diagrams that show how to hook up a particular transducer
lists of recommended wiring
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all the modules installed in the rack
iii
iv
Contents
1
Receiving and Handling Instructions

1.1
1.2
1.3
General Information
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Receiving Inspection ................................................................................................ 1

Handling and Storing Considerations....................................................................... 1
Disposal Statement .................................................................................................. 1
Common Features.................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Hot Insertion or Removal of Modules ........................................................... 4
2.1.2 External and Internal Termination ................................................................ 4
Components of the System ...................................................................................... 6
Standard Rack Relay Options: ................................................................................. 8
2.3.1 Individual Relays .......................................................................................... 9
2.3.2 Bussed Relays............................................................................................ 11
2.3.3 Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System.................................................. 12
Intrinsic Safety The 3500 Internal Barrier System ............................................. 16
Initial Rack Installation

3.1
3.2
3.3
General Installation Procedure ............................................................................... 19

Installation Checklist............................................................................................... 19
Weatherproof Housing Installation ......................................................................... 19
3.3.1 General Description .................................................................................... 20
3.3.2 Rack Temperature Derating ....................................................................... 21
3.3.3 Panel Cutout............................................................................................... 22
3.3.4 Conduit Fitting Option ................................................................................. 24
3.3.5 Air Purge Option ......................................................................................... 25
3.3.6 Installation Instructions ............................................................................... 28
3.4 Rack Installation ..................................................................................................... 29
3.4.1 Rack Ventilation.......................................................................................... 29
3.4.2 Panel Mount ............................................................................................... 30
3.4.3 Rack Mount ................................................................................................ 35
3.4.4 Bulkhead Mount.......................................................................................... 41
3.5 External Termination Blocks................................................................................... 44
3.6 Intrinsically Safe Installation ................................................................................... 47
3.7 High Electromagnetic Noise Environment and European Conformance (CE) Rack
Installation .............................................................................................................. 49
3.7.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................... 52
3.7.2 Considerations for CE Installation to a Public Power Supply ..................... 52
3.7.3 Considerations for I.S. systems.................................................................. 53
3.7.4 Additional Notes ......................................................................................... 53
3.8 Set rack jumpers and switches............................................................................... 54
3.9 Wiring Requirements.............................................................................................. 55
3.10 Software Portion of the Rack Installation ............................................................... 56
3500/42M Operation and Maintenance Manual
Module Installation and Removal

4.1
4.2
4.3
Maintenance
5.1
5.2
Rack Ordering Information ..................................................................................... 65

Weatherproof Housing Ordering Information ......................................................... 65
Earthing Module Ordering Information ................................................................... 66
Spares.................................................................................................................... 67
Specifications
7.1
7.2
7.3
vi
General Maintenance Instructions ......................................................................... 64

Choosing a Maintenance Interval........................................................................... 64
Ordering Information
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Installation of Modules ........................................................................................... 57

4.1.1 Power Supplies .......................................................................................... 57
4.1.2 Full-height modules .................................................................................... 58
4.1.3 Half-height modules ................................................................................... 59
Removal of Modules .............................................................................................. 60
4.2.1 Power Supplies .......................................................................................... 60
4.2.2 Full-height modules .................................................................................... 61
4.2.3 Half-height modules ................................................................................... 62
Replacing Modules................................................................................................. 63
4.3.1 Main Modules ............................................................................................ 63
4.3.2 I/O Modules ................................................................................................ 63
Dimensions (overall) .............................................................................................. 68

Weight .................................................................................................................... 69
Environmental (All 3500 Components) .................................................................. 70
Section 1 -- Receiving and Handling Instructions
1 Receiving and Handling Instructions

1.1
Receiving Inspection
Visually inspect the system for obvious shipping damage. If shipping damage
is apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada
LLC.
1.2
Handling and Storing Considerations

Handling and storing of printed circuit boards is extremely critical. Circuit
boards contain devices that are susceptible to damage when exposed to electrostatic charges. Damage caused by obvious mishandling of the board will
void the warranty. To avoid damage, observe the following precautions in the
order given.
Application Alert
Machinery protection will be lost when all the power is
removed from the rack.
Do not discharge static electricity onto the circuit board. Avoid tools or
procedures that would subject the circuit board to static damage. Some
possible causes include ungrounded soldering irons, nonconductive plastics, and similar materials.
Personnel must be grounded with a suitable grounding strap (such as 3M

Velostat No. 2060) before handling or performing maintenance on a
printed circuit board.
Transport and store circuit boards in electrically conductive bags or foil.
Use extra caution during dry weather. Relative humidity less than 30%
tends to multiply the accumulation of static charges on any surface.
When performed properly, modules may be removed from or installed into the
rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to Module Installation and
Removal on page 57 for the proper procedure.
1.3
Disposal Statement
Customers and third parties that are in control of product at the end of its life or
at the end of its use are solely responsible for proper disposal of product. No
person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of product
shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States state laws,
United States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada
Corporation is not responsible for disposal of product at the end of its life or at
the end of its use.
1.1 Receiving Inspection
General Information
Monitoring and computerized vibration information systems provide the information needed to assess the mechanical condition of rotating and reciprocating machinery. These systems continuously measure and monitor a variety of
supervisory parameters, providing crucial information for early identification of
machinery problems such as imbalance, misalignment, shaft crack, and bearing failures. As such, they are an efficient and effective means of satisfying
plant management, engineering, and maintenance concerns for:
Increasing plant safety by minimizing the occurrence of hazardous conditions or catastrophic failures.
Improving product quality by minimizing process variances caused by

improperly operating equipment.
Maximizing plant availability by servicing only those machines that require

it and having more efficient turnarounds.
Reducing plant operating costs by minimizing unplanned shutdowns and

by making more efficient use of maintenance resources.
For protection of critical machinery, it is highly recommended to permanently

install continuous monitoring systems. The term "protection" means that the
system can shut down machinery on alarm, without human interaction. These
systems include applicable transducers, each with its own dedicated monitoring circuitry and alarm setpoints. The 3500 Monitoring System is the newest
addition to the family of continuous monitoring systems offered by Bently
Nevada Corporation.
3500 Monitoring System: Designed using the latest in proven microprocessor technology, the 3500 is a full-feature monitoring system. In addition to
meeting the above stated criteria, the 3500 adds benefit in the following areas:
Enhanced Operator Information
Improved integration to plant control computer
Reduced installation and maintenance cost
Improved reliability
Intrinsic Safety option
Enhanced Operator Information: The 3500 was designed to both enhance

the operator's information and present it in a way that is easy for the operator
to interpret. These features include:
Improved Data Set

-
Overall Amplitude
Probe Gap Voltage
1X Amplitude and Phase
Not 1X Amplitude
Windows Based Operator Display Software
Section 2 -- General Information
Data displayed at multiple locations
Improved integration to plant control computer:
Communication Gateways supporting multiple protocols
Time synchronized vibration and process information
Reduced installation and maintenance cost:
Reduced cabling costs
Downward product compatibility
Improved space utilization
Easier configuration
Reduced spare parts
Improved serviceability
Improved reliability:
Redundant power supplies available
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) monitors and relay cards available
Redundant Gateway and Display Modules permitted
Intrinsic Safety Option: To monitor equipment located in hazardous atmospheres, the 3500 Monitoring System has a range of I/O modules with internal
zener barriers. These modules provide an Intrinsically Safe interface between
the 3500 rack and the transducers located in the hazardous area.
Multiple Output Interfaces: Monitor options (such as full scale ranges,
transducer inputs, recorder outputs, alarm time delays, alarm voting logic, and
relay configuration) can be conveniently adjusted in the field via software.
Modular system design employs plug-in components which allow easy servicing and expansion.
The following three independent interfaces are available with the 3500 system:
Data Manager Interface (Transient Data Interface External or Dynamic

Data Interface External)
Configuration/Data port
Communications Gateway (support for Programmable Logic Controllers,

Process Control Computers, Distributed Control Systems, and PC-based
Control Systems)
These interfaces allow monitored parameters and their statuses to be easily

viewed in the following ways:
Bently Nevada System 1 Software
Bently Nevada 3500 Operator Display Software
Remote Display Panel
DCS or PLC display
Front panel coaxial connectors provide dynamic transducer signals for convenient connection to diagnostic or predictive maintenance instruments.
3
2.1
Common Features
The common features of the modules in the 3500 rack include hot insertion or
removal of modules and external and internal termination of the wiring.
2.1.1
Hot Insertion or Removal of Modules

When performed properly, any module can be removed and replaced while
the system is under power without affecting the operation of any unrelated
modules. If the rack has two power supplies, removing or inserting a power
supply will not disrupt the operation of the 3500 rack. See Module Installation
and Removal on page 57 for the proper procedure.
2.1.2
External and Internal Termination

External Termination uses multi-conductor cables to connect the I/O modules
to the terminal blocks. These blocks make it easier to connect many wires to
the rack in tight areas. External Termination is not available on I/O modules
with internal zener barriers.
(1)
(2)
(3)
To Transducers.
External Termination Blocks.
External Termination I/O Modules.
Internal Termination lets you connect transducers directly to the I/O modules.
4
2.1 Common Features
(1)
(2)
2.1 Common Features
To Transducers.
Internal Termination I/O Modules.
2.2
Components of the System

The 3500 Monitoring System consists of modules that fit into a rack as shown
in the following figure (full-size rack shown)3:
(1)
(2)
(3)
One or Two Power Supplies.

Rack Interface Module (standard, Transient Data Interface (TDI), Triple Module
Redundant (TMR) and TMR TDI).
Monitoring Slot Positions
- Monitor Module
-
Keyphasor Module (2 maximum)
Relay Module
Communication Gateway Module
Display Module1
3500/04-01 Earthing Module, 2
Notes:
1
For System Face Mount option, the Display Interface Module must be
inserted in slot 15.
2
One Earthing Module is required per rack if Internal Barrier I/O's are used.
The Mini-rack has 7 module positions available beyond the Power Supplies
and RIM.
2.2 Components of the System
This section lists the function of each module. Refer to the individual operation and maintenance manuals for the available options, detailed description,
operation and maintenance.
Weatherproof Housing: Protects the 3500 rack from adverse environmental
effects, such as excessive moisture, dirt and grime, and even unclean air.
The weatherproof housing will not accommodate a Display Unit or VGA
Display.
Rack: Two 3500 racks are available: the full-size 19-inch rack and the compact 12-inch Mini-rack. Each rack requires the Power Supplies and Rack
Interface Module (RIM) to be installed in certain locations. The full-size
version offers 14 additional rack positions and the Mini-rack offers 7 additional rack positions for use with any combination of modules. Both racks
offer Standard (non-redundant) and Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) configurations. The TMR system also restricts the location of certain modules.
The following modules may be installed in the 3500 rack:
Power Supply: The Power Supply is a half-height module available in AC
and DC versions. One or two power supplies can be installed in the rack.
Each power supply has the capacity to power a fully loaded rack. When
two power supplies are installed in a rack, the supply in the lower slot acts
as the primary supply and the supply in the upper slot acts as the backup
supply. If the primary supply fails, the backup supply will provide power to
the rack without interrupting rack operation. Any combination of power
supply types is allowed. Overspeed Detection and TMR Monitors require
dual power supplies.
Rack Interface Module: The Rack Interface Module is a full-height module
that communicates with the host (computer), a Bently Nevada Communication Processor, and with the other modules in the rack. The Rack Interface Module also maintains the System Event List and the Alarm Event
List. This module can be daisy chained to the Rack Interface Module in
other racks and to the Data Acquisition / DDE Server Software. The 3500
Monitoring System Computer Hardware and Software Manual shows how
to daisy chain the Rack Interface Modules together. Rack Interface Modules are available in Standard, Triple Modular Redundant and Transient
Data Interface versions.
Communication Gateway Module: The Communication Gateway Modules
are full-height modules that allow external devices (such as a DCS or a
PLC) to retrieve information from the rack and to set up portions of the
rack configuration. More than one Communication Gateway Module can
be installed in the same rack. Communication Gateway Modules are available for a variety of network protocols.
Monitor Module: The Monitor Modules are full-height modules that collect
data from a variety of transducers. Any combination of Monitor Modules
can be installed in the 3500 rack.
Relay Module: Relay Modules offer relays that can be configured to close or
open based on channel statuses from other monitors in the 3500 rack.
Relay modules are available in 4 channel, 16 channel, and 4 channel Triple Modular Redundant.
2.2 Components of the System
The TMR Relay Module is a half-height 4-channel module that operates in

a Triple Module Redundant (TMR) system. Two half-height TMR Relay
Modules must operate in the same slot. If the upper or lower Relay Module is removed or declared as not OK, then the other Relay Module will
control the Relay I/O Module.
Keyphasor Module: The Keyphasor Module is a half-height module that provides power for the Keyphasor transducers, conditions the Keyphasor signals, and sends the signals to the other modules in the rack. The
Keyphasor Module also calculates the rpm values sent to the host (computer) and external devices (DCS or PLC) and provides buffered Keyphasor outputs. Each Keyphasor Module supports two channels and two
Keyphasor Modules may be placed in a 3500 rack (four channels maximum). If two Keyphasor Modules are used, they must be placed in the
same full-height slot and will share a common I/O module.
Display Module: 3500 features multiple display options. The Display Interface Module can display rack data on an LCD based Interface unit or a 3rd
party modbus based display unit. The VGA Display Module will display
rack data on certain touch screen VGA Displays. The Integrated PC display is a complete rack mount touch screen PC pre-loaded with rack configuration software and display utilities.
Earthing Module: The Earthing Module is a full-height module that provides
a low resistance connection (must be less than 1 ) from the 3500 rack to
the plants intrinsically safe earth ground. The module is used in conjunction with the 3500 internal zener barrier I/O modules. One Earthing Module
is required per rack when internal barrier I/O modules are used.
2.3
Standard Rack Relay Options:

The standard (or nonTMR) 3500 rack can be configured to have individual
relays, bussed relays, or a combination of individual and bussed relays.
2.3 Standard Rack Relay Options:
2.3.1
Individual Relays
A rack with individual relays contains one or more relay cards for each monitor
module. There are many ways to configure the monitor and relay modules
within a 3500 rack.
Example 1:
One relay module is used with one monitor module.
Monitor
Channel
Monitor
Alarm
Type
Relay
Module
Relay
Channel
1
1
1
2
Alert
Alert
1
1
1
2
Danger
Danger
1
1
3
4
Alert
Alert
1
1
3
4
Danger
Danger
The Alarm Types are ORed in the above example.

Example 2:
Two relay modules are used with one monitor module.
Monitor
Channel
Monitor
Alarm
Type
Relay
Module
Relay
Channel
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
Danger
Danger
Danger
Danger
Example 3:
One relay module is used with one monitor module.
Monitor
Channel
Monitor
Alarm
Type
Relay
Module
Relay
Channel
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
Danger
Danger
Danger
Danger
The Alarm Types are ORed in the above example.

The following figure shows a typical Individual Relay layout for a standard
3500 rack. The monitors and relay modules can be placed in any slot as long
as one monitor is linked to one (or more) relay module(s) in the Rack Configuration Software.
Figure 2-1. Typical Standard 3500 Rack with Individual Relays (Full-size
rack shown)
10
2.3.2
Bussed Relays
Bussed Relays is a configuration where a number of monitor channels share a
single relay. Use the Rack Configuration Software to define the combination
of alarms that will trigger the relay. The following figure shows a typical
Bussed Relay layout for a standard 3500 rack. The monitors and relay modules can be placed in any slot as long as the monitors are linked to the relay
module in the Rack Configuration Software.
Figure 2-2. Typical Standard 3500 Rack with Bussed Relays (Full-size
rack shown)
11
2.3.3
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System
Figure 2-3. Typical TMR 3500 System (Full-size rack shown)

For applications that require high system reliability, the 3500 rack is capable of
Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR). The goal of a TMR setup is such that no
single point failure of any component will disable machinery protection for critical machine points. When a TMR system is configured properly, every function of the rack is done in duplicate or triplicate to facilitate this goal.
2.3.3.1
Requirements for a 3500 TMR rack:
Rack Jumper must be set to TMR position (see Rack Jumper section of
this manual)
The TMR version of the 3500/20 or 3500/22 Rack Interface Module (TMR
RIM or TMR TDI RIM) must be used.
Two 3500/15 Power Supplies are required. These power supplies should
be connected to independent sources of power. In the event of a failure on
the primary supply, the monitors will use the secondary supply.
TMR monitors are the same as regular monitors only installed in sets of 3
in adjacent slots. The 3 monitors will monitor the same machine point.
Only one monitor is configured in 3500 Rack Configuration Software, the
other two monitors will automatically be configured the same as the first.
The TMR group can use separate transducers for each monitor (discrete).
All I/O modules support TMR with discrete transducers.
Some 3500 monitors are capable of sharing a common transducer across

the triple (bussed). To use bussed transducers the following conditions
must be met:
-
12
The TMR I/O Module for that monitor must be used. If a TMR I/O Module is not available for that monitor, discrete transducers must be used.
The TMR I/O Module must support the desired channel measurement.
The Bussed ET Block for that monitor must be used.
Intrinsic Safety Barriers cannot be used with bussed transducers
Application Alert
When using bussed transducers a single point failure
in the transducer or field wiring can cause a loss of
machinery protection.
2.3.3.2
2.3.3.3
For truly redundant keyphasors, use 2 3500/25 keyphasor monitors. Configure such that the primary and secondary keyphasors reside on different
keyphasor modules. Non-redundant keyphasors are allowed. There can
be a maximum of 2 keyphasor modules per rack.
Independent monitors may be installed in a TMR rack for monitoring less

critical machine points.
Both standard and TMR relay modules may be used in a TMR rack. The
3500/34 TMR Relay Module can only be configured with to drive relays
from channels in a TMR group. Standard relay modules can only drive
relays from channels in an independent monitor.
Redundant Display modules and Communication Gateways are permitted

but not required. Some modules do have configuration restrictions for
placing multiple modules in a rack; see the Operation and Maintenance
manual for the appropriate module.
Features of a properly configured 3500 TMR rack:
Duplicate Power Supplies, All monitors capable of switching between primary and backup supplies without interruption of monitoring.
Triplicate inter-monitor communication networks between RIM, Relay

Module and TMR groups.
Triplicate alarm voting logic and circuitry
Triplicate relay voting logic and control circuitry
Duplicate processing of alarm information from monitors in the rack
TMR Relay Module

A 3500/34 TMR Relay Module consists of 2 half-height Monitors and 1 full size
I/O module. The 2 monitors are configured identically and perform the same
monitoring function redundantly. The I/O module contains triplicate relays and
control logic.
2.3.3.4
Inside a TMR rack

1. Dual 3500 power supplies Independently supply redundant power to each
component in the system
2. TMR Monitor group. Each Channel's status is determined independently in
each monitor
3. Triplicate transducers monitor a single point. Typical for 4 channels. (Discrete transducer inputs shown)
13
4. 2 3500/34 half-height cards process alarm events from the other monitor
cards in duplicate.
5. TMR Relay I/O module has triplicate relay logic
6. TMR Relay I/O module features 2 out of 3 relay voting.
Figure 2-4.
14
2.3.3.5
TMR Individual Relays

The following figure shows a typical TMR rack with Individual Relays. This
configuration requires that three identical monitors be placed next to each
other and that the monitors be linked to one relay module using the Rack Configuration Software.
Figure 2-5. Typical TMR 3500 Rack with Individual Relays (Full-size rack
shown)
15
2.3.3.6
TMR Bussed Relays

The following figure shows a typical TMR rack with Bussed Relays. This configuration requires that three identical monitors be placed next to each other
and that the monitor groups be linked to one relay module in the Rack Configuration Software.
Figure 2-6. Typical TMR 3500 Rack with Bussed Relays (Full-size rack
shown)
(1)
(2)
(3)
2.4
TMR Group 1.
TMR Group 2.
TMR Group 3.
Intrinsic Safety The 3500 Internal Barrier

System
To provide Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) vibration and process variable monitoring,
the 3500 system has a range of I/O modules with internal zener barriers.
When these modules are installed in a 3500 rack with an Earthing Module,
they provide an integrated solution for explosion protection for approved
Bently Nevada transducer systems that are located within all classifications of
hazardous areas (surface industries other than mining).
The following items are required for a 3500 Internal Barrier System:
16
2.4 Intrinsic Safety The 3500 Internal Barrier System
One 3500/04-01 Earthing Module is required per rack when Internal Barrier I/
O modules are used. The Earthing Module does occupy one slot position in
the rack.
The 3500/15 Power supplies must have their grounding configuration changed
from the default factory setting. See the 3500/15 Operation and Maintenance
Manual (PN 129767-01) for instructions.
Any RS-232 connection to any 3500 Module must be isolated (Monitors supporting RS232 connections include: Rack Interface Modules, Communication
Gateways, 3500/95 PC Display). See the 3500/20 Operation and Maintenance Manual (PN 129768-01) for instructions. This does not apply to RS422
and RS485 connections to the rack (Monitors supporting RS422 and/or
RS485 connections include 3500/20, 3500/90, 3500/92, 3500/93, 3500/95).
The 3500/94 VGA Display is not for use in Internal Barrier Systems
Bussed transducers are not allowed in Internal Barrier Systems (see TMR
section of this manual for more information)
The following are features of the 3500 Internal Barrier System:
The Earthing Module enables dual I.S. Earth connections for cables with
cross-sectional areas up to 10 mm2. This module lets you test I.S. Earth
continuity online.
The design of the internal barrier I/O modules provides the necessary 2
inches (50 mm) of separation between safe and hazardous area field wiring.
Field wiring connectors are green for safe areas and blue for hazardous
areas. In addition the pitch of the connectors is different. This helps to
avoid incorrect field wiring installation.
Quick connect/disconnect connectors provide simplified field wiring installation and removal.
Standard and internal barrier I/O modules can be located in the same
3500 rack. We recommend that you group the modules together as
shown in the diagram below to facilitate connection to field wiring.
17
(1)
(2)
18
Earthing Module.
Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
Section 3 -- Initial Rack Installation
Initial Rack Installation

This section shows how to install a new 3500 rack.
3.1
General Installation Procedure

1. Review the Installation Checklist (see Installation Checklist on page 19)
2. Install the Weatherproof Housing (if required) (see Weatherproof Housing
Installation on page 19)
3. Install the rack (see Rack Installation on page 29)
4. Set the jumpers and switches on rack (see Set rack jumpers and
switches on page 54)
5. Install the External Termination Blocks (if required) (see External Termination Blocks on page 44)
6. Install the modules (see Module Installation and Removal on page 57)
7. Wire the transducers, relay, and power to the rack and modules (see Wiring Requirements on page 55)
8. Perform the Software Portion of the Rack Installation (see Software Portion of the Rack Installation on page 56)
3.2
Installation Checklist
Use the following items to plan a 3500 rack installation:
3.3
What are the power requirements?
Does the rack fit in the proposed location?
Can the rack be mounted in the proposed location?
Is there enough air circulation in the proposed location?
Is a weatherproof housing required?
What termination is required (internal or external)?
Is a telephone line required?
Is good rack grounding available?
If Internal Barriers are to be fitted, is there an Intrinsically Safe Earth?
Weatherproof Housing Installation

This section describes the 3500 weatherproof housing and provides
instructions for proper installation.
3.1 General Installation Procedure
19
3.3.1
General Description
The 3500/06 weatherproof housing is an enclosure designed to meet NEMA 4
requirements and to contain one 3500 series rack (rack mount option only).
The housing is not designed to accommodate a Display Unit or VGA display. It
is available in painted steel or stainless steel versions, with or without conduit
fittings, and with or without air purge accessories. Access to the front of the
rack is provided by a hinged door. Access to the rear of the rack is provided by
a bolted-on cover.
1. 16.70 inches (424.2 mm).

2. 23.43 inches (595.1 mm) full-size,
16.43 (417.3 mm) for the Mini-rack.
3. 16.20 inches (411.5 mm).
8. The housing door will latch in this 90

degree position.
9. The housing door will latch in this
135 degree position.
5. 21.00 inches (533.4 mm).
10. The door must be opened to this

position to latch or unlatch the door
in the two shown latching positions.
6. Panel to which the housing is

mounted.
11. Hinged door for access to front of

rack.
7. Thread-seal washers supplied with the

housing. To be used under all internal
heads of mounting bolts or nuts to
obtain a water-tight seal.
12. Bolted cover for access to rear of

rack.
4. 3.75 inches (95.3 mm).
20
3.3 Weatherproof Housing Installation
CAUTION
The hinged door will NOT latch in the 180 degree
position shown in the diagram above. Do not leave
the door unsupported in this position or else
serious injury could result.
3.3.2
Rack Temperature Derating

Because the housing restricts ventilation to the rack, the maximum ambient
temperature of the rack must be derated. Derating is based on how many
watts the rack is dissipating. Refer to the chart below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Temperature rise above ambient, degrees

C.
Temperature rise above ambient, degrees
F.
Power dissipated in Watts.
21
3.3.3
Panel Cutout
The following diagram shows the recommended panel cutout for the 3500/06
weatherproof housing for a full size rack.
1. 21.050 inches (534.7 mm).
12. 0.50 inches (12.7 mm).
2. 16.525 inches (419.7 mm).
13. 4.87 inches (123.7 mm).
3. 10.525 inches (267.3 mm).
14. 9.75 inches (247.7 mm).
4. 4.525 inches (114.9 mm).
15. 20.05 inches (509.3 mm).
5. 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) radius, maximum (4 places).
16. 0.281 inches (7.14 mm) diameter clearance hole for 0.250 inches diameter bolt
or mounting studs. 8 places for housing.
12 places for housing and air purge
gauge assembly.
6. 13.27 inches (337.1 mm).

7. 6.635 inches (168.5 mm).
8. 0.57 inches (14.5 mm).
9. 12.13 +/- 0.06 inches (308.1 +/- 0.2
mm).
17. This 4-hole pattern is only used when

installing the air purge gauge assembly.
10. 4.37 inches (111.0 mm).

11. 5.00 inches (127.0 mm).
22
Dimensions are +/- 0.02 inches (+/- 0.51 mm) unless specified otherwise.
The following diagram shows the recommended panel cutout for the 3500/06
weatherproof housing for a Mini-rack.
23
1. 14.050 inches (356.87 mm).
12. 0.50 inches (12.7 mm).
2. 11.525 inches (292.74 mm).
13. 4.87 inches (123.7 mm).
3. 7.025 inches (178.44 mm).
14. 9.75 inches (247.7 mm).
4. 2.525 inches (64.135 mm).
15. 13.05 inches (331.47 mm).
5. 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) radius, maximum (4 places).
16. 0.281 inches (7.14 mm) diameter clearance hole for 0.250 inches diameter bolt
or mounting studs. 8 places for housing.
12 places for housing and air purge
gauge assembly.
6. 13.27 inches (337.1 mm).

7. 6.635 inches (168.5 mm).
8. 0.57 inches (14.5 mm).
9. 12.13 +/- 0.06 inches (308.1 +/- 0.2
mm).
17. This 4-hole pattern is only used when

installing the air purge gauge assembly.
10. 4.37 inches (111.0 mm).

11. 5.00 inches (127.0 mm).
Dimensions are +/- 0.02 inches (+/- 0.51 mm) unless specified otherwise.
3.3.4
Conduit Fitting Option

The conduit fitting option provides four 1 NPT weatherproof hubs. The
conduit is supplied by the customer, and the percentage of fill should not
exceed 40% as specified in National Electrical Code, 1975, Chapter 9, Tables
1 and 2. The upper conduits are to be used for transducer power, signal input
and recorder output. The lower conduits are to be used for rack power input
and relay wiring. Power input and relay wiring should NOT be mixed with
transducer and recorder wiring. The following diagrams show the hubs
installed onto the housing.
24
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
3.3.5
1.03 inches (26.2 mm), 4 places.

19.55 inches (496.6 mm) full size, 12.55
inches (318.77 mm) for Mini-rack.
Customer-supplied conduit, 4 places.
Weatherproof conduit hub. Also shown in
cross-section A-A.
Rear view of housing with rear cover and
typical 3500 rack installed.
O-ring seal.
Housing wall. Arrow points to inside surface of the housing.
Lock ring.
Collar.
Air Purge Option

There are two air purge options:
1. The fittings only option provides four 1 NPT Pour seal type fittings and
one NPT weatherproof hub, with fittings to reduce down to NPT
(female) for air input.
2. The fittings and gauge option provides the fittings listed above, a gauge
assembly, a bulkhead connector and a connecting tube.
25
When either of the air purge options is required, the conduit fitting option is
also required.
Static purge pressure (the pressure required to insure that a hazardous
atmosphere does not enter the housing) must be above 0.2 inches of water
(0.05 Kilopascals) for installations that require N.F.P.A. 495-1982
specification. For installations that require Canadian Electrical Code C22.11986 specification, pressure must be above 0.25 Kilopascals (1.0 inches of
water). This is measured on the gauge (after housing has been purged) with
valve in the closed position.
Application Alert
This housing is NOT equipped with over pressure
protection. Maximum working pressure should not
exceed 2.49 Kilopascals (10 inches of water).
Purge flow rate (the time required to purge 5 or 10 volumes of air through the
housing) is determined by:
1. Turn the valve to its vent position and read the gauge to determine housing purge pressure.
2. Find that pressure on the appropriate chart provided below.
3. Determine the size of the housing that is being purged and read from that
column the length of time required to purge the system with your housing
pressure. This number, in minutes, should be permanently marked in the
space provided on the warning label on the housing door.
(1)
26
Use this table for 5X purge per N.F.P.A.

496-1982.
(2)
Use this table for 10X purge per Canadian

Electrical Code C22.1-1986, Part 1.
(3) Pressure in inches of water.
(4) Flow (in cubic feet per minute) through air
purge valve.
(5) Time (in minutes) for purging weatherproof housing.
(6) Pressure in Kilopascals.
(7) Flow (in cubic meters per hour) through air
purge valve.
All tests and recommendations are in accordance with specifications and
requirements made by N.F.P.A. in pamphlet 496-1982 for type Y purge, or
Canadian Electrical Code C22.1-1986, Part 1. For additional information on
purge requirements, refer to the above standards.
The following diagrams show installation of the air purge fittings and gauge.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
3.00 inches (76.2 mm).

6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Purge warning label.
10.50 inches (266.7 mm).
27
(5)
(6)
3.25 inches (88.6 mm).

Drill a 0.43 inches diameter mounting
hole.
(7) Locknut.
(8) Bulkhead fitting.
(9) Connecting tube.
(10) 0.50 inches (12.7 mm).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
3.3.6
31.05 inches (788.7 mm) full size, 24.05

inches (610.87 mm) for Mini-rack.
5.75 inches (146.1 mm).
Sealing compound.
Weatherproof housing wall, inside surface.
Packing fiber, 2 places.
Pour seal fitting.
Adapter.
Conduit hub.
Installation Instructions
1. Create the appropriate panel cutout for the options to be used.
2. Install the weatherproof housing into the panel cutout.
28
3. Secure the housing to the panel with eight inch bolts. Be sure to use the
provided thread seals to ensure a water-tight seal.
4. If required, install the optional fittings and gauge.
5. Install the 3500 system rack per the instructions for a rack-mount system.
6. Remove the rear access cover of the housing.
7. Install the field wiring to the rack.
8. Secure all fittings.
9. Install the housings rear access cover.
Perform the necessary installation tests.
3.4
Rack Installation
This section provides instructions for the proper mounting of each type (Panel
Mount, Rack Mount and Bulkhead Mount) of 3500 full-size and mini-racks.
When mounting a rack, check that the rack is mounted to a grounded surface
and that the features on the front panels of the main modules are accessible.
Be sure to also provide for maintenance access to the I/O modules.
3.4.1
Rack Ventilation
The top and bottom of the rack are perforated to allow cooling air in and
heated air to escape. In order to help ensure adequate ventilation, maintain
the minimum clearances at the top and bottom of the rack as shown below.
3.4 Rack Installation
29
(1)
(2)
3.4.2
Minimum top clearance = 2.00 inches

(50.4 mm).
Minimum bottom clearance = 2.00 inches
(50.4 mm).
Panel Mount
A 3500 Panel Mount rack is shown in the following diagram. A Panel Mount
rack allows you to install a 3500 rack behind a panel through a sheet metal
cutout and clamp into place.
30
3.4.2.1
Panel Mount Full-Size Rack
Figure 3-1. Dimensions of a Panel Mount 3500 Full-Size Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10.470 inches (265.94 mm).

19.000 inches (482.60 mm).
17.400 inches (441.96 mm).
9.700 inches (246.38 mm).
13.750 inches (349.25 mm), 16.650
inches (422.91 mm) if used with internal
barriers
CAUTION
Clamps must not be used as handles while
carrying or installing the rack. The clamps may
fall off resulting in injury to personnel and damage
to the rack.
The required dimensions for the panel cutout, is shown in the following
diagram.
31
3.4.2.2
(1) 17.80 +/- 0.06 inches (452.1 +/- 1.5 mm).

(2) 0.125 inches (3.2 mm) radius, maximum.
(3) 9.90 +/- 0.60 inches (251.5 +/- 1.5 mm).
Panel Mount Mini-Rack
Figure 3-2. Dimensions of a Panel Mount 3500 Mini-Rack

32
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10.470 inches (265.94 mm).

12.000 inches (304.80 mm).
10.400 inches (264.16 mm).
9.700 inches (246.38 mm).
13.750 inches (349.25 mm), 16.650
barriers
CAUTION
Clamps must not be used as handles while
carrying or installing the rack. The clamps may
fall off resulting in injury to personnel and damage
to the rack.
The required dimensions for the panel cutout, is shown in the following
diagram.
(1)
(2)
(3)
10.80 +/- 0.06 inches (274.3 +/- 1.5 mm).

0.125 inches (3.2 mm) radius, maximum.
9.90 +/- 0.60 inches (251.5 +/- 1.5 mm).
33
3.4.2.3
Instructions for installing panel mount rack

1. Cut panel cutout to the required dimensions.
2. If installed, remove the panel mount clamps from the rack. Slide rack
through panel cutout.
3. Assemble the clamp.
(1)
(2)
34
Rear of Rack.
Clamp.
4. Align the rack in the cutout.

5. Tighten the clamping screws.
3.4.3
Rack Mount
3.4.3.1
Full-Size Rack Mount

A Rack Mount 3500 full-size rack is shown in the following diagrams. A Rack
Mounted 3500 system allows you to install the rack into a standard 19-inch
EIA cabinet.
35
36
Figure 3-3. Dimensions of a Rack Mount 3500 Full-Size Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
3.4.3.2
10.470 inches (265.94 mm).

7.500 inches (190.50 mm).
18.008 inches (457.40 mm).
19.000 inches (482.60 mm).
17.400 inches (441.96 mm).
9.700 inches (246.38 mm).
13.750 inches (349.25 mm), 16.650
barriers
Instructions for installing rack mount 3500 full-size rack

Install the 3500 rack using No. 10 flat washers (4 places) and 10-32 screws (4
places) at the locations shown by the arrows in the diagram below.
37
3.4.3.3
Mini-Rack Mount
A Rack Mount 3500 mini-rack is shown in the following diagrams. The MiniRack Mounted 3500 system also allows you to install the rack into a standard
19-inch EIA cabinet with the use of the mini-rack Adapter Panel.
38
39
Figure 3-4. Dimensions of a Rack Mount 3500 Mini-Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
3.4.3.4
10.470 inches (265.94 mm).

7.500 inches (190.50 mm).
11.008 inches (279.60 mm).
12.000 inches (304.80 mm).
10.400 inches (264.16 mm).
9.700 inches (246.38 mm).
13.750 inches (349.25 mm), 16.650
barriers
Instructions for installing a rack mount 3500 Mini-rack
Install the Mini-rack adapter panel into the EIA rack using No. 10 flat washers
(4 places) and 10-32 screws (4 places). Next, install the 3500 Mini-rack onto
the adapter panel using No. 10 flat washers (4 places) and 10-32 screws (4
places).
40
(1)
(2)
(3)
3.4.4
3500 Mini-rack
Adapter Panel
Standard 19-inch EIA rack
Bulkhead Mount
A Bulkhead Mount 3500 rack is shown in the following diagrams. Use a 3500
Bulkhead rack when you want to attach the rack to a wall or want to be able to
change the field wiring from the front of the rack.
Note:
The 3500/05 Mini-rack is not available in the Bulkhead
Mount option
41
42
Figure 3-5. Dimensions of a Bulkhead Mount 3500 rack
3.4.4.1
(1) 19.000 inches (482.60 mm).

(2) 18.094 inches (459.59 mm).
(3) 5.250 inches (133.35 mm).
(4) 7.500 inches (190.50 mm).
(5) 5.250 inches (133.35 mm).
(6) 20.970 inches (532.64 mm).
(7) 10.500 inches (266.70 mm).
Instructions for installing bulkhead mount 3500 rack
places) in the locations shown in the diagram below.
43
3.5
External Termination Blocks

External and Internal Termination on page 4 briefly described when External
Termination (ET) Blocks and I/O modules would be used and shows a
diagram of the components assembled.
The diagram below shows some of the common DIN rail types that the ET
Blocks can mount to.
44
3.5 External Termination Blocks
(1)
U-shaped rail. Dimension A = 35mm and

dimension B = 7.5mm. This rail is referred
to as U-Rail(7.5) in this section.
(2) U-shaped rail. Dimension A = 35mm and
dimension B = 15mm. This rail is referred
to as U-Rail(15) in this section.
(3) G-shaped rail. Dimension A = 32mm and
dimension B = 15mm. This rail is referred
to as G-Rail in this section.
The diagram below shows a Euro-style ET Block mounted on G-Rail.
45
The diagram below shows a Terminal-strip (or barrier type) ET Block mounted
on G-Rail.
Either ET Block type can be mounted on any of the rail types mentioned
above. For a more detailed picture of a particular ET Block, refer to the manual
of the applicable 3500 monitor.
The table below lists the available ET Blocks and their dimensions. The
location of the dimensions are shown in the diagrams above. All dimensions
are in mm.
Part Number
128710
46
68
H U-Rail(7.5)
H U-Rail (15)
H G-Rail
77
51
59
57
C1
39
C2
39
125808
128702
133900
141208
68
77
58
66
63
39
39
128718
133932
136603
140993
90
77
58
66
63
39
39
128726
90
77
51
59
57
39
39
133916
113
77
58
66
63
39
39
128015
133892
133924
136595
141001
113
77
51
59
57
39
39
132242
153
90
67
75
73
46
43
133908
141216
153
90
60
68
65
46
43
132234
178
90
60
68
65
46
43
3.6
Intrinsically Safe Installation

For correct operation of an I.S. installation, you must maintain a low resistance
path to the I.S. earth point of the plant. Either one or two cables of less than 1
ohm combined resistance must be connected to the Earthing Module in order
to provide a connection between the rack and the plant I.S. earth. These
cables must have a cross-sectional area of between 4 mm 2 and 10 mm2.
The optimum solution is to use two cables to connect from the Earthing
Module to plant I.S. earth. This connection lets you test the continuity of the
I.S. earth connection on-line. If one cable is disconnected from the Earthing
Module then the resistance of the two cables can be measured using a
suitable milli-ohm meter. A total resistance of less than 2 ohms will ensure that
the parallel combination of the two cables is less than 1 ohm. Continuity
between the shield of the field wiring from the hazardous area and the
Earthing Module should also be verified.
If the Earthing Module is positioned in the rack such that it would be difficult to
remove one of the I.S. earth cables in order to perform on-line testing, then the
3.6 Intrinsically Safe Installation
47
standard slotted set screws may be replaced with the Allen headed set screws
provided.
Please refer to Bently Nevada drawing number 138547 for additional
information regarding the installation requirements for an Intrinsically Safe
System.
To avoid ground loops, the system must provide a single point ground. In
Intrinsically Safe applications the 3500 Rack is floated and referenced to an
intrinsically safe ground instead of earth ground. RS-232 communications are
referenced to earth ground, and therefore to keep the rack isolated from earth
ground, a serial data isolator must be used. RS-485 uses an isolated ground
and no additional isolation is required.
The following diagram shows the connections for testing the I.S. earth
resistance.
Figure 3-6. Testing I.S. earth resistance.
48
3.6 Intrinsically Safe Installation
3.7
High Electromagnetic Noise Environment

and European Conformance (CE) Rack
Installation
For the high electromagnetic noise environment or CE installation, the system
rack, EMI shield, and cables must be thoroughly grounded to provide a ground
path for electromagnetic energy (see figures below). The Bulkhead Rack and
External Termination Blocks must be mounted inside an Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI) shielded area.
Figure 3-7. Typical Installation - Standard Rack with Internal Termination

I/O Modules (Top View of Full-Size Rack Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Grounded Cabinet.
3500 Monitoring System.
Front of Rack.
Field Wiring Cables with Both Foil and
Braid Shield.
Cable Shields Terminated to EMI Shield.
3.7 High Electromagnetic Noise Environment and European Conformance (CE) Rack Installation
49
Figure 3-8. Typical Installation - Standard Rack with External Termination I/O Modules, External Termination Blocks Installed Inside the Cabinet (Top View of Full-Size Rack Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
External Termination Blocks, Mounted

Inside EMI Shielded Area.
EMI Shielded Area.
Front of Rack.
Braid Shielding.
Figure 3-9. Typical Installation - Standard Rack with External Termination I/O Modules, External Termination Blocks Installed in a Junction
Box (Top View of Full-Size Rack Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
50
Grounded Cabinet.
Front of Rack.
Multi-Conductor Cables with Both Foil and
Braid Shielding.
External Termination Block Junction Box.
Is Also an EMI Shielded Area.
Braid Shielding.
3.7 High Electromagnetic Noise Environment and European
Figure 3-10. Typical Installation - Bulkhead Rack with Internal Termination I/O Modules (Top View Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
EMI Shielded Area.

Front of Rack.
Braid Shielding.
Cable Shields Terminated to EMI shield.
Figure 3-11. Typical Installation - Bulkhead Rack with External Termination I/O Modules, External Termination Blocks Installed Inside the Cabinet (Top View Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
EMI Shielded Area.

Front of Rack.
51
(4)
(5)
(6)
External Termination Blocks, Mounted

Inside EMI Shielded Area.
Braid Shielding.
Figure 3-12. Typical Installation - Bulkhead Rack with External Termination I/O Modules, External Termination Blocks Installed in a Junction
Box (Top View Shown).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
3.7.1
EMI Shielded Area.

Front of Rack.
Multi-conductor Cable with Both Foil and
Braid shielding.
Cable Shields Terminated to EMI shield.
External Termination Block Junction Box.
Is Also an EMI Shielded Area.
Braid Shielding.
Wiring
All wiring exiting the metal cabinet or EMI shielded area must be shielded.
Acceptable EMI shielding includes metal conduit or multi-conductor cables
with both foil and braid shielding. In places where cables enter shielded
areas, the cable shield should make good electrical contact with the EMI
shield and any subsequent junction enclosure. This contact drains off EMI
energy from the cable before the cable enters the shielded area.
3.7.2
Considerations for CE Installation to a Public Power Supply

For systems installed in areas that require compliance to EN61000.3.2, the
equipment shall only be used in industrial environment with a connection to
52
3.7 High Electromagnetic Noise Environment and European
the industrial power supply network. If the system is connected to the public
power supply mains, EN61000.3.2 must be met by using a third party device
that provides power factor correction.
3.7.3
Considerations for I.S. systems
3.7.3.1
Field Wiring to the Hazardous Area

This should be of steel wire armored construction and should be connected to
the EMI shielded area using a suitable cable gland. The inner cores should
have an overall screen of foil with a drain wire to connect to the barrier shield
terminal of the I/O module. Cables manufactured to BS5308 Part 1, or similar
national or international standards, are suitable.
3.7.3.2
Connecting the I.S. Earth

To ensure that EMI is not picked up by or radiated from the I.S. earth cables,
install a feed-through capacitor on each I.S. earth cable. These capacitors
must be installed at the boundary of the EMI shielded area. A Schaffner
FN7000 Series or similar bulkhead mounting type is recommended.
Critical filter parameters are:
500 V isolation.
25 A continuous rated current.
Less than 0.1ohm resistance.
At least 47 nF capacitance.
Screw terminals with locking washers at each end.
CAUTION
The series resistance of the filter has to be taken
into account when planning the installation of the
I.S. cables, since the total resistance of the
combination of cables and filters must be less
than 1 ohm.
3.7.4
Additional Notes
Larger scale factors are less susceptible to EMI than smaller scale factors.
Larger full-scales are less susceptible to EMI than smaller full-scale.
Monitors with narrow bandwidth filter configurations are less susceptible to

EMI than monitors configured with wide bandwidth.
Larger Keyphasor or hysteresis settings are less susceptible to EMI than

smaller hysteresis settings.
Shorter Alarm delay times may increase monitor susceptibility to transient

EMI.
53
3.8
Environments with higher levels of EMI than tested may cause unpredictable monitor readings and may cause system malfunction.
Set rack jumpers and switches

Set the following jumpers and switches before operating the rack:
Rack address switch (on the front of the Rack Interface Module)
Transducer jumpers on each I/O Module, as required
Certain I/O Modules have switches to control their mode of operation.

Examples include:
RIM and Comm Gateway I/Os that support both RS232 and RS422
have a protocol selection switch
Overspeed and non-TMR Relay I/Os have Normally Energized/Deenergized Relay mode switches
Comm Gateway I/Os that support RS485 have termination mode

switches
Setup phone connection to rack / host (if you use an internal or external
modem)
Phone cable to internal modem in rack
OR
Phone cable to modem and RS-232 cable from modem to rack
54
TMR / SIM jumper on the inside of the 3500 Rack backplane between the
Power Supply and the Rack Interface Module as shown in the diagrams
below.
3.8 Set rack jumpers and switches
(1)
(2)
Ten-legged jumper must be placed in this

position for Standard 3500 rack.
Ten-legged jumper must be placed in this
position for TMR 3500 rack.
Note:
If the ten-legged jumper is not installed in one of the
above positions, the rack will not operate correctly.
3.9
Wiring Requirements
Refer to the individual module manuals and field wiring diagrams for detailed
instructions for connecting components to the I/O module. Refer to the
weatherproof housing section for information specific to those installations.
Refer to the high electromagnetic noise environment section for information
applicable to those installations.
Connect the I/O modules in the 3500 rack to the following items.
Transducers (match the selected transducer jumpers)
Keyphasor transducers
Power
Connect the external devices to the following terminals.
Relay outputs
OK Relay on the back of the Rack Interface I/O Module
3.9 Wiring Requirements
55
3.10
System Contacts (Trip Multiply, Inhibit, Rack Reset, etc)
Software Portion of the Rack Installation

Now that the hardware portion of the 3500 rack installation is complete, refer
to 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide to configure
and verify the 3500 Monitoring System. The following steps should be
performed in the order presented to configure your rack.
56
Verify the Rack Communication
Upload Default Configuration from the rack
Customize the Rack Configuration
Download the Configuration to rack
Adjust the Scale Factor, Zero Position, and Manual Keyphasor Threshold
Download any adjustments
Perform Rack Verification
3.10 Software Portion of the Rack Installation
Section 4 -- Module Installation and Removal
Module Installation and Removal

This section shows how to install and remove the individual modules (including I/O modules) in a 3500 rack.
In all discussions, the main module is the part that gets installed in the front of
the rack-mount and panel-mount racks or in the bottom of the bulkhead rack.
They have the blue overlays with the model number printed on them.
The input or I/O modules are the parts that get installed at the rear of the rackmount and panel-mount racks or in the top of the bulkhead rack. This is where
the power and field wiring connections are made.
4.1
Installation of Modules
The following section describes how to install modules in a 3500 rack. It is
assumed that the applicable slot is empty. Power to the rack does not need to
be removed before installing a module if the procedures below are followed.
4.1.1
Power Supplies
The following lists general steps for installing the 3500/15 power supplies.
Refer to the specific manual for the power supply for details and safety considerations. Verify that the main module and the Power Input Module (PIM) are
compatible before proceeding.
1. Install the PIM.
-
Configure the PIM for Single Point Ground, if necessary.
Attach power cord to the PIM, if it is deemed to be more convenient at

this time. Be sure that the power cord is not live.
Place the PIM into place at the back (or top for bulkhead racks) of the
rack. Tighten the screws to pull the PIM securely against the rack.
2. Install the main module.

-
Slide the main module into place. Ensure that the module is properly in
the guides provided on the rack.
Tighten the screws securely.
Note:
It is important to tightly secure the thumb screws to
ensure each module is Chassis grounded. Loose
thumb screws may allow noise to show on the channel
readings.
3. Verify operation.
-
4.1 Installation of Modules
When appropriate, apply power to the PIM and verify operation of the
power supply.
57
4.1.2
Full-height modules
The following lists general steps for installing any full-height 3500 module.
Refer to the specific manual for the module for details and safety considerations. Verify that the main module and the I/O module are compatible before
proceeding.
1. Install the I/O module.
-
Configure the I/O module for available options, if necessary.
Place the I/O module into place at the back (or top for bulkhead racks)
of the rack. Tighten the screws to pull the I/O module securely against
the rack.
Attach field wiring to the I/O module, if appropriate at this time.
58
Ensure that the ejectors are in their normal position, flush with the front
of the module.
Slide the main module into place, ensuring that they are properly in the
guides provided on the floor and roof of the rack chassis.
Note:
readings.
4.1.3
Half-height modules
The following lists general steps for installing any half-height 3500 module
other than the power supplies. Refer to the specific manual for the module for
details and safety considerations. Verify that the main module and the I/O
module are compatible before proceeding.
1. Install the half-height card guide. This may require removing other modules in the rack in order to make room for getting the guide into place.
2. Install the I/O module.

-
Configure the I/O module for available options, if necessary.
59
Place the I/O module into place at the back (or top for bulkhead racks)
of the rack. Tighten the screws to pull the I/O module securely against
the rack.
Attach field wiring to the I/O module, if appropriate at this time.

-
Slide the main module into place, ensuring that they are properly in the
guides provided on card guide and the rack chassis.
Note:
readings.
4.2
Removal of Modules
The following section describes how to remove the modules in a 3500 rack.
Power to the rack does not have to be removed if the following procedures are
followed.
4.2.1
Power Supplies
The following lists general steps for removing the 3500/15 power supplies.
Refer to the specific manual for the power supply for details and safety considerations.
1. Remove power to the PIM.
-
Remove power to the PIM that is to be removed. Observe applicable

safety precautions while handling the power cables.
2. Remove the main module.

-
Loosen the screws to the main module so that they are free of the rack
chassis, but still attached to the main module.
Use the loose screws as handles to pull the main module out of the
rack.
Use caution when handling because the unit may still be carrying a
charge.
3. Remove the PIM.
60
Loosen the screws holding the PIM to the rack. As the screws are
loosened, they will push the PIM away from the rack.
Use caution when handling because the unit may still be carrying a
charge.
4.2 Removal of Modules
4.2.2
Full-height modules
The following lists general steps for removing any full-height 3500 module.
Refer to the specific manual for the module for details and safety considerations.
1. Remove the main module.
-
Use the ejectors to pry the main module loose from the backplane connectors.
Once freed from the backplane, the main module can be removed
completely from the rack.
2. Remove the field wiring from the I/O module.

-
See the applicable manual for removing the connector headers or

computer-type cables.
3. Remove the I/O module.

-
Loosen the screws holding the I/O module to the rack. As the screws
are loosened, they will push the I/O module away from the rack.
61
4.2.3
Half-height modules
The following lists general steps for removing any half-height 3500 module
other than the power supplies. Refer to the specific manual for the module for
details and safety considerations.
1. Remove the main modules. It does not matter if the upper or lower main
module is removed first.
-
Use the loose screws as handles to pull the main module out of the
rack.
2. Remove the half-height card guide.

-
See the applicable manual for removing the connector headers or

computer-type cables.
4. Remove the I/O module.

-
62
Loosen the screws holding the I/O module to the rack. As the screws
are loosened, they will push the I/O module away from the rack.
4.3
Replacing Modules
When replacing modules, whether main or I/O, power does not need to be
removed from the rack if the following procedures are followed. Refer to applicable steps in the procedures above for removing or installing a module.
4.3.1
Main Modules
This assumes that only the main module of a monitor or power supply is to be
replaced. Prior to removing any module, refer to the applicable manual to see
how rack behavior may be affected, and for any special handling requirements
required for personal safety.
1. If necessary, upload and save the configuration of the module to be
replaced.
2. Remove the main module from the rack.
3. Install the new main module into the rack.
4. If necessary, configure the new main module.
4.3.2
I/O Modules
This assumes that only the I/O module of a monitor or the PIM of a power supply is to be replaced. Prior to removing any module, refer to the applicable
manual to see how rack behavior may be affected, and for any special handling requirements required for personal safety.
1. If necessary, upload and save the configuration of the module to be
replaced.
4. Remove the old I/O module from the rack.
5. Install the new I/O module into the rack.
6. Connect the field wiring to the new I/O module.
7. Install the main module into the rack.
8. If necessary, re-configure the main module.
4.3 Replacing Modules
63
5
5.1
Maintenance
General Maintenance Instructions
The boards and components inside of 3500 modules cannot be repaired in the
field. Maintaining a 3500 rack consists of testing module channels to verify
that they are operating correctly. Modules that are not operating correctly
should be replaced with a spare.
rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to Initial Rack Installation on
page 19 for the proper procedure.
The 3500 Monitoring System is a high precision instrument that requires no
calibration. The functions of the 3500 modules, however, must be verified at
regular intervals. All modules in the 3500 Monitoring System should be verified at these maintenance intervals. The procedures in the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting sections of the module manuals describe the verification and
troubleshooting process.
5.2
Choosing a Maintenance Interval

Use the following approach to choose a maintenance interval:
64
Start with an interval of one year and then shorten the interval if any of the
following conditions apply:
-
the monitored machine is classified as critical
the 3500 rack is operating in a harsh environment such as in extreme

temperature, high humidity, or in a corrosive atmosphere
At each interval, use the results of the previous verifications and ISO Procedure 10012-1 to adjust the interval.
5.1 General Maintenance Instructions
Section 6 -- Ordering Information
6
6.1
Rack Ordering Information
3500/05-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
A: Rack Size
01
19-inch Rack (14 Module Slots)
02
12-inch Mini-Rack (7 Module Slots)
01
Panel Mount Option, Full-Size Rack
02
Rack Mount Option, Full-Size Rack (mounts

to19-inch EIA Rack)
03
Bulkhead Mount Option (Not available in

Mini-Rack)
04
Panel Mount Option, Mini-Rack
05
Rack Mount Option, Mini-Rack
00
None
01
CSA-NRTL/C
B: Mounting Options
C: Agency Approval
Option
D: Reserved
00
E: European
Compliance Option
6.2
00
None
01
CE
Weatherproof Housing Ordering Information

3500/06-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
Note:
The 3500/06 Weatherproof Housing does not provide
a smaller version designed specifically for the 3500/05
Mini-rack. Use of the Mini-rack in the Weatherproof
Housing will require installation of the Mini-rack
Adapter Panel. A Door Only option does exist for the
Mini-Rack.
6.1 Rack Ordering Information
65
Note:
The 3500/06 Weatherproof Housing is not designed to
accommodate a Display Unit or a VGA Display.
A: Housing Type
01
Painted Steel Housing
02
Stainless Steel Housing
03
Painted Steel Door Only, Full-Size Rack
04
Stainless Steel Door Only, Full-Size Rack
05
Painted Steel Door Only, Mini-Rack
06
Stainless Steel Door Only, Mini-Rack
00
No Fittings Required
01
Conduit Fittings Re q u i r e d
00
No Air Purge Accessories Required
01
Air Purge Fittings Only
02
Air Purge Fittings and Gauge
00
None
B: Conduit Fitting
Option
C: Air Purge Option
D: Agency Approval
Option
6.3
Earthing Module Ordering Information

3500/04-AXX
A: Module Type
01
Earthing Module
Note:
This option requires one monitor slot position in the
rack.
66
6.3 Earthing Module Ordering Information
6.4
Spares
Part Number:
Description
00517016:
TMR/SIM jumper (installed on the 3500 backp lane)
00530843:
3500/42 Prox/Seismic I/O Module four pin connector shunt
131150-01:
Power Supply Blank Front Panel
131151-01:
Half-height Blank Front Panel
130944-01:
Full-height Blank Front Panel
130768-01:
Blank Slot Assembly (Front and Rear)
136719-01:
Earthing Module
138257-01:
Earthing Module Front Panel Assy
144863-01:
Adapter Panel, Mini-rack, 19-inch
Half Height Module Adapter:
6.4 Spares
125388-01:
Chassis
125565-01:
Card Guide
04300111:
Screws (order 3 per adapter )
67
7
7.1
Specifications
Dimensions (overall)
Panel Mount Full-Size Rack:
Width:
482.6 mm (19.0 in)
Height:
265.9 mm (10.47 in)
Depth:
349.3 mm (13.75 in)
Depth with internal

barriers:
423.0 mm (16.65 in)
Rack Mount Full-Size Rack:

Width:
482.6 mm (19.0 in)
Height:
265.9 mm (10.47 in)
Depth:
349.3 mm (13.75 in)
Depth with internal

barriers:
423.0 mm (16.65 in)
Bulkhead Mount Rack:

Width:
482.6 mm (19.0 in)
Height:
532.6 mm (20.97 in)
Depth:
266.7 mm (10.50 in)
Depth with internal

barriers:
266.7 mm (10.50 in)
Panel Mount Mini-Rack:
68
Width:
304.8 mm (12.0 in)
Height:
265.9 mm (10.47 in)
Depth:
349.3 mm (13.75 in)
Depth with internal

barriers:
423.0 mm (16.65 in)
7.1 Dimensions (overall)
Section 7 -- Specifications
Rack Mount Mini-Rack:

Width:
304.8 mm (12.0 in)
Height:
265.9 mm (10.47 in)
Depth:
349.3 mm (13.75 in)
Depth with internal

barriers:
423.0 mm (16.65 in)
Weatherproof Housing:
7.2
Width:
595.1 mm (23.43 in)
Height:
424.2 mm (16.70 in)
Depth:
628.7 mm (24.75 in)
Weight
Basic (Unloaded Full-Size Rack):
Panel Mount
Configuration:
7.03 kg (15.5 lb)
Rack Mount
Configuration:
6.67 kg (14.7 lb)
Bulkhead Mount
Configuration:
11.93 kg (26.3 lb)
Standard Fully
Loaded Full-Size
System:
7.2 Weight
Panel Mount
Configuration:
31.07 kg (68.5 lb)
Rack Mount
Configuration:
30.71 kg (67.7 lb)
Bulkhead Mount
Configuration:
35.97 kg (79.3 lb)
69
Internal Barrier
System (typical fully
loaded
configuration):
This will add approximately 4.00 kg (8.96 lb) to the above

weights.
Basic (Unloaded Mini-Rack):

Panel Mount
Configuration:
4.76 kg (10.5 lb)
Rack Mount
Configuration:
4.40 kg (9.7 lb)
Standard Fully Loaded Mini-Rack System:

Panel Mount
Configuration:
22.86 kg (50.4 lb)
Rack Mount
Configuration:
22.50 kg (49.6 lb)
Internal Barrier
Mini-Rack System
(typical fully loaded
configuration):
7.3
This will add approximately 2.39 kg (5.27 lb) to the above

weights.
Environmental (All 3500 Components)

Temperature:
Operating:
-30 C to 65 C (-22 F to 150 F)
Operating (Internal
Barriers):
0 C to 65 C (32 F to 150 F)
Storage:
-40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185F)
Humidity:
0% to 95% non-condensing
Mechanical:
Impact:
70
10 g for 11 ms
7.3 Environmental (All 3500 Components)
Shipping:
per mil Std 810D - Category G equipme n t
Vibration, Sinusoidal:
3 g at 5 to 100 Hz
71
72

Revision NC, October 2002
3500 Monitoring System

Installation and Operation Guide
3500 Monitoring System Installation and Operation Guide
Copyright 2002 Bently Nevada, LLC

The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States and other
countries:
ACM, Actionable Information , Actionable Information to the
, Asset Condition
Right People at the Right Time , ADRE
Management, Asset Condition Monitoring, Bently ALIGN,
Bently BALANCE , Bently DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE,

Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently Nevada
, CableLoc,
SM
ClickLoc, Data Manager
, Decision Support , DemoNet,
Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer Assist, FieldMonitor,
flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping You Protect and Manage All Your
Machinery
, HydroScan
, HydroView, Key ,
MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move
Data, Not People, Move Information, Not Data, NSv, Prime
, RuleDesk, SE,
Spike, PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM
Seismoprobe, Smart Monitor
, Snapshot, System 1,
System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX, TipLoc,
TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager, Trendmaster
,
TrimLoc, Velomitor.
Bently Nevadas orbit logo and other logos associated with the
trademarks in bold above, are also all trademarks or registered
trademarks of Bently Nevada in the United States and other
countries
The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada are provided for those times when you
cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address
Telephone
Fax
Internet
ii

Minden, NV 89423
USA
1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
1 775 215 2876
www.bently.com
About this manual

This manual shows how to install and operate a new 3500 Monitoring System
that is fully assembled and has a complete and correct configuration
downloaded.
The following reference manuals contain additional information that will be
helpful
If your rack is not fully assembled
If you need to make major changes to the configuration of the rack
If you need to verify the performance of channels.
General reference manuals for 3500 System

The following reference manuals contain information about the 3500 Monitoring
System.
3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual
(129766-01)
general description of a standard system.
general description of a Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) system
Instructions for installing and removing the module from a 3500 rack
3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide ( 12977701)
guidelines for using the 3500 Rack Configuration software for setting the
operating parameters of the module
guidelines for using the 3500 test utilities to verify that the input and output
terminals on the module are operating properly
3500 Monitoring System Computer Hardware and Software Manual (12815801)
guidelines for using Data Acquisition / DDE Server and Operator Display
Software
iii
Reference manuals for 3500 modules
iv
Title
Part number
3500 Monitoring System Computer Hardware and Software Manual
128158-01
3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual
129766-01
3500 System Field Wiring Diagram Package
130432-01
3500 System Overview Datasheet
162096-01
3500/08 Diagnostic Access Panel
136275-01
3500/15 & 16 Power Supply Operation and Maintenance Manual
129767-01
3500/20 Rack Interface Module (Operations and Maintenance Manual)
129768-01
3500/22M Transient Data Interface Manual
161580-01
3500/25 Keyphasor Module (Operations and Maintenance Manual)
129770-01
3500/32 & 3500/34 4 Channel Relay Module & TMR Relay Module (Operations &
Maintenance Manual)
129771-01
3500/33 16 Channel Relay Module Operations and Maintenance Manual
162291-01
3500/40 Proximitor Monitor Module (Operations and Maintenance Manual)
129772-01
3500/40M Proximitor Monitor Module
143488-01
3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Module (Op/Maintenance Manual)
129773-01
3500/42M Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Module (Op/Maintenance Manual)
143489-01
3500/44 Aeroderivative GT Vibration Monitor Module (Operations and Maintenance

Manual)
129774-01
3500/44M Aeroderivative GT Vibration Monitor Module (Operations and Maintenance

Manual)
143490-01
3500/45 Position Monitor Operation and Maintenance Manual
135545-01
3500/46M Hydro Monitor Manual
144403-01
3500/50 Tachometer Module Operation and Maintenance Manual
134938-01
3500/53 Overspeed Protection System Operation and Maintenance Manual
134939-01
3500/60 and 61 Temperature Module Operation & Maintenance Manual
134542-01
3500/62 Process Variable
136973-01
3500/64 Dynamic Pressure Monitor Operation and Maintenance Manual
142836-01
3500/72M Rod Position Monitor Operation and Maintenance Manual
146479-01
3500/77M Cylinder Pressure Manual
146282-01
3500/90 Communication Gateway Module (Operation and Maintenance Manual)
129769-01
3500/92 Communication Gateway Module (Operation and Maintenance Manual)
138629-01
3500/93 System Display Operation and Maintenance Manual
137412-01
3500/94 VGA Display Module Operation and Maintenance Manual
148636-01
3500/95 PC Display
145169-01
Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide
129777-01
Contents
About this manual ..................................................................................................... iii
General reference manuals for 3500 System............................................................ iii
Reference manuals for 3500 modules ...................................................................... iv
1.
Installing a new system.............................................................. 1

1.1 Receiving, inspecting, and handling.................................................................. 1
1.2 Installing the rack.............................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Installing a panel mount rack ............................................................. 2
1.2.2 Installing a Bulkhead mount rack ....................................................... 5
1.2.3 Installing a rack-mount rack............................................................... 6
1.3 Connecting power........................................................................................... 10
1.3.1 To connect power to your 3500 rack:............................................... 10
1.4 Connecting devices to the Rack Interface Module .......................................... 12
1.5 Connecting the field wiring to the I/O modules ................................................ 13
2.
Operating the system ............................................................... 15

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Verifying configuration .................................................................................... 15

Operating switches ......................................................................................... 15
System contacts ............................................................................................. 16
Reading the LEDs .......................................................................................... 16
2.4.1 3500 LED Descriptions.................................................................... 16
2.4.2 Power Supply OK LED .................................................................... 17
2.4.3 OK and TX/RX LEDs ....................................................................... 17
2.4.4 TM LED ........................................................................................... 17
2.4.5 Config OK LED................................................................................ 18
2.4.6 Bypass LED..................................................................................... 18
2.4.7 Relay alarm LED ............................................................................. 18
2.4.8 Overspeed Detection System .......................................................... 18
2.5 Collecting data from output terminals.............................................................. 19
3.
Common maintenance procedures ......................................... 21

3.1 Changing configuration................................................................................... 21
3.2 Replacing modules ......................................................................................... 22
3.2.1 Replacing a main module ................................................................ 22
3.2.2 Replacing an I/O module ................................................................. 23
3.2.3 Removing and inserting a main module........................................... 24
3.3 Verifying channels .......................................................................................... 26
vi
Section 1 Installing a new system
1.
Installing a new system

This section shows how to install a 3500 Monitoring System rack that is fully
assembled and that has a complete configuration downloaded. If your rack is not
fully assembled, contact your nearest Bently Nevada representative.
The section is divided into the following parts:
Receiving, inspecting, and handling
Installing the rack
Connecting power
Connecting devices to the Rack Interface Module
Connecting field wiring to the I/O modules
Notice that in order to connect field wiring to the I/O modules, you will need
additional information provided in the 3500 Field Wiring Diagram Package, part
number 130432-01.
1.1
Receiving, inspecting, and handling
Visually inspect the module for obvious shipping damage. If shipping

damage is apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently
Nevada.
Verify that your rack is fully assembled. A fully assembled rack has modules
or covers labeled Future Explansion in all slots on the front of the rack and
has I/O modules or connector covers on all slots on the back of the rack. If
your rack is not fully assembled, contact your nearest Bently Nevada
representative.
Customers and third parties that are in control of product at the end of its life
or at the end of its use are solely responsible for proper disposal of product.
No person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of
product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States
state laws, United States federal laws, or any applicable international law.
Bently Nevada is not responsible for disposal of product at the end of its life
or at the end of its use.
1.2
Installing the rack

The 3500 rack has three mounting configurations as shown in the following table.
To mount your rack, refer to the appropriate instructions.
Table 1-1 3500 Rack Mounting Configurations
Configuration
type
Panel
Bulkhead
Rack mount
Illustration
Refer to
page
1.2.1
Installing a panel mount rack

A Panel Mount rack allows you to install a 3500 rack behind a panel through a
sheet metal cutout and clamp into place. The following figures show the
dimensions of a panel mount for a full sized rack and for a mini rack.
1.2.1.1
Panel mount cutout dimensions
Figure 1-1 Dimensions of a Panel Mount 3500 Full-Size Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
265.94 mm (10.470 inches)

482.60 mm (19.000 inches).
441.96 mm (17.400 inches).
246.38 mm (9.700 inches).
349.25 mm (13.750 inches), 422.91 mm (16.650 inches) if used with internal barriers
CAUTION
Do not use clamps as handles
while carrying or installing the
rack. The clamps may fall off
resulting in injury to personnel
and damage to the rack.
Figure 1-2 Cutout for a Panel Mount 3500 Full-Size Rack

(1) 452.1 1.5 mm (17.80 0.06 inches).
(2) 3.2 mm (0.125 inches) radius, maximum.
(3) 251.5 1.5 mm (9.90 0.60 inches).
Figure 1-3 Dimensions of a Panel Mount 3500 Mini-Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
265.94 mm (10.470 inches).

304.80 mm (12.000 inches).
264.16 mm (10.400 inches).
246.38 mm (9.700 inches).
CAUTION
Clamps must not be used as
handles while carrying or
installing the rack. The clamps
may fall off resulting in injury to
personnel and damage to the
rack.
Figure 1-4 Panel cutout for the panel mount of 3500 Mini-Rack
(1) 274.3 1.5 mm (10.80 0.06 inches).
(2) 3.2 mm (0.125 inches) radius, maximum.
(3) 251.5 1.5 mm (9.90 0.60 inches).
1.2.1.2
To install a panel mount rack

1. Cut panel cutout to the required dimensions.
2. If installed, remove the panel mount clamps from the rack. Slide rack through
panel cutout.
3. Assemble the clamp.
(1) Rear of Rack.

(2) Clamp.
4. Align the rack in the cutout.

5. Tighten the clamping screws.
1.2.2
Installing a Bulkhead mount rack

A 3500 Bulkhead rack is attached to a wall and lets you change the field wiring
from the front of the rack.
1.2.2.1
Dimensions of a bulkhead mount rack
Figure 1-5 Dimensions of a Bulkhead Mount 3500 rack

(1) 482.60 mm (19.000 inches).
(2) 459.59 mm (18.094 inches).
(3) 133.35 mm (5.250 inches).
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
1.2.2.2
190.50 mm (7.500 inches).

133.35 mm (5.250 inches).
532.64 mm (20.970 inches).
266.70 mm (10.500 inches).
To install a bulkhead mount 3500 rack

places) in the locations shown in the diagram below.
1.2.3
Installing a rack-mount rack

A Rack Mounted 3500 system is installed into a standard 19-inch EIA cabinet.
The following figures show the dimensions for a full-sized rack-mount rack and
for a mini rack.
1.2.3.1
Dimensions of a full-sized rack-mount rack
Figure 1-6 Dimensions of a Rack Mount 3500 Full-Size Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
1.2.3.2
265.94 mm (10.470 inches).

190.50 mm (7.500 inches).
457.40 mm (18.008 inches).
482.60 mm (19.000 inches).
441.96 mm (17.400 inches).
246.38 mm (9.700 inches).
To install a rack mount 3500 full-size rack

places) at the locations shown by the arrows in the diagram below.
1.2.3.3
Dimensions of a rack mount 3500 mini rack

The Mini-Rack Mounted 3500 system is installed into a standard 19-inch EIA
cabinet by using the mini-rack Adapter Panel.
Figure 1-7 Dimensions of a Rack Mount 3500 Mini-Rack

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
265.94 mm (10.470 inches).

190.50 mm (7.500 inches).
279.60 mm (11.008 inches).
304.80 mm (12.000 inches).
264.16 mm (10.400 inches).
246.38 mm (9.700 inches).
1.2.3.4
To install a rack mount 3500 Mini-rack

Install the Mini-rack adapter panel into the EIA rack using No. 10 flat washers (4
places) and 10-32 screws (4 places). Next, install the 3500 Mini-rack onto the
adapter panel using No. 10 flat washers (4 places) and 10-32 screws (4 places).
(1) 3500 Mini-rack

(2) Adapter Panel
(3) Standard 19-inch EIA rack
1.3
Connecting power
Connect power wires to the Power Supply I/O module. This module is located
behind the power supply module on rack and panel mount racks and above the
power supply module on bulkhead mount racks. If your rack has two power
supplies, the upper supply is the primary supply and the lower one is the backup.
1.3.1
To connect power to your 3500 rack:

1. Identify the type of I/O module by using the following table.
Table 1-2 Power Supply I/O Modules
Module
type
Power
requirement
Low voltage AC
High voltage AC
High voltage DC
Low voltage DC
85 to 125 Vac
175 to 250 Vac
88 to 140 Vdc
20 to 30 Vdc
4.5 A
2.3 A
2.5 A
10 A
47 to 63 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
I/O Module
2. Verify that the power source matches the values listed under Power
requirements in Table 1-2 Power Supply I/O Modules.
3. Install a power switch or circuit breaker close to the rack and mark the switch
or breaker as the disconnect device for the rack.
CAUTION
Touching exposed power wires
can cause shock, burns, or
death.
Turn off power before
connecting the power cable to
the Power Supply I/O module.
10
4. Open the hinged protector that covers the power terminals.
(1) Hinged terminal protector
5. Connect the power cable as shown in the following figure and table.
(1) Power cable. Select a wire gage and type that meets the local code requirements and meets the
power requirements as listed in Table 1-2 Power Supply I/O Modules. Use Table 1-3 Power wire
legend to identify the wires.
(2) Chassis ground. To minimize ground loop noise, a single point earth ground (GRD) to the system
common connection is recommended. When two supplies are used in the same system, both
connections are considered a single point.
11
Table 1-3 Power wire legend

Wire
Type of Power Supply I/O module

AC
DC
High voltage
Line 1
Low voltage
Line 1
High voltage
Positive DC
Low voltage
Positive DC
Line 2 Neutral
Line 2
Negative DC
Negative DC
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
6. Close the hinged terminal protector.
1.4
Connecting devices to the Rack Interface

Module
OK Relay
System Contacts
The OK Relay is normally energized and is

used to indicate whether the 3500 Monitoring
System is OK.
OK Relay contact rating: 5 A @ 24 Vdc or 5
A @ 120 Vac 50/60 Hz or 3 A @ 220 Vac
50/60 Hz resistive maximum.
System contacts let you use external contacts

to control the operation of the rack.
Wiring recommendations: 18 AWG to 22
AWG stranded 2-wire shielded with insulating
sheath.
Note: Shields are spliced into a single wire then grounded at the stud marked
SHIELD. Shields should be insulated.
Table 1-4 System contacts
12
Label
TM
Name
Trip mulitply
INHB
Rack alarm inhibit
RST
Reset
Description
temporarily increases the alarm (Alert and Danger) setpoint
values by a specific multiple (usually two or three). This
function is normally applied by manual (operator) action
during startup to allow a machine to pass through high
vibration speed ranges without monitor alarm indications.
Used to prevent an alarm from being declared on any
monitor or relay in the 3500 rack. This is typically used when
performing maintenance functions.
Used to signal when the modules in the 3500 rack are to be
reset. This contact has the same function as the Rack Reset
switch on the front panel of the Rack Interface Module.
1.5
Connecting the field wiring to the I/O modules

You connect transducer field wiring to a 3500 rack by using either internal or
external termination. The type of termination is determined by the type of I/O
modules that are installed on the rack.
Internal termination
Connect transducer wires directly to the I/O
modules
External termination
Simplify wiring at the rear of the rack by using
cables to connect external temination I/O
modules to external termination blocks.
(1) To Transducers.
(2) Internal Termination I/O Modules.
(1) To Transducers.
(2) External Termination Blocks.
(3) External Termination I/O Modules.
Refer to the 3500 Field Wiring Diagram package, part number 130143-01, for
information about how to connect transducer field wiring to the I/O modules in
your rack.
13
14
Section 2 Operating the system
2.
Operating the system

This section shows how to use the various indicators and connections of a 3500
rack to control operation and collect data.
The section is divided into the following parts:
2.1
Verifying configuration
Operating switches
Reading LEDs
Collecting data from output terminals
Verifying configuration
A 3500 rack can contain a variety of modules that can be set
up to operate different ways. The process of setting system,
module, and channel options so that all the modules in the
3500 rack work together is called configuration.
After power is applied to the rack, the configuration LED
(CONFIG OK) indicates that the rack contains a complete
and correct configuration.
If the configuration LED is not ON, contact your local Bently
Nevada representative.
2.2
Operating switches
Hardware switches let you control the operation of the rack
as follows:
Reset switch
clears latched alarms and resets Timed OK Channel
Defeat indications. If the Configuration LED is blinking at
5 Hz, it will be stopped. This switch performs the same
function as the Rack Reset contact on the Rack Interface
I/O Module.
Key switch
prevents unauthorized changes to the configuration settings. When the
switch is in the RUN position, the 3500 rack cannot be configured. When the
switch is in the PROGRAM position, the 3500 rack can be configured and the
rack continues to operate normally. By removing the key, you can lock the
Rack Interface Module in the RUN or PROGRAM position.
15
2.3
System contacts
System contacts provide additional control by
connecting external contacts to the rack.
Trip multiply ( TM )
temporarily increases the alarm (Alert and
Danger) setpoint values by a specific multiple
(usually two or three). This function is normally applied by manual (operator)
action during startup to allow a machine to pass through high vibration speed
ranges without monitor alarm indications.
Rack alarm inhibit ( INHB )
prevents an alarm from being declared on any monitor or relay in the 3500
rack. This is typically used when performing maintenance functions.
Reset ( RST )
Same function as pressing in the RESET switch on the front of the rack.
2.4
Reading the LEDs

The LEDs on the front panel of 3500 modules indicate the
operating status of the module.
2.4.1
3500 LED Descriptions

3500 Module
LED label
Description
SUPPLY OK
all of the output

voltages from the
supply are within
specification.
The module and I/O
module are operating
correctly.
Flashes at the rate
that messages are
sent from the module.
Some of the monitor
functions are
temporarily
suppressed.
Indicates whether the
rack is in Trip Mulitply
mode.
The configuration of
the rack is correct.
An alarm condition
has occurred with this
relay. (Where n is
the channel number 1
through 4.)
3500/15 Power
Supply
OK
TX/RX
Most 3500 modules
BYPASS
TM
3500/20 RIM Module
CONFIG OK
CHn ALARM
3500/32 and 34 Relay
16
Detailed description
see page
page 17
page 17
page 17
page 18
page 17
page 18
page 18

3500 Module
3500/53 Overspeed
Protection system
2.4.2
LED label
Description
Detailed description
see page
TEST MODE
The module is in test

mode
page 18
ALARMS
Power Supply OK LED

Supply OK
On
Condition
all of the output voltages from the
supply are within specification
An output voltage from the supply is
not within specification
Off
Solution
No action required
Refer to the following procedures
If the Power Supply OK LED is off, check the following items:

1. Verify that the correct voltage is connected to the Power Input Module (refer
to Table 1-2 Power Supply I/O Modules on page 10).
2. Verify that the installed Power Input Module matches the installed Power
Supply. For example, an AC Power Input Module with the AC version of the
Power Supply.
3. Check to see if the fuse on the Power Input Module has blown. If the fuse is
blown, replace it. A blown fuse may be due to:
2.4.3
Severe overvoltage on the Power Input Module.
A fault within the 3500 Power Supply.
OK and TX/RX LEDs

OK
1 Hz
TX/RX
1 Hz
5 Hz
XX
Condition
Module is not configured or is
in configuration mode
Module has detected an

intenal fault and is not OK
ON
Flashing
Module is operating correctly
XX
Not flashing
Module is not operating
correctly
XX = behavior of the LED is not related to the condition
Solution
Reconfigure the module (see
3500 Rack Configuration Guide,
part number 129777-01)
Check the System Event List
No action required
Check the System Event list
Event lists
Contain records of things that happen to the rack. The system maintains two
event lists -- the Alarm Event list and the System Event list. To view these
lists, refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Configuration Guide, part number
129777-01.
2.4.4
TM LED
Trip multiply
temporarily increases the alarm (Alert and Danger) setpoint values by a
specific multiple (usually two or three). This function is normally applied by
manual (operator) action during startup to allow a machine to pass through
high vibration speed ranges without monitor alarm indications.
17

TIM LED
ON
OFF
2.4.5
Condition
Rack is in Trip Multiply
Rack is not in Trip Multiply
Solution
No action required
No action required
Config OK LED
Configuration
the process of setting system, module, and channel options so that all the
modules in a 3500 rack work together.
CONFIG OK
ON
5 Hz
OFF
Condition
Configuration information for every
module in the rack is valid.
One of the selected security options
has not been met
At lease one module in the rack has a
configuration fault
A non-configured active Power
Supply is present in the rack
2.4.6
Solution
No action required.
Check the System Event List. Press
the Rack Reset Switch to clear.
One or more of the following
configuration problems exist:
-- a module in the rack is not
configured
-- the configuration in the RIM does
not match the physical configuration
of the rack
-- a configuration security option
condition is not met
Bypass LED
Bypass
an operating condition of a 3500 monitoring module where functions of all 4
channels in the monitor are suppressed. When the channels in a bypassed
3500 monitor go in alarm, the alarm events are posted to the Alarm Event
List but any relays that use the alarms from the monitor in the relay alarm
logic will not be activiated.
BYPASS
OFF
ON
2.4.7
Condition
Alarm Enabled
Some or all alarming in the
module disabled
Solution
No action required
No action required
Relay alarm LED

Relay alarm
the alarm status of a 3500 relay channel. A relay channel is in alarm if the
alarm logic as defined in the configuration for the relay channel is true. Use
the 3500 Configuration program to view the alarm logic for relay channels.
Relay alarm LED
ON
OFF
2.4.8
Condition
Relay channel is in alarm
Relay channel is not in alarm
Solution
No action required.
No action required.
Overspeed Detection System

Test mode
The 3500 Overspeed Detection Module has an on board frequency generator
that can generate a test signal for testing the overspeed detection function of
the monitor. When the test function is enabled in the configuration software
(option box is checked), you can invoke the function by closing a contact on
18
the Overspeed Detection I/O module or via a software switch. When the test
is invoked, the test frequency sweeps through a start RPM and an end RPM.
(The start and end RPM are set in the configuration for the module.) When
the test input speed exceeds the over Alert/ /Alarm 1 and Overspeed
(Danger) setpoints, the associated alarms will be driven.
TEST MODE
ON
OFF
Condition
The overspeed module is in
test mode.
The overspeed module is not
in test mode.
Solution
No action required.
No action required.
Alarm LED
The 3500 Overspeed Detection System (ODS) consists of mulitiple ODS
modules that operate as a group. The alarms generated from this group are
the result of a voting process that is set up in configuration. The alarm LEDs
on the modules in overspeed detection systems indicate the result of this
voting. Use the 3500 Configuration program to determine how this voting has
been configured for the modules in the ODS.
ALARM
OFF
ON
2.5
Condition
Relay is not in alarm
Relay is in alarm
Solution
No action required.
No action required.
Collecting data from output terminals

Buffered Transducer Outputs provide the unfiltered output
from the channels in the modules. All outputs are short
circuit protected.
19
20
Section 3 Common maintenance procedures
3.
Common maintenance procedures

Once a 3500 Monitoring System is operating, it continuously measures and
monitors a variety of supervisory parameters. The boards and components
inside of 3500 modules cannot be repaired in the field and require no calibration.
This section provides information for common tasks required under normal
operating condititions. For procedures that require more detailed information,
refer to the reference manuals listed in Reference manuals for 3500 modules on
page iv.
This section includes the following topics:
3.1
Changing configuration
Replacing modules
Verifying channels
Changing configuration
The process of setting system, module, and channel options so that all the
modules in the 3500 rack work together is called configuration. These settings
are established and adjusted by using the 3500 Rack Configuration program.
Configuration settings are usually protected by security settings. The security
setting for a typical 3500 Monitoring System that is operating normally is
Change Setpoints in Program Mode. This section shows how to adjust
setpoints. To change other configuration settings, refer to the 3500 Monitoring
System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide, part number 129777-01.
To adjust alarm setpoints
1. Place the rack in program mode by using the key switch on the Rack
Interface Module.
2. In the 3500 Rack Configuration program, click the Setpoints pushbutton.
3. Click on the monitor module to be adjusted.

The Configuration Setpoint dialog for that monitor module will appear.
21
4. Select the monitor channel to be adjusted in the Monitor Channel list box.
5. For all measurement parameters except phase, adjust the setpoint level by
dragging the bar in the bar graph or by entering a value in the text box above
or below the parameter.
Notice that setpoints can be adjusted only for those parameters that are
enabled and that some parameters have both upper and lower setpoint
values. Parameters are enabled or disabled by using the Channel Option
screen. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and
Utilities Guide for more information.
6. For phase setpoints, enter the values for the beginning and ending setpoint in
the text boxes below the phase diagrams.
7. Apply the adjusted setpoints to the rack by clicking OK and then downloading
the revised configuration to the rack.
3.2
Replacing modules
field and require no calibration. For 3500 modules that are not operating
properly, use the information in this section to replace the module with a spare
and then contact your local Bently Nevada representative for information about
returning the faulty module for failure analysis.
3.2.1
Replacing a main module

1. Save the configuration of the module to be replaced.
3500 modules must have valid configuration settings in order to operate
properly. Replacement modules are not configured. By saving the
configuration, you can download the original configuration settings to the
replacement module.
The 3500 Monitoring System Configuration and Utilities Guide, part number
129777-01, shows how to save configuration files.
22
2. Remove the module to be replaced.

Refer to Removing and inserting a main module on page 24.
3. Insert the new module
4. Download the configuration to the new module.
129777-01, shows how to download configuration files.
3.2.2
Check that the LEDs for the replaced module are indicating correct
operation (see Reading the LEDs on page 16).
The values of the measurement parameters of a channel are verified by

using the Verification utility in the 3500 Rack Configuration program and
the verification procedure in the reference manual for that module.
Replacing an I/O module

This procedure applies only to the I/O module of a monitor or the PIM of a power
supply that is to be replaced. Prior to removing any module, refer to the
applicable reference manual to see how rack behavior may be affected and for
any special handling requirements required for personal safety.
1. If necessary, upload and save the configuration of the module to be replaced.
3500 modules must have valid configuration settings in order to operate
properly. Replacement modules are not configured. By saving the
configuration, you can download the original configuration settings to the
replacement module.
129777-01, shows how to save configuration files.
If the wires connected to the I/O module are not labeled, label the wires
before you remove them.
4. Remove the old I/O module from the rack.
5. Install the new I/O module into the rack.
6. Connect the field wiring to the new I/O module.
7. Install the main module into the rack.
8. Download the configuration to the new module.
129777-01, shows how to download configuration files.
23
3.2.3
Check that the LEDs for the replaced module are indicating correct
operation (see Reading the LEDs on page 16.
The values of the measurement parameters of a channel are verified by

using the Verification untility in the 3500 Rack Configuration program and
the verification procedure in the reference manual for that module.
Removing and inserting a main module

rack while power is applied to the rack.
3.2.3.1
To remove the old full-height module

This procedure shows how to remove any full-height 3500 module. Refer to the
reference manual for the module for details and safety considerations.
1. Loosen the screws to the main module so that they are free of the rack
2. Use the ejectors to pry the main module loose from the backplane
connectors.
3. Once freed from the backplane, the main module can be removed completely
from the rack
24
3.2.3.2
To install a spare full-height module

1. Ensure that the ejectors are in their normal position, flush with the front of the
module.
2. Slide the main module into place, ensuring that they are properly in the
guides provided on the floor and roof of the rack chassis.
3. Tighten the screws securely.
Application Advisory: It is important to tightly secure the thumb screws to
ensure each module is Chassis grounded. Loose thumb screws may allow noise
to show on the channel readings.
3.2.3.3
To add or remove a half-height card guide
Installing the card guide
Removing the card guide
25
3.3
Verifying channels
field. Maintaining a 3500 rack consists of testing module channels to verify that
they are operating correctly. Modules that are not operating correctly should be
replaced with a spare. When performed properly, modules may be removed
from or installed into the rack while power is applied to the rack.
calibration. The functions of the 3500 modules, however, must be verified at
regular intervals. All modules in the 3500 Monitoring System should be verified at
these maintenance intervals. The procedures in the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting sections of the module reference manuals describe the
verification and troubleshooting process. (Refer to the reference manuals listed
in Reference manuals for 3500 modules on page iv.)
26

Revision G, April 2002
3500/15
AC AND DC POWER
SUPPLIES
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Copyright 2001 Bently Nevada LLC.

The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada LLC. in the United States and other
countries:
Actionable Information, Actionable Information to the
Right People at The Right Time, ADRE, Bently
Nevada, CableLoc, Data Manager, Decision
Support, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager,
Dynamic Transmitor, Engineer Assist,
FieldMonitor, FluidLoc, FlexiTIM, FlexiTAM,
Helping you Protect and Manage All Your Machinery,
HydroVU, Key , Keyphasor, Machine Condition
Manager 2000, MachineLibrary, MicroPROX,
Move Data, Not People, Move Information, Not
Data, Performance Manager, PROXPAC,
Proximitor, REBAM, Seismoprobe, System 1,
TDIXconnX, Tecknowledgy, TipLoc,
TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager,
Trendmaster, TrimLoc, VAM, Velomitor,
Xlerometer
The Bently Nevada LLC Orbit Design is a trademark of
Bently Nevada Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada LLC are provided for those times when you
cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address
Telephone
Fax
Internet

Minden, NV 89423
USA
1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
1 775 782 9259
www.bently.com
3500/15 Operation and Maintenance
Note:
This manual does not contain all the information required to
operate and maintain the AC and DC Power Supplies. Refer
to the following manuals for other required information.
3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual (129766-01)
general description of a standard system
general description of a Triple Modular redundant (TMR) system
instructions for installing and removing the module from a 3500 rack
drawings for all cables used in the 3500 Monitoring System
3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (129777-01)
guidelines for using the 3500 Rack Configuration software for setting the operating
parameters of the module
guidelines for using the 3500 test utilities to verify that the input and output terminals on
the module are operating properly
instructions for connecting the rack to a 3500 host computer
iii
Contents
1
Receiving and Handling Instructions .........................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Receiving Inspection ..................................................................................................1

Handling and Storing Considerations .........................................................................1
Disposal Statement ....................................................................................................1
General Information.....................................................................2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Power Supply Versions...............................................................................................3

Single Power Supply ..................................................................................................3
Redundant Power Supplies ........................................................................................3
CE Compliance information ........................................................................................3
Low Voltage Directive Compliance .............................................................................4
Configuration Information...........................................................5
3.1
Software Configuration Options..................................................................................5
Power Input Module Description ................................................6
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
AC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version)...........................................................6

AC Power Input Module (High Voltage version)..........................................................7
DC Power Input Module (High Voltage version)..........................................................8
DC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version) ..........................................................9
Connecting Single Point Ground ..............................................................................10
Maintenance ...............................................................................12
Troubleshooting.........................................................................13
6.1
LED Fault Conditions................................................................................................13
Ordering Information .................................................................14
Specifications ............................................................................15
iv
1.1
Visually inspect the module for obvious shipping damage. If shipping damage is
apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada
Corporation.
1.2

Circuit boards contain devices that are susceptible to damage when exposed to
electrostatic charges. Damage caused by obvious mishandling of the board will
order given.
Application Alert
Machinery protection may be lost when this module is
removed from the rack.
1.3
possible causes include ungrounded soldering irons, nonconductive plastics,
and similar materials.

Velostat No. 2060) before handling or maintaining a printed circuit board.
Use extra caution during dry weather. Relative humidity less than 30% tends
to multiply the accumulation of static charges on any surface.
When performed properly, this module may be installed into or removed from
the rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to the Rack Installation and
Maintenance Manual (part number 129766-01) for the proper procedure.
Disposal Statement
Customer and third parties that are in control of product at the end of its life or at
the end of its use are solely responsible for proper disposal of product. No
person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of product shall
dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States state laws, United
States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada
the end of its use.
2 General Information
General Information
The 3500 Power Supplies are half-height modules and must be installed in the
specially designed slots at the left side of the rack. The 3500 rack can contain
one or two power supplies (any combination of AC and DC). Either supply can
power a full rack. If installed, the second supply acts as a backup for the
primary supply. Removing or inserting a power supply module will not disrupt
operation of the rack as long as a backup supply is installed.
The 3500 Power Supplies accept a wide range of input voltages and converts
them to voltages acceptable for use by other 3500 modules.
1) The Supply OK LED on the front of

each power supply module indicates
if all of the output voltages from that
supply are within specification.
2.1
Power Supply Versions

Three Power Supply versions are available with the 3500 Monitoring System: the
AC Power Supply, the High Voltage DC Power Supply, and the Low Voltage DC
Power Supply.
The 3500 AC Power Supply accepts two ranges of AC input voltages by using
two versions of the Power Input Module (PIM). The High Voltage AC PIM
accepts inputs from 175 to 264 Vac rms. The Low Voltage AC PIM accepts
inputs from 85 to 132 Vac rms.
The High Voltage DC supply supports DC inputs from 88 to 140 Vdc. The Low
Voltage DC Supply supports DC inputs from 20 to 30 Vdc.
2.2
Single Power Supply

The 3500 will operate under fully loaded conditions with a single power supply.
When a single power supply is used, it is recommended that the supply be
located in the upper position.
2.3
Redundant Power Supplies

When two power supplies are installed in a rack, the supply in the lower slot acts
as the primary supply and the supply in the upper slot acts as the backup supply.
If the primary supply fails, the backup supply will provide power to the rack
without interrupting rack operation.
Each supply provides power on an independent power distribution network. This
ensures that any failure in one power distribution network (example: short in +5
volt supply) will not affect the second supply.
Note:
Redundant power supplies are required for Triple Modular
Redundant (TMR) applications.
2.4
CE Compliance information
For systems installed in areas that require compliance to EN61000.3.2, the
equipment shall only be used in industrial environment with a connection to the
industrial power supply network. If the system is connected to the public power
supply mains, EN61000.3.2 must be met by using a third party device that
provides power factor correction.
2.5
Low Voltage Directive Compliance

To comply with EN 61010-01 Low Voltage Directive the PIM Connector Shield
should be orientated properly. If the shield is not installed the same as the figure
below carefully remove the shield and replace it in the correct orientation.
Failure to correctly place the connector shield will make the power terminals
accessible to an operator.
Connector Shield Standard Rack
Connector Shield Bulkhead Rack
3500/32 and 3500/34 Operation and Maintenance
3 Configuration Information
Configuration Information
The process of identifying the type of Power Supply and setting operating
parameters is called configuration. To configure a Power Supply, use this
section to gather configuration information, then use the Rack Configuration
Software to set the options and download the settings to the rack. The Rack
Configuration and Utilities Guide explains how to connect a computer to a rack
and run the Rack Configuration Software.
3.1
Software Configuration Options

The Power Supply configuration field is on the option screen of the Rack
Interface Module.
Any combination of the following Power Supply options can be used in the upper
and lower slots of the rack:
None
AC High Voltage
AC Low Voltage
DC High Voltage
DC Low Voltage
4 I/O Modules Description
Power Input Module Description

The Power Input Module is half-height and connects the power source to the
Power Supply. Install the Power Input Module behind the Power Supply (in a
Rack Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or above the Power Supply (in a Bulkhead
rack). For example, if the Power Supply is installed in the upper slot then its
Power Input Module must be installed in the upper slot. Removing or inserting a
Power Input Module will not disrupt operation of the 3500 rack as long as the
other Power Supply and its associated Power Input Module are installed.
4.1
AC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version)

Use the AC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version) when the rack will be
powered by low voltage AC (85 to 132 Vac, rms).
Refer to the 3500 Field Wiring Diagram Package for

connecting the power to this Power Input Module.
CAUTION
Proper rack chassis grounding requires that
this metal strap remain connected. Failure to
follow this warning could expose personnel to
dangerously high voltage levels that could
cause shock, burns, or death.
4.2
AC Power Input Module (High Voltage

version)
Use the AC Power Input Module (High Voltage version) when the rack will be
powered by high voltage AC (175 to 264 Vac, rms).

CAUTION
4.3
DC Power Input Module (High Voltage

version)
Use the DC Power Input Module (High Voltage version) when the rack will be
powered by high voltage DC (88 to 140 Vdc).

CAUTION
4.4
DC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version)

Use the DC Power Input Module (Low Voltage version) when the rack will be
powered by low voltage DC (20 to 30 Vdc).

CAUTION
4.5
Connecting Single Point Ground

To avoid ground loops, the system must provide a single point ground. The
Power Input Modules come with a switch that lets you control where the system
is grounded. If two Power Supplies are installed then both switches need to be
set to the same position. A CLOSED switch grounds the system through the
GND terminal on the Terminal Strip connector. If the system is grounded at
another location, such as when internal/external barriers are used, you need to
be sure the switch is OPENED. The following figure and steps show how to set
the switch to the desired position. For most racks the switch will be set to
CLOSED at the factory; if Internal Barriers are installed at the factory the switch
will be set to the OPENED position.
1) When the switch is

pushed to this side the
switch is in the
CLOSED position.
2) When the switch is
pushed to this side the
switch is in the
OPENED position.
3) Grounding switch.
Depending on model,
this switch could be
located directly above or
below the input
connector.
CAUTION
High voltage may be present on the AC and DC Power
Supplies for several minutes after removal from the rack.
10
Note:
For systems with internal/external barriers, refer to the 3500
Field Wiring Diagram Package for grounding requirements.
1) Remove the line cord protection cover from the Terminal Strip connector.
2) Remove the Phillips screw from the side. The screw holds the sheet metal
cover on the Power Input Module.
3) Loosen the two screws that hold the Chassis ground clip. The screws are
located below the Terminal Strip connector. Remove the Chassis ground clip.
4) While disengaging the sheet metal tab on the bottom of the sheet metal
cover, slide the sheet metal cover over the Terminal Strip connector.
5) Slide the switch to the desired position.
6) Replace the cover and the Chassis ground clip on the Power Input Module.
11
6 Troubleshooting
Maintenance
This section shows how to verify that the Power Supplies and Power Input
Modules are operating correctly.
When performed properly, this module may be removed from the rack while
power is applied to the rack. Refer to the Rack Installation and Maintenance
Manual (part number 129766-01) for the proper procedure.
If a problem is detected with a Power Supply or a Power Supply has been
removed or installed, one of the following messages will be entered in the
System Event List:
Message
12
Description
Supply OK / Installed
A Power Supply has been installed or a Power

Supply has gone from a not OK condition to an
OK condition.
Supply Faulted /
Removed
A Power Supply has been removed or a Power

Supply has gone not OK.
6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the Power Supply or the
Power Input Module.
WARNING
AC LINE connected voltage is present. This voltage could cause shock,
burns or death. Use proper isolation techniques.
WARNING
Power Supply shield may be hot when the rack is operating at elevated
temperatures or under full load.
WARNING
High voltage may be present on the AC and DC Power Supplies for several
minutes after removal from the rack.
6.1
LED Fault Conditions

If the Power Supply OK LED is off, check the following items:
1) Verify that the correct voltage is connected to the Power Input Module.
2) Verify that the installed Power Input Module matches the installed Power
Supply. For example, an AC Power Input Module with the AC version of the
Power Supply.
3) Check to see if the fuse on the Power Input Module has blown. If the fuse is
blown, replace it. A blown fuse may be due to:
a) Severe over voltage on the Power Input Module.
b) A fault within the 3500 Power Supply.
4) If steps 1 through 3 do not solve the problem:
a) Install a new Power Supply. If the Power Supply OK LED comes on,
the original Power Supply is faulty.
b) If the problem persists, the Power Input Module may be damaged.
Contact Bently Nevada Corporation.
13
8 Specifications
A
Part number 3500/15 -
C
-
01
02
03
04
Power Supply Type (Top Slot)

Low Voltage AC (85 to 132 Vac)
High Voltage AC (175 to 264 Vac)
High Voltage DC (88 to 140 Vdc)
Low Voltage DC (20 to 30 Vdc)
00
01
02
03
04
Power Supply Type (Bottom Slot)

No supply (used when only one supply is required)
Low Voltage AC (85 to 132 Vac)
High Voltage AC (175 to 264 Vac)
High Voltage DC (88 to 140 Vdc)
Low Voltage DC (20 to 30 Vdc)
00
01
Agency Approval Option

None
CSA-NRTL/C
14
Spares
AC Power Supply Module
High Voltage AC Power Input Module (PIM)
Low Voltage AC Power Input Module (PIM)
Replacement Fuse (Both AC PIMs)
127610-01
125840-01
125840-02
01720025
High Voltage DC Power Supply Module

High Voltage DC Power Input Module (PIM)
Replacement Fuse (High Voltage DC PIM)
129486-01
129478-01
01720025
Low Voltage DC Power Supply Module

Low Voltage DC Power Input Module (PIM)
Replacement Fuse (Low Voltage DC PIM)
133292-01
133300-01
01720045
Power Supply Module Manual
129767-01
8 Specifications
Specifications
INPUTS
Low Voltage AC:
Input: 85 to 132 Vac rms (120 to 188 Vac, pk)*

Frequency: 47 to 63 Hertz.
Input Current: 4.5 A rms Max
Input Power: 194 W Max
Efficiency: .8 min, typical
Power Factor: .5 min, typical
Volt-Amps 388 VA, Max
* Installations using AC Power Input Modules (PIM) prior to rev R and/or AC

Power Supply Module prior to rev M require voltage input:: 85 to 125 Vac rms
High Voltage AC:
Input: 175 to 264 Vac rms (247 to 373 Vac, pk)**

Frequency: 47 to 63 Hertz.
Input Current: 2.3 A rms Max
Power Factor: .5 min, typical
Volt-Amps 388 VA, Max
** Installations using AC Power Input Modules (PIM) prior to rev R and/or AC

Power Supply Module prior to rev M require voltage input:: 175 to 250 Vac rms
Low Voltage DC:
Input: 20-30 Vdc

Input Current: 10 A Max
High Voltage DC:
Input: 88-140 Vdc

Input Current: 2.5 A Max
Out of Range Protection:
For all power supply versions, an undervoltage

will not harm either the supply or the PIM.
However, an overvoltage will cause the fuse to
open on the PIM.
Note:
Max input power = (max. output power)/(min efficiency)
Max volt-amps = (max input power)/(min power factor)
15
8 Specifications
OUTPUTS
Front Panel LEDs:
Supply OK LED:
Indicates when the power supply is operating

properly.
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITS
Temperature:
-30 C to 65 C (-22 F to 149 F) operating

-40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F) storage
Humidity: 95 % non-condensing
CE MARK DIRECTIVES:
EMC Directives:
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
Conducted Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:
Electrostatic Discharge:
Radiated Susceptibility:
Conducted Susceptibility:
EN 61000-4-2, Criteria B
ENV 50140, Criteria A
Electrical Fast Transient:

Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
EN 61000-4-8, Criteria A
Power Supply Dip:

Radio Telephone:
ENV 50204, Criteria B
Low Voltage Directives:

Safety Requirements:
EN 61010-01
APPROVALS
CSA-NRTL/C:
16
Class I, Division 2, Groups A through D
8 Specifications
PHYSICAL
Power Supply Module:
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth):
120.7 mm x 50.8 mm x 251.5 mm
(4.75 in x 2.0 in x 9.9 in)
Weight:
1.39 kg (3.06 lbs)
Power Input Modules:
120.7 mm x 25.4 mm x 114.3 mm
(4.75 in x 1.0 in x 4.5 in)
Weight:
0.34 kg (0.75 lbs)
RACK SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Power Supply Module:
Two special half-height slots are located on the

left side of the rack. Each slot accommodates
one power supply. Both slots can be filled with a
power supply at the same time allowing for
redundant power supplies.
Power Input Module:
Special half-height module located directly

behind the associated power supply.
MISCELLANEOUS
Minimum Loading:
No minimum rack load is required.
17
8 Specifications
18

Revision B, February 2003
3500/22M Transient Data

Interface
Operation and Maintenance Manual
3500/22M Transient Data Interface Operation and Maintenance Manual
Copyright 2002 - 2003 Bently Nevada, LLC

Bently Trademarks
The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States and other countries:
ACM, Actionable Information, Actionable Information to the Right
People at the Right Time, ADRE, Asset Condition Management,
Asset Condition Monitoring, Because Better Machines Begin With
Better BearingsSM, Bently ALIGN, Bently BALANCE, Bently
DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE, Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently
Nevada, CableLoc, ClickLoc, Data Manager, Decision
SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer Assist,
FieldMonitor, flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping You Protect and
Manage All Your Machinery, HydroScan, HydroView,
Key , Keyphasor, Machine Condition Manager 2000,
MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move Data,
Not People, Move Information, Not Data, NSv, Prime Spike,
PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, RuleDesk, SE,
Seismoprobe, ServoFluid, Smart Monitor, Snapshot, System
1, System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX, TipLoc,
TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager, Trendmaster, TrimLoc,
Velomitor
The Bently Nevada orbit logo and other logos associated with the
trademarks in bold above, are also all trademarks or registered
trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States and other
countries.

The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada are provided for those times when you cannot
contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
ii
Mailing Address

Minden, NV 89423
USA
Telephone
1 775 782 3611

1 800 227 5514
Fax
1 775 215 2876
Internet
www.bently.com
Note:
This manual does not contain all the information
required to operate and maintain the 3500/22M Transient Data Interface. Refer to the following manuals
for other required information.
3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenancw Manual (129766-01)
general description of a standard system.
guidelines for using the 3500 Rack Configuration software for setting the operating parameters of the module
guidelines for using the 3500 test utilities to verify that the input and output terminals on the
module are operating properly


iii
Contents
1
Receiving and Handling Instructions ............................................. 1

1.1
1.2
1.3
General Information ......................................................................... 2

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.5
3.6
3.7
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9
Definitions ................................................................................................................ 9
Communication ...................................................................................................... 10
Data Content .......................................................................................................... 10
3.4.1 Static Values .............................................................................................. 10
3.4.2 Dynamic Data............................................................................................. 11
Status Inputs .......................................................................................................... 13
Speed Inputs .......................................................................................................... 13
3.6.1 Multiple Event Keyphasor Signals.............................................................. 14
3.6.2 Recip Multi-Event Wheel ............................................................................ 14
Data Collection Modes ........................................................................................... 14
3.7.1 Current Values ........................................................................................... 14
3.7.2 Alarm Data ................................................................................................. 14
3.7.3 Transient Data............................................................................................ 16
Configuration Information ............................................................. 21

4.1
4.2
4.3
iv
TDI Features ............................................................................................................ 4

2.1.1 Contacts ....................................................................................................... 4
2.1.2 Security ........................................................................................................ 4
2.1.3 Communications Ports ................................................................................. 4
2.1.4 Event Lists.................................................................................................... 4
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description ......................................................... 4
Status ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.1 Module Status .............................................................................................. 5
2.3.2 Channel Status............................................................................................. 5
LED Descriptions ..................................................................................................... 6
Requirements........................................................................................................... 7
2.5.1 Hardware...................................................................................................... 7
2.5.2 Software ....................................................................................................... 8
2.5.3 Limitations .................................................................................................... 8
Data Collection ................................................................................. 9

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Handling and Storing Considerations....................................................................... 1
Transient Data Interface Considerations................................................................ 21

4.1.1 3500 Rack Configuration............................................................................ 21
4.1.2 System 1 .................................................................................................... 21
Configuration Process Overview............................................................................ 22
Transient Data Interface Configuration .................................................................. 23
4.3.1 Rear Port .................................................................................................... 23
4.3.2 Ethernet (Rear Port) ................................................................................... 23
4.4
4.5
4.6
I/O Module Description ................................................................... 31

5.1
5.2
Verification.............................................................................................................. 42
LED Fault Conditions ............................................................................................. 42
System Event List Messages ................................................................................. 43
Management System Event List Messages ........................................................... 59
Alarm Event List Messages.................................................................................... 62
Ordering Information ...................................................................... 64

8.1
8.2
Verification.............................................................................................................. 40
Performing Firmware Upgrades ............................................................................. 40
Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 42
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Transient Data Interface Input/Output (I/O) Modules ............................................. 31

5.1.1 Wiring Euro Style Connectors ................................................................... 35
5.1.2 Cable Pin Outs ........................................................................................... 36
Buffered Signal Output Module .............................................................................. 36
5.2.1 Signal Pin Out............................................................................................. 38
Maintenance .................................................................................... 40
6.1
6.2
4.3.3 Front Port.................................................................................................... 24

4.3.4 Passwords .................................................................................................. 24
4.3.5 Rack Mounting Option ................................................................................ 25
4.3.6 Power Supply ............................................................................................. 25
4.3.7 Agency Approvals....................................................................................... 25
Security Options Configuration............................................................................... 26
Software Switches.................................................................................................. 27
4.5.1 Module Switch ............................................................................................ 27
Hardware Switches ................................................................................................ 28
4.6.1 Key Switch.................................................................................................. 28
4.6.2 Rack Reset ................................................................................................. 28
4.6.3 Rack Address ............................................................................................. 28
List of Options and Part Numbers .......................................................................... 64

8.1.1 3500/22M TDI Module and I/O ................................................................... 64
8.1.2 3500/22M Dynamic Data Enabling Disk ..................................................... 64
Accessories ............................................................................................................ 65
8.2.1 Host Computer to 3500 Rack Cable, RS232.............................................. 65
8.2.2 Ethernet Cables:......................................................................................... 65
8.2.3 Spares ........................................................................................................ 66
3500/22M Specifications................................................................. 67
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
Inputs...................................................................................................................... 67
Outputs................................................................................................................... 67
Controls .................................................................................................................. 68
Data Collection ....................................................................................................... 68
Communications..................................................................................................... 71
Environmental Limits .............................................................................................. 72
CE Mark Directives................................................................................................. 72
Hazardous Area Approvals .................................................................................... 73
v
9.9
vi
Physical.................................................................................................................. 73
Section 1 -- Receiving and Handling Instructions

1.1
Visually inspect the module for obvious shipping damage. If shipping damage
is apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada.
1.2

Circuit boards contain devices that are susceptible to damage when exposed
to electrostatic charges. Damage caused by obvious mishandling of the board
will void the warranty. To avoid damage, observe the following precautions in
the order given:
Application Alert
Host communication and rack configuration capabilities will be lost when this module is removed from the
rack.
1.3
possible causes include ungrounded soldering irons, nonconductive plastics, and similar materials.

Use extra caution during dry weather. Relative humidity less than 30 %
tends to multiply the accumulation of static charges on any surface.
Disposal Statement
Customers and third parties that are in control of the product at the end of its
life or at the end of its use are solely responsible for proper disposal of product. No person, firm, corporation, association, or agency that is in control of
the product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States
state laws, United States federal laws, or any applicable international laws.
Bently Nevada is not responsible for disposal of product at the end of its life or
at the end of its use.
General Information
The Transient Data Interface (TDI) is the primary interface into the 3500 rack.
It supports a Bently Nevada proprietary protocol used to configure the rack
and retrieve machinery information. TDI has two primary functions: configuration of the protection system and data retrieval for Bently Nevada machine
management systems.
The TDI must be located in slot 1 of the rack (next to the power supplies).
Although the TDI does provide certain functions common to the entire rack,
the TDI is not part of the critical monitoring path. The TDI's operation (or nonoperation) has no effect on the proper, normal operation of the overall monitoring system.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Main Module
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet I/O
Module
100 Base-FX Ethernet I/O Module
LEDs: Indicates the operating status of the
module
Hardware Switches
Configuration Port: Configure or retrieve
machinery data using RS-232 protocol
3
(7)
OK Relay: Indicates the OK status of the

rack
(8) Fiber Optic Ethernet Port: For configuration and data collection
(9) RJ-45 Ethernet Port: For configuration and
data collection
(10) System Contacts
2.1
TDI Features
2.1.1
Contacts
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.2
Rack Reset
Trip Multiply
Alarm Inhibit
OK Relay
Security
Password
Key Switch
Communications Ports
Front Panel Configuration Port, RS-232
Rear Panel Host Port, Ethernet
Event Lists
Alarm Event List
System Event List
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR)

Description
For TMR applications, the 3500 system requires a TMR version of the TDI. In
addition to all the standard TDI functions, the TMR TDI also performs "monitor
channel comparison." The 3500 TMR configuration executes monitoring voting using the setup specified in the monitor options. Using this method the
TMR TDI continually compares a specified output of 3 redundant monitors. If
the TMR TDI detects that the information from one of those monitors is no
longer equivalent (within a configured percent) to the remaining two, it will flag
the monitor as being in error and place an event in the System Event List.
2.1 TDI Features
2.3
Status
The Transient Data Interface returns both module and channel status. This
section describes the available statuses and where they can be found.
2.3.1
Module Status
2.3.1.1
OK
This indicates if the Transient Data Interface is functioning correctly. A not OK
status is returned under any of the following conditions:
Hardware Failure in the module
Node Voltage Failure
OK Relay coil check Failed
Communication Failure with any module
If any of the following security options have been configured and their conditions met:
-
Rack Address is changed while the TDI is in Run Mode.
A module was inserted into or removed from the rack.
The Key Switch was changed from Run to Program Mode.
If the Module OK status goes not OK then the system OK Relay on the Rack
Interface I/O Module will be driven not OK.
2.3.1.2
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the Transient Data Interface configuration is invalid.
2.3.2
Channel Status
2.3.2.1
OK
This indicates whether or not a fault has been detected on the channel or
within the module. If the Channel OK status goes not OK then the system OK
Relay on the Rack Interface I/O Module will be driven not OK.
The following table shows where the statuses can be found.
Status Locations
Module OK
Communication
Gateway
Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Module Configuration Fault
Channel OK
2.3 Status
Operator
Display
Software
2.4
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the Transient Data Interface indicate the operating status of the module as shown in the following figure. Refer to Section
7.2 LED Fault Conditions for all of the available LED conditions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
OK: Indicates that the Transient Data

Interface and the I/O modules are operating correctly.
TX/RX: Flashes at the rate that messages
are sent.
TM: Indicates whether the rack is in the
Trip Multiply mode.
Config OK: Indicates that Any module in
the rack is unconfigured or has a configuration error or the stored configuration of
the Transient Data Interface does not
match the physical configuration of the
rack or a security option condition was not
met.
2.4 LED Descriptions
2.5
Requirements
For TDI there two levels of requirements. The first level is for functioning as
the interface module for interfacing with 3500 Rack Configuration and 3500
Data Acquistion software. The second level is for data collection for interfacing
with System 1 software.
2.5.1
Hardware
TDI requires a management ready 3500/05 rack. The management ready
racks are identified by the presences of an Orbit on the left hand side of the
bezel.
SYSTEM
(1)
Management Ready Rack Indicator
To provide waveforms to System 1, TDI requires M series monitors with PWA

revisions of G or higher. These are monitors that have an M suffix to the catalog number and include 3500/40M, 42M, 44M, 46M, 64M, 72M and 77M.
To handle multi-event per revolution speed signals, TDI requires a Keyphasor
module with a PWA number of 149369-01.
Determine the PWA revision of the monitors in the rack by executing the following steps:
1. Launch 3500 Configuration Software
2.5 Requirements
2. Select Update Firmware from the Utilities pull down menu
3. On the firmware update screen:

-
Select the modules of interest
Click on Print Extended Information
A textual file displays the PWA revision for the modules.

TDI supports static value data collection from any 3500 monitor, including
older 3500/40, 42 and 44 monitors that are not capable of providing waveform
data.
2.5.2
Software
TDI support requires the following software revisions:
2.5.3
3500 Configuration revision 3.30 or higher,
3500 Data Acquisition revision 2.40 or higher,
3500 Display revision 1.40 or higher, and
System 1 Release 3.0 or higher.
Limitations
TDI will not support the following:
TDI will not interface to a TDXnet, TDIX, or DDIX,
TDI does not support DM2000, and
TDI will not permit 3500 Configuration software to access the rack through
a 3500/92 Communications Gateway.
2.5 Requirements
Section 3 -- Data Collection
Data Collection
The Transient Data Interface is an integral communication processor that collects and stores information from the 3500 monitors and transmits this information to a host computer. This section describes how the data collection
functions.
3.1
Overview
Data collected from a machine has several forms. This data includes static
data, dynamic data, status information and speed data. All of these forms of
data are acquired by TDI as a result of various stages of operation for a
machine: steady state, transient (start-up & coast-down) and when alarms
occur. TDI collects, stores and transmits the data sets from the 3500 monitors
to the data acquisition computer. The data acquisition computer, in turn, provides the data to the database and display stations.
TDI organizes data collection using structures called Collection Groups. Channels (measurement points) that are related to each other should be placed in
the same collection group. Groups are created and channels added to them
until all of the channels of the monitoring system are associated with their
respective collection group. All of the channels data within the collection
group are collected together and synchronized with each other. Collection
Groups are created by using System 1 configuration.
TDI attempts to move data to the host computer at the earliest opportunity, so
data collected as part of an event is identified as related to the event and then
sent using the network connections of the TDI. If TDI is unable to send the
data it will store the data and send it when it is able to do so.
3.2
Definitions
Channels: The connection of a transducer to the system.
Collection Group: A group of channels (transducers) that are collected
together. This is used for collection of data for alarms and during transient
events.
Collection Group Enabler: A speed region that is configured by the user
and is used by TDI to enter into transient collection mode.
Collection Control Parameter: A parameter that defines when to collect
transient data.
Delta RPM: The difference, expressed in CPM, between subsequent samples in RPM based transient buffers.
Delta Time: The difference, in time, between the subsequent samples in time
based transient buffers. After a sample is collected, the delta time value
is added to the current time to determine the next time a data set is captured.
M-Series Monitors: 3500 vibration monitors that support collection of
machinery management data. The label on a M-Series monitor has an M
3.1 Overview
added to the end of the catalog number. All vibration monitors are now Mseries.
Static Values: Values extracted from the transducer signal with some signal
conditioning applied.
Synchronous Sample Rate: The number of samples taken for each revolution of the shaft for synchronous data. This is set in the host software (System 1). The fastest sample rate will give the best waveform and orbit
presentation, but the lowest spectral resolution, whereas the slowest sample rate will give the lowest waveform and orbit resolution but the highest
spectral resolution.
Transient Mode: A state of operation wherein data is collected based on
parameter changes, such as speed. This mode is entered when the value
of a collection point the enters the enabler region of a collection group.
3.3
Communication
TDI communicates with the data acquisition computer using Ethernet. It can
support the following physical media: 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX or 100 BaseFX. TDI is designed to work as a standard network device and should be
compatible with any Ethernet structure.
3.4
Data Content
3.4.1
Static Values
Static values represent values extracted from the transducer signal with some
signal conditioning applied. Examples of the conditioning can be linearizing,
scaling, determining the average or peak-to-peak value, or extracting the once
per turn amplitude and phase. Within the 3500 TDI system there are three
sources of static values: protection values, management values, and software
variables. Protection values are generated and used by the monitors, compared against setpoints, and used to protect the machine by use of relays
based on the results. TDI uses the dynamic waveform information, applies signal conditioning and generates additional static values. Lastly, the software
system retrieves the dynamic waveform information and generates additional
values after applying software calculations and signal conditioning.
3.4.1.1
Protection Values
All of the static values configured or enabled using 3500 monitor configuration
are available through TDI. TDI does not re-compute or replace any values that
are measured by the monitors. These static values are available from all of the
3500 monitors regardless of the type of monitor and whether it is designed to
support TDI (M vs. non M series). Although both support static values, one
difference between non-M series and M series monitors is the M series are
capable of faster static value updates than their non-management ready counterparts.
10
3.3 Communication
3.4.1.2
Management Values
The 3500 TDI takes the dynamic waveform from the management ready (M
series) monitors and processes it to provide additional static values. These
values computed by TDI are nX static values that return amplitude and phase*
information of the vibration related to an order (nX) of running speed. Up to
four nX values can be calculated and are available through the System 1 software.
The nX values require a speed input to the 3500 rack. The nX options available are based on the synchronous sampling rate used for waveform sampling. NX values are adjustable by 0.01x steps.
Synchronous Sampling
Rate
Maximum Machine Speed
.1x to 7x, steps of 0.01x
16x
100,000 rpm
32x
60,000 rpm
64x
30,000 rpm
128x
15,000 rpm
256x
7,500 rpm
360x*
5333 rpm
512x
3,750 rpm
720x*
2666 rpm
.1x to511x, steps of 0.01x
1024x
1,875 rpm
NX Range
*Phase information for nX values derived from 360x or 720x sample rates will
be marked invalid.
3.4.1.3
Software Variables
The static variables available from the monitor and from the TDI are augmented by software variables. The software calculates these variables after
retrieving a waveform from the TDI, and performing a series of calculations on
the data. Alarm data capture may be driven by the software based on the values of these variables, however a protection alarm (relay closure) cannot be
issued.
3.4.2
Dynamic Data
Dynamic data, also known as waveform data or dynamic waveform data, is
available from any M series monitor and is not available for non-M series
monitors. TDI is capable of collecting waveform data for up to 12 monitors (48
channels). TDI collects waveform data that is both synchronous to the rotation
of the machine and asynchronous to machine rotation for each channel. Each
of the two waveforms is composed of 2048 samples of 16 bit data. Waveforms
for all channels on a shaft are sampled simultaneously and that allows for
Orbit presentations, modal analysis and better determination of a faults location.
3.4 Data Content
11
The number of dynamic channels configured determines the maximum

machine speed that can be supported by TDI. The following table list the available speed ranges:
3.4.2.1
Number of Channels
Minimum Machine Speed
1 to 16
1 rpm
100,000 rpm
17 to 24
1 rpm
60,000 rpm
25 to 48
1 rpm
30,000 rpm
Synchronous Data
Synchronous data requires a once-per-turn input to the rack. The data sampling is relative to this once-per-turn reference signal and uses a predictive
algorithm to assist in sampling systems with changing speeds. The user configures the TDI to collect a defined number of samples for each rotation of the
shaft generally trading off between spectral resolution and waveform detail.
The upper sampling rates available are limited by the speed of the machine.
The following table lists the sampling rates and the maximum machine speed
supported by the sampling rate.
3.4.2.2
Sampling Rate
Revolutions per Waveform
16x
128
100,000 rpm
32x
64
60,000 rpm
64x
32
30,000 rpm
128x
16
15,000 rpm
256x
7,500 rpm
360x
5333 rpm
512x
3,750 rpm
720x
2666 rpm
1024x
1,875 rpm
Asynchronous Data
Simultaneously with the synchronous data, TDI also collects waveforms using
a fixed-frequency sampling rate. It will collect a 2048 sample data set that can
be used to display as a waveform or an 800 line spectrum. The data collected
in this manner is anti-alias filtered. Sampling of channel pairs within a monitor
is synchronized, except for the 64kHz sampling rate, and the data can be
viewed using full spectrum plots. The following table shows the sampling rate,
corresponding spectral frequency span and the number of spectral lines.
12
3.4 Data Content
Sample Rate
Frequency Span
Number of Spectral
Lines
Spectral
Resolution
25.6 Hz
10 Hz
800
0.0125 Hz
51.2 Hz
20 Hz
800
0.025 Hz
128 Hz
50 Hz
800
0.0625 Hz
256 Hz
100 Hz
800
0.125 Hz
512 Hz
200 Hz
800
0.25 Hz
1.28kHz
500 Hz
800
0.625 Hz
2.56kHz
1kHz
800
1.25 Hz
5.12kHz
2kHz
800
2.5 Hz
12.8kHz
5kHz
800
6.25 Hz
25.6kHz
10kHz
800
12.5 Hz
51.2kHz*
20kHz
800
25 Hz
64kHz*
30kHz
960
31.25 Hz
* For 51.2kHz and 64kHz the number of channels allowed in a collection group
is limited to 24.
3.4.2.3
Integration
TDI can be configured to return integrated waveform data. All of the waveform
and nX values will be returned as integrated data if integration is selected in
the protection system configuration.
3.5
Status Inputs
TDI is constantly informed of the status of the monitors in the rack and reports
this status back to the host computer. Operational status is reported at a
channel level including the alarm status and transducer OK status as well as
the TDI entering and leaving operating modes. Monitor health is also reported
as part of the ongoing voltage and performance checks within the monitor with
exceptions reported as a monitor event message.
3.6
Speed Inputs
TDI accepts from one to four speed signals that are the same as available for
the rest of the 3500 System. TDI uses speed inputs to sample data while
acquiring synchronous waveforms and computing nX values. The speed
inputs are also used to collect transient data. TDI can use either once per revolution Keyphasor signals, Multiple Event per revolution speed signals, or
Recip Multi-Event Wheels.
3.5 Status Inputs
13
3.6.1
Multiple Event Keyphasor Signals

TDI supports the use of multiple event-per-revolution speed inputs. The
Keyphasor Module must be configured to output a once per revolution signal
to the 3500 modules. When configured for multiple event signals TDI will mark
all phase related data as invalid.
3.6.2
Recip Multi-Event Wheel

There is special configuration selection to support the Recip Multi-Event
Wheel. This speed reference provides a combination of a multi-event input for
improved sampling along with a once per indication for phase reference.
3.7
Data Collection Modes

Data is delivered by the TDI to the host software for different causes. In some
instances data is delivered upon request from the software such as current
values requests. In other instances the TDI determines that data collection
should occur based on the existing monitoring situation such as a monitor
going into alarm. The following sections list the different causes of data collection. In each case the data content consists of the types of data described
above but taken at varying density and frequency and sometimes with historical content.
3.7.1
Current Values
Application Advisory
Collection and storage of waveform data is an optional
software feature that must be purchased, and then
activated in the TDI.
TDI returns static values and waveforms when requested from the host computer. This data is used to provide both real time data displays and is used to
establish historical trend and reference data. The static values are collected at
1-second intervals across the machine train by the software to build historical
trend plots. Historical waveform data is collected and stored by the host computer at a user-defined interval. This collection is used in static, steady state
and transient software operation.
3.7.2
Alarm Data
TDI will store a set of data occurring before and after an alarm event that
occurs within the 3500 rack for all the measurement points in the collection
group. To provide the data prior to the event, TDI records a running time window of static and waveform data and when an alarm occurs this data is associated with the event and transmitted to the host computer. TDI will then
collect additional data after the alarm event, associate it with the alarm and
transmit this data to the host. Since all of the data is collected from a collection
group all of the waveform data between channels is time-coherent, as is the
steady state data.
14
3.7 Data Collection Modes
Alarm data collection is initiated by one of two methods:
First, if any static value within a collection group goes into alarm the alarm
data for all points in the collection group will be collected. Alarm collection
will occur for both alert and danger alarms.
Second, System 1 software can initiate an alarm event. This can occur if 1)
a software alarm occurs for one of the points within the collection group or
2) a point in another rack that is associated by being in the same collection
group goes into alarm.
Alarm data is not collected when leaving the alarm state such as going from
danger to alert, or from alert to no alarm.
The data set for an alarm event on a dynamic point will typically consist of the
following:
20 seconds of 0.1 sec interval static data just prior to the event (200 static
data points);
1 from the time the event was detected;
10 minutes of 1 sec interval static data from before the event (580 static
data points);
2.5 minutes of 10 sec interval waveforms from before the event (15 waveforms);
10 seconds of 0.1 sec interval static data from after the event (100 static
data points);
1 minute of 1 sec interval static data from after the event (50 static data
points);
1 minute of 10 sec interval waveforms from after the event (6 waveforms).

Event Detected
Change
Filtered Trend
Pre-Event
Post Event
10 minutes
1 sec Interval
Static Data
Waveform
0.1 Sec Interval

Static Data
Change
Filtered Trend
Data for a static only point such as temperature will be the same except there
will be no waveform data, and the time resolution is limited to once per second.
3.7.2.1
Issues With Alarm Collection

The time between the event and the first set of historical data can vary based
on when the data was sampled and when the alarm occurred. Therefore the
time interval from the event to the first of the pre-waveforms can be anywhere
between 0 to 10 seconds. The older waveforms will be ten seconds apart.
Because of machine speed or sampling rate a waveform may take longer than
10 seconds to acquire. In this case the next waveform will begin at the end of
the previous one and will be greater than 10 seconds between them. Because
15
of this there can be less than 15 waveforms for the pre-event data and less
than 6 waveforms of post event data.
Once data is sent to the host the same data will not be sent again. Therefore,
if there are multiple closely spaced alarms for a collection group, each alarm
will not cause a full set of data to be sent. However, all of the data representing
the event will be available at the software.
The alarm list indicates when the rack detects alarms; any alarm events sent
to the rack by the software are not logged in the event list. There is no event
list for the collection of the data.
3.7.3
Transient Data
Application Advisory
This feature is an optional software feature that must
be purchased and activated to enable the capability.
TDI has a special mode of operation for collecting data during transient operation of the machine. TDI collects transient data based on changes in machine
speed and at a configurable time interval. Speed based and time based data
collection is always ongoing inside the TDI. The data is temporarily saved but
not sent to the host until the machine is detected as going into a transient
mode of operation. When this happens the last 200 data collection sets are
transmitted to the host and the TDI continues to send new data sets until the
end of transient conditions are met.
To configure the data collection during transient events the user has to do the
following in System 1 Configuration:
3.7.3.1
Place all of the channels into a collection group.
Place a Keyphasor into the same collection group.
Define the Collection Group Enablers; these determine how TDI will detect
that a machine is in transient operation.
Define the Collection Control Parameters; these determine when TDI will
collect data.
Collection Group Enablers

Collection Group Enablers are rules defined by the user based on machine
speed that determine when the machine has entered a transient mode of
operation. When the speed of the machine is detected as within the region
defined by the enabler, TDI enters into transient collection mode. There are
two collection group enablers available for each collection group. These
enablers define a speed range with a lower and upper speed. Normally one
enabler range is set between slow roll (or stop) and running speed to capture
machine starts and shut downs. The second enabler is intended to be set
above normal operational speed to catch over speed events. The shaded
regions in the following figure show sample rpm ranges for the two collection
group enablers.
16
Once in transient mode TDI will stay in the mode until the Host software tells it
to exit transient mode. This occurs at a configured time interval after the TDI
exits the Collection Group Enabler range.
Another way for TDI to enter transient mode is using direct user intervention.
At the Host software the user can issue a command for TDI to enter transient
mode. This action bypasses the collection group enablers and goes immediately into transient mode. TDI will then stay in transient mode until manually
removed from transient mode.
3.7.3.2
Collection Control Parameters

The Collection Control Parameters (CCP) are used to define when the TDI will
capture data. There are two types of parameters: delta RPM and delta time.
Both of these types of parameters function simultaneously. For each collection
group the following selections are available: increasing delta rpm, decreasing
delta rpm and time interval. All three of these can be active simultaneously for
a collection group. The increasing and decreasing delta rpm are individually
programmable.
The time interval CCP defines a fixed time period that will cause a data set to
be taken. The time interval CCP will initiate data collection at the configured
interval regardless of the speed of the machine. The RPM based CCP forces
data collection based on changes in machine speed in either increasing or
decreasing speed. Once a data set is collected at a given speed, the delta rpm
values are added (subtracted) and two target rpm values calculated, one for
increasing and one for decreasing speeds. When either of the target values
are reached or exceeded data collection occurs and the next target rpm values calculated. Since the target values are determined by using the current
speed and because data may be collected at slightly higher or lower rpm values, even though the delta speed may be set to 50 rpm intervals (for example)
the resulting data may be at slightly different intervals.
17
When TDI detects that it has entered into a transient region it will immediately
collect a waveform and static data set. TDI will collect one complete set of
static data for all points in the collection group each time a CCP detects a collection event. Every ten events TDI will collect a waveform data set for all of
the dynamic points in the collection group. The events can consist of both
RPM CCPs and time CCP collection. Therefore, if there had been 6 RPM
based events (increasing or decreasing) detected and 4 time interval events
since the last waveform collection, a new waveform will be collected.
18
3.7.3.3
Issues With Transient Collection

If the software tells TDI to exit while it is in a transient region it will terminate
transient collection. It will re-enter transient mode only when the speed exits
the enabler region then re-enters the region or enters another enabler region.
Under startup conditions or after reconfiguration of the TDI the historical buffer
may not be full at the time of the event and only a partial data set will be
returned.
Care needs to be taken when configuring the Collection Control Parameters
for transient data collection. TDI can collect a large amount of data in a short
time and unless the system can handle transferring it to the software the TDIs
memory will eventual fill up. The following guideline should help in optimizing
the TDI configuration.
System 1 / TDI can transfer a waveform set at a rate of 1 set per second. If 2
TDIs are connected to a single DAQ and both TDIs are in transient mode then
the computer takes 2 seconds to collect a waveform set.
In addition to its alarm data storage and pre-transient data storage TDI can
hold 35 waveforms sets internally.
The optimum Delta RPM value is set using the following equation:
Delta RPM [(Maximum Speed - Minimum Speed)/ (35 + Ramp Time /
Transfer Rate)]/10
Example:
Machine ramps from 100 rpm to 15,000 rpm in 2 minutes.
The DAQ computer is supporting 3 TDIs.
19
Delta RPM [(15,000 100) / (35 + 120 sec / 3 sec)] /10

Delta RPM 19.8 rpm
During the event the system would collect 752 static set and 75 waveforms sets. Plus it will have stored the 200 static set and 20 waveform sets
acquired before entering transient mode.
20
Section 4 -- Configuration Information
There are two steps to configurate the 3500/22M. The first step is configuring
it to function as the Rack Interface Module. The second step is configuring the
data collection system. Configuring the Rack Interface Module is covered in
this manual; and, the configuration of data collection is covered in the System
1 help system.
This section describes how the Transient Data Interface is configured using
the 3500 Rack Configuration Software. It also describes configuration
restrictions associated with this module. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System
Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide and the Rack Configuration Software
for the details on how to operate the software.
4.1
Transient Data Interface Considerations
4.1.1
3500 Rack Configuration

The Rear Port I/O option and the Power Supply option specified on the
Transient Data Interface option screen must match the physical components
of the system. If a configuration mismatch is found, the rack will not accept
the downloaded configuration.
Initial setting of the Ethernet parameters must be done using the RS-232 port
on the front panel.
A Keyphasor or Tachometer module must be in the rack for TDI to collect
synchronous data. If a channel is assigned to a Keyphasor signal and the
module is not in the rack, the configuration will be disallowed.
TDI requires that the same backup Keyphasor channel is selected for every
channel using a given primary Keyphasor channel. If the backup Keyphasor
assignment is inconsistent, the configuration will be disallowed.
The rack file is used by System 1 as part of the configuration process and
must agree with the configuration in the physical rack, otherwise data
collection will not be initiated.
4.1.2
System 1
If more than 24 channels are in a collection group then 20 kHz and 30 kHz are
not available as asynchronous frequency spans in that group. Other smaller
collection groups can still use 20 kHz or 30 kHz.
Waveform collection for a collection group is either Transient or Steady-State.
The two types of collection can not be mixed within a collection group. Static
only points can be assigned to collection groups with either transient or
steady-state collection.
All channels that do not have a Keyphasor association within the 3500 Rack
Configuration have to be manually placed in a collection group within System
1 Configuration. Points with Keyphasor association will be automatically
assigned to a collection group.
4.1 Transient Data Interface Considerations
21
Care should be taken in setting the collection control parameters. If a delta

rpm of 0.1 is used for a machine that runs at 30,000 rpm, an excessive
amount of data will be collected during a startup.
If the protection system configuration is changed, then data collection for the
rack will stop until the System 1 configuration is updated to match the
changes.
If a new monitor is added, it will be ignored by the management system until it
is configured in System 1.
If a monitor channel is configured for integration, using 3500 Rack
Configuration, then all of the management data for the channel will be
integrated.
TDI can support up to a maximum of 12 M series monitors (3500/40M, 42M,
44M, 46M, 64M, 72M and 77M).
To view full spectrum data from asynchronous sampling the two channels
must be from the a single monitor channel pair and the sampling rate must be
20 kHz or slower.
When configured with a Shaft Absolute channel type, TDI will return the
waveforms from the displacement waveform on the first channel and the shaft
absolute waveform on the second channel.
4.2
Configuration Process Overview

The initial configuration of TDI involves several steps. The following list of
steps is the recommended method for installing a TDI.
1. Install TDI in the 3500 Rack
2. Use the front port to configure the TDIs Ethernet options
3. Finish configuring the 3500 Rack via the front port or Ethernet port
4. Save the rack file after downloading
5. Use System 1 Configuration to add a 3500 Rack to the DAQ
6. Import the rack file
7. Configure the sampling configuration*
8. Configure the collection configuration*
* These processes are covered in the System 1 help screens.
22
4.2 Configuration Process Overview
4.3
Transient Data Interface Configuration

This section describes the options available on the Transient Data Interface
configuration screen.
Configuration ID: A unique six character identifier, which is entered when a

configuration is downloaded to the 3500 rack.
4.3.1
Rear Port
I/O Option: The I/O field lets you identify the type of I/O Module that is
attached to the module (The option selected must agree with the I/O module installed). These choices are:
4.3.2
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
100 Base-FX
Ethernet (Rear Port)

The primary communication interface for TDI is Ethernet utilizing TCP/IP.
Several parameters need to be configured to allow usage of the
communication interface.
Network Device Name: Use this parameter to give the rack a name it will be
known as on the Network. The name has to be 20 characters or less and
cannot contain any spaces.
Rack IP Address: The IP Address is a number that identifies the device on
the network at a software level. Entered as a string containing 4 numbers
between 0 and 255. An IP Address is used to identify and connect to a
rack across an Ethernet WAN or LAN.
Note: IP Addresses of 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 are not valid.
When configuring a new TDI, see your network administrator to obtain a
valid IP Address.
4.3 Transient Data Interface Configuration
23
Rack Subnet Mask: String used to mask against the IP Address. In the form
of 255.255.0.0, 255.255.255.0 etc...
Gateway Address: The IP Address of the Gateway server. The Gateway
server is used to access addresses outside the local network. For networks where the Host Computer and the TDI are on the same local area
network a Gateway is not needed. Contact your network administrator to
obtain the gateway address.
4.3.3
Front Port
The port on the front of the Transient Data Interface labeled
CONFIGURATION PORT is primarily used to configure the 3500 rack with a
personal computer. This port may also be used to retrieve machinery data for
display using the Data Acquisition/DDE Server Software and the Operator
Display Software. This port supports RS-232 only and provides access to only
one rack.
External Modem: The following external modems are directly supported by
the Transient Data Interface:
-
None
Hayes Ultra 9600
Hayes Optima 9600
Motorola FasTalkII 14400
US Robotics 56k
Custom
Initialization String: The command that sets up and starts the modem. If
you select a modem from the list, the default initialization string will be displayed in this field. If you select Custom, enter an initialization string from
information found in the modem's documentation.
Byte Timeout: The number of byte times which the communication line must
be idle before a communication is considered complete. One byte time is
a function of the baud rate selected. The range of values is 3 to 255.
4.3.4
Passwords
Connect Password: Provides read only access to the 3500 rack. If the
password entered in this field does not match the password entered in the
Rack Configuration Software "Connect" screen or in the Data Acquisition/
DDE Server Software "Setup" screen, no communication with the 3500
rack will be allowed. This password is stored in non-volatile memory in the
Transient Data Interface.
Configuration Password: Provides configuration write access to the 3500
rack. If the password entered in this field does not match the password
entered in the Rack Configuration Software "Download" screen, the 3500
24
rack will not accept new configurations. This password is also required to
change setpoints in the 3500 rack from the Operator Display Software.
This password is stored in non-volatile memory in the Transient Data Interface.
4.3.5
Rack Mounting Option

Select the type of 3500 rack that is installed or is going to be installed. Refer
to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual for
a description of the various mounting options.
4.3.6
Power Supply
Select the power supply options for both the upper and lower power supply
positions.
Top: The following power supplies can be installed in the upper 3500 Power
Supply Slot:
-
No Power Supply
AC High Voltage
AC Low Voltage
DC High Voltage
DC Low Voltage
Bottom: The following power supplies can be installed in the upper 3500
Power Supply Slot:
4.3.7
No Power Supply
AC High Voltage
AC Low Voltage
DC High Voltage
DC Low Voltage
Agency Approvals
The following Agency Approvals are available for the 3500 rack:
None
CSA-NRTL/C
CE Approval: Select this box if the CE mark is applicable to the racks installation.
25
4.4
Security Options Configuration

This Section describes the options available on the Transient Data Interface
Security Option Configuration screen.
Change Setpoints in Program Mode Only: This will only allow changes to
setpoints in any of the monitors if the keylock is in the program mode position. If the key is in the run position, setpoint changes will not be allowed.
Disable Front Communication Port of TDI: This option disables all write
functions through the front communication port on the Transient Data
Interface when selected. When in this mode the Rear Communication Port
is still active.
Drive Rack NOT OK Relay if Rack Address is Changed in Run Mode:
With this option selected the NOT OK Relay will go into a NOT OK state if
the Rack Address is changed at any time while the key switch is in the run
position.
Drive Rack NOT OK Relay if a Module is Removed From the Rack: When
selected this option will force the NOT OK Relay into a NOT OK state if
any module is removed from its slot in the Rack.
Drive Rack NOT OK Relay if Key Switch is Changed From Run to Program Mode: The Rack NOT OK Relay will go into a NOT OK state any time
that the key switch is changed from Run to Program mode when this
option is selected.
26
4.4 Security Options Configuration
4.5
Software Switches
Switches let you control the operation of the 3500 rack and control access to
the configuration of the rack. This section lists the software and hardware
switches that are available for the Transient Data Interface.
No changes will take effect until the Set button is pressed.
4.5.1
Module Switch
Configuration Mode: A switch that allows the rack to be configured. To set
the rack in configuration mode, enable () this switch and set the key
switch on the front of the Transient Data Interface in the PROGRAM position. When downloading a Transient Data Interface configuration, this
switch will automatically be enabled and disabled by the Rack Configuration Software. If the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration
process, use this switch to remove the module from Configuration Mode.
The module switch number is used in the Communication Gateway Module.
Module Switch Number

1
4.5 Software Switches
Switch Name
Configuration Mode
27
4.6
Hardware Switches
The Transient Data Interface has three hardware switches that are found on
the front panel.
4.6.1
Key Switch
The Key Switch is used to prevent unauthorized changes to the configuration
settings. When the switch is in the RUN position, the 3500 rack cannot be
configured. When the switch is in the PROGRAM position, the 3500 rack can
be configured and the rack continues to operate normally. By removing the
key, you can lock the Transient Data Interface in the RUN or PROGRAM
position.
4.6.2
Rack Reset
Note:
An I/O Module must be installed for the Rack Reset
switch to function correctly.
When the Rack Reset switch is pressed, any monitors in the rack will clear
latched alarms and reset Timed OK Channel Defeat indications. If the
Configuration LED is blinking at 5 Hz, it will be stopped. This switch performs
the same function as the Rack Reset contact on the Rack Interface I/O
Module.
4.6.3
Rack Address
The Rack Address is used to identify individual 3500 Racks on the network.
Set the rack address by using a 7-position DIP switch, which provides for 127
possible addresses. All racks on a local area network should have a unique
rack address. The following diagram and table show how to select the
address 0110001 (49 decimal).
28
4.6 Hardware Switches
Figure 4-1. Rack Address Switch

LSB - Least Significant Bit
MSB - Most Significant Bit
The white area shows the direction of the switch.
Table 4-1: Available Rack Address
Switch Addresses
Switch Addresses
Switch Addresses
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
7654321 _____
7654321 _____
7654321 _____
0000000 1*
0101011 43
1010110 86
0000001 1
0101100 44
1010111 87
0000010 2
0101101 45
1011000 88
0000011 3
0101110 46
1011001 89
0000100 4
0101111 47
1011010 90
0000101 5
0110000 48
1011011 91
0000110 6
0110001 49
1011100 92
0000111 7
0110010 50
1011101 93
0001000 8
0110011 51
1011110 94
0001001 9
0110100 52
1011111 95
29
0001010 10
0110101 53
1100000 96
0001011 11
0110110 54
1100001 97
0001100 12
0110111 55
1100010 98
0001101 13
0111000 56
1100011 99
0001110 14
0111001 57
1100100 100
0001111 15
0111010 58
1100101 101
0010000 16
0111011 59
1100110 102
0010001 17
0111100 60
1100111 103
0010010 18
0111101 61
1101000 104
0010011 19
0111110 62
1101001 105
0010100 20
0111111 63
1101010 106
0010101 21
1000000 64
1101011 107
0010110 22
1000001 65
1101100 108
0010111 23
1000010 66
1101101 109
0011000 24
1000011 67
1101110 110
0011001 25
1000100 68
1101111 111
0011010 26
1000101 69
1110000 112
0011011 27
1000110 70
1110001 113
0011100 28
1000111 71
1110010 114
0011101 29
1001000 72
1110011 115
0011110 30
1001001 73
1110100 116
0011111 31
1001010 74
1110101 117
0100000 32
1001011 75
1110110 118
0100001 33
1001100 76
1110111 119
0100010 34
1001101 77
1111000 120
0100011 35
1001110 78
1111001 121
0100100 36
1001111 79
1111010 122
0100101 37
1010000 80
1111011 123
0100110 38
1010001 81
1111100 124
0100111 39
1010010 82
1111101 125
0101000 40
1010011 83
1111110 126
0101001 41
1010100 84
1111111 127
0101010 42
1010101 85
* The address 0000000 is reserved for the host. Setting the switches to
0000000 will select a Rack Address of 1 just as 0000001 will.
30
Section 5 -- I/O Module Description
I/O Module Description

The Transient Data Interface requires one I/O module and supports an
optional second I/O module. The Transient Data Interface I/O Module is
required and is used to connect the TDI to a network using Ethernet. The second module is the Buffered Signal Output Module and provides the buffered
signals from the vibration monitors.
This section describes how to use the connectors on the I/O modules, lists
what cables to use, and shows the pin outs of the cables.
Only one Transient Data Interface I/O Module can be installed at a time behind
the Transient Data Interface (in a Rack Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or above
the Transient Data Interface (in a Bulkhead rack).
Also, one Buffered Signal Output Module may be installed between the Power
Input Modules and the Transient Data Interface I/O.
5.1
Transient Data Interface Input/Output (I/O)

Modules
There are two types Transient Data Interface I/O Modules that are available
for the 3500 Monitoring System. They are the 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet I/O (RJ-45) and the 100 Base-FX Ethernet I/O (Fiber Optic).
The Transient Data Interface I/O module must be installed behind the Transient Data Interface (in a Rack Mount or Panel Mount rack) or above the Transient Data Interface (in a Bulkhead rack).
5.1 Transient Data Interface Input/Output (I/O) Modules
31
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
32
OK RELAY: The OK Relay is normally

energized and is used to indicate whether
the 3500 Monitoring System is OK.
RJ-45 Ethernet Connector: Used to connect to a Host computer system with
Ethernet.
MT-RJ FIBER OPTIC Connector: Used to
connect to a Host computer system with
Ethernet.
ACTIVITY LED: This amber LED will
flicker if the TDI detects network activity.
(5)
(6)
LINK LED: This green LED will illuminate if

the TDI is connected to an active network.
EXTERNAL CONTACTS:
- Trip Multiply
- Rack Alarm Inhibit
- Rack Reset
OK RELAY
The following items will cause the OK Relay to go NOT OK:
Removing the Transient Data Interface from the 3500 rack
Plugging a module into the 3500 rack (during self-test)
Transducer going not OK (except Keyphasor transducer)
Hardware failure within a module
Configuration Failure
Slot ID Failure, (a module is unable to determine what slot it is in)
Any module in the 3500 rack which has detected a fault
Communication Failure with any module.
If any of the following security options have been configured and their conditions met:
-
Rack Address is changed while the TDI is in Run Mode.
Any module is inserted or removed from the rack.
The Key Switch is changed from Run Mode to Program Mode.
The following diagrams show the different ways the OK Relay can be wired:
NO means Normally Open.

ARM means Armature.
NC means Normally Closed.
Note:
OK relays are normally energized
33
Communications Interface
The TDI Ethernet port connects the 3500 rack to a 10 or 100 Mega-bit Ethernet local area network to which the host computer is also connected. This connection can either use the RJ-45 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX connector or the
100 Base-FX connector. The TDI supports standard LAN architectures and
can be routed to the host via hubs and switches.
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX: A RJ-45 port used to connect the TDI to the host
computer through an Ethernet network. Connection requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. This port supports a maximum cable length of 100 m (328 ft) .
100 Base-FX: A MT-RJ fiber optic port used to connect the TDI to the host
computer through an Ethernet network. Connection requires MT-RJ Multimode fiber optic network cabling. Maximum length supported is 400 m
(1312 ft).
EXTERNAL CONTACTS
These require dry contact inputs. To enable a specific function, short the
desired contact to a system common (COM).
Trip Multiply (TM): When active, places the entire rack in Trip Multiply.
Rack Alarm Inhibit (INHB): Used to prevent an alarm from being declared
for any monitor or relay in the 3500 rack. This is typically used when performing maintenance functions. When active, monitors in alarm will be
taken out of alarm and the rack OK relay will be in the not OK state.
Rack Reset (RST): Used to signal when the modules in the 3500 rack are to
be reset. This contact has the same function as the Rack Reset switch on
the front panel of the Transient Data Interface.
34
5.1.1
Wiring Euro Style Connectors

To remove a terminal block from its base, loosen the screws attaching the terminal block to the base and then grip the block firmly and pull. Do not pull the
block out by its wires because this could loosen or damage the wires or connector.
Figure 5-1. Typical I/O module

Refer to the 3500 Field Wiring Diagram Package for the recommended wiring.
Also, do not remove more than 6 mm (0.25 inches) of insulation from the
wires.
35
5.1.2
Cable Pin Outs

Cable Number 02290860
Host Computer (or Transient Data Interface) to External Modem Cable
3500 Front
Panel
Modem
Cable Number 130118-XXXX-XX

Host Computer to 3500 Rack RS-232 Interface Cable
5.2
Buffered Signal Output Module

The Buffered Signal Output Module is an optional module to allow an access
to all of the buffered signals from the monitors when used with the Bently
Nevada Diagnostic Access Panel (Catalog Number 3500/08). Additionally,
access to the conditioned Keyphasor signal is available through this module.
The module must be installed behind the Power Supplies between the Power
Input Modules and the Transient Data Interface I/O Module (in a Rack Mount
or a Panel Mount rack) or above the Power Supplies between the Power Input
Modules and the Transient Data Interface I/O Module (in a Bulkhead rack).
There are four connectors:
1. The first connector provides access to the buffered signals for the first 6
monitor slots (2-7).
2. The second connector provides access for the next 6 slots (slots 8-13).
3. The third connector allows access to the last two slots (slots 14 & 15).
4. The fourth connector provides access to the conditioned Keyphasor signals.
36
5.2 Buffered Signal Output Module
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Buffered Signals for slots 2 through 7

Buffered Signals for slots 8 through 13
Buffered Signals for slots 14 & 15
Conditioned Keyphasors 1 through 4
Note:
This I/O module does not support connection to DDIX,
TDIX or TDXnet.
37
5.2.1
Signal Pin Out

Table 5-1: Dynamic Connector 1
Slot
2
Channel
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Common
Pin Number
7
14
18
16
11
21
25
23
2
9
4
6
20
3
19
5
24
10
13
12
15
22
17
8
1

Slot
8
10
11
12
13
Common
38
Channel
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Pin Number
7
14
18
16
11
21
25
23
2
9
4
6
20
3
19
5
24
10
13
12
15
22
17
8
1

Slot
14
Channel
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
15
Common
Pin Number
2
16
4
14
3
17
5
15
1
Table 5-4: Conditioned Keyphasor Signals Connector 4

Slot
Upper Keyphasor
Upper Keyphasor
Lower Keyphasor
Lower Keyphasor
Common
Channel
1 (1 Upper Kph)
2 (2 Upper Kph)
3 (1 Lower Kph)
4 (2 Lower Kph)
Pin Number
6
7
8
5
9
39
Maintenance
This section shows how to verify that the Transient Data Interface and the I/O
modules are operating correctly.
6.1
Verification
Use the TDI Host Port Test Utility to verify that the HOST ports on the Transient Data Interface and the TDI I/O Module are operating properly. Before
running the TDI Host Port Test Utility, connect the host to the rack with either a
RS-232 cable to the front of the TDI.
Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide
and the Rack Configuration Software for the details of this utility.
6.2
Performing Firmware Upgrades

Occasionally it may be necessary to upgrade the original firmware that is
shipped with the 3500/22M TDI. The following instructions describe how to
upgrade the existing firmware using the 3500 Configuration software.
CAUTION
During the following procedure power to the
rack cannot be interrupted and the monitor
that is being upgraded cannot be removed
from the rack. If either of these occurs the
monitor may become inoperable.
1. Close System 1 Data Acquisition.
2. Start the 3500 Configuration software and connect to the rack. Use the
Ethernet port for upgrading due to the length of the files that have to be
downloaded.
3. Upload and save the current configuration of the module. Although the
module retains the current configuration during the upgrade, saving the
present configuration will help if there are any problems in the upgrade
process.
4. Under the Utilities menu option select Update Firmware.
40
6.1 Verification
Section 6 -- Maintenance
5. Select the module to be updated and click on the OK button.
6. The software will request the file to be downloaded. Select the file and
click on the Open button.
7. The software will now download the file. If the process fails, the module will
revert to its old code. Under no circumstances should the monitor be
removed until it has finished the process.
8. After the download is completed, the module will restart and the software
will disconnect.
9. Once the module has completed its startup, reconnect.
10. The software will request for DSP code files to be downloaded. There will
be four files. Select each file and click on the Open button.
11. The software will now download the files.
Cycle power to the module, either by removing and reinstalling the module or
by removing power from the rack.
6.2 Performing Firmware Upgrades
41
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the Transient Data
Interface or the I/O modules by using the information provided by the
verification screen, the LEDs, the System Event List, and the Alarm Event List.
You can display the verification screen and the two event lists by using the
Rack Configuration Software.
7.1
Verification
To perform the Transient Data Interface's verification:
1. Connect a computer running the Rack Configuration Software to the 3500
rack (if needed).
2. Select Utilities from the main screen of the Rack Configuration Software
3. Select Verification from the Utilities menu.
4. Select the Transient Data Interface and select the channel you want to verify.
5. Press the Verify button.
6. Select the Front Port or the Rear Port to get the status.
7. The Module OK State will show the Transient Data Interface's status and
the Channel OK State will show the channel's status.
7.2

The following table shows how to use the LEDs to diagnose and correct
problems.
OK LED
42
TX/RX
Condition
Solution
1 Hz
1 Hz
Transient Data Interface is not configured or in Configuration Mode.
Reconfigure the Transient Data Interface.
5 Hz
Dont
Care
Transient Data Interface has

detected an internal fault and is not
OK.
Check the System

Event List.
ON
Flashing
Transient Data Interface is operating correctly.
No action is required.
Dont
Care
Not
Flashing
Transient Data Interface not operating correctly.
Check the System

Event List.
7.1 Verification
Section 7 -- Troubleshooting
TM LED
Condition
Solution
ON
Rack is in Trip Multiply (due to hardware or

software).
OFF
Rack is not in Trip Multiply.
Config OK LED
Condition
Solution
Configuration information for

every module in the rack is
valid.
5 Hz
One of the selected security

options has had its condition
met.
Check the System Event List.

Press the Rack Reset switch to
clear.
OFF
At least one module has a configuration fault.
Check System Event List for which

module(s) need to be reconfigured.
OR
Reconfigure module(s) that are
flashing OK and TX/RX LEDs at 1
Hz.
ON
A non-configured active Power

Supply is present in the rack.
Remove Power Supply or change

TDI configuration to include additional Power Supply.
7.3
System Event List Messages

This section describes the System Event List Messages that are entered by
the Transient Data Interface.
Example of a System Event List Message
Sequence
Number
0000000123
Event
Information
Device Not
Communicating
Event
Number
32
Class
Event
Date
DDMMYY
02/01/90
Event
Time
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Slot
5L
Sequence Number: Number of the event in the System Event List (for
example 123).
Event Information: The name of the event (for example Device Not
Communicating).
7.3 System Event List Messages
43
Event Number: Code that identifies a specific event.

Class: Number used to display the severity of the event. The following
classes are available:
Class Value
0
1
2
3
Classification
Severe/Fatal Event
Potential Problem Event
Typical Logged Event
Reserved
Event Date: The date the event occurred.

Event Time: The time the event occurred.
Event Specific: Provides additional information for the events that use this
field.
Slot: Identifies the module that the event is associated with. If a half-height
module is installed in the upper slot or a full-height module is installed, the
field will be 0 to 15. If a half-height module is installed in the lower slot,
then the field will be 0L to 15L. For example, the module is installed in the
lower position of slot 5 (5L).
The following System Event List Messages may be placed in the list by the
Transient Data Interface and are listed in numerical order. If an event marked
with an asterisk (*) occurs...
the host link on the back of the Rack Interface I/O Module supplying the
message will not communicate with the host computer
If you are unable to resolve a problem, contact your nearest Bently Nevada
office.
Flash Memory Failure:
Event Number: 11
Event Classification: Potential Problem
Action:Replace the Transient Data Interface as soon as possible.
Real Time Clock Failure :
Event Number: 12
Event Classification: Severe/Fatal Event
Action:Replace the Transient Data Interface as soon as possible.
44
Internal Network Failure:

Event Number: 30
Action:Replace the Transient Data Interface immediately.
Resync Internal Network(Resynchronize Internal Network):
Event Number: 31
Action:Check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
-
the Transient Data Interface or
the rack backplane
Device Not Communicating:

Event Number: 32
-
the module installed in the slot or
the rack backplane
Device Is Communicating:
Event Number: 33
-
the module installed in the slot or
the rack backplane
Config Token Acquired(Configuration Token Acquired):

Event Number: 50
Event Classification: Typical logged event
Event Specific:
-
Front,
Back,
The specified port can download configuration, change setpoints, set

software switches, enable/disable Rack Alarm Inhibit, enable/disable Trip
Multiply, or perform Rack Reset.
Action:No action required.
45
Config Token Released(Configuration Token Released):

Event Number: 51
Event Specific:
-
Front,
Back,
The specified port can no longer download configuration, change

setpoints, set software switches, enable/disable Rack Alarm Inhibit,
enable/disable Trip Multiply, or perform Rack Reset.
Config Token Expired(Configuration Token Expired):
Event Number: 52
-
the connection between the Transient Data Interface and the computer
running the Rack Configuration Software;
the Transient Data Interface; or
the computer running the Rack Configuration Software.
Config Token Override(Configuration Token Override):

Event Number: 53
Event Classification: Typical Logged Event
Fail Relay Coil Sense:
Event Number: 55
Action:Check to see if the Rack Interface I/O Module is installed. If
installed, check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
46
the Transient Data Interface, or
the Rack Interface I/O Module
Pass Relay Coil Sense:

Event Number: 56
Action:Check to see if the Rack Interface I/O Module is installed. If
-
the Rack Interface I/O Module
I/O Module Mismatch:

Event Number: 60
Action:Verify that the Rack Interface I/O Module installed matches the
Rack Interface I/O Module selected in the Rack Configuration Software. If
the correct Rack Interface I/O Module is installed, there could be a fault
with the installed Rack Interface I/O Module.
Rack Type Mismatch:
Event Number: 61
Action:Verify that the rack selection jumper, installed on the rack
backplane, matches the rack type selected in the software. If the jumper is
installed in the correct position, there could be a fault with the rack
backplane.
HW Rack Alm Inh Active(Hardware Rack Alarm Inhibit Active):
Event Number: 70
HW Rack Alm Inh Inactive(Hardware Rack Alarm Inhibit Inactive):
Event Number: 71
HW override of SW Inh(Hardware override of Software Inhibit):
Event Number: 72
47
HW Trip Multiply Active(Hardware Trip Multiply Active):

Event Number: 73
HW Trip Mult Inactive(Hardware Trip Multiply Inactive):
Event Number: 74
HW override of SW TM(Hardware override of Software Trip Multiply):
Event Number: 75
HW Rack Reset Active(Hardware Rack Reset Active):
Event Number: 76
HW Rack Reset Inactive(Hardware Rack Reset Inactive):
Event Number: 77
SW Rack Alm Inh Active(Software Rack Alarm Inhibit Active):
Event Number: 78
SW Rack Alm Inh Inactive(Software Rack Alarm Inhibit Inactive):
Event Number: 79
SW Trip Multiply Active(Software Trip Multiply Active):
Event Number: 80
48
SW Trip Mult Inactive(Software Trip Multiply Inactive):

Event Number: 81
SW Rack Reset (Software Rack Reset):
Event Number: 82
Rack Address changed:
Event Number: 90
Key Switch in Run Mode:
Event Number: 91
Key Switch in Prgm Mode(Key Switch in Program Mode):
Event Number: 92
Fail Main Board +5V-A(Fail Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply):
Event Number: 100
Action:Verify that noise from the power source is not causing the problem.
If the problem is not caused by noise, check to see if one of the following
components is faulty:
-
the Power Supply installed in the upper slot
49
Pass Main Board +5V-A(Pass Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply):
Event Number: 101
-
Fail Main Board +5V-B(Fail Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply):
Event Number: 102
-
the Power Supply installed in the lower slot
Pass Main Board +5V-B(Pass Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply):
Pass Main Board +5V-B
Event Number: 103
-
* Fail Main Board +5V-AB(Fail Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies):
Event Number: 104
Event Classification: Severe / Fatal Event
50
the Transient Data Interface,
the Power Supply installed in the lower slot, or
the Power Supply installed in the upper slot.
Pass Main Board +5V-AB(Pass Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies):
Event Number: 105
-
Fail Main Board +15V-A(Fail Main Board +15V - upper Power Supply):
Event Number: 106
components is faulty
-
Pass Main Board +15V-A(Pass Main Board +15V - upper Power Supply):
Event Number: 107
-
Fail Main Board +15V-B(Fail Main Board +15V - lower Power Supply):
Event Number: 108
-
the Power Supply installed in the lower slot.
51
Pass Main Board +15V-B(Pass Main Board +15V - lower Power Supply):
Event Number: 109
-
* Fail Main Board +15V-AB(Fail Main Board +15V - upper and lower
Power Supplies):
Event Number: 110
-
Pass Main Board +15V-AB(Pass Main Board +15V - upper and lower
Power Supplies):
Event Number: 111
-
Fail Main Board +3V-AB(Pass Main Board +3V - upper and lower Power
Supplies):
Event Number: 162
52
Pass Main Board +3V-AB(Pass Main Board +3V - upper and lower Power
Supplies):
Event Number: 163
-
Fail Main Board +2.5V-AB(Pass Main Board +2.5V - upper and lower
Power Supplies):
Event Number: 164
-
Pass Main Board +2.5V-AB(Pass Main Board +2.5V - upper and lower
Power Supplies):
Event Number: 165
-
53
Fail Low Rough Supply A(Fail Main Board Rough Supply- upper Power
Supply):
Event Number: 174
-
Fail Low Rough Supply B(Fail Main Board Rough Supply- lower Power
Supply):
Event Number: 175
-
Pass Low Rough Supply A(Pass Main Board Rough Supply- upper
Power Supply):
Event Number: 176
-
Pass Low Rough Supply B(Fail Main Board Rough Supply- lower Power
Supply):
Event Number: 177
54
Device Configured :
Event Number: 300
Configuration Failure :
Event Number: 301
Action:Replace the Transient Data Interface immediately.
Configuration Failure:
Event Number: 301
Action:Download a new configuration to the Transient Data Interface. If
the problem still exists, replace the Transient Data Interface as soon as
possible.
Module Entered Cfg Mode(Module Entered Configuration Mode):
Event Number: 302
Software Switches Reset :
Event Number: 305
Action:Download the software switches to the Transient Data Interface. If
the software switches are not correct, replace the Transient Data Interface
as soon as possible.
Init Real Time Clock(Initialize Real Time Clock):
Event Number: 306
Action:Replace the Real-Time Clock component in the Transient Data
Interface as soon as possible.
Monitor TMR PPL Failed(Monitor TMR Proportional value Failed):
Event Number: 310
Action:Replace the monitor installed in the slot as soon as possible.
55
Monitor TMR PPL Passed(Monitor TMR Proportional value Passed):

Event Number: 311
Action:Replace the monitor installed in the slot as soon as possible.
TMR Hw Settings Conflict:
Event Number: 313
Action:Check the following:
If configured for TMR there must be two power supplies in the rack.
The jumper on the backplane must be set to the lower position.
TMR Sw Config Conflict:
Event Number: 314
Event Classification:
Action:
Module Reboot:
Event Number: 320
Module Removed from Rack:
Event Number: 325
Module Inserted in Rack:
Event Number: 326
Supply OK/Installed:
Event Number: 330
Action:Determine if a power supply has been installed. Verify that there is
not a problem with the power source. If there are no problems with the
power source, replace the power supply as soon as possible.
56
Supply Faulted/Removed :
Event Number: 331
Action:Determine if a power supply has been removed. Verify that there is
not a problem with the power source. If there are no problems with the
power source, replace the power supply as soon as possible.
Rack/TDI Powered Down(Rack or Transient Data Interface Powered
Down):
Event Number: 340
Rack/TDI Powered Up(Rack or Transient Data Interface Powered Up):
Event Number: 341
Modem Reinitialized:
Event Number: 350
Device Events Lost:
Event Number: 355
Device Alarms Lost:
Event Number: 356
Rack Time Changed:
Event Number: 360
57
Module Entered Calibr.(Module Entered Calibration Mode):

Event Number: 365
Module Exited Calibr.(Module Exited Calibration Mode):
Event Number: 366
Config Password Changed(Configuration Password Changed):
Event Number: 400
Connect Password Changed:
Event Number: 401
Incompatible Backplane:
Event Number: 402
Action: Change the TDIs configuration to match the rack.
Loopback Test Failed:
Event Number: 403
Action: Replace the TDI module.
Management Test Failed:
Event Number: 404
Action: Replace TDI module
58
Manage Password Changed:

Event Number: 411
Action:No action required
7.4
Management System Event List Messages

This section describes the System Events returned by the management
portion of the TDI. The format of the messages is the same as those used for
System Events. The events listed here will not effect the operation of the
protection system, but may effect data collection and transmission of the data
to System 1.
Speed DSP Faliure.:
Event Number: 1000
Action:Replace TDI Module.
DSP Code Set Missing.:
Event Number: 1001
Action:Download DSP Code.
Management KPH Faulted:
Event Number: 1002
Action:Check Keyphasor signal.
Management KPH Reassigned:
Event Number: 1003
Management KPH Acquired:
Event Number: 1004
7.4 Management System Event List Messages
59
Clctn Group Enter Transient (Collection Group Entered into Transient

Mode):
Event Number: 1006
Clctn Group Exit Transient (Collection Group Exited from Transient
Mode):
Event Number: 1007
Management Sys. Halted:
Event Number: 1008
Action:If the event occurred when started System 1 DAQ or changing TDIs
configuration no action is required. If it occurs otherwise then replace TDI.
Management Sys. Online:
Event Number: 1009
Action:If the event occurred when started System 1 DAQ, changing TDIs
configuration or during module power up no action is required. If it occurs
otherwise then replace TDI.
Management Cfg. Failure:
Event Number: 1010
Action:Restart System 1 DAQ, if the problem persists then replace TDI.
Fixed HW/FW Cfg. Failure:
Event Number: 1011
Action:Restart System 1 DAQ, if the problem persists then replace TDI.
Management Configured:
Event Number: 1012
60
DSP Code Downloaded:

Event Number: 1013
Fixed HW/FW Configured:
Event Number: 1014
TDI IP Address Changed:
Event Number: 1015
TDI Gateway Add. Change:
Event Number: 1016
TDI Network Name Change:
Event Number: 1017
Invalid Mngmnt Mon Rev:
Event Number: 1018
Action:Determine which M series monitor does not meet the
requirements for TDI: PWA revision of G or higher; or Mod 162183.
Replace the monitor.
Invalid rack address:
Event Number: 1019
Action:The rack address has been set to 0 change it to another address.
61
7.5
Alarm Event List Messages

The following Alarm Event List Messages are returned by the different module
types installed in the 3500 rack.
Communication
Gateway Module
Entered not OK
Module went not OK
Left not OK
Module returned to the OK state
Keyphasor Module
When the message will occur
Entered not OK
Module went not OK
Left not OK
Monitor Module
Enter Alert/Alarm 1
A static data value in the channel has entered Alert / Alarm 1

and changed the channel Alert / Alarm 1 status
Left Alert/ Alarm 1
A static data value in the channel has left Alert / Alarm 1 and
changed the channel Alert / Alarm 1 status
Enter Danger/Alarm 2
A static data value in the channel has entered Danger /

Alarm 2 and changed the channel Danger / Alarm 2 status
Left Danger/Alarm 2
A static data value in the channel has left Danger / Alarm 2

and changed the channel Danger / Alarm 2 status
Enter not OK
module went not OK
Left not OK
module returned to the OK state
Transient Data Interface
62
Entered not OK
Module went not OK
Left not OK
7.5 Alarm Event List Messages
Relay Module
Entered not OK
Module went not OK
Left not OK
Relay Activated
Condition for driving the relay channel met
Relay Deactivated
Condition for driving the relay channel is not met anymore
63
8.1
List of Options and Part Numbers
8.1.1
3500/22M TDI Module and I/O

3500/22-AXX-BXX-CXX
A: Transient Data
Interface Type
01
Standard (Use for standard monitoring

applications)
02
TMR (Use only for applications that requires

a Triple Modular Redundant Configuration)
01
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet I/O Module
02
100 Base-FX (Fiber Optic) Ethernet I/O

Module
00
None
01
CSA/NRTL/C
B: I/O Module Type
C: Agency Approval
Option
8.1.2
3500/22M Dynamic Data Enabling Disk

This disk is used to enable the number of channels of dynamic data that the
TDI will support; dynamic data refers to the ability to collect waveforms. There
are two levels of dynamic data: Steady-State points are channels that collect
waveform data either due to a software command or due to an alarm event,
and therefore support current values, scheduled waveform capture and alarm
data capture. Transient points provide all the function of a Steady-State point
with the additional capabilities of waveform collection due to parameter variations such as machine speed.
3500/09-AXXX-BXXX
A: Steady-State Points
0 to 672
B: Transient Points
0 to 672
64
8.1 List of Options and Part Numbers
Note:
The sum of the two fields must be equal or less than
672. One disk can support multiple TDIs.
8.2
Accessories
8.2.1
Host Computer to 3500 Rack Cable, RS232

130118 -AXXXX-BXX
A: Cable Length
0010
10 feet (3 metres)
0025
25 feet (7.5 metres)
0050
50 feet (15 metres)
0100
B: Assembly
Instructions
8.2.2
01
Not Assembled
02
Assembled
Ethernet Cables:
Standard 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Shielded Category 5 Cable with RJ-45 connectors (solid conductor)
138131-AXXX
A: Cable Length
8.2 Accessories
006
6 feet (1.8 m)
010
10 feet (3.0 m)
025
25 feet (7.6 m)
040
40 feet (12.2 m)
050
50 feet (15.2 m)
075
75 feet (22.9 m)
085
85 feet (25.9 m)
100
100 feet (30.5 m)
120
120 feet (36.6 m)
150
150 feet (45.7 m)
200
200 feet (61.0 m)
250
250 feet (76.2 m)
65
320
320 feet (97.5 m)
Note:
Standard lengths for 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX cabling
are shown above. Specific lengths can be ordered
within the dimensions shown below. Contact your
Bently Nevada solution specialist for assistance.
30 ft. 100 ft. in 5 ft increments only
100 Base-FX Fiber Optic Cable with MT-RJ connectors.
161756-AXXX
A: Length (in ft.) up to
1300 ft (400 m) in
length
8.2.3
66
Spares
138607-01 :
Standard Transient Data Interface Module
138607-02 :
TMR Transient Data Interface Module
146031-01 :
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX I/O Module
146031-02 :
100 Base-FX (Fiber Optic) I/O Module.
147364-01 :
3500 Buffered Signal Output Module.
161580-01 :
3500/22M TDI Operation and Maintenance Manual
00580441 :
Connector Header, Internal Termination, 3-Position, Green
00580436 :
Connector Header, Internal Termination, 6-Position, Green
8.2 Accessories
Section 9 -- 3500/22M Specifications
9
9.1
3500/22M Specifications
Inputs
Power
Consumption:
10.5 Watts
Data:
9.2
Front panel:
115.2 k baud maximum RS232 serial communications
10 Base-T/100 BaseTX I/O:
10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX Ethernet, auto-sensing.
100 Base-FX I/O:
100 Base-FX Fiber-Optic Ethernet
Outputs
Front Panel LEDs:
OK LED:
Indicates when the 3500/22M is operating properly.
TX/RX LED:
Indicates when the 3500/22M is communicating with other

modules in the 3500 rack.
TM LED:
Indicates when the 3500 rack is in Trip Multiply mode.
CONFIG OK LED:
Indicates that the 3500 rack has a valid configuration
I/O Module OK
Relay:
OK Relay:
Normally closed
contacts:
9.1 Inputs
Relay to indicate when the 3500 rack is operating normally

or when a fault has been detected within the rack. User can
select either an OPEN or CLOSED contact to annunciate a NOT OK condition. This relay always operates as
Normally Energized.
Rated to 5A @ 24 Vdc/ 120 Vac, 120 Watts/600 VA
Switched Power.
Arc suppressors are provided.
67
9.3
Controls
Front Panel:
Rack reset button:
Clears latched alarms and Timed OK Channel Defeat in the

rack. Performs same function as Rack Reset contact on I/
O module.
Address switch:
Used to set the rack address; 127 possible addresses.
Configuration Keylock:
Used to place 3500 rack in either RUN mode or PROGRAM mode. RUN mode allows for normal operation of
the rack and locks out configuration changes. PROGRAM
mode allows for normal operation of the rack and also
allows for local or remote rack configuration. The key can
be removed from rack in either position, allowing switch to
remain in either RUN or PROGRAM positions. Locking
switch in the RUN position allows you to restrict unauthorized rack reconfiguration. Locking switch in PROGRAM
position allows remote configuration of a rack at any time.
I/O Module System Contacts:

Trip Multiply:
Description:
Used to place 3500 rack in Trip Multiply.
Maximum Current:
<1 mA dc, Dry Contact to Common.
Alarm Inhibit:
Description:
Used to inhibit all alarms in the 3500 rack.
Maximum Current:
Rack Reset:
9.4
Description:
Used to clear latched alarms and Timed OK Channel

Defeat.
Maximum Current:
Data Collection
Keyphasor Inputs:
68
Supports the four 3500 system Keyphasors. The speed

range support is based on the number of dynamic channels enabled:
9.3 Controls
Number of Channels
Minimum Speed
Maximum Speed
1 to 16
1 rpm
100,000 rpm
17 to 24
1 rpm
60,000 rpm
25 to 48
1 rpm
30,000 rpm
Supports multiple event per revolution speed inputs up to

20k Hz.
Startup/Coastdown
Data:
Data collected from speed and time intervals.

Increasing and decreasing speed interval independently
programmable.
Initiation of transient data collection based on detecting
the machine speed within one of two programmable windows.
The number of transient events that can be collected is
only limited by the available memory in the module.
Alarm Data
Collection:
Pre and post alarm data

1 sec static values collected for 10 minutes before the
event and 1 minute after the event.
100 msec static values collected for 20 seconds before
the event and 10 seconds after the event.
2.5 minutes of waveform data at 10 second intervals
before the alarm and 1 minute collected at 10 second
intervals after the alarm.
Static Values Data:
TDI will collect the static values including the values

measured by the monitors.
TDI provide four nX static values for each point. Amplitude and phase are returned for each of the values.
9.4 Data Collection
69
Waveform
Sampling:
Collection of waveforms for 48 channels

DC Coupled waveforms.
Simultaneous Synchronous and Asynchronous data sampled during all operational modes.
User configurable Synchronous waveform sampling
rates:
- 1024 samples/rev for 2 revolutions,
- 32 samples/rev for 64 revolutions, and
- 16 samples/rev for 128 revolutions.
Asynchronous data sampled to support an 800-line Spectrum at the following frequency spans:
- 10 Hz,
- 20 Hz,
- 50 Hz,
- 100 Hz,
- 200 Hz,
- 500 Hz,
- 1000 Hz,
- 2000 Hz,
- 5000 Hz,
- 10 k Hz,
- 20 k Hz, and
- 30 k Hz.
Asynchronous data is anti-alias filtered.
Channel Pairs for providing Orbit or synchronous full
spectrum presentations can be split among multiple monitors. For asynchronous full spectrums the channels must
be within a monitor channel pair (30k Hz frequency span
data will not be phase correlated between channel pairs).
70
9.4 Data Collection
9.5
Communications
Protocols:
BN Host Protocol:
Communication with 3500 Configuration Software and 3500

Data Acquisition and Display Software.
BN TDI Protocol:
Communication with Bently Nevada System 1 Asset Management and Data Collection Software.
Front Panel:
Communications:
RS232
Protocol Supported:
BN Host Protocol.
Baud Rate:
115.2 k baud maximum (auto baud capable).
Cable Length:
30 meters (100 feet) maximum.
Connector:
9 Pin D-Sub.
10 Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet I/O:

Connection:
Ethernet, 10 Base-T and 100 Base-TX. Conforms to

IEEE802.3
Protocol Supported:
BN Host Protocol & BN TDI Protocol using Ethernet TCP/IP.
Connection:
RJ-45 (telephone jack style) for 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX

Ethernet cabling.
Cable Length:
100 meters (328 feet) maximum.
100 Base-FX Ethernet I/O:

Communications:
Ethernet, 100 Base-FX Fiber Optic. Conforms to

IEEE802.3u.
Protocol Supported:
BN Host Protocol & BN TDI Protocol using Ethernet TCP/IP.
Connection:
MT-RJ Fiber Optic connecter for 100 Base-FX cabling.
Cable Length:
400 meters (1312 feet) maximum, multimode fiber optic

cable.
9.5 Communications
71
9.6
Environmental Limits
TDI Module, 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX I/O, and 100 Base-FX
I/O:
Operating
Temperature:
-30C to +65C (-22F to +150F).
Storage Temperature:
-40C to +85C (-40F to +185F).
Humidity:
95%, non-condensing.
Battery Life:
9.7
Powered TDI:
38 years @ 50C.
Un-powered TDI:
12 years @ 50C.
CE Mark Directives
EMC Directives:
Certificate of
Conformity:
136669
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN 61000-6-2:
72
Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
9.6 Environmental Limits
Power Supply Dip:
CE Mark Low Voltage Directives:
9.8
Certificate of
Conformity:
134036
EN 61010-1:
Safety Requirements
Hazardous Area Approvals

CSA/NRTL/C:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A through D, T4@ Ta=65.

Certification Number BN26744C-18
9.9
Physical
TDI Module:
Dimensions (Height x
Width x Depth):
Weight:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 241.8 mm (9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52

in).
0.91 kg (2.0 lbs.).
I/O Modules :
Width x Depth):
Weight:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm (9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90

in).
0.20 kg (0.44 lb.).
Rack Space Requirements:

TDI Module:
1 full-height front slot.
I/O Modules:
1 full-height rear slot.
9.8 Hazardous Area Approvals
73
74
9.9 Physical
Part No. 129770-01

Revision M, June 2005
3500/25 ENHANCED
KEYPHASOR MODULE
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Copyright 2003 Bently Nevada LLC

Trademarks
The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada LLC in the United States and other
countries:
Xlerometer
The Bently Nevada LLC Orbit Design is a trademark of
Bently Nevada LLC in the United States and other
countries.

The following means of contacting Bently Nevada LLC are provided for those times when
you cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address
Telephone
Fax
Internet

Minden, NV 89423
USA
1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
1 775 782 9259
www.bently.com
NOTE:
This manual does not contain all the information required to operate and
maintain the 3500/25 Keyphasor Module. Refer to the following manuals
instructions for installing and removing the module from a 3500 Rack
iii
iv
Contents
1
Receiving and Handling Instructions......................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Receiving Inspection.................................................................................................. 1
Handling and Storage Considerations ....................................................................... 1
Disposal Statement ................................................................................................... 1
General Information .................................................................... 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.6
Module Compatibility ................................................................................................. 3

Expanded Signal Processing Capability..................................................................... 3
Paired Keyphasor Capability...................................................................................... 4
Special Considerations: ......................................................................................... 6
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description............................................................ 6
Available Data ........................................................................................................... 6
Statuses................................................................................................................. 7
LED Descriptions....................................................................................................... 9
Configuration Information ........................................................ 10
3.1
Hardware Considerations ........................................................................................ 10
3.1.1
Paired Keyphasor Hardware Considerations........................................................ 10
3.2
Software Configuration Considerations.................................................................... 10
3.2.1
Keyphasor Module / 3500 Monitor Configuration Interaction ................................ 10
3.2.2
Signal Paths And Signal Options ......................................................................... 11
3.2.3
Event Setup Options ............................................................................................ 11
3.2.4
Keyphasor Signal Rate Division By 3500 Monitors............................................... 12
3.2.5
Restrictions On Absolute Phase Information Availability ...................................... 12
3.2.6
Phase Accuracy Limitations Of Processed Signals .............................................. 13
3.2.7
Limitations When Specifying An "Event Ratio" Event Setup................................. 14
3.3
Software Configuration Options............................................................................... 15
3.3.1
Keyphasor Module Configuration Options ............................................................ 15
3.3.2
Keyphasor Module Configuration Screen, Example 1 .......................................... 21
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
Paired Keyphasor Configuration .......................................................................... 25
3.3.7
Paired Keyphasor Configuration Screen Example 1............................................. 26
3.3.8
Paired Keyphasor Configuration Screen Example 2............................................. 26
3.3.9
Software Switches................................................................................................ 27
3.3.10 Software Switch Options ...................................................................................... 28
Keyphasor I/O Module Descriptions ........................................ 29
4.1
Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules........................................................... 30
4.1.1
Non-Isolated Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module .................................... 30
4.1.2
Isolated Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module............................................ 31
4.1.3
Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module................................. 32
4.1.4
Euro Style Connectors ......................................................................................... 33
4.2
External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules.......................................................... 34
4.2.1
Non-Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module................................... 34
4.2.2
Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module .......................................... 35
4.2.3
External Termination Blocks................................................................................. 36
v
4.2.4
External Termination Block Cable Signal Pin Outs ............................................... 38
Maintenance............................................................................... 39
5.1
Verifying Keyphasor Module Operation .................................................................... 39
5.1.1
Choosing A Maintenance Interval ......................................................................... 39
5.1.2
Required Verification Test Equipment .................................................................. 39
5.1.3
Typical Verification Test Setup ............................................................................. 40
5.1.4
Using Rack Configuration Software For Verification Testing ................................ 42
5.1.5
Procedure For Verifying Keyphasor Module Channels ......................................... 43
5.1.6
If A Channel Fails A Verification Test ................................................................... 46
5.2
Performing Firmware Replacement / Upgrade ......................................................... 47
5.2.1
Determine The Firmware Replacement Process To Use ...................................... 47
5.2.2
Replace The Firmware IC..................................................................................... 47
5.2.3
Firmware Download Via Rack Configuration Software.......................................... 52
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 54
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.4
6.4.1
Self-Test .................................................................................................................. 54
LED States............................................................................................................... 55
System Event List Messages ................................................................................... 55
List Of System Event List Messages .................................................................... 56
Alarm Event List Messages...................................................................................... 63
List Of Alarm Event List Messages ....................................................................... 63
Ordering Information................................................................. 64
Specifications ............................................................................ 66
vi
1
1.1

apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada LLC.
1.2
Handling and Storage Considerations

order given.
Application Alert
Machinery protection
may be lost when this
module is removed
from the rack.
1.3

Disposal Statement
States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada LLC is
not responsible for disposal of product at the end of its life or at the end of its
use.
General Information
The 3500/25 Enhanced Keyphasor Module is a half-height, two-channel module
used to provide Keyphasor signals to the Monitor modules in a 3500 Rack. The
Keyphasor module receives analog input signals from proximity probes or
magnetic pickups and converts them to conditioned digital signals that indicate
when the Keyphasor mark on the shaft is in line with the probe. The 3500
Monitoring System can accept four such Keyphasor signals, which are used by
3500 Monitoring System modules and external diagnostic equipment to measure
vector parameters such as 1X amplitude and phase.
A 3500 Rack may have one or two Keyphasor Main Modules in a normal
configuration, three or four Keyphasor Main Modules for a paired keyphasor
configuration, and one of five types of Keyphasor I/O Modules installed.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Keyphasor Main Module (front panel buffered output connectors indicated)

Keyphasor I/O Module, with Isolated Internal Terminations
Keyphasor I/O Module, with Isolated External Terminations
Keyphasor I/O Module, with Non-Isolated Internal Terminations
Keyphasor I/O Module, with Non-Isolated External Terminations
Keyphasor I/O Module, with Barriers (Non-Isolated, Internal Terminations)
Views of the Keyphasor Main Module and
Keyphasor I/O Module Components
2.1
Module Compatibility
The 3500/25 Enhanced Keyphasor Main Module is an upgraded version of the
original 3500/25 Keyphasor Main Module. It offers enhanced signal processing
capabilities while maintaining complete downward-compatibility with the original
Keyphasor Main Module and all Keyphasor I/O Modules for use in legacy
systems. The form, fit and function of the two modules are essentially identical,
with the additional enhanced features incorporated into the internal design of the
new module. The enhanced features are accessible with upgraded Rack
Configuration software.
Throughout this manual, the term "Keyphasor Module" refers interchangeably to
both the original Keyphasor Main Module, PWA 125792-01, and the Enhanced
Keyphasor Main Module, PWA 149369-01. The physical and mechanical
characteristics of these two main modules, including product labeling, are
identical. The interface to the 3500 Rack remains unchanged. As well, each of
the various Keyphasor I/O Modules remain unchanged. The full name,
"Enhanced Keyphasor Module", is used in those circumstances where the
unique, enhanced signal processing capability of the new module is being
referenced.
2.2
Expanded Signal Processing Capability

The Enhanced Keyphasor Module expands on the original design by using a
digital signal processor (DSP) to optionally generate an arbitrary number of
output Keyphasor events in proportion to the number of input events. The
generated output rate may be greater than or less than the input rate and is not
limited to a small range of integral event ratios. Virtually any practical real
numbered ratio of input events to output events may be programmed into the
module, independently for each of two channels.
There are two types of Keyphasor signals available from an Enhanced
Keyphasor Module. These may be selected on a per-channel basis, and further
selected individually for routing to the Monitor modules in a 3500 Rack and to the
buffered outputs. The two types are referred to as "Processed" and "NonProcessed" signals.
Processed signals are those that have undergone a change in frequency, from
the input transducer signal to the output conditioned Keyphasor signal. This
type of signal is only available from an Enhanced Keyphasor Module, and is only
available for certain configuration options as detailed in Section 3.
Non-Processed signals are those that have not undergone a change in
frequency, from the input transducer signal to the output conditioned Keyphasor
signal. This is the only type of signal that is produced by the original design
Keyphasor Module.
2.3
Paired Keyphasor Capability

P/N 149369-01 Keyphasor Modules that are revision C or newer have additional
circuitry that was not on previous revisions. This circuitry provides the customer
with Paired Keyphasor capability.
Paired Keyphasor Capability is meant to be used by customers who have speed
input sets to be used as a primary and a backup speed signal entering the
Keyphasor Module. The Keyphasor Module then determines which signal in
each set will be transmitted down the backplane and passed to monitors in the
3500 rack. Only one of the two signals being input to each Keyphasor module
will be transmitted to the rest of the 3500 system. It should be noted that
although only one signal will be output from the Keyphasor module to the 3500
system, both channels will be monitored continuously.
In a Paired Keyphasor application, the customer will be able to insert four halfheight keyphasor modules, which would allow them to have up to eight
Keyphasor input module signals at one time. The four Keyphasor modules can
be placed anywhere in the rack except for the slots designated for the RIM and
the Power Supplies. The Keyphasor modules must be placed in adjacent slots
with two modules on top and two on the bottom half of the rack.
The 3500 system backplane only has the ability to accept four speed input
signals. Therefore, during Paired Keyphasor operation each of the four
Keyphasor modules will drive one backplane trace with one of the two input
signals received. The signal placed on the backplane is based upon by the
module configuration and the status of each Keyphasor channel.
The Keyphasor module must avoid conflicts or contention on the four system
Keyphasor lines when it switches from primary to the backup input signals. To
accomplish this, the Keyphasor module performs a test checking to see if the
system line is being driven by another module previous to actively driving the line
itself. This test for conflicts will be done on power up or whenever Keyphasor
signals are switched.
If a backplane drive conflict is detected, the module will behave in a manner
consistent with reporting a fatal error, e.g. upon detection of an invalid
configuration or fatal node voltage error. This has the effect of disabling the
primary function and rendering the Module OK status as NOT OK. In cases
where this is brought on simply by invalid module configurations, and not
hardware malfunctions, recovery can be accomplished by downloading valid
configuration(s) to the one or more 3500 modules in the rack causing, or
affected by this condition. In cases where a hardware failure is causing the
situation, replacing the offending module(s), followed by a valid configuration
download to the 3500 rack should resolve the problem.
To determine which input signal will be transmitted to the 3500 system during
Paired Keyphasor operation, the Keyphasor module takes the following into
consideration:

If an input channel is Not Active, it can be considered to be non-existent,

so it cannot source the output.
If an input channel is in Bypass, it can be considered to be temporarily
non-existent while Bypass is active, so it cannot source the output. Note
that Threshold Adjust mode overrides Bypass and makes a channel act
as if it is not in Bypass. Only one channel at a time can be in Threshold
Adjust mode.
If the Primary input channel is Active, and not in Bypass, and its OK state
is Valid, the Primary input channel will source the output; -or- If the
Primary input channel is Active, and not in Bypass, and the Backup input
channel is either Not Active or is in Bypass, the Primary input channel will
source the output.
If the Backup input channel is Active, and not in Bypass, and the Primary
input is not sourcing per the previous bullet, then the Backup input
channel will source the output.
If neither the primary nor the backup input signals are being used to drive
the system Keyphasor lines, then the output will not be driven (i.e., it will
be tri-stated to high impedance).
The following table explains the possible circumstances and what outputs will be
sent to the system:
Case
Primary
Active
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Primary
Threshold
Adjust
X
X
X
X
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Paired Keyphasor Output Table

Primary Primary Backup
Backup
Bypass
Valid
Active
Threshold
Adjust
X
X
No
X
X
X
Yes
No
X
X
Yes
Yes
X
X
Yes
No
Yes
X
No
X
Yes
X
Yes
No
Yes
X
Yes
Yes
Yes
X
Yes
No
X
Yes
X
X
X
No
No
X
X
No
Yes
No
X
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
X
X
No
No
No
X
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Backup
Bypass
Backup
Valid
X
No
X
Yes
X
No
X
Yes
X
X
No
Yes
X
X
No
X
Yes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Output
Chann
el
High-Z
Backup
Backup
High-Z
High-Z
Backup
Backup
High-Z
Primary
Primary
Backup
Primary
Primary
Primary
Backup
Backup
Primary
2.3.1
Special Considerations:
The following considerations should be taken into account when using the Paired
Keyphasor Capability:
2.4
Following a transition from a Primary to a Backup Keyphasor signal, or a

switch from Backup to Primary, there will be a period in which the
Keyphasor signal is likely to be invalid on the system line that is being
switched. Because the Primary and the Backup signals may closely
resemble each other, it is possible that a monitor will not detect a switch
from Primary to Backup. The result of this is that monitors will not be
able to always detect that the phase has potentially become invalid. So in
the end, unless both the Primary and Backup signal sources can provide
absolute phase information, the validity of the phase information from a
given Primary/Backup signal pair cannot be guaranteed.
Due to the inability of the monitors to detect a switch of Keyphasor
signals, additional system events have been created to inform the user
that these switches have occurred. System Event numbers 494 through
496 were created.
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description

When a system Keyphasor signal input is required for TMR applications, the
3500 should be equipped with two Keyphasor Modules. In this application, the
modules work in parallel to provide both a primary and secondary Keyphasor
signal to the other modules in the rack.
When used in a TMR application, Keyphasor transducers may be connected to
the 3500 Rack in two ways:
Redundant Keyphasor Transducers
Two independent Keyphasor transducers are at each measurement location.
This configuration provides for both primary and secondary inputs and is the
most fault tolerant and reliable configuration. In this configuration, the primary
and secondary inputs will be connected to independent Keyphasor Modules.
Single Keyphasor Transducers
This configuration requires only a single Keyphasor transducer. The signal from
this transducer is wired to provide input to both Keyphasor Modules.
When used in a TMR application, only two speed measurement locations can be
supported.
2.5
Available Data
The Keyphasor Module returns the machine speed in RPM, measured from each
Keyphasor transducer. The RPM reading is the primary value and is used by the
Communication Gateway Module and the Rack Interface Module. The
Keyphasor Module also returns both module and channel statuses.
2.5.1
Statuses
This section describes the available statuses and where they can be found.
MODULE STATUS
OK
This indicates if the Keyphasor Module is functioning correctly. A Not OK
Slot ID Failure
If the Module OK status goes Not OK, then the system OK Relay on the
Rack Interface I/O Module will be driven Not OK.
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the Keyphasor Module configuration is invalid.
Bypass
This indicates if the Keyphasor Module has been bypassed. Any of the
following conditions can cause the Keyphasor Module to be bypassed:
Keyphasor Module has never been configured
Keyphasor Module is in configuration mode
Fatal error was found during self-test
A channel has an invalid configuration
Any active channel is bypassed
CHANNEL STATUS
OK
This indicates whether or not a fault has been detected on the channel. The
following will cause a Channel Not OK status AND a Module Not OK status:
Bypass is active on the channel
Slot ID Failure
The following will cause only a Channel Not OK status and will NOT cause
the System OK Relay on the Rack Interface I/O Module to be driven:
Keyphasor Signal less than 1 RPM
Keyphasor Signal greater than 99,999 RPM
Keyphasor Signal has a 50% or greater Change in Period
Keyphasor Transducer Failure
Keyphasor Signal greater than 20 kHz
Bypass
This indicates if the associated Keyphasor Module channel has been
bypassed. Any of the following conditions can cause a channel to be
bypassed:
Keyphasor Module has never been configured
Keyphasor Module is in configuration mode
Fatal Error was found during self-test
Off
This indicates whether the channel has been turned off. The Keyphasor
channels may be turned off (inactivated) using the Rack Configuration
software.
Statuses
Module OK
Communication
Gateway
Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Module Configuration
Fault
Module Bypass
Operator
Display
Software
Channel OK
Channel Bypass
Channel Off
2.6
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the Keyphasor Module indicate the operating
status of the module as shown in the following figure. Refer to Section 6.2 for all
of the available LED conditions.
1) OK
Indicates that the Keyphasor Module
and the Keyphasor I/O Module are
operating correctly.
2) TX/RX
Indicates communication between
the Keyphasor Module and the Rack
Interface Module as messages are
transmitted and received.
This section describes how the 3500/25 Keyphasor Module is configured using
the Rack Configuration software. It also describes configuration restrictions
associated with this module. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack
Configuration and Utilities Guide and the Rack Configuration software for details
on how to operate the software.
3.1
Hardware Considerations
The slots in the rack are numbered from 0 to 15, counting from left to right. The
power supplies go into slot 0 and the Rack Interface Module goes into slot 1.
Slots 2 through 15 are called monitoring positions. The 3500/25 Keyphasor
Module can be installed into any of the monitoring positions. However, if the
3500/20 Rack Interface Module and Data Manager I/O are to be used to
interface to DDIX, TDIX or TDXnet, refer to the manual on the 3500/20 for slot
restrictions this may place on your configuration.
3.1.1
Paired Keyphasor Hardware Considerations

In a paired keyphasor application the customer will be able to insert up to four
half height keyphasor modules which would allow them to have up to eight
Keyphasor module input signals at one time. The four keyphasor modules can
be placed anywhere in the rack besides the slots designated for the RIM and the
Power Supplies. The Keyphasor modules must however be placed in adjacent
slots with two modules on the top half and two on the bottom half of the rack.
*When using the 3500/25 in a Paired Keyphasor application, the following
modules must have the listed, or more recent firmware:
Management 4 Channel Monitors (PWA 140734-XX): Firmware rev 2.30
3500/22 Transient Data Interface (PWA 1388607-XX): Firmware rev 1.20
3.2
Software Configuration Considerations

The Keyphasor Module configuration options are for the most part, very
straightforward; however, the increased signal processing options warrant a
discussion of some configuration considerations that should be taken into
account. This section covers those items and also introduces some new terms
used in the Enhanced Keyphasor Module configuration.
3.2.1
Keyphasor Module / 3500 Monitor Configuration Interaction

Keyphasor probe orientation and Event Setup configuration parameters are
directly linked to monitor operation in the 3500 Rack. When these parameters
are changed, the configuration of the monitors which are associated with the
changed Keyphasor channels, must also be downloaded (or re-downloaded) to
the 3500 Rack. The Rack Configuration software displays messages and
confirmation dialog boxes to assist in the proper selection of affected monitors
for configuration downloading as appropriate.
10
3.2.2
Signal Paths And Signal Options

There is an important distinction to be made between the Rack Signal and
Buffered Output signal paths, and the selection of Processed and NonProcessed signals one wishes to place on them. These terms are defined here.
The Rack Signal path is that Keyphasor signal path which runs down the 3500
System Backplane, for use by monitors in the rack.
The Buffered Output path is that Keyphasor signal path which runs to the front
panel BNC connectors and to the Keyphasor I/O Module Buffered Output
terminals.
The Buffered Output signal paths have no bearing on how monitors in the rack
handle Keyphasor signals, as the monitors do not operate on the Buffered
Output signals. The selection of the signal type put on the Rack Signal path
does however, affect monitor operation as described herein.
Non-Processed signals are simply those that have not undergone a change in
frequency, from the input transducer signal to the output conditioned signal.
Processed signals are those that have undergone such a change. They may be
at a rate higher or lower in frequency than the input transducer signal with which
they are derived.
The effect of using Processed vs. Non-Processed signals can be illustrated by
considering that, if an identical, 100 RPM test signal were applied to the inputs of
two Enhanced Keyphasor Module channels, with the Event Ratio for Channel 1
specified to be 0.5, and that for Channel 2 specified to be 2.0, then the
Processed signal output on Channel 1 would be at 200 RPM, while that for
Channel 2 would be at 50 RPM, and the Non-Processed signal on either
channel, if selected, would show an output signal at 100 RPM.
The Keyphasor signals generated by the original Keyphasor Module are always
of the Non-Processed type. The Enhanced Keyphasor Module is capable of
producing both Non-Processed and Processed signals.
3.2.3
Event Setup Options

The expanded signal processing capabilities of the Enhanced Keyphasor Module
leads to the introduction of a new configuration parameter known as the Event
Setup. This parameter adds the Event Ratio option to the already existing
configuration options known as Events Per Revolution, or Events Per Rev, and
Recip Multi-Event Wheel. Logically, each of these three mutually-exclusive
options are variations of the same theme, as each describe a number of input
events seen at the Keyphasor probe in relation to a single revolution of some
primary rotor.
The Recip Multi-Event Wheel option is the most specialized of the three, with a
fixed integer relationship of 13 input events per single rotation of the primary
rotor, for reciprocating machine applications. The Events Per Rev option allows
11
for an integer number of input Keyphasor events per single revolution of some
primary rotor, in the range from 1 to 255. The Event Ratio option is the most
flexible, allowing for a practically unlimited range of expression of the number of
input Keyphasor events per single revolution of some primary rotor (or more
generally, the ratio of the number of input events per generated output events),
including fractional numbers. Generally speaking, Processed signals are
synonymous with an Event Ratio Event Setup; whereas Non-Processed signals
usually imply an Events Per Rev or Recip Multi-Event Wheel Event Setup.
To avoid redundant specifications of any particular configuration, the Rack
Configuration software automatically reduces an Event Ratio Event Setup to an
Events Per Rev Event Setup whenever they would be logically equivalent.
3.2.4
Keyphasor Signal Rate Division By 3500 Monitors

Individual monitors in a 3500 Rack are sensitive to the configuration being set up
for Non-Processed Rack Signals, where the Event Setup parameter is
specified to be an integer in the range of 2 to 255. It makes no difference
whether the Event Setup is optioned as Events Per Rev, Event Ratio or Recip
Multi-Event Wheel. For this configuration, the individual monitors configured to
use such a Keyphasor channel will apply internal rate division of the received
Keyphasor pulse train at the individual monitor level. Simply put, individual
monitors divide down the Keyphasor signal they receive from the Rack Signal
path by the integer specified in the Event Setup numeric input field on the
Keyphasor Module configuration screen.
Note that in all cases where a Keyphasor channel is configured to use a
Processed Rack Signal, monitors in the rack configured to use that
channel will not do internal dividing of the Keyphasor signal rate.
This makes sense since the point of using a Processed Rack Signal is to let the
Enhanced Keyphasor Module do the work of modifying the incoming signal rate
to provide monitors with a "once-per-turn" Keyphasor signal.
3.2.5
Restrictions On Absolute Phase Information Availability

One caveat with which to be aware is that absolute phase information is not
available from a monitor channel using a Processed Rack Signal, or when
specifying an Events Per Rev other than one (1). This is because
subsequent to a lost or invalidated Keyphasor input signal, the re-acquisition of
the input signal may or may not correspond with the synchronizing events of past
or future sessions, from run to run. As an illustration, consider that if an n-tooth
gear is used as the input Keyphasor source, then from run to run there is no
guarantee that any one gear tooth or notch will be observed as the
"synchronizing event" during the re-synchronization process. So for this reason,
phase information is disabled (made unavailable and/or marked as invalid),
when using a Processed Rack Signal, or if specifying an Events Per Rev Event
Setup with a value other than 1. The Recip Multi-Event Wheel option is a special
case however, and phase information is retained with this setup. The Rack
Configuration software displays messages and confirmation dialog boxes to
12
assist in the proper identification and selection of such monitors that would be
affected by this constraint.
Note that relative phase (from initial acquisition of the input Keyphasor signal
until loss for whatever reason) is maintained to a fraction of a degree, but
absolute phase cannot be guaranteed.
3.2.6
Phase Accuracy Limitations Of Processed Signals

As with any processed signal system with a finite response time capability, there
are limitations to the precision and accuracy of the generated output Processed
Keyphasor signal in response to the input signal. Both static and dynamic phase
error components should be considered, however small they may be. The
following discussion covers the phase error specifications for static and dynamic
Processed output signals.
The Static Phase Error ("SPE") of the Processed output signal is the long-term
deviation in the output signal while maintaining a constant-speed input signal.
This deviation is due to unavoidable algorithm execution time deviation in
processing asynchronous Keyphasor input events, and limited by the internal
DSP clock rate. Approximately 6 microseconds of fixed, maximum deviation in
the output signal over time is observed. The following table shows some
representative performance numbers for Static Phase Error values that may be
expected at typical output frequencies across the valid range. Note that as the
output frequency decreases, so does the worst-case SPE, in a linear fashion.
Fout
1667 Hz
463 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
RPM/CPM
100,000
27,780
3,600
3,000
SPE
3.60
1.00
0.13
0.11
The Dynamic Phase Error ("DPE") of the Processed output signal is the shortterm deviation in the output signal created in response to a changing-speed
input signal. This deviation is due to several factors. There is an unavoidable
natural response latency in the signal processing algorithms, mostly dictated by
the finite internal DSP clock rate. In addition, the predictive nature of the
algorithms employed tends to improve the response for frequency division
(Event Ratio greater than or equal to 2.0) and degrade the response for
frequency multiplication (Event Ratio less than 2.0). The Event Ratio strongly
affects the dynamic response in a non-linear, natural logarithmic fashion. In
addition to this, an essentially linear response of degrees of phase error per
percent change in the input signal is observed, assuming constant acceleration.
The Specifications section of this manual contains more detailed information
regarding the Static, and Dynamic Phase Error characteristics of the Enhanced
Keyphasor Module in generating Processed signals.
13
3.2.7
Limitations When Specifying An "Event Ratio" Event Setup

The numeric range specified to the left of the data entry field for an Event Ratio
Event Setup is displayed as 0.0000001 to 10000000.0, reflecting the valid range
of numbers with which the Event Ratio may be specified. This range, for all
intents and purposes, should cover any practical user application. The Rack
Configuration software automatically performs limit checking to ensure that only
numbers within the valid range may be entered.
Regardless of the specified Event Ratio, there are frequency limitations on both
the input Keyphasor signal and on generated Processed Rack Signals which,
among other things, affect the Channel and Module OK Statuses. These are
detailed in the Specifications section of this manual.
The Event Ratio may be specified as a positive, real number (integer and/or
fractional number), either less than or greater than unity (1.0). An Event Ratio of
exactly 1.0 is disallowed. Functionally, this can be achieved by specifying the
Event Setup option as Events Per Rev with a value of 1. This reflects the
majority of typical customer applications, and maximum system performance is
achieved with this configuration. This also eliminates what would otherwise be a
redundant means of specifying unity Keyphasor rate processing.
It should be noted that in general, the higher the numeric value of the Event
Ratio, the better the system is able to track the input since it has more
"information" to work with in the form of input pulses; the better to respond to
speed fluctuations or ramping conditions as the input is tracked.
There are a few extra considerations to keep in mind when specifying an Event
Ratio less than two (2.0). The digital signal processing algorithm design uses
two fundamentally different strategies, one for Event Ratios equal to or greater
than 2.0 (which essentially implies frequency division), and the other for Event
Ratios less than 2.0 (which implies frequency multiplication). Algorithm selection
is automatic within the DSP code, based on the programmed Event Ratio for
each channel. The large majority of applications will require dividing-down of the
input signal, with the Event Ratio typically much greater than 2.0. As such, the
DSP code has been optimized to support these applications, leading to an effect
which improves the transient response for frequency division, but degrades it for
frequency multiplication. For this reason, one should not expect any reasonable
transient response to be achieved for Event Ratios approaching or less than 2.0.
There are also two additional side-effects of frequency multiplication processing
that are not present when the Event Ratio is specified as 2.0 or greater. The two
are similar in effect and are due to the limitations inherent in attempting to
generate multiple output pulses in response to a single input pulse (or sequence
of pulses), which is the essence of frequency multiplication. First, there can be a
significant synchronization time required from the time a signal is first applied to
the input to a Keyphasor channel to the time the first Processed Signal output
appears. Generally speaking, the greater the number of significant digits
specified to the right of the decimal point in the fractional Event Ratio, the longer
14
it may take to synchronize to the input and therefore commence generating

output pulses in response. The second effect is that, upon loss of the input
Keyphasor signal, a multiplied output may persist at the programmed rate for
some time after the input stimulus has gone away. These side effects may be
observable for two minutes or more.
3.3

The Keyphasor Module configuration options are discussed in detail in this
section. Following the descriptions of the options, figures are shown depicting
screen views of the 3500 Rack Configuration software. Several examples are
shown to illustrate the various option choices available on the Keyphasor Module
configuration screen. Depending on the numeric values entered for some
configuration parameters, certain options may be restricted, made unavailable,
and/or "force-selected" automatically by the Rack Configuration software.
3.3.1
Keyphasor Module Configuration Options

REFERENCE INFORMATION
These fields are shown at the top of the Configuration Screen and contain
information to indicate the location of the Keyphasor Module in the 3500 Rack,
the type of associated Keyphasor I/O Module, and an optional label to track
configuration setups. The I/O Module parameter must be selected by the
user as part of the configuration setup.
ConfigID
This information field displays an optional identifier of up to six characters,
which if present was entered upon last configuration download to the
module.
Slot
This information field indicates the slot monitoring position of the Keyphasor
Module in the 3500 Rack.
Keyphasor Position
This information field identifies where the Keyphasor Module is physically
located in the 3500 Rack, either in the Upper or Lower slot.
I/O Module
This user-input field specifies the type of interface module used to connect
the transducers to the Keyphasor Main Module. Internal and External
Termination options refer to the wiring points of the transducers, which either
wire directly to the I/O module (Internal type) or to an external termination
block (External type). The Barrier I/O type is offered only as an Internal
Termination type, and does not support the Magnetic Pickup transducer type
option. The Isolated types provide transformer isolation of the input channels
from the rack common and from each other. The available Keyphasor I/O
Module options are as follows:
Keyphasor I/O Module (Internal Termination)
Keyphasor Barrier I/O
Keyphasor I/O Module (External Termination)
15
Isolated Keyphasor I/O (Internal Termination)

Isolated Keyphasor I/O (External Termination)
Output Assignment
This option is only available for paired Keyphasor configuration. Since two
Keyphasors (with a total of 4 outputs) modules must share only two outputs,
each paired Keyphasor can only be configured in a primary/backup manner,
with each module allowed only 1 output assignment. For the module, select
channel 1 or channel 2 to be this assignment. The user must select this
assignment.
Input Assignment
This option is only available for paired Keyphasor configuration. As described
previously, output assignment is restricted to 1 channel only for paired
Keyphasor configurations. The two inputs must be defined as primary &
backup. The choice is channel 1 = Primary / channel 2 = Backup OR channel
2 = Primary / channel 1 = Backup. The user must select this assignment.
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
The two channels of a Keyphasor Module may be configured independent of
each other, per the following configuration options. Channel 1 options are
specified in the left half of the Configuration Screen, below the Reference
Information fields; Channel 2 options are specified in the right half.
Active (Channel Activity)
This check box enables or disables a Keyphasor channel. If no Keyphasor
transducer is connected to this channel, then this box should be unchecked.
Signal Polarity
Notch
Select this option if an output pulse is produced, for use by the monitors, that
is triggered by the leading edge of a negative-going pulse in the input signal.
This type of pulse is produced by a Keyphasor transducer looking at a notch
in the shaft. If a magnetic pickup is used, the Notch/Projection setting should
be set to Notch since in most cases the positive signal portion will be clipped.
Projection
Select this option if an output pulse is produced, for use by the monitors, that
is triggered by the leading edge of a positive-going pulse in the input signal.
This type of pulse is produced by a Keyphasor transducer looking at a
projection on the shaft.
Type (Transducer Type)
Proximitor
Select this option if the Keyphasor signal for this channel is supplied through
a Proximitor-type transducer.
Magnetic
Select this option if the Keyphasor signal for this channel is supplied through
a Magnetic Pickup-type transducer. Magnetic Pickups require a shaft
rotative speed of at least 200 RPM (3.3 Hz).
Buffered Output
16
The Buffered Output signal is routed to the Keyphasor Module front panel
BNC connector and to the Keyphasor I/O Module Buffered Output terminal
for a given channel.
Non-Processed
Select this option if the Buffered Output signal is to be "Non-Processed".
Processed
Select this option if the Buffered Output signal is to be "Processed".
Rack Signal
The Rack Signal is routed down the 3500 System Backplane, for use by
monitors in the rack for a given channel.
Non-Processed
Select this option if the Rack Signal is to be "Non-Processed".
Processed
Select this option if the Rack Signal is to be "Processed".
Hysteresis
The difference between the voltage levels in the input signal where the
Keyphasor pulse turns on and where it turns off. The larger the hysteresis,
the greater the immunity to noise on the input signal.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Analog Input Signal

Digital Output Keyphasor Signal
Threshold
Hysteresis
Threshold
The point where the Keyphasor pulse would turn on and off if the Hysteresis
was zero.
Auto
The trigger threshold is automatically set to a value midway between the
most positive peak and the most negative peak of the input signal. This
tracks changes in the input signal. Auto threshold requires a minimum signal
amplitude of 2 Vpp and a minimum frequency of 120 RPM (2 Hz).
Manual
The trigger threshold may be set manually by the operator to any value in the
range of -20.0 to 0.0 volts.
Adjust
17
This option is made available when Manual Threshold is selected. A dialog

box is displayed to aid in the setting of the Manual Threshold value.
Event Setup
Events Per Rev
This option specifies the number of pulses in a Keyphasor transducer input
signal for each shaft revolution (rotation). If the Keyphasor transducer is
observing a single notch or projection, set the Events Per Rev to 1. If the
Keyphasor transducer is observing a multi-tooth gear, set the Events Per
Rev to the number of teeth on the gear. The available range is 1 to 255.
The following graph and figure shows the maximum settings for Events Per
Rev and depicts typical applications.
(1) RPM
(2) Events Per Revolution
(3) Upper RPM Limit is 99999

(4) Upper Frequency Limit is 20 kHz
Note
Signals from a Keyphasor transducer observing a multi-tooth gear (except for Recip MultiEvent Wheel) can be used for speed measurements only and not for phase measurements.
Events Per Rev typically set to

1 event per revolution
(Phase Available)
18
Events Per Rev typically set to

24 events per revolution
(Phase Unavailable)
Probe A
Probe A
Probe B
Shaft with notch
Probe B
24 tooth gear
19
Recip Multi-Event Wheel

This option specifies the case for reciprocating machines where the
Keyphasor transducer is observing a specially-designed 13-tooth gear with
an inherent, distinguishable once-per-turn event built into the gear design.
Event Ratio
This option specifies the ratio of the number of input pulses to the number of
desired output pulses in a Processed Keyphasor signal. The input pulses
are those received via a Keyphasor transducer observing a shaft or gear.
The output pulses are generated by the DSP in an Enhanced Keyphasor
Module in proportion to the specified Event Ratio. The Event Ratio can be
specified as any positive, real number other than 1.0 exactly, in the range
0.0000001 to 10000000. The Event Ratio can be specified to a precision of
at least seven significant decimal digits. The Setup dialog box allows you to
specify the Event Ratio in terms of an integer numerator and denominator.
Note
Processed Keyphasor signals using the Event Ratio Event Setup option can
be used for speed measurements only and not for phase measurements.
Orientation
This specifies the transducer location on the machine. The orientation angle
is 0 to 180 degrees left or right as observed from the driver to the driven end
of the machine train. The following figure shows this for horizontal shafts.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Shaft
Driven end
Driver end
0 degrees
90 degrees right
180 degrees
90 degrees left
Upper RPM Limit

This specifies the full scale maximum RPM value to use when reporting
channel RPM data to the Communication Gateway and Operator Display
software.
RPM Clamp Value
This specifies the fixed RPM value to be provided by the Communication
Gateway, when the channel is Not OK or is bypassed.
20
3.3.2
Keyphasor Module Configuration Screen, Example 1
Example of a Rack Configuration Screen for the Keyphasor Module. This shows the default "Events Per
Rev" Event Setup option, with Number of Events set to 1. Channel 2 is configured identical to channel 1.
21
3.3.3
Example of a Rack Configuration Screen for the Keyphasor Module. This shows an "Event Ratio" Event
Setup on Channel 1 and a "Recip Multi-Event Wheel" Event Setup on Channel 2.
For Channel 1, this Event Setup allows for the Buffered Output to be selected as Non-Processed or
Processed, which is always the case when Event Ratio Event Setup is selected. The Rack Signal is
force-selected as type Processed, since the Event Ratio is non-integer.
For Channel 2, this Event Setup makes both the Buffered Output and Rack Signal paths force-selected
as type Non-Processed, which is always the case for the Recip Multi-Event Wheel option.
22
3.3.4
Example of a Rack Configuration Screen for the Keyphasor Module. This shows an "Events Per Rev" Event
Setup on Channel 1 and an "Event Ratio" Event Setup on Channel 2.
For Channel 1, this Event Setup makes both the Buffered Output and Rack Signal force-selected as NonProcessed, which is always the case for the Events Per Rev option.
For Channel 2, both the Buffered Output and Rack Signal may be optioned for Non-Processed or
Processed, since the Event Ratio is an integer in the range 2 to 255 (in this case, 5).
23
3.3.5
Example of a Rack Configuration Screen for the Keyphasor Module. This specifies an input-multiplying "Event
Ratio" Event Setup on Channel 1 and an input-dividing "Event Ratio" Event Setup on Channel 2.
In both cases, the Rack Signal is force-selected as Processed, since the Event Ratios specified are non-integer.
24
3.3.6
Paired Keyphasor Configuration

Configuring the 3500/25 module for a Paired Keyphasor application using the
Rack Configuration software is similar to configuring the module for a Standard
application. The following items may help avoid confusion during configuration:

Output Assignment refers to the system Keyphasor line that will be

driven by the module configured. There are four system lines. In Paired
Keyphasor mode Output Assignment for each module must be different.
Input Assignment defines the priority of the signals input into the
Keyphasor module. This determines the primary and backup signal within
the Keyphasor module being configured.
The Input Active setting allows one to either enable or disable the
monitoring functionality related to each channel in the Keyphasor module.
Output activity is no longer configurable. The output activity in a paired
Keyphasor application is based on the Input Assignment, Output
Assignment, and the validity, or OK state of the Keyphasor inputs.
When configuring the 3500 Rack configuration Software the following items
should be taken into consideration:

Rack Configuration Software will not allow a configuration download in

which more than two Keyphasor Modules are placed in the upper or the
lower half of the rack.
Rack Configuration Software will not allow a configuration download in
which a Paired Keyphasor and a Standard Keyphasor configuation are
installed in either the upper or the lower half of the rack simultaneously. If
both Paired Keyphasor and Standard Keyphasor capabilities are needed
within one rack, the user will be forced to use the Paired Keyphasor
configuration in the upper/lower half of the rack and the Standard
Keyphasor configuration in the opposite half of the rack.
Rack Configuration software will not allow the use of more than two slots
for Keyphasor modules. If two Keyphasor modules are placed in the
upper half of the 3500 rack and it is desired to place either one or two
additional Keyphasor modules in the lower half of the rack, they must be
placed in the same slots that are being used in the upper half of the rack.
If multiple monitors are associated with one paired Keyphasor module,
these monitors must be configured to have the same primary and backup
Keyphasor association.
Restrictions are placed upon Paired Keyphasor applications because
inputs are used as a primary/backup set for one system line. These
restrictions force the two Keyphasor inputs to be input with the same
events per revolution or be conditioned such that they have the same
events per revolution before being placed on the system line. To
accomplish this, the Keyphasor modules must be configured in one of the
following ways:
1. Both channels will have an input with the same events per
revolution and will not be processed.
2. Channel 1 and Channel 2 will both be processed.
3. One channel will be processed and the other channel will have a
1 event per revolution input.
25
3.3.7
Paired Keyphasor Configuration Screen Example 1
To make Paired Keyphasor Capability available, Keyphasors must be placed and configured as shown above.
3.3.8
Paired Keyphasor Configuration Screen Example 2
After placing one of the three configurations in example one, each Keyphasor Module can
be configured using the options menu.
26
3.3.9
Software Switches
The Keyphasor Module supports software switches which you can use to further
control the operation of the module as a whole, or on an individual channel
basis. These switches let you temporarily bypass, enable or cancel monitor
and/or channel functions. These switches are accessed by selecting
Utilities/Software Switches from the main menu screen of the Rack
Two special notes apply with regards to the use of Software Switches as follows.
The Software Switch control screen in the Rack Configuration software is

common to all the 3500 System module types available. Several
different types of software switches are listed, not all of which apply to
the Keyphasor Module. The Keyphasor Module will only respond to the
software switch options presented in this section.
Software Switch changes do not take effect until the Set button is clicked.
27
3.3.10
Software Switch Options

MODULE SWITCHES
These switches affect the Keyphasor Module as a whole.
Configuration Mode
This switch reflects the status of the Keyphasor Module with regard to
Configuration Mode. When downloading a configuration from the Rack
Configuration software, this switch will automatically be enabled and disabled
by the software. If the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration
Manual Keyphasor Threshold Adjust Mode
This switch reflects the status of the Keyphasor Module with regard to
Manual Keyphasor Threshold Adjust Mode. This switch will automatically be
enabled and disabled when the Threshold Adjust button on the Keyphasor
Module Configuration Screen is clicked on, if Manual Threshold is selected.
While in this mode, the Keyphasor Module will operate with a temporary
Manual Threshold supplied by the Rack Configuration software. Monitor
values such as 1X amplitude and phase that use affected Keyphasor signals
may go invalid while the Manual Threshold is being adjusted. If the
connection to the rack is lost during the adjustment process, use this switch
to remove the module from Manual Keyphasor Threshold Adjust Mode.
The module switch number is used in the Communication Gateway or Display
Interface Module, as follows.
Switch Name
Configuration Mode
Manual Keyphasor Threshold Adjust Mode
CHANNEL SWITCHES
These switches affect the Keyphasor Module on an individual channel basis.
Bypass
When this switch is enabled, the RPM value for the channel will be rendered
invalid and the signal conditioning for the channel will be bypassed.
The channel switch number is used in the Communication Gateway or Display
Interface Module, as follows.
Channel Switch Number
4
28
Switch Name
Bypass
4 I/O Module Description
Keyphasor I/O Module Descriptions

The Keyphasor I/O Modules are full-height rack modules that receive signals
from the Keyphasor transducers and route these signals to the Keyphasor Main
Module (or Modules). The I/O Modules provide power to the Keyphasor
transducers, and have provisions for outputting conditioned Keyphasor signals
via their Buffered Output terminals. These buffered outputs are typically used to
provide Keyphasor signals to external equipment, such as TDIX or TDXnet.
One or two Keyphasor Main Modules may be installed in any one available
"monitoring position" in the rack, occupying the upper and/or lower half-slot(s) of
the chosen monitoring position. For paired Keyphasors configuration, the two
paired keyphasors must occupy adjacent rack slots. Keyphasors configured for
paired operation may be installed in any two consecutively available monitoring
positions in the rack, occupying the upper and lower half-slots of the chosen
position. One (or two for paired) full-height Keyphasor I/O Module is then
installed behind this slot (if installed in a Rack Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or
above this slot (if installed in a Bulkhead rack).
There are five different types of Keyphasor I/O Modules available, covering the
various options for internal or external terminations, type of terminations, signal
isolation or non-isolation, and use of intrinsic safety barriers or not. The
following table summarizes the Keyphasor I/O Module options that are available.
Internal Termination*
External Termination**
Non-Isolated Keyphasor I/O Module
Non-Isolated Keyphasor I/O Module
Isolated Keyphasor I/O Module
Isolated Keyphasor I/O Module
Internal Barrier Keyphasor I/O Module
* All Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules use Euro Style connectors.
** All External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules use an External Termination
Block. External Termination Blocks are available with either Euro Style
connectors or Terminal Strip connectors.
This section of the manual describes how to use the connectors on the various
Keyphasor I/O Modules. It also lists part numbers of what cables to use, and
shows cable signal pin-outs.
The following additional documentation should be referenced to assist with
module wiring and mounting details.
The 3500 Field Wiring Diagram Package (part number 130432-01)

shows how to connect Keyphasor transducers to the Keyphasor I/O
Modules or to External Termination Blocks.
The 3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual

(part number 129766-01) shows how to mount External Termination
Blocks.
29
4.1
Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules

Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules require you to wire each Keyphasor
transducer to the I/O Module individually. This section shows what the different
Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules look like and how to connect the
wires to the Euro Style connectors that are used on all of these modules.
4.1.1
Non-Isolated Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module
1) Connect wires here to the

Keyphasor transducer associated
with Upper Keyphasor Main
Module, Channel 1.
2) Connect wires here to external
equipment such as TDIX/TDXnet,
associated with Upper Keyphasor
Main Module, Channels 1 and 2.
with Lower Keyphasor Main
Module, Channel 2.
associated with Lower Keyphasor
Module, Channel 1.
Module, Channel 2.
30
4.1.2
Isolated Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module

The Isolated Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module provides true isolation
for four Keyphasor channels by passing the input signals through transformers.
The primary side of each transformer is not referenced to ground and therefore
provides isolation that removes potential ground loops present in installations
where numerous systems are connected in parallel. The transformer-coupled
signals are also given a -10 Vdc offset after passing through the transformers.
This improves the range of input signals that can be input to the Keyphasor Main
Module without internal clipping. The Isolated I/O module was created
specifically for Magnetic Pickup applications, however it will work and provide
isolation for proximitor applications as long as an external power supply is
provided. It should also be noted that this I/O module was meant to be used
primarily to measure shaft speed and not as a phase measurement. It can be
used in phase measurements, but it should be noted that this I/O introduces a
slightly higher phase shift than the Non-Isolated version. Refer to section 8
(Specifications) for the specific phase shift associated with this I/O at different
frequencies.
1) Connect wires here to the Keyphasor

transducer associated with Upper
Keyphasor Main Module, Channel 1.
associated with Upper Keyphasor
transducer associated with Lower
associated with Lower Keyphasor
transducer associated with Lower
transducer associated with Upper
31
4.1.3
Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module

The Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module provides four
channels of intrinsically safe signal conditioning for Keyphasor transducers. It
has two internally mounted zener barrier modules, one for each pair of
transducer channels. A 3500 Earthing Module is required for systems that use
the Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module to provide an
intrinsically safe earth connection. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack
Installation and Maintenance Manual (part number 129766-01) for system
requirements when using the Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O
Module.

associated with Lower
Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2. Note that
these channels are referred
to as Channels 3 and 4,
respectively, from the point of
view of the I/O Module.
2) Connect wires here to
external equipment such as
TDIX/TDXnet, associated
Module Channels 1 and 2.
associated with Upper
Keyphasor Main Module
Channels 1 and 2.
4) Connect wires here to
external equipment such as
TDIX/TDXnet, associated
Module Channels 1 and 2.
32
4.1.4
Euro Style Connectors

It is often easier to wire connections to a Euro Style connector by removing the
connector terminal block from its base, making the connections at the terminal
block, and then securing the terminal block back to its base. To remove a Euro
Style connector terminal block from its base, loosen the screws attaching the
terminal block to the base, grip the block firmly and pull. Do not pull the block
out by its wires because this could loosen or damage the wires or connector.
Typical I/O Module with Euro Style connectors

Remove no more than 6 mm (0.25 inches) of insulation from the wires.
33
4.2
External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules

External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules let you simplify the wiring to the
Keyphasor I/O Modules in a 3500 Rack by using a 9-pin cable to route the
signals from two Keyphasor transducers to the Keyphasor I/O Module. This
section describes the External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules and the
External Termination Block. It also includes signal pin outs of the cables that go
between the External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules and the External
Termination Block.
4.2.1
Non-Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module
1) Connect the 9-pin cable (part number

129530-XXXX-XX) here to the External
Termination Block associated with
Upper Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
Termination Block associated with
Lower Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
associated with Lower Keyphasor Main
Module, Channels 1 and 2.
associated with Upper Keyphasor Main
Module, Channels 1 and 2.
34
4.2.2
Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module

The Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module provides true isolation
for four Keyphasor channels by passing the input signals through transformers.
The primary side of each transformer is not referenced to ground and therefore
provides isolation that removes potential ground loops present in installations
where numerous systems are connected in parallel. The transformer-coupled
signals are also given a -10 Vdc offset after passing through the transformers.
This improves the range of input signals that can be input to the Keyphasor Main
Module without internal clipping. The Isolated I/O module was created
specifically for Magnetic Pickup applications, however it will work and provide
isolation for proximitor applications as long as an external power supply is
provided. It should also be noted that this I/O module was meant to be used
primarily to measure shaft speed and not as a phase measurement. It can be
used in phase measurements, but it should be noted that this I/O introduces a
slightly higher phase shift than the Non-Isolated version. Refer to section 8
(Specifications) for the specific phase shift associated with this I/O at different
frequencies.

Termination Block associated with Upper
Keyphasor Main Module, Channels 1 and
2.
Termination Block associated with Lower
Keyphasor Main Module, Channels 1 and
2.
3) Connect wires here to external equipment
such as TDIX/TDXnet, associated with
Lower Keyphasor Main Module, Channels
1 and 2.
4) Connect wires here to external equipment
such as TDIX/TDXnet, associated with
Upper Keyphasor Main Module, Channels
1 and 2.
35
4.2.3

Two types of External Termination Blocks are used with the External Termination
Keyphasor I/O Modules. These are the Keyphasor External Termination Block
with Terminal Strip Connectors and the Keyphasor External Termination Block
with Euro Style Connectors.
4.2.3.1
Keyphasor External Termination Block With Terminal Strip

Connectors
1) Connect wires here to the Keyphasor transducers.

2) Connect the 9-pin cable(s) (part number 129530-XXXX-XX) here to
the External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module. The two cable
connectors are labeled Top and Bottom corresponding to the
associated Upper and Lower Keyphasor Main Modules, respectively.
3) Use this set of terminals for wiring to Lower Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
4) Use this set of terminals for wiring to Upper Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
36
4.2.3.2
Keyphasor External Termination Block With Euro Style Connectors
1) Connect wires here to the Keyphasor transducers.

2) Connect the 9-pin cable(s) (part number 129530-XXXX-XX) here to
the External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module. The two cable
connectors are labeled Top and Bottom corresponding to the
associated Upper and Lower Keyphasor Main Modules, respectively.
3) Use this set of terminals for wiring to Lower Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
4) Use this set of terminals for wiring to Upper Keyphasor Main Module,
Channels 1 and 2.
37
4.2.4
External Termination Block Cable Signal Pin Outs

The following shows the signal pin outs used to connect Keyphasor transducer
signals from Keyphasor External Termination Blocks to External Termination
Keyphasor I/O Modules. The cable is part number 129530-XXXX-XX.
38
5 Maintenance
Maintenance
The printed circuit boards and components inside of 3500 Modules, including the
Keyphasor Module, are not designed to be repaired in the field. Maintaining a
3500 Rack module consists of testing module channels to verify that they are
operating correctly, and replacing a faulty module with a spare. This section
shows how to verify correct operation of a Keyphasor Module.
When performed properly, the Keyphasor Module may be installed into or
removed from the rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to the 3500
Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual (part number
129766-01) for the proper procedure.
Application Alert
Machinery protection may be lost while Keyphasor
Module maintenance operations are being performed.
5.1
Verifying Keyphasor Module Operation

calibration. The functions of Keyphasor Module channels, however, must be
verified at regular intervals. At each maintenance interval, it is recommended that
the procedures in this section be exercised to verify the operation of all active
channels in the Keyphasor Module.
5.1.1
Choosing A Maintenance Interval
o
o
5.1.2
The monitored machine is classified as critical.

The 3500 Rack is operating in a harsh environment, such as that of
extreme temperatures, high humidity or corrosive atmospheres.
At each interval, use the results of the previous verifications and ISO
Procedure 10012-1 1992(E) to adjust the interval.
Required Verification Test Equipment

Listed below is the equipment needed to conduct module verification testing.
Signal Function Generator
Multimeter
DC Power Supply
Laptop or other Computer running 3500 Rack Configuration Software
39
5 Maintenance
5.1.3
Typical Verification Test Setup

The following figure shows the typical test setup for verifying a Keyphasor
Module. The Signal Function Generator and DC Power Supply are used to
simulate the transducer signal and DC bias input to the module. The Multimeter
is useful for verifying signal levels. The laptop computer is used to observe the
output from the Rack Configuration Software during the tests. It is also used to
save the current rack configuration prior to conducting the tests, and to restore
the saved configuration afterwards.
General Layout for Maintenance Testing

1)
2)
3)
4)
40
3500 Rack
Signal Generation / Verification Test Equipment
RS-232 Communications Cable
Laptop Computer running 3500 Rack Configuration
Software
5 Maintenance
Transducers can be connected to a 3500 Rack in a variety of ways. Depending

on the type of Keyphasor I/O Module being used, connect the test equipment to
the Keyphasor transducer input terminals per the following figure.
1) The Keyphasor transducer input terminals are located variously as shown,

depending on the Keyphasor I/O Module type:
2) Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module
3) Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module (Non-Isolated or Isolated)
4) Keyphasor External Termination Block With Euro Style Connectors (used
with External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules)
5) Keyphasor External Termination Block With Terminal Strip Connectors
(used with External Termination Keyphasor I/O Modules).
41
5 Maintenance
5.1.4
Using Rack Configuration Software For Verification Testing

To perform the test procedures described in this section you must be familiar with
the following features of the 3500 Rack Configuration Software:
Uploading, Saving and Downloading of Configuration Files

Display of the Verification Utility Screen
The 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (part number
129777-01) explains how to perform these operations.
Note
It is important to save the original rack configuration before doing any maintenance
or troubleshooting procedures, and to restore the rack configuration to its original
state afterwards.
The following figure depicts a typical screen view of the 3500 Rack Configuration
Software, Verification Utility Screen. This screen may be accessed by selecting
Utilities/Verification from the main menu screen of the Rack Configuration
Software.
The information displayed on this screen is used in the module channel

verification procedure.
42
5.1.5
5 Maintenance
Procedure For Verifying Keyphasor Module Channels

This section shows how to verify correct operation of Keyphasor Module
channels. This procedure tests the Threshold, RPM, and OK Status values for
each channel of the Keyphasor Module. The values are checked and verified by
varying the input Keyphasor signal frequency and DC bias applied and then
observing that the correct results are reported in the Rack Configuration Software
Verification screen on the test computer. Refer to the following figure.
Keyphasor Module Channel Verification Setup

1) Keyphasor I/O Module test signal connections (Internal Termination type I/O
Modules shown; connect test signal equipment in the same manner to the
External Termination Block terminals for External Termination type I/O Modules).
2) Multimeter
3) DC Power Supply
4) Signal Function Generator
Note: Test equipment outputs should be floating relative to earth ground.
43
5 Maintenance
5.1.5.1
Set Up The Test Signal Equipment And Verification Display Screen

The Keyphasor transducer signal will be simulated by combining the Sync Out
signal of the function generator with the output of the dc power supply to drive the
Keyphasor I/O Module transducer input.
1. Turn on the function generator and dc power supply, and connect these as
shown in the Setup diagram. For now, connect the combined test signal
output only to the Multimeter (not to the I/O Module). Set the function
generator to an initial frequency of 100 Hz and the power supply to -7.00 Vdc.
Use the Multimeter to verify the signal frequency and dc bias level.
2. Run the Rack Configuration Software on the test computer. Save the current
configuration now if you have not already done so. Following that, choose
Verification from the Utilities menu and choose the proper Slot number and
Channel number of the Keyphasor Module Channel to be tested. Then click
on the Verify button to open the Verification display screen.
5.1.5.2
Verify Keyphasor Threshold Value

The Keyphasor Threshold value is the input voltage level where the Keyphasor
signal will turn on. This value can be set automatically or manually. Use the
following procedure to verify that the Keyphasor Threshold is working correctly.
1. Disconnect PWR, COM, and KPH wiring from the Channel 1 terminals on the
Keyphasor I/O Module or External Termination Block.
2. Connect the test signal to the Keyphasor I/O Module or External Termination
Block as shown in the Setup diagram.
3. If the channel is configured for Manual Threshold, adjust the power supply
voltage so that it is 2.50 Vdc more negative than the configured Manual
Threshold voltage level. Note: Skip this step if the channel is configured for
Automatic Threshold.
Example:
If the displayed Manual Threshold value is: -10.00 Vdc
Then adjust the power supply voltage to:
-12.50 Vdc
4. Observe the Keyphasor Module Verification screen and do the following.
Verify that the Channel OK State reads OK

Verify that the Keyphasor RPM box displays an RPM value
5. If the Keyphasor channel will not produce an RPM reading, double check the
input signal to ensure it is correct. Also, make sure Channel Bypass and
Channel Off are showing as Disabled. If the module still does not perform as
expected, it may be considered faulty. In this case, proceed to Section 5.1.6.
44
5.1.5.3
5 Maintenance
Verify Keyphasor RPM Value

The Keyphasor RPM value is the measured speed in RPM of the Keyphasor input
signal. Use the following procedure to verify that the Keyphasor RPM
measurement is working correctly.
Note
Before following this procedure, verify that the Channel OK State reads OK.
1. Disconnect PWR, COM, and KPH wiring from the Channel 1 terminals on the
Keyphasor I/O Module or External Termination Block.
2. Connect the test signal to the Keyphasor I/O Module or External Termination
Block as shown in the Setup diagram. Adjust the frequency to 100 Hz.
3. Observe the Keyphasor Module Verification screen and note the number
displayed as either the Events Per Rev or the Event Ratio value. This value
will be referred to as simply the Event Value in the following step.
4. Use the following equation to determine what the correct nominal displayed
RPM value should be:
Displayed RPM = (Frequency x 60) / Event Value
Example 1:
Input Frequency = 100 Hz
Events Per Rev = 10
Displayed RPM = (100 x 60) / Events Per Rev
= 6000 / 10
= 600
Example 2:
Input Frequency = 100 Hz
Event Ratio = 2.27
Displayed RPM = (100 x 60) / Event Ratio
= 6000 / 2.27
= 2643
5. Observe the Keyphasor Module Verification screen and note the type of Rack
Signal, displayed as either Non-Processed or Processed. The displayed
RPM value accuracy is slightly different for Non-Processed and Processed
signals, as noted in the table below. Verify that the displayed Keyphasor RPM
is within the specified tolerance. This is specified at +25C (+77F).
Rack Signal Type
Non-Processed
Processed
Input Frequency
0.017 to 100 Hz
101 to 500 Hz
501 to 20 kHz
0.017 to 60 Hz
61 to 150 Hz
151 to 20 kHz
Displayed RPM
Nominal 1 RPM
Nominal 8 RPM
1% of Nominal RPM
Nominal 1 RPM
Nominal 8 RPM
1% of Nominal RPM
6. If the RPM reading does not meet specifications, double check the input
signal to ensure it is correct. If the module still does not perform as expected,
it may be considered faulty. In this case, proceed to Section 5.1.6.
45
5 Maintenance
5.1.5.4
Verify Channel OK Status

The Keyphasor Channel OK Status indicates the overall state of the Keyphasor
Channel. There are two states, OK and Not OK. This is shown as the Channel
OK State on the Verification screen. The individual Channel OK Statuses also
affect the Keyphasor Module OK State, which is indicated on the Keyphasor Main
Module front panel OK LED, and on the Verification screen. Use the following
procedure to verify the Keyphasor Channel OK Status is valid.
1. Disconnect the wire from the test equipment to the Channel 1 KPH input
terminals on the Keyphasor I/O Module or External Termination Block. The
OK LED on the front of the Keyphasor Main Module should go off.
2. Observe the Keyphasor Module Verification screen and do the following.
Verify that the Channel OK State reads Not OK

Verify that the Keyphasor RPM box display reads Invalid
3. If the above is not observed, double check that there is no input signal to the
Keyphasor Module transducer input. If the module still does not perform as
expected, it may be considered faulty. In this case, proceed to Section 5.1.6.
4. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the PWR, COM, and KPH
wiring to the Channel 1 terminals on the Keyphasor I/O Module or External
Termination Block.
5.1.5.5
Perform Verification Procedure On Keyphasor Module Channel 2

Repeat the Threshold, RPM and Channel OK Status verification procedure steps
for Channel 2 of the Keyphasor Module. Once that is complete, restore the
original rack configuration that was saved prior to starting the verification tests.
5.1.6
If A Channel Fails A Verification Test

This section describes what to do if a Keyphasor Module fails a Channel
Verification test. When handling or replacing circuit boards always be sure to
adequately protect against damage from Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Always
wear a proper wrist strap and perform work on a grounded conductive surface.
1. Double check that the configuration for the module has been saved using the
2. Replace the module with a spare. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack
Installation and Maintenance Manual (part number 129766-01) for details.
3. Download the configuration to the spare module.
4. Verify the operation of the spare module.
5. Return the faulty module to Bently Nevada LLC for repair.
46
5.2
5 Maintenance
Performing Firmware Replacement / Upgrade

Occasionally it may be necessary or desirable to replace the original firmware that
is shipped with the 3500/25 Keyphasor Module, to support functional upgrades or
changes. This section of the manual describes how to go about doing this.
Early versions of the module, including the original Keyphasor Module and some
Enhanced Keyphasor Modules, incorporate a socketed, integrated circuit memory
device ("Firmware IC") to store the firmware program. This Firmware IC may be
replaced as outlined below.
Later versions of the Enhanced Keyphasor Module support firmware downloads
directly from the 3500 Rack Configuration Software. This allows for easier
upgrading or changing of the firmware without requiring the module to be
physically removed from the rack. This process is described below as well.
5.2.1
Determine The Firmware Replacement Process To Use

The first step in performing a firmware replacement / upgrade is to determine
which process is required. The simplest way to do this is to use the Rack
Configuration Software to determine the current firmware version of the
Keyphasor Module. From the Rack Configuration Software main menu, select
Utilities / Update Firmware. A screen will appear showing a table of all of the
3500 System modules installed in the rack, along with the respective firmware
versions of each of the modules. Note the firmware version of the Keyphasor
Module of interest, and select the replacement process per the following.
5.2.2
Firmware Version
Firmware Replacement / Upgrade Process To Use
1.00 thru 2.00
Replace The Firmware IC
2.01 and higher
Download Firmware Via Rack Configuration Software
Replace The Firmware IC

The following lists the tools, items and instructions needed to remove the existing
Firmware IC from the module and replace it with an upgraded unit. The module
will need to be reconfigured using the 3500 Rack Configuration Software after the
IC is replaced.
Tools / Items Required
Medium Phillips Screwdriver
Small Flat Blade Screwdriver
Grounding Wrist Strap *
Upgrade Firmware IC *
* Refer to the Ordering Information section of this manual for part numbers.
Users may use their own grounding wrist strap if desired.
47
5 Maintenance
Firmware IC Replacement Process

Before proceeding, you should review Section 1.2, Handling and Storage
Considerations, before handling the module or the upgrade Firmware IC.
Below is a list of general instructions on how to replace the Firmware IC. Detailed
instructions for some of these steps are provided on the following pages. Please
review these completely before proceeding.
1. Ensure that the module configuration is saved using the 3500 Rack
Configuration Software.
2. Remove the module from the 3500 Rack.
3. Remove the shield from the module.
4. Remove the original Firmware IC from the socket on the module PWA.
5. Install the upgrade Firmware IC to the socket on the module PWA.
6. Replace the module shield.
7. Replace the module into the 3500 system.
8. Reconfigure the module using the 3500 Rack Configuration Software.
48
5 Maintenance
Shield Removal / Replacement
Shield Removal
1. Remove the 4 screws (item 1) that hold the shield and PWA together using a
Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the 2 nuts (item 2) from the BNC connectors on the front of the
Keyphasor Main Module.
3. Remove the shield (item 3) from the PWA.
Shield Replacement
1. Place the shield (item 3) onto the PWA.
2. Replace the nuts (item 2) for the BNC connectors on the front of the
Keyphasor Main Module.
3. Align the holes in the shield with the standoffs on the PWA.
4. Replace the screws (item 1) to fasten the shield to the PWA.
49
5 Maintenance
Keyphasor Module (PWA 125792-01) Firmware IC Removal / Installation

This shows the removal and installation process for the Firmware IC as found on
a Keyphasor Main Module with PWA 125792-01. The PWA number can be found
along the top edge of the module.
Step 1. Insert the small flat blade screwdriver under the lip of either end of the IC.
The diagram shows the approximate location of the IC to be removed, but not
necessarily its orientation.
Step 2. Slightly lift one end of the IC by gently prying with the screwdriver. Move
to the other end of the IC and repeat. Continue this process until the IC comes
loose from the socket.
Step 3. Install the upgrade Firmware IC into the PWA. Be sure that the notched
end of the IC is matched to the notched end of the socket. Ensure that the IC is
firmly seated in the socket, and that no pins are bent or deformed.
50
5 Maintenance
Keyphasor Module (PWA 149369-01 up to Rev A) Firmware IC Removal /

Installation
This shows the removal and installation process for the Firmware IC as found on
an Enhanced Keyphasor Main Module with PWA 149369-01. The PWA number
can be found along the top edge of the module.
Step 1. Insert the removal tool in one of the two slots at the corners of the socket
on the PWA. The diagram shows the approximate location of the IC to be
removed, but not necessarily its orientation.
Step 2. Slightly lift the corner of the IC by gently pulling back on the tool. Move to
the other slotted corner and repeat. Continue this process until the IC comes
51
5 Maintenance
Step 3. Install the upgrade Firmware IC into the PWA. Be sure that the keyed
corner on the IC is matched to the keyed corner of the socket. Ensure that the IC
is firmly seated in the socket.
5.2.3
Firmware Download Via Rack Configuration Software

Occasionally it may be necessary to upgrade the original firmware that is shipped
with the 3500/25 Keyphasor Module. The following instructions describe how to
upgrade the existing firmware using the 3500 Rack Configuration software. The
monitor will need to be reconfigured using the 3500 Rack Configuration software
after having its firmware upgraded. Note that the firmware file structure may
differ slightly among upgrade packages. Please refer to the documentation
available with the upgrade package for additional information.
This information is intended for a Bently Nevada Service Engineer performing the
upgrade. If circumstances require that someone other than a Bently Nevada
Service Engineer perform the upgrade, it is critical to note that any damage to the
product caused by performing the upgrade will void the warranty, and repair to the
product will be the responsibility of the customer.
CAUTION
During the following procedure power to the rack cannot be interrupted and the
Keyphasor Module that is being upgraded cannot be removed from the rack. If
either of these occur the module may become inoperable.
1. Copy the firmware upgrade files into \3500\Rackcfg\firmware in the local

directory on the host computer.
2. Start the 3500 Rack Configuration Software and connect to the rack.
3. Upload and save the current configuration of the 3500/25 Keyphasor Module.
The upgrade process erases the existing module configuration.
52
5 Maintenance
4. Under the Utilities menu option, select Update Firmware.

5. Select the Module to be updated and click on the OK button.
6. The software will request the file to be downloaded. Select the appropriate
upgrade file that was copied in step one and click on the Open button.
7. The software will download the file. After the download process is complete,
a status message indicating success or failure will be displayed.
Download the saved configuration to the Keyphasor Module.
If the firmware download process fails, the Keyphasor Module will revert to
using its old code. Under no circumstances should the module be removed
from the rack until the download / configuration process is completed.
53
6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the Keyphasor Module
or Keyphasor I/O Module using the information provided by the module self-test
function, the LEDs, the System Event List, and the Alarm Event List.
6.1
Self-Test
To perform a Keyphasor Module self-test, do the following.
1. Connect a computer running Rack Configuration Software to the 3500 Rack
(if needed).
2. Select Utilities from the main screen of the Rack Configuration Software.
3. Select System Events / Module Self-Test from the Utilities menu.
4. Click on the Module Self-Test button on the System Events screen.
Application Alert
Machinery protection may be lost while the self-test is
being performed.
5. Select the slot position (upper or lower slot) that contains the Keyphasor
Module to be tested and click on the OK button. The Keyphasor Module will
perform a full self-test and the System Events screen will be displayed. This
list will not immediately contain the results of the self-test.
6. Wait 30 seconds for the module to run a full self-test.
7. Click on the Latest Events button. The System Events screen will be
updated to include the results of the Keyphasor Module self-test.
8. Verify that the Keyphasor Module passes self-test. If it does not, refer to
Section 6.3, System Event List Messages for further diagnosis.
54
6.2
6 Troubleshooting
LED States
The following table shows how to read the LED states on the Keyphasor Main
Module front panel to diagnose and correct problems. The OK LED will either be
steadily ON, steadily OFF, or flashing at a fixed rate of 1 Hz or 5 Hz. The TX/RX
LED may be steadily ON, steadily OFF, or FLASHING at an arbitrary rate.
OK LED
TX/RX LED
ON
FLASHING
1 Hz
1 Hz
Indicated Condition
Recommended Action
Keyphasor Module is operating

correctly.
No action required.
Keyphasor Module is not

configured.
Reconfigure the Keyphasor

Module.
5 Hz
Keyphasor Module has detected

an internal fault and is Not OK.
OFF
Keyphasor Module is not operating

correctly or the Keyphasor
transducer has faulted or has
stopped providing a valid signal.
Check the System Event List

and the Alarm Event List.
Keyphasor Module is not

communicating correctly.
NOT
FLASHING
= behavior of this LED is irrelevant to the indicated condition
6.3

This section describes the System Event List Messages that are entered by the
Keyphasor Module and gives an example of one. A typical System Event List
Message entry looks like the following:
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
Event
Date
DDMMYY
Event
Time
0000000123
Device Not
Communicating
32
02/01/90
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Slot
5L
Sequence Number:
The sequenced number of the event in the System

Event List (for example, "123").
Event Information:
The descriptive name of the event (for example,

"Device Not Communicating").
Event Number:
The descriptive number of the event, which identifies a

specific event type.
55
6 Troubleshooting
Class:
The severity of the event. The following classes are available.

Class Value
Classification
0
1
2
3
Severe / Fatal Event

Typical Logged Event
Reserved
Event Date:
The date the event occurred.
Event Time:
The time the event occurred.
Event Specific:
Additional information pertaining to the specific event may be

found in this field.
Slot:
This indicates the slot position of the module with which the
event pertains. For a Keyphasor Module installed in a given
upper slot, this field will simply indicate the slot number as 0 to
15. For a Keyphasor Module installed in a given lower slot, this
field will indicate the slot number as 0L to 15L.
Note: In the System Event List Message example given above,
the module is indicated as being installed in the lower position
of slot 5 (i.e., slot position 5L is indicated).
6.3.1
List Of System Event List Messages

The following describes the System Event List Messages that may be placed in
the list by the Keyphasor Module, given in numerical order. If an event listed here
with a preceding asterisk (*) occurs, the Keyphasor signal will not be provided and
the RPM value will be invalid. If you are unable to solve any problems contact
your nearest Bently Nevada LLC office.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------EEPROM Memory Failure

Event Number: 13
Event Class: 1 = Potential Problem Event
Action:
Replace the Keyphasor Module as soon as possible.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Device Not Communicating
Event Number: 32
Action:
Check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
the Keyphasor Module
the rack backplane
56
6 Troubleshooting
Device Is Communicating
Event Number: 33
Action:
the rack backplane
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fail Main Board +5V-A
(Fail Main Board +5V, upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 100
Action:
Verify that noise from the power source is not causing the problem.
If the problem is not caused by noise, check to see if one of the
following components is faulty:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board +5V-A
(Pass Main Board +5V, upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 101
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fail Main Board +5V-B
(Fail Main Board +5V, lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 102
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board +5V-B
(Pass Main Board +5V, lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 103
Action:
57
6 Troubleshooting
* Fail Main Board +5V-AB
(Fail Main Board +5V, upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 104

Event Class: 0 = Severe / Fatal Event
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board +5V-AB
(Pass Main Board +5V, upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 105
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fail Main Board -24V-A
(Fail Main Board -24V, upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 112
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board -24V-A
(Pass Main Board -24V, upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 113
Action:
58
6 Troubleshooting
Fail Main Board -24V-B

(Fail Main Board -24V, lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 114
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board -24V-B
(Pass Main Board -24V, lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 115
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Fail Main Board -24V-AB
(Fail Main Board -24V, upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 116
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Main Board -24V-AB
(Pass Main Board -24V, upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 117
Action:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Device Configured
Event Number: 300
Event Class: 2 = Typical Logged Event
Action:
No action required.
59
6 Troubleshooting
* Configuration Failure
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Keyphasor Module. If the
problem still exists replace the Keyphasor Module immediately.
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Keyphasor Module. If the
problem still exists replace the Keyphasor Module as soon as
possible.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Entered Cfg Mode
(Module Entered Configuration Mode)
Event Number: 302
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Software Switches Reset
Event Number: 305
Action:
Download the software switches to the Keyphasor Module. If the
software switches are not correct replace the Keyphasor Module
as soon as possible.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Reboot
Event Number: 320
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Removed from Rack
Event Number: 325
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Inserted in Rack
Event Number: 326
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Device Events Lost
Event Number: 355
Action:
No action required.
60
6 Troubleshooting
Module Alarms Lost

Event Number: 356
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Entered Calibr.
(Module Entered Calibration Mode)
Event Number: 365
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Module Exited Calibr.
(Module Exited Calibration Mode)
Event Number: 366
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Module Self-test
Event Number: 410
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Enabled Ch Bypass
(Enabled Channel Bypass)
Event Number: 416
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Disabled Ch Bypass
(Disabled Channel Bypass)
Event Number: 417
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Enabled Threshold Adj
(Enabled Threshold Adjustment)
Event Number: 418
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Disabled Threshold Adj
(Disabled Threshold Adjustment)
Event Number: 419
Action:
No action required.
61
6 Troubleshooting
Fail Slot Id Test

Event Number: 461
Action:
Verify that the Keyphasor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Keyphasor Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the
the rack backplane
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass Slot Id Test
Event Number: 462
Action:
Verify that the Keyphasor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Keyphasor Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the
the rack backplane
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fail DAC Test
(Fail Digital to Analog Converter Test)
Event Number: 471
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
Replace the Keyphasor Module immediately.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pass DAC Test
(Pass Digital to Analog Converter Test)
Event Number: 472
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
Replace the Keyphasor Module immediately.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Enabled Test Signal
Event Number: 481
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Disabled Test Signal
Event Number: 482
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SW To Paired Primary Kph
Event Number: 494
Action:
No action required.
62
6 Troubleshooting
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SW To Paired Backup Kph

Event Number: 495
Action:
No action required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Kph Backplane Conflict
Event Number: 496
Action:
Check Keyphasor module configurations to ensure that each
Keyphasor module is configured correctly for a paired Keyphasor
application. Also check for standard Keyphasor modules, and
Tachometers that are being used in an incorrect or incompatible
way with the paired Keyphasor modules. If these checks are made
and no problems are found then check to see if one of the
the rack backplane
6.4

This section describes the Alarm Event List Messages that are returned by the
Keyphasor Module.
6.4.1
List Of Alarm Event List Messages

Alarm Event List Message
When Message Will Occur
Entered Not OK
Module went Not OK
Left Not OK
63
7 Ordering Information
AA BB CC
Part Number 3500/25 - XX - XX - XX
AA
01
02
Number of channels
Single Half-Height 2-Channel Keyphasor Module
(order for 2 channels)
Two Half-Height 2-Channel Keyphasor Modules
(order for 4 channels)
BB
01
02
03
04
05
Type of I/O Module

Non-Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module *
Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module *
CC
00
01
Agency Approvals
No Approvals Required
CSA-NRTL/C
* When ordering Keyphasor I/O Modules with External Terminations the external
termination blocks and cables must be ordered separately for each I/O module.
Note
When the Keyphasor Module is used with the Internal Barrier Internal Termination
I/O Module option, the following firmware and software versions are required:
3500/25 Keyphasor Module Firmware:
Version 1.06 or later
3500 Rack Configuration Software:
Version 2.30 or later
When the Keyphasor Module is to be used in a Paired Keyphasor Application, the

following firmware and software versions are required:
Management 4 Channel Monitors (PWA 140734-XX): Firmware rev 2.15
3500/22 Transient Data Interface (PWA 1388607-XX): Firmware rev 1.07
3500 Rack Configuration Software:
64
Software rev 3.60
Spares
Part Number
Enhanced Keyphasor Main Module **

149369-01
125800-01
Non-Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module
126648-01
135473-01
125800-02
Isolated External Termination Keyphasor I/O Module
126648-02
Grounding Wrist Strap (single use)
04425545
Internal Termination Header, 4 Position, Green
00580438
Internal Termination Header, 12 Position, Blue
00502133
Keyphasor Module Operation and Maintenance Manual
129770-01
Height Internal Chassis Parts
125388-0, 125565-01, 043001111
** Note: This module may be ordered as a direct plug-in replacement for
Keyphasor Module 125792-01.
Keyphasor Signal (KPH) to External Termination Block (ET) Cable
AAAA BB
Part Number 129530 - XXXX - XX
AAAA
0005
0007
0010
0025
0050
0100
Cable Length
5 feet (1.5 metres)
7 feet (2.1 metres)
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
BB
01
02
Assembly Instructions
Not Assembled
Assembled
Keyphasor External Termination Blocks
Part Number
External Termination Block, Euro Style Connectors

External Termination Block, Terminal Strip Connectors
128718-01
128726-01
Upgrade Firmware IC
Part Number
For PWA 125792-01

For PWA 149369-01
128754-01
162237-01
65
8 Specifications
Specifications
INPUTS
Power Consumption:
3.2 watts typical
Signal Levels:
Each Keyphasor Module accepts up to two transducer

signals from proximity probe transducers or magnetic
pickups. Note: If an Internal Barrier Internal Termination
Keyphasor I/O Module is used, then the Magnetic Pickup
transducer type option is disabled. The input signal range is
+0.8V to -21.0V (Non-Isolated inputs), and +5V to -11.0V
(Isolated inputs). Signals exceeding this range are limited
internally by the module. Magnetic pickups require a shaft
rotative speed greater than 200 RPM (3.3 Hz).
Impedance:
21.8 k minimum, all except Internal Barrier I/O Module.

10.1 k minimum, Internal Barrier I/O Module.
SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Speed Ranges:
Input range of 1 to 1,200,000 RPM (0.017 Hz to 20 kHz).

Supports multiple events per rev. to a maximum of 20 kHz.
Output range of 1 to 99,999 RPM (0.017 Hz to 1667 Hz).
Speed Measurement
Accuracy:
Specified at +25C (+77F) per output signal type as follows:

Input Freq. Range Output Freq. Accuracy
Non-Processed:
0.017 to 100 Hz
101 to 500 Hz
501 to 20 kHz
1 RPM
8 RPM
1% of Nominal RPM
Processed:
0.017 to 60 Hz
61 to 150 Hz
151 to 20 kHz
1 RPM
8 RPM
1% of Nominal RPM
Isolated Keyphasor I/O

Phase Error:
A phase error is introduced when using either of the Isolated
Keyphasor I/O modules. The following graph shows the
amount of phase shift that will be added at different machine
speeds when using these I/O modules:
66
8 Specifications
Isolated I/O Phase Error

7
Phase Error (deg)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
20000
40000
60000
80000
100000
120000
RPM
SIGNAL PROCESSING
Static Phase Error:
The Static Phase Error (SPE) of a Processed output signal

is the long-term deviation in the output signal period with a
constant-speed input signal. The following equation can be
used to determine the maximum phase error at a given
output frequency, FOUT.
SPEMAX = FOUT * 0.00216
Dynamic Phase Error: The Dynamic Phase Error (DPE) of a Processed Keyphasor
output signal is the short-term deviation in the output signal
period created in response to a changing-speed input signal.
The effect is logarithmically dependent on the Event Ratio
(ratio of input Keyphasor events to generated output
events), and linearly dependent on the percent change of
speed over one revolution, assuming constant acceleration.
The following graph shows the typical response
characteristics of a Processed output signal due to a
dynamic input signal.
67
8 Specifications
Dynamic Phase Error Factor vs. Eve nt Ratio

For Proce sse d Ke yphasor Signals
15
14
Degrees Phase Error per Percent Change per
1X Revolution
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Eve nt Ratio (Input Eve nts pe r 1X Re volution)
To illustrate an example of how to read this graph, consider that an Event Ratio of
10.0 would produce approximately 0.35 degrees of phase error in the Processed
Keyphasor output signal, relative to the actual 1X event rotor, presuming that the 1X
rotor was undergoing a 0.35% speed change over the course of one revolution with
linear acceleration.
TRANSDUCER CONDITIONING
68
Auto-Threshold:
Minimal signal amplitude for triggering is 2.0 volts peak to

peak. Minimum frequency for triggering is 120 RPM (2 Hz).
Manual Threshold:
Use for any input above 1 RPM (0.017 Hz). User-selectable

from 0 to -20 volts dc. Minimum signal amplitude for
triggering is 0.5 volts peak to peak.
Hysteresis:
User-selectable from 0.2 to 2.5 volts.
8 Specifications
OUTPUTS
Buffered Keyphasors:
For each Keyphasor Main Module in a rack, two buffered

Keyphasor signal outputs are available at the front of the
rack via coaxial connectors, one for each of two channels.
There may be two Main Modules installed in a rack for a
total of four Keyphasor channels. The buffered Keyphasor
signal outputs are also available at the back of the rack via
Euro Style Connectors located on the Keyphasor I/O
Module. If a load is connected to both the coaxial connector
and the I/O Module outputs for a given channel, the loads
are in parallel with each other. Output impedance is
534 maximum.
Transducer Power:
The range on the output power supply voltage to power the

Keyphasor transducers is -22.0 Vdc to -24.50 Vdc over
temperature, and -22.33 Vdc to -24.18 Vdc at 25C (+77F).
The current draw per channel is 40 mA maximum.
Front Panel LEDs:
The front panel of the Keyphasor Main Module has two

LEDs to indicate the Keyphasor Module operating status.
These are the OK LED and the TX/RX LED.
OK LED:
This LED indicates whether or not the Keyphasor Module

and Keyphasor I/O Module are operating correctly.
TX/RX LED:
This LED indicates communication between the Keyphasor

Module and the Rack Interface Module (RIM) as messages
are transmitted and received.
Operating
Temperature:
-30C to +65C (-22F to +150F),

all modules except Internal Barrier I/O Module
0C to +65C (+32F to +150F),
Internal Barrier I/O Module
Storage
Temperature:
-40C to +85C (-40F to +185F)
Humidity:
95%, non-condensing
69
8 Specifications
CE MARK DIRECTIVES
EMC Directives:
EN50081-2
Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
EN55011, Class A
EN55011, Class A
EN61000-6-2
Electrostatic Discharge
Radiated Susceptibility
Conducted Susceptibility
Electrical Fast Transient
Surge Capability
Magnetic Field
Power Supply Dip
EN61000-4-2, Criteria B
EN61000-4-3, Criteria A

EN61010-1
Safety Requirements
HAZARDOUS AREA APPROVALS

For systems not using the Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O
Module:
CSA-NRTL/C:
For systems using the Internal Barrier Internal Termination Keyphasor I/O Module:
Please refer to specification sheet 141495-01 for detailed approvals information.
PHYSICAL
Main Module
Dimensions:
Height x Width x Depth
119.9 mm x 24.4 mm x 256.5 mm

(4.72 in. x 0.96 in. x 10.10 in.)
Weight:
0.34 kg (0.76 lbs.)
I/O Modules (all except Internal Barrier I/O Module)
70
Dimensions:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 103.1 mm

(9.50 in. x 0.96 in. x 4.06 in.)
Weight:
0.40 kg (0.88 lbs.)
8 Specifications
Internal Barrier I/O Module

Dimensions:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 163.1 mm

(9.50 in. x 0.96 in. x 4.06 in.)
Weight:
0.46 kg (1.01 lbs.)

Main Module:
One half-height front slot.

A special mounting adapter is required to allow the halfheight Main Modules to be mounted in the full-height slots.
The Main Modules can be placed in any one of the 14
available "monitoring position" slots. There may be no more
than two Main Modules in a rack; one in a top half-slot and
one in a bottom half-slot.
I/O Modules:
One full-height rear slot.
71

Revision G, October 2001
3500/32 AND 3500/34

4 CHANNEL RELAY
MODULE AND TMR
RELAY
MODULE
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Copyright 2001 Bently Nevada Corporation

The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada Corporation in the United States and other
countries:
Xlerometer
The Bently Nevada Corporation Orbit Design is a
trademark of Bently Nevada Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada Corporation are provided for those times
when you cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address
Telephone
Fax
Internet

Minden, NV 89423
USA
1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
1 775 782 9259
www.bently.com
NOTICE:
maintain the 4 Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module. Refer
to the following manuals for other required information.
iii
Contents
1
Receiving and Handling Instructions....................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3

Handling and Storing Considerations ....................................................................... 1
General Information .................................................................. 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
The 4 Channel Relay Module ................................................................................... 3

Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description .......................................................... 6
Statuses................................................................................................................. 10
LED Descriptions ................................................................................................... 13
4 Channel Relay Module ................................................................................. 13
TMR Relay Module.......................................................................................... 13
Configuration Information....................................................... 14
3.1
Hardware Considerations....................................................................................... 14
3.2
Entering Alarm Drive Logic..................................................................................... 14
3.2.1
Relay Module Configuration Considerations.................................................... 15
3.2.2
Relay Module Configuration Options............................................................... 16
3.3
Software Switches.................................................................................................. 19
I/O Module Description............................................................ 21
4.1
4.2
4.3
4 Channel Relay I/O Module (Internal Termination) ............................................... 21

TMR Relay I/O Module (Internal Termination) ....................................................... 23
Wiring Euro Style Connectors ................................................................................ 25
Maintenance............................................................................. 26
5.1
Verifying a 3500 Rack - Relay Module ................................................................... 26
5.1.1
Choosing a Maintenance Interval .................................................................... 26
5.1.2
Required Test Equipment ............................................................................... 27
5.1.3
Typical Verification test setup.......................................................................... 27
5.1.4
Using the Rack Configuration Software........................................................... 29
5.1.5
Standard Relay Channels ............................................................................... 30
5.1.6
TMR Relay Channels ..................................................................................... 31
5.1.7
If a Channel Fails a Verification Test............................................................... 32
5.2
Performing Firmware Upgrades ............................................................................. 33
5.2.1
4 Channel Relay Firmware Installation Procedure........................................... 33
5.2.2
TMR Relay Firmware Installation Procedure ................................................... 36
Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 40
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Self-test.................................................................................................................. 40
Ordering Information............................................................... 50
7.1
4 Channel Relay Module ........................................................................................ 50
iv
7.2
TMR Relay Module .................................................................................................51
Specifications .......................................................................... 52
8.1
8.2
3500/32 4 Channel Relay Module.........................................................................52

3500/34 TMR Relay Module ...................................................................................55
vi
1.1
Corporation.
1.2

order given.
Application Alert
will be lost when this
module is removed
from the rack.
1.3

Disposal Statement
States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada
the end of its use.
General Information
The 3500 system is available with two types of relay modules. The first type is
the 4 Channel Relay Module. The 4 Channel Relay Module is used for most
monitoring applications. It uses a single relay to drive the output for each
channel. See section 2.1 for additional information on the 4 Channel Relay
Module.
For applications that require high availability, the 3500 also supports a Triple
Modular Redundant (TMR) Relay Module. The TMR Relay Module uses three
independent relays to drive a single relay output. The TMR Relay Module works
in conjunction with a TMR Rack Interface Module and three monitor modules
configured as a TMR set to provide 2 out of 3 voting for inputs. See section 2.2
for additional information on the TMR Relay Module.
3500/32 and 3500/34 Operati and Maintenance
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.1
LEDs indicate the status of the relay channels.

Terminals for connecting relay contacts to external devices.
Switches that control how the relay contacts work.
4 Channel Relay and I/O Modules
TMR Relay and I/O Modules
The 4 Channel Relay Module

The 4 Channel Relay Module is a full-height module that provides four relay
outputs. Any number of 4 Channel Relay Modules can be placed in any of the
slots to the right of the Rack Interface Module.
Each relay output is fully programmable using AND and OR voting. The Alarm
Drive Logic for each relay channel can use alarming inputs (alerts and dangers)
from any monitor channel in the rack. This Alarm Drive Logic is programmed
using the Rack Configuration Software.
The three common types of Alarm Drive Logic are bussed relays, individual
relays, and independent relays. Bussed relays use an Alarm Drive Logic that
ORs the Alerts or Dangers for all channels in the rack to drive a single relay.
Individual relays use Alarm Drive Logic that ORs the Alerts or Dangers for
channel pairs (channel 1 and channel 2 or channel 3 and channel 4) in a monitor
to drive a single relay. Independent relays use Alarm Drive Logic that cause
each alarm level (Alert and Danger) from a channel to drive a separate relay
channel. The following examples show the drive logic for these three types of
logic.
S = Monitor Slot
C = Channel
A1 = Alert/Alarm 1
A2 = Danger/Alarm 2
Bussed Relays (Alert and Danger)

##A1 = Any Active Alert
##A2 = Any Active Danger
((S02C##A1) OR (S03C##A1) OR ... OR (S15C##A1)) ! Trip Relay Channel 1

((S02C##A2) OR (S03C##A2) OR OR (S15C##A2)) ! Trip Relay Channel 2
Bussed Relays
Individual Relays (Alert and Danger)

(S02C01A1) OR (S02C02A1) ! Trip Relay Channel 1 (Alert Relay)
(S02C01A2) OR (S02C02A2) ! Trip Relay Channel 2 (Danger Relay)
(S02C03A1) OR (S02C04A1) ! Trip Relay Channel 3 (Alert Relay)
(S02C03A2) OR (S02C04A2) ! Trip Relay Channel 4 (Danger Relay)
Individual Relays
Independent Relays (Alert and Danger)

(S02C01A1)
(S02C02A1)
(S02C03A1)
(S02C04A1)
!
!
!
!
Trip Relay Module in slot 3 Channel 1

(S02C01A2)
(S02C02A2)
(S02C03A2)
(S02C04A2)
!
!
!
!

Independent relays require that you install two 4 Channel Relay Modules for
each monitor module.
Independent Relays
2.2

For applications that require high system reliability, the 3500 rack is capable of
Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR). The goal of a TMR setup is such that no
single point failure of any component will disable machinery protection for critical
machine points. When a TMR system is configured properly, every function of
the rack is done in duplicate or triplicate to facilitate this goal.
Requirements for a 3500 TMR rack:

Rack Jumper must be set to TMR position (see 3500 Rack Installation
and Maintenance manual).
The TMR version of the 3500/20 Rack Interface Module (TMR RIM)
must be used.
Two 3500/15 Power Supplies are required. These power supplies should
be connected to independent sources of power. In the event of a failure
on the primary supply, the monitors will use the secondary supply.
TMR monitors are the same as regular monitors only installed in sets of 3
in adjacent slots. The 3 monitors will monitor the same machine point.
Only one monitor is configured in 3500 Rack Configuration Software, the
other two monitors will automatically be configured the same as the first.
The TMR group can use separate transducers for each monitor
(discrete). Some 3500 monitors are capable of sharing a common
transducer across the triple (bussed). Any I/O module can be used for
discrete transducers. The TMR I/O module for that monitor must be used
for bussed transducers. Channel pair types not supported by the TMR I/O
must use discrete transducers; see the Operation and Maintenance
manual for the desired monitor. Some monitors do not have TMR I/O
modules; these monitors cannot be used with bussed transducers.
Application Alert
When using bussed
transducers a single
point failure in the
transducer or field
wiring can cause a loss
of machinery
protection.
For truly redundant keyphasors, use 2 3500/25 keyphasor monitors.

Configure such that the primary and secondary keyphasors reside on
different keyphasor monitors. Non-redundant keyphasors are allowed.
Independent monitors may be installed in a TMR rack for monitoring less

critical machine points.
Both the 3500/32 and 3500/34 may be used in a TMR rack. The 3500/34
TMR Relay Monitor can only be configured with to drive relays from
channels in a TMR group. The 3500/32 4 channel Relay Monitor can
only drive relays from channels in an independent monitor.
Redundant Display modules and Communication Gateways are permitted

but not required. Some modules do have configuration restrictions for
placing multiple modules in a rack; see the Operation and Maintenance
manual for the appropriate module.
Features of a properly configured 3500 TMR rack:

Duplicate Power Supplies, All monitors capable of switching between
primary and backup supplies without interruption of monitoring.
Triplicate inter-monitor communication networks between RIM, Relay
Module and TMR groups.
Triplicate alarm voting logic and circuitry
Triplicate relay voting logic and control circuitry
Duplicate processing of alarm information from monitors in the rack
How the TMR Relay Module functions:
A 3500/34 TMR Relay Module consists of 2 half-height Monitors and 1 full size
I/O module. The 2 monitors are configured identically and perform the same
monitoring function redundantly. The I/O module contains triplicate relays and
control logic.
TMR Relay Module:

The TMR Relay Module drives 3 independent Alarm Contact Signals for each of
the 4 relay channels, based on the user programmed Alarm Drive Logic. Alarm
Drive Logic is programmed for each relay channel via the 3500 Rack
Configuration Software. The TMR Relay Module evaluates each data path
independently, produces three Alarm Contact Signals, and passes these Alarm
Contact Signals to the TMR Relay I/O Module. If the OK Status for a data path
is Not OK, the Alarm Contact Signal Associated with that data path is set as
Invalid.
TMR Relay I/O Module:
The TMR Relay I/O Module contains 12 relays arranged in 4 channel groups of 3
relays each. This arrangement provides 2 out of 3 relay voting for each of the 4
relay channels. For each relay channel, the TMR Relay Module provides 3
Alarm Contact Signals. Each Alarm Contact Signal is input to one of the relays
in the channel group. These relay channel groups are electrically designed to
provide the 2 out of 3 voting as listed in the table below. Additionally, each TMR
Relay Module provides an OK status that is evaluated on the TMR Relay I/O
Module. If the module is Not OK, the Alarm Contact Signals from that module
are not evaluated.
Legs in
Legs Not
Legs
Alarm
Alarm
in Alarm
Faulted
Status
3
0
0
Alarm
2
1
0
Alarm
1
2
0
No Alarm
0
3
0
No Alarm
2
0
1
Alarm
1
1
1
Alarm
0
2
1
No Alarm
1
0
2
Alarm
0
1
2
No Alarm
0
0
3
Alarm*
* Default is No Alarm but can be configured for Alarm
Note: Relays will alarm if both TMR relay modules are removed regardless of
configuration.
2.3
Statuses
The 4 Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module return both module
and channel statuses. This section describes the available statuses and where
they can be found.
10
Module Status
OK
This indicates if the 4 Channel Relay Module or TMR Relay Module is
functioning correctly. A not OK status is returned under any of the following
conditions:
Slot ID Failure
If the Module OK status goes not OK, then the system OK Relay on the Rack
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the 4 Channel Relay Module or the TMR Relay Module
configuration is invalid.
Bypass
This indicates if any of the channels in the 4 Channel Relay Module or the
TMR Relay Module has been bypassed. Any of the following conditions can
cause the Relay Module to be bypassed:
A channel has never been configured
The Relay Module is in configuration mode
A Fatal error was found during self-test
Rack Alarm Inhibit has occurred
Alarm 1 Active
This indicates that one or more of the channels of the 4 Channel Relay
Module or the TMR Relay Module is in alarm.
Channel Status
OK
This indicates that no fault has been detected by the associated 4 Channel
Relay Module channel or associated TMR Relay Module channel. If the
Channel OK status goes not OK, then the system OK Relay on the Rack
Bypass
This indicates if the associated 4 Channel Relay Module channel or
associated TMR Relay Module channel has been bypassed. Any of the
following conditions can cause the channel to be bypassed:
The channel has never been configured
The Relay Module is in configuration mode
A Fatal error was found during self-test
Rack Alarm Inhibit has occurred
The channel has an invalid configuration
The channel is bypassed
11
Channel Off
This indicates if the associated 4 Channel Relay Module channel or
associated TMR Relay Module channel has been turned off. The Relay
Software.
Alarm 1 Active
This indicates if the associated 4 Channel Relay Module channel or the
associated TMR Relay Module channel is in alarm.
Statuses
Module OK
12
Communication
Gateway
Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Module Bypass
Operator
Display
Software
Module Alert/Alarm 1 Active
Channel OK
Channel Bypass
Channel Off
Channel Alert/Alarm 1 Active
2.4
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the 4 Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay
Module indicate the operating status of the module as shown in the following
figures. Refer to Section 6.2 for all of the available LED conditions.
2.4.1
4 Channel Relay Module
1) OK
Indicates that the 4 Channel Relay Module and the
4 Channel Relay I/O Module are operating
correctly.
2) TX/RX
Flashes at the rate that messages are received.
3) Channel Alarm
Indicates that an alarm condition has occurred with
this relay.
2.4.2
TMR Relay Module
1) OK
Indicates that the TMR Relay Module and the
TMR I/O Module are operating correctly.
2) TX/RX
Flashes at the rate that messages are
received.
3) Channel Alarm
Indicates that an alarm condition has
occurred with this relay.
13
Configure 3500 relay modules by using the Relay Association screen to enter
alarm drive logic for each relay channel and by using the Software Switches
screen to set software switches. This section defines the options on these
configuration screens. The Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (part number
129777-01) shows how to operate the screens.
3.1
The Slots in the rack are numbered from 0 to 15, counting from left to right. The
power supplies go into slot 0 and the Rack Interface module goes into slot 1.
Slots 2 through 15 are called monitoring positions. The 3500/32 or 3500/34
module can be installed into any of the monitoring positions. However, if the
3500/20 Rack Interface Module and Data Manager I/O are to be used to
interface to DDIX, TDIX or TDXnet, refer to the manual on the 3500/20 for slot
restrictions this may place on your configuration.
3.2
Entering Alarm Drive Logic

Use the Relay Association screen to enter the alarm logic that controls what
alarms cause the channels in the relay to drive the output.
Relay Association Screen for a Standard Relay

14
Relay Association Screen for a TMR Relay
3.2.1
Relay Module Configuration Considerations
Add monitor modules to the rack configuration before configuring the Relay
Module.
Activate only the Relay Module channels that will be used.
Only monitor modules may be used in the alarm drive logic.
Only the first monitor module of a TMR group needs to be added to the
alarm drive logic.
For the TMR Relay Module, if a channel has an alarm that is part of AND
voting and that channel is bypassed, the bypassed channel is removed from
the voting logic. Alarms will not be inhibited because of the bypass. The 4
Channel Relay Module is configurable.
Prior to downloading, the configuration software will determine if the number
of instructions exceeds the limit of your relay module. The 4-channel relay
monitor is limited to a combined total of 60 tokens, instructions and elements
for the 4 channels. The TMR Relay monitor is limited to 10 tokens,
instructions and elements per channel.
15
3.2.2
Relay Module Configuration Options

Available Monitors
A field that shows the monitors in the rack.
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack. Standard indicates that
a 4 Channel Relay Module is installed. TMR indicates that a TMR Relay Module
is installed.
Config ID
A unique six character identifier which is entered when a configuration is
downloaded to the 3500 rack.
Relay Slot
The location in the 3500 rack of the relay module being configured.
Active
A check box that applies to the selected channel in the Channel Association
group. The relay channel drives the output only when this box is enabled ()
and the alarm drive logic for the channel is true.
Latching Relays (only applies to 4 Channel Standard Relay)
When this option is selected, the corresponding relay alarm channel will hold the
alarm state until it receives a rack reset or the relay is reconfigured.
Standard Relay Channel Association / TMR Relay Channel Association
A group for selecting the channel to be configured and activated.
Relay NE/NDE Switch Status (only applies to 4 Channel Relay Module)
Indicates how the relay hardware switches are set on the Relay I/O Module.
This status is only available after the relay has been uploaded.
Alarm on 3 Faults (only applies to TMR Relay Module)
This option lets you enable or disable alarming on three faults. The default is to
not alarm if all three legs (monitors) of a TMR Monitor set are in fault. An alarm
will occur if both TMR monitors are removed, regardless of configuration.
Application Alert
Do not enable Alarm on
3 Faults if the relays are
associated to Zero
Speed channels.
16
Available Monitor Channels/Alarms

When a monitor is selected, this area shows all the alarms that are available for
the monitor.
Alarm Drive Logic
Build the alarm drive logic in this area using the available monitor alarms.
AND Voting Setup
This option allows you to determine the AND voting for a standard relay.
AND Voting Setup Screen
17
Normal AND Voting (Default)

With this option selected, if an alarming parameter is Not OK or bypassed (either
by user selection or monitor failure), then the parameter will be removed from
the relay logic.
True AND Voting
Selecting True AND logic causes Not OK and bypassed parameters to remain in
the relay logic. Using 'True And' logic will not drive an alarm if an alarming
parameter being And-ed is Not OK or in bypass.
Important: Care must be taken when selecting AND the voting to be used;
consider the configuration settings for the channel to be used as an alarm
parameter. Not OK Channel Defeat (single channel measurements), Not OK
Channel Pair Defeat (paired channel measurements), Timed OK Channel Defeat
and Latching vs. Non-Latching Not OK modes all affect the circumstances that
cause a channel to be "Not OK" or bypassed. The following channel types have
special scenarios to consider:
Thrust Position: Monitor reports an Alarm (not a "Not OK" condition) to the
relay monitor for a transducer not OK.
Overspeed, Zero-Speed, Rotor Speed: These channel types have optional "OK
Voltage Checks" that will determine if the monitor will or will not report a Not OK
status to the Relay Monitor due to a transducer voltage error.
Eccentricity: "Direct Channel Above 600 RPM" affects bypass and Not OK
status.
18
3.3
Software Switches
Software switches for relay modules let you temporarily bypass or inhibit relay
module and channel functions. Set these switches on the Software Switches
screen under the Utilities Option on the main screen of the Rack Configuration
Software. Switch settings take affect only after you press the Set button.
Configuration Mode
A switch that allows the 4 Channel Relay Module or the TMR Relay Module to be
configured. To configure a relay module, enable () this switch and set the key
switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module in the PROGRAM position.
When downloading a configuration from the Rack Configuration Software, this
switch will automatically be enabled and disabled by the Rack Configuration
Software. If the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration process,
use this switch to remove the module from Configuration Mode.
The monitor switch number is used in the Communication Gateway Module.
1
Switch Name
Configuration Mode
19
Bypass
When enabled (), the channel will be turned off.
The channel switch number is used in the Communication Gateway Module.
1
20
Switch Name
Bypass

This section describes the I/O modules that are associated with the 4 Channel
Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module. This section also describes how to
use the connectors on the Relay I/O Module and describes where to install each
I/O module.
4.1
4 Channel Relay I/O Module (Internal

Termination)
The 4 Channel Relay I/O Module contains four sets of relay contacts (one for
each channel) and can be setup so each channel is Normally Energized or
Normally De-energized. The 4 Channel Relay I/O Module must be installed
behind the 4 Channel Relay Module (in a Rack Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or
above the 4 Channel Relay Module (in a Bulkhead rack).
1) Terminals for connecting doublepole, double-throw (DPDT) relays.

2) DIP switches for configuring the
relays for Normally Energized (NE)
or Normally De-energized (NDE).
The numbers refer to relay channel.
For example, 1 is for relay Channel
1.
21
Note
Relay contacts are marked NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally Open), and
ARM (Armature). NC and NO define the state of the relay contacts with no
power applied to the relay coil (de-energized).
Normally Energized
(NE)
Normally De-energized
(NDE)
1) No Power/ No Alarm (shelf state)

2) With Power/ No Alarm
3) With Power/ In Alarm
22
4.2
TMR Relay I/O Module (Internal Termination)

Each relay channel in the TMR Relay I/O Module contains a set of relay contacts
that are setup so that each channel is always Normally Energized. The TMR
Relay I/O Module must be installed behind the TMR Relay Modules (in a Rack
Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or above the TMR Relay Modules (in a Bulkhead
rack).
1) Relay connections for

relay Channel 1 and relay
Channel 2.
2) Relay connections for
relay Channel 3 and relay
Channel 4.
23
Note
Relay contacts are marked NO (Normally Open) and ARM (Armature). NO
defines the state of the relay contacts with no power applied to the relay coil
(de-energized).
Normally Energized
(NE)
1) No Power/ No Alarm (shelf state)

2) With Power/ No Alarm
3) With Power/ In Alarm
24
4.3

To remove a terminal block from its base, loosen the screws attaching the
Typical I/O Module

Do not remove more than 6 mm (0.25 in) of insulation from the wires.
25
5 Maintenance
Maintenance
replaced with a spare.
When performed properly, this module may be installed into or removed from the
rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to the Rack Installation and
This section shows how to verify the operation of the 3500/32 4 Channel Relay
Module and the 3500/34 TMR Relay Module.
5.1
Verifying a 3500 Rack - Relay Module

calibration. The functions of Relay Module channels, however, must be verified
at regular intervals. At each maintenance interval, we recommend that you use
the procedures in this section to verify the operation of all active channels in the
Relay Module.
Section
Number
5.1.1
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.1
26
5.1.2
Required Test Equipment
27
5.1.3
27
5.1.4
Using the Rack Configuration Software
29
5.1.5
Standard Relay Channels
30
5.1.6
TMR Relay Channels
31

o Monitored machine is classified as critical
o 3500 rack is operating in a harsh environment such as in extreme
temperature, high humidity, or in a corrosive atmosphere
26
Procedure 10012-1 1992(E) to adjust the interval.
5.1.2
5 Maintenance

The test equipment needed to simulate the inputs for the relay channel will
depend on the type of monitor providing inputs to the Relay Alarm Drive Logic.
This equipment can be found under Required Test Equipment in the
Maintenance section of the specific monitor manual.
5.1.3
Typical Verification test setup

The following figure shows the typical test setup for verifying a Relay Module.
The test equipment is used to simulate the transducer signal to selected
monitors and the laptop computer is used to observe the output from the rack.
1)
2)
3)
4)
3500 Rack
Test Equipment
RS-232 communications
Laptop Computer
Transducers can be connected to a 3500 rack in a variety of ways. Depending

on the wiring option for the I/O module of your monitor, connect the test
equipment to the Monitor Module and Relay Module using one of the following
methods:
27
5 Maintenance
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
28
Connect test equipment here.

Inputs
Monitor I/O Module (Internal Termination)
External Termination Block (Euro Style Connectors)
External Termination Block (Terminal Strip Connectors)
5 Maintenance
1) Outputs
2) Connect test
equipment here.
4 Channel Relay I/O

Module (Internal
Termination)
5.1.4
TMR Relay I/O Module

(Internal Termination)

The laptop computer that is part of the test setup uses the Rack Configuration
Software to display output from the rack and to reset certain operating
parameters in the rack. To perform the test procedures in this section you must
be familiar with the following features of the Rack Configuration Software.
upload and save configuration files
display the Verification screen
The Rack Configuration and Test Utilities Guide (part number 129777-01)
explains how to perform these operations.
Note
Save the original rack configuration before doing any maintenance
or troubleshooting procedures.
29
5 Maintenance
The Verification screen displays relay channel output from a 3500 rack as shown
in the following figure. Information such as Alarm Drive Logic, Channel Alarm
State and Channel OK State are used to verify relay channels.
5.1.5
Standard Relay Channels

Verify relay channels by forcing alarms from the monitors that provide inputs for
the Relay Alarm Drive Logic. When the logic is true, the Channel Alarm State
will change to Alarm on the Verification screen and the alarm relay for that
channel will change state. Verify only those channels that are active and
configured.
To verify that a 4 Channel Relay channel is working correctly.
1. Run the Rack Configuration Software on the test computer.
2. Choose Verification from the Utilities menu. A screen prompting for the
slot and channel number of the relay to be tested will appear.
3. Choose the proper Slot number and Channel number and then click on the
Verify button. The Verification screen will appear.
4. Verify that the Channel OK State status on the Relay Verification screen
reads OK.
5. Use the Relay Verification screen to determine what inputs must be
simulated.
6. Simulate the required Alarm Drive Logic inputs to cause the relay to change
states.
30
5 Maintenance
For example, a 3500 Rack with the following configuration:

Slot Number
1
2
3
4
5
Module Type
Rack Interface Module
3500/42 4 Channel Monitor
3500/42 4 Channel Monitor
3500/42 - 4 Channel Monitor
3500/32 - 4 Channel Standard Relay
A relay channel with the following Alarm Drive Logic:

( S02C01A1 * S03C01A1 ) + S04C01A2
Send test signals to the monitors in the rack to cause Slot 2 Channel 1 AND
Slot 3 Channel 1 to be in Alert OR cause Slot 4 Channel 1 to be in Danger.
7. Verify that the Channel Alarm State status on the Relay Verification screen
changes to Alarm. Verify that the relay contacts change state.
8. If the Relay channel does not respond correctly, check the inputs to ensure
they meet the Alarm Drive Logic requirements. If the module still does not
meet specifications, go to Section 5.1.7 (If a Channel Fails a Verification
Test).
9. Select the next channel to be tested by using the Channel drop down list on
the Verification screen. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to test the next relay
channel.
5.1.6
TMR Relay Channels

The TMR Relay Module contains two half-height TMR Relay Modules that work
with one TMR Relay I/O module in one slot of the 3500 rack. The two halfheight TMR Relay Modules work in parallel. Both see the same inputs at the
same time and perform the same function within the same time frame. The
inputs to the two TMR Relay Modules are from one or more groups of three 4channel monitors. Each channel from each monitor in the group of three is
redundant.
Verify relay channels by forcing alarms from the monitors that provide inputs for
the Relay Alarm Drive Logic. When the logic is true, the Channel Alarm State
will change to Alarm on the Verification screen and the alarm relay for that
channel will change state. Verify only those channels that are active and
configured.
To verify that a TMR Relay channel is working correctly.
1. Run the Rack Configuration Software on the test computer.
2. Choose Verification from the Utilities menu. A screen prompting for the
slot and channel number will appear.
31
5 Maintenance
3. Choose the proper Slot number and Channel number of the relay to be
tested then click on the Verify button. The Verification screen will appear.
4. Verify that the Channel OK State status on the Relay Verification screen
reads OK.
5. Use the Relay Verification screen to determine what inputs must be
simulated.
6. Simulate the required Alarm Drive Logic inputs to cause the relay to change
states.
For example, for a 3500 Rack with the following configuration:
Slot Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Module Type
Rack Interface Module
3500/34 - TMR Relay Module
|
|-- TMR group
|
|
|--TMR group
|
For a relay channel with the following Alarm Drive Logic:

S02C01A1 * S06C01A1
Send test signals to the monitors in the rack to cause Slot 2 Channel 1, Slot
3 Channel 1, and Slot 4 Channel 1 AND Slot 6 Channel 1, Slot 7 Channel 1,
and Slot 8 Channel 1 to be in Alert.
7. Verify that the Channel Alarm State status on the Relay Verification screen
changes to Alarm. Verify that the relay contacts change state.
8. If the Relay channel does not respond correctly, check the inputs to ensure
they meet the Alarm Drive Logic requirements. If the module still does not
meet specifications, go to Section 5.1.7 (If a Channel Fails a Verification
Test).
9. Select the next channel to be tested by using the Channel drop down list on
the Verification screen. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to test the next relay
channel.
5.1.7
If a Channel Fails a Verification Test

When handling or replacing circuit boards always be sure to adequately protect
against damage from Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Always wear a proper wrist
strap and work on a grounded, conductive work surface.
1. Save the configuration for the module using the Rack Configuration
Software.
32
5 Maintenance
2. Replace the module with a spare. Refer to the installation section in the
3500 Monitoring System Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual (part
number 129766-01).
3. Return the faulty module to Bently Nevada Corporation for repair.
4. Download the configuration for the spare module using the Rack
5. Verify the operation of the spare.
5.2

Occasionally it may be necessary to replace the original firmware that is shipped
with the 3500/32 4 Channel Relay Module and the 3500/34 TMR Relay Module.
The following instructions describe how to remove the existing firmware and
replace it with upgrade firmware. The monitor will need to be reconfigured using
the 3500 Rack Configuration software after having its firmware upgraded.
The following items will be required to perform a firmware upgrade to the
monitor:
Phillips Screwdriver.
Large Flathead Screwdriver.
Small Flathead Screwdriver.
Grounding Wrist Strap.*
IC Removal Tool.*
Upgrade Firmware IC.*
*Refer to Section 7 (Ordering Information) for part numbers. Users may use their
own grounding wrist strap or IC removal tool.
5.2.1
4 Channel Relay Firmware Installation Procedure

The following steps will need to be followed to complete the monitor firmware
upgrade:
Ensure that the monitors configuration is saved using the 3500 Rack
Refer to Section 1.2 (Handling and Storing Considerations) before handling
the monitor or the upgrade firmware IC.
Remove the monitor from the 3500 rack.
Remove the Top Shield from the monitor.
Remove the original firmware IC from the monitor PWA.
Install the upgrade firmware IC into the socket on the monitor PWA.
Replace the monitor Top Shield.
33
5 Maintenance
Replace the monitor into the 3500 system.

Reconfigure the monitor using the 3500 Rack Configuration software.
Detailed instructions for some of the steps listed above are provided on the
following pages. Please review completely before proceeding.
Top Shield Removal
1) Top Shield.
2) Standoff.
3) Screwdriver.
Step 1. Place the large flathead screwdriver under the top shield and on the
ridge of the rear standoffs and lift upward on the screwdriver to pop the cover
loose from the rear standoffs.
Step 2. Move the top shield up and down to work it loose from the two front
standoffs.
34
5 Maintenance
Original Firmware IC Removal

Step 1. Insert the removal tool in one of the two slots at the corner of the socket
on the PWA. The diagram shows the approximate location of the chip to be
Step 2. Slightly lift the corner of the chip by gently pulling back on the tool. Move
to the other slotted corner and repeat. Continue this process until the chip comes
35
5 Maintenance
Upgrade Firmware IC Installation
Install the upgrade firmware IC into the PWA. Be sure that the keyed corner on
the IC is matched to the keyed corner of the socket. Ensure that the IC is firmly
seated in the socket.
Top Shield Replacement
Replace the top shield. Be sure that the notch on the top shield is positioned at
the top left corner of the module as shown in the diagram under Top Shield
Removal. Align the holes in the top shield with the standoffs and press down
around each standoff until they snap in place.
5.2.2
TMR Relay Firmware Installation Procedure

upgrade:
36
5 Maintenance
Shield Removal
Step 1. Remove the 4 screws (item 1) that hold the shield and PWA together
using a Phillips screwdriver.
Step 2. Remove the shield (item 3) from PWA.
37
5 Maintenance

38
5 Maintenance
Shield Replacement
Replace the shield. Align the holes in the shield with the standoffs and replace
the 4 Phillips-head screws to fasten the shield to the PWA.
39
6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to use the module self-test, the LEDs, and System
Event List to troubleshoot a problem with the 4 Channel Relay Module, the TMR
Relay Module, or the I/O module.
6.1
Self-test
To perform a self-test:
rack (if needed).
3. Select System Events/Module Self-test from the Utilities menu.
4. Press the Module Self-test button on the System Events screen.
Application Alert
Machinery protection will be
lost while the self-test is
being performed.
5. Select the slot that contains the relay module and press the OK button. The
relay module will perform a full self-test and the System Events screen will be
displayed. The list will not contain the results of the self-test.
7. Press the Latest Events button. The System Events screen will be updated
to include results of the self-test.
8. Verify if the relay module passed self-test. If the module failed the self test,
refer to Section 6.3.
40
6.2
6 Troubleshooting

problems with the 4 Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module.
OK Led
1 Hz
TX/RX
1 Hz
5 Hz
ON
Flashing
OFF
Not
flashing
Condition
Solution
Relay Module is not configured.
Reconfigure the Relay

Module.
Relay Module or the Relay I/O

Module has detected an internal
fault and are not OK.
Check the System Event

List.
Relay Module and the Relay I/O

Module are operating correctly.
Relay Module is not operating

correctly.
Replace the Relay

Module.
Relay Module is not

communicating correctly or the
Relay Module is not associated
with any monitors in the rack that
are communicating.

List.
= behavior of the LED is not related to the condition.

Alarm LED
Condition
Solution
ON
Channel is in Alarm.
OFF
Channel is not in Alarm.
41
6 Troubleshooting
6.3

4 Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module and gives an example of
one.
Example of a System Event List Message:
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
Event
Date
DDMMYY
Event
Time
0000000123
EEPROM
Memory Failure
13
02/01/90
12:24:31:99
Slot
Sequence Number:
The number of the event in the System Event List (for

example 123).
Event Information:
The name of the event (for example EEPROM Memory

Failure).
Event Number:
Identifies a specific event.
Class:
Used to display the severity of the event. The

following classes are available:
Class Value
0
1
2
3
42
Event
Specific
Classification
Severe/Fatal Event
Typical logged Event
Reserved
Event Date:
Event Time:
Event Specific:
Provides additional information for the events that use

this field.
Slot:
Identifies the module that the event is associated with.

If a half-height module is installed in the upper slot or a
full-height module is installed, the field will be 0 to 15.
If a half-height module is installed in the lower slot then
the field will be 0L to 15L. For example, a half-height
module installed in the lower position in slot 5 would be
5L.
6 Troubleshooting
The following System Event List Messages may be placed in the list by the 4
Channel Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module and are listed in numerical
order. If an event marked with a star (*) occurs the relays on the 4 Channel
Relay I/O Module and the TMR Relay I/O Module will not be driven. If you are
unable to solve any problems contact your nearest Bently Nevada Corporation
office.
EEPROM Memory Failure
Event Number: 13
Action:
Replace the Relay Module as soon as possible.
Internal Network Failure
Event Number: 30
Action:
Replace the Relay Module immediately.
Device Not Communicating
Event Number: 32
Action:
the Relay Module
the rack backplane
Event Number: 33
Action:
the Relay Module
the rack backplane
Fail Relay Coil Sense
Event Number: 55
Action:
Check to see if the Relay I/O Module is installed. If installed,
check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
the Relay Module
the Relay I/O Module
Pass Relay Coil Sense
Event Number: 56
Action:
the Relay Module
43
6 Troubleshooting
Fail Main Board +5V-A

(Fail Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 100
Action:
Verify that noise from the power source is not causing the
problem. If the problem is not caused by noise, check to see if
one of the following components is faulty:
the Relay Module
Pass Main Board +5V-A
(Pass Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 101
Action:
the Relay Module
Fail Main Board +5V-B
(Fail Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 102
Action:
the Relay Module
(Pass Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 103
Action:
the Relay Module
(Fail Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 104

Action:
the Relay Module
44
Pass Main Board +5V-AB
6 Troubleshooting
(Pass Man Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 105

Action:
the Relay Module
Event Number: 301
Action:
Replace the Relay Module immediately.
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Relay Module. If the
problem still exists, replace the Relay Module as soon as
possible.
Software Switches Reset
Event Number: 305
Action:
Download the software switches to the Relay Module. If the
software switches are not correct replace the Relay Module as
soon as possible.
* Fail I/O Board +5V-AB
(Fail I/O Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 390

Action:
the Relay Module
45
6 Troubleshooting
Pass I/O Board +5V-AB
(Pass I/O Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 391

Action:
the Relay Module
Fail I/O Board +14V-A
(Fail I/O Board +14V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 392
Action:
the Relay Module
Pass I/O Board +14V-A
(Pass I/O Board +14V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 393
Action:
the Relay Module
Fail I/O Board +14V-B
(Fail I/O Board +14V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 394
Action:
the Relay Module
46
6 Troubleshooting
Pass I/O Board +14V-B

(Pass I/O Board +14V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 395
Action:
the Relay Module
* Fail I/O Board +14V-AB
(Fail I/O Board +14V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 396

Action:
the Relay Module
Pass I/O Board +14V-AB
(Pass I/O Board +14V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 397

Action:
the Relay Module
Fail I/O Module DIP Sw
(Fail I/O Module DIP switch)
Event Number: 398
Action:
Verify that the Relay I/O Module is installed. If the Relay I/O
Module is installed, replace the Relay I/O Module as soon as
possible.
Pass I/O Module DIP Sw
(Pass I/O Module DIP switch)
Event Number: 399
Action:
Verify that the Relay I/O Module is installed. If the Relay I/O
Module is installed, replace the Relay I/O Module as soon as
possible.
47
6 Troubleshooting
Pass Module Self-test

Event Number: 410
Action:
No action required.
Enabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 416
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
No action required.
Disabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 417
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
No action required.
Invalid Alm Drive Logic
(Invalid Alarm Drive Logic)
Event Number: 451
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Relay Module. If the
problem still exists replace the Relay Module as soon as possible.
Fail Slot Id Test
Event Number: 461
Action:
Verify that the Relay Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Relay Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the
the Relay Module
the rack backplane
Pass Slot Id Test
Event Number: 462
Action:
Verify that the Relay Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Relay Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the
the Relay Module
the rack backplane
48
6.4
6 Troubleshooting

The following messages may be placed in the Alarm Event List by the 4 Channel
Relay Module and the TMR Relay Module.
Entered not OK
module went not OK
Left not OK
Relay Activated
condition for driving the relay channel met
Relay Deactivated
condition for driving the relay channel is no longer

met
49
This section contains the ordering information for the 3500/32 4 Channel Relay
Module and the 3500/34 TMR Relay Module.
7.1

A
Part number 3500/32- !! - !!

A
!! Output Module
01
4 Channel Relay I/O Module
!! Agency Approval Option

00
01
None
CSA-NRTL/C
Spares
4 Channel Relay I/O Module
Relay Internal Termination Headers
Relay Module Manual
Firmware IC
Grounding Wrist Strap (single use only)
IC Removal Tool
50
125712-01
125720-01
00580436
129771-01
132319-01
04425545
04400037
7.2
TMR Relay Module

A
Part number 3500/34 A
!! - !!
!! TMR Relay Module Type

01
TMR Relay Module
!! Agency Approval Option

00
01
No Approvals Required
CSA-NRTL/C
Spares
TMR Relay Module
TMR Relay I/O Module
Relay Internal Termination Headers
Relay Module Manual
Firmware IC
Grounding Wrist Strap(single use only)
IC Removal Tool
Half-height Module Adapter
Chassis
Card Guide
Screws (order 3 per adapter)
125696-01
125704-01
00580438
129771-01
132317-01
04425545
04400037
125388-01
125565-01
04300111
Note
When ordered as a new system, the TMR relay module includes two halfheight modules with required mounting hardware. When the spare is ordered,
a single half-height TMR Relay Module is shipped.
51
8 Specifications
Specifications
This section contains the specifications for the 3500/32 4 Channel Relay Module
and the 3500/34 TMR Relay Module.
8.1
3500/32 4 Channel Relay Module

TYPE
Two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) relays connected in a double-pole,
double-throw (DPDT) configuration.
ENVIRONMENTAL SEALING
Epoxy-sealed
ARC SUPPRESSORS
250 Vrms, installed as standard.
CONTACT RATINGS (resistive load):
52
Max switched power:
DC: 120 W
AC: 600 VA
Min switched current:
100 mA @ 5 Vdc
Max switched current:
5A
Max switched voltage:
DC: 30 Vdc
AC: 250 Vac
8 Specifications
53
8 Specifications
CONTACT LIFE
100,000 @ 5 A, 24 Vdc or 120 Vac
OPERATION
Each channel is switch selectable for Normally De-energized or Normally
Energized.
Temperature:

o
o
o
o
Humidity:
95% non-condensing
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:

Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
Power Supply Dip:

Radio Telephone:

EN61010-01
APPROVALS
CSA-NRTL/C:
54
8 Specifications
PHYSICAL
Main Module:
241 mm x 24.4 mm x 242 mm
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52 in)
Weight:
0.7 kg (1.6 lbs)
I/O Module:
241 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm.
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
Weight:
0.4 kg (1.0 lbs)
8.2
Main Module:
1 full-height front slot
I/O Module:
1 full-height rear slot
3500/34 TMR Relay Module

TYPE
Three Double-pole, double-throw (DPDT) relays connected in a single-pole,
single-throw (SPST) configuration.
ENVIRONMENTAL SEALING
Epoxy-sealed
ARC SUPPRESSORS
Not Supported
CONTACT RATINGS (resistive load)

Max switched power:
DC: 60 W,
AC: 125 VA
Min switched current:
100 mA @ 5 Vdc
Max switched current:
2A
Max switched voltage:
150 Vdc or 220 Vac
55
8 Specifications
56
8 Specifications
CONTACT LIFE
100,000@ 1.5 A, 24 Vdc or 1 A, 120 Vac
OPERATION
Each channel is Normally Energized.
Temperature:

o
o
o
o
Humidity:
95% non-condensing
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:

Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
Power Supply Dip:

Radio Telephone:

EN61010-01
APPROVALS
CSA-NRTL/C:
57
8 Specifications
PHYSICAL
Main Module:
120.4 mm. x 24.6 mm x 241.8 mm
(4.74 in x 0.97 in x 9.52 in)
Weight:
0.34 kg (0.74 lbs)
I/O Modules:
241 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
Weight:
0.5 kg (1.0 lbs)
58
Main Module:
1 half-height front slot
I/O Modules:
Part No. 129772-01

Revision C, February 1999
3500/40
PROXIMITOR MONITOR
MODULE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Bently Nevada Corporation 1999

All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated
into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner,
Bently Nevada Corporation

1617 Water Street
Minden, Nevada 89423 USA
Telephone (800) 227-5514 or (775) 782-3611
Fax (775) 782-9259
Copyright infringement is a serious matter under
the United States of America and foreign copyright laws.
Keyphasor and Proximitor are registered trademarks of Bently Nevada Corporation.
NOTICE:
This manual does not contain all the information required to operate and maintain
the Proximitor Monitor. Refer to the following manuals for other required
information.
iii
Contents
1.
Receiving and Handling Instructions .........................................1
1.1
1.2
Receiving Inspection ..................................................................................................1

Handling and Storing Considerations .........................................................................1
2.
General Information.....................................................................2
2.1
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description ............................................................4
2.2
Available Data ............................................................................................................4
2.2.1
Statuses ..............................................................................................................4
2.2.2
Proportional Values .............................................................................................7
2.3
LED Descriptions........................................................................................................8
3.
Configuration Information...........................................................9
3.1
Software Configuration Options..................................................................................9
3.1.1
Proximitor Monitor Configuration Options ............................................................9
3.1.2
Radial Vibration Channel Options......................................................................12
3.1.3
Thrust Position Channel Options .......................................................................21
3.1.4
Differential Expansion Channel Options ............................................................29
3.1.5
Eccentricity Channel Options.............................................................................35
3.2
Setpoints ..................................................................................................................45
3.3
Software Switches ....................................................................................................47
4.
I/O Module Description..............................................................49
4.1
Proximitor I/O Module (Internal Termination) ............................................................50
4.2
Proximitor Internal Barrier I/O Module (Internal Termination) ...................................51
4.2.1
Wiring Euro Style Connectors ...........................................................................52
4.3
Proximitor I/O Module (External Termination)...........................................................53
4.3.1
External Termination Blocks..............................................................................54
4.3.2
Cable Pin Outs ..................................................................................................56
5.
Maintenance ...............................................................................57
5.1
Verifying a 3500 Rack Proximitor Monitor Module................................................57
5.1.1
Choosing a Maintenance Interval ......................................................................58
5.1.2
Required Test Equipment..................................................................................58
5.1.3
Typical Verification test setup............................................................................59
5.1.4
Using the Rack Configuration Software.............................................................60
5.1.5
Radial Vibration Channels .................................................................................62
5.1.6
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Channels ........................................91
5.1.7
Eccentricity Channels ......................................................................................102
5.1.8
If a Channel Fails a Verification Test ...............................................................115
5.2
Adjusting the Scale Factor and the Zero Position ...................................................116
5.2.1
Adjusting the Scale Factor...............................................................................116
5.2.2
Zero Position Adjustment Description..............................................................117
5.2.3
Adjusting the Zero Position..............................................................................121
5.3
Performing Firmware Upgrades..............................................................................122
5.3.1
Installation Procedure......................................................................................122
iv
6.
Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 126
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Self-test ................................................................................................................. 126

7.
Ordering Information............................................................... 139
8.
Specifications .......................................................................... 142
vi
1.
1.1
Corporation.
1.2

void the warranty. To avoid damage, observe the following precautions.
Application Alert
Machinery protection will be lost when
this module is removed from the rack.

2.
General Information
The 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor is a four channel monitor that accepts input
from Proximitor transducers and uses this input to drive alarms. The 3500/40
can be programmed by using the 3500 Rack Configuration Software to perform
any of these functions: Radial Vibration, Thrust Position, Eccentricity, and
Differential Expansion. The module can receive input from many types of
displacement transducers including the following Bently Nevada transducers:
3300XL 8mm
3300 RAM
3300 5mm and 8mm
3300 16mm HTPS
7200 5, 8, 11 and 14mm
3000
1) Main module front view.

2) Status LEDs, refer to Section 2.3.
3) Buffered transducer outputs. Provide an unfiltered output for each of the four
transducers. All are short circuit protected.
4) I/O module rear views.
5) Barrier I/O module, Internal Termination. Refer to Section 4.2.
6) I/O module, Internal Termination. Refer to Section 4.1.
7) I/O module, External Termination. Refer to Section 4.3.
The primary purpose of the 3500/40 monitor is to provide 1) machinery

protection by continuously comparing current machine vibration against
configured alarm setpoints to drive alarms, and 2) essential machine vibration
information to both operator and maintenance personnel. Alarm setpoints are
configured using the 3500 Rack Configuration Software. Alarm setpoints can be
configured for each active proportional value and danger setpoints can be
configured for two of the active proportional values.
When shipped from the factory, the 3500/40 is delivered unconfigured. When
needed, the 3500/40 can be installed into a 3500 rack and configured to perform
the required monitoring function. This lets you stock a single monitor for use as
a spare for many different applications.
2.1

Not available with this monitor.
2.2
Available Data
The Proximitor Monitor returns specific proportional values dependent upon the
type of channel configured. This module also returns both monitor and channel
statuses which are common to all types of channels.
2.2.1
Statuses
The following statuses are provided by the Proximitor Monitor. This section
describes the available statuses and where they can be found.
Monitor Status
OK
This indicates if the Proximitor Monitor is functioning correctly. A not OK
Transducer Failure
Slot ID Failure
Keyphasor Failure (if Keyphasor signals are assigned to channel pairs)
Channel not OK
If the Monitor OK status goes not OK then the system OK Relay on the
Rack Interface I/O Module will be driven not OK.
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether the Proximitor Monitor has entered Alert/Alarm 1. A
monitor will enter the Alert/Alarm 1 state when any proportional value
provided by the monitor exceeds its configured Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint.
4
Danger/Alarm 2
This indicates whether the Proximitor Monitor has entered Danger/Alarm 2.
A monitor will enter the Danger/Alarm 2 state when any proportional value
provided by the monitor exceeds its configured Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint.
Bypass
This indicates when the Proximitor Monitor has bypassed alarming on one
or more proportional values of a channel. When a channel bypass status is
set, this monitor bypass status will also be set.
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the Proximitor Monitor configuration is valid.
Special Alarm Inhibit

This indicates whether all the nonprimary Alert/Alarm 1 alarms in the
Proximitor Monitor are inhibited. This status is active when:
The Alarm Inhibit contact on the Proximitor Monitor I/O Module is closed
(active).
A software Special Channel Alarm Inhibit is active.
Channel Status
OK
This indicates that no fault has been detected by the associated Proximitor
Monitor channel.
There are three types of channel OK checking: Transducer Input Voltage,
Transducer Supply Voltage, and Keyphasor OK. Keyphasor OK only affects
channel pairs that have Keyphasor signals assigned to them. A channel OK
status will be deactivated if any of the three OK types goes not OK.
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether the associated Proximitor Monitor channel has
entered Alert/Alarm 1. A channel will enter the Alert/Alarm 1 state when any
proportional value provided by the channel exceeds its configured
Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint.
Danger/Alarm 2
This indicates whether the associated Proximitor Monitor channel has
entered Danger/Alarm 2. A channel will enter the Danger/Alarm 2 state
when any proportional value provided by the channel exceeds its configured
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint.
Bypass
This indicates when the associated Proximitor Monitor channel has
bypassed one or more proportional values of the channel. A bypass status
may be the result of:
A transducer is not OK, the channel supports Timed OK Channel
Defeat, and the channel is configured for Timed OK Channel Defeat.
The Keyphasor transducer associated with the channel has gone invalid
causing all proportional values related to the Keyphasor signal (for
example 1X Amplitude, 1X Phase, Not 1X, ...) to be bypassed.
The Proximitor Monitor has detected a serious internal fault.
A software switch is bypassing any channel alarming function.
The Special Alarm Inhibit is active and causing enabled alarms not to be
processed.

associated Proximitor Monitor channel are inhibited. This status is active
when:
The Alarm Inhibit contact on the Proximitor Monitor I/O Module is closed
(active).
A software Special Channel Alarm Inhibit is active.
Off
This indicates whether the channel has been turned off. The Proximitor
Monitor channels may be turned off (inactivated) using the Rack

Statuses
Communication
Gateway
Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Monitor OK
Monitor Alert/Alarm 1
Monitor Danger/Alarm 2
Monitor Bypass
Monitor Configuration Fault
Monitor Special Alarm Inhibit
Operator
Display
Software
Channel OK
Channel Alert/Alarm 1
Channel Danger/Alarm 2
Channel Bypass
Channel Special Alarm Inhibit
Channel Off
2.2.2
Proportional Values
Proportional values are vibration measurements used to monitor the machine.
The Proximitor Monitor returns the following proportional values:
Radial Vibration
Direct *
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Thrust
Position
Direct *
Gap
Differential
Expansion
Direct *
Gap
Eccentricity
Peak to Peak *
Gap
Direct Min
Direct Max
* The primary value for each channel pair type. You can place these values in
contiguous registers on the Communication Gateway or Display Module.
2.3
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the Proximitor Monitor indicate the operating
status of the module as shown in the following figure. Refer to Section 6.2 (LED
Fault Conditions) for all of the available LED conditions.
1) OK: Indicates that the Proximitor Monitor and the Proximitor I/O
2) TX/RX: Flashes at the rate that messages are received and
transmitted.
3) BYPASS: Indicates that some of the monitor functions are
temporarily suppressed.
3.
This section describes how the Proximitor Monitor is configured using the Rack
Configuration Software. It also describes any configuration considerations
associated with this module. Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack
Configuration and Utilities Guide and the Rack Configuration Software for the
details on how to operate the software.
3.1

This section shows the configuration screens of the Rack Configuration Software
that are associated with the Proximitor Monitor and discusses the configuration
considerations. It will show a copy of the software screens and will explain the
options that are available.
3.1.1
Proximitor Monitor Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Proximitor Monitor
Reference Information
These fields contain information that indicates which module you are configuring.
Slot
The location of the Proximitor Monitor in the 3500 rack (2 through 15).
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack. This field is always set
to Standard since the Proximitor Monitor can only be installed in a Standard
rack.
Configuration ID
Contains a unique six-character identifier which is entered when a configuration
is downloaded to the 3500 rack.
Slot Input/Output Module Type

The I/O field lets you identify the type of I/O module that is attached to the Proximitor
Monitor. The option selected must agree with the I/O module installed.
Discrete I/O
Used when each Proximitor Monitor has its own I/O module.
Discrete Internal I/O

The transducer field wiring is connected directly to the Proximitor Monitor
I/O Module.
Discrete External I/O

The transducer field wiring is connected to an External Termination Block
and then routed from the External Termination Block to the Proximitor
Monitor I/O Module through a 25-pin cable.
Prox/Accel Int. Barr. I/O

The transducer field wiring is connected directly to the Proximitor Monitor
Internal Barrier I/O Module. Note that by selecting the Prox/Accel Internal
Barrier I/O option, this will disable certain transducer type options.
10
Channel Pair 1 and 2

The fields within these boxes pertain to both channels of the channel pair.
Channel Pair Type
The Channel Pair Type defines the type of monitoring which is to be
performed by the channel pair. The following Channel Pair types are
available in the Proximitor Monitor:
Radial Vibration
Thrust Position
Differential Expansion
Eccentricity
Keyphasor Association
No Keyphasor
Can be used when a Keyphasor is not available. If this is marked,
then the only data that will be available is Direct and Gap. This field
will automatically be marked for channel pairs which do not require a
Keyphasor transducer (for example Thrust Position and Differential
Expansion).
Primary
The Keyphasor channel selected that is normally used for
measurement. When this Keyphasor transducer is marked invalid,
the backup Keyphasor transducer will provide the shaft reference
information.
Backup
The Keyphasor channel selected that will be used in event of a failure
of the primary Keyphasor. If you do not have a backup Keyphasor,
select the same Keyphasor channel as the primary Keyphasor.
Active
Select whether the functions of the channel will be turned on ( ) or off
( ).
Options
A button to display the configuration options for the selected channel
type.
11
Notes:
The alarming hysterisis for all channel configurations for a 40 Monitor is 1/64 of Full
Scale. When a channel exceeds an alarm setpoint, it must fall back below the
setpoint less the hysterisis before it can go out of alarm. For example, consider a
channel configuration with a 0 - 10 mils full scale and an alarm setpoint at 6 mils as
illustrated below:
The hysterisis = 10 mils/64 = 0.16 mils. The channel input must fall below 6 mils 0.16 mils (5.84 mils) before the channel is out of alarm.
3.1.2
Radial Vibration Channel Options

This section discusses the Configuration Considerations and the Rack
Configuration Software screens associated with the Radial Vibration Channel.
3.1.2.1
Radial Vibration Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Radial Vibration Channel:
When "No Keyphasor" is selected, the 1X Amplitude (Ampl) and Phase Lag,
2X Amplitude (Ampl) and Phase Lag, Not 1X Amplitude (Ampl), and Smax
Amplitude (Ampl) are not available.
If a Keyphasor channel is selected, a Keyphasor Module must be installed in
the rack.
The full scale options allowed for each proportional value is dependent upon
the transducer type.
Internal Barrier I/O and External Barriers are not currently supported with
7200 11 mm, 14 mm, or 3000 Proximitors or the 3300 16 mm HTPS.
If a Non-Standard transducer is selected, the setpoint OK limits are set to 1
volt from the Upper and Lower OK limits that are selected.
There are two selections for 3000 Series transducers:
12
3000 (-24V) Proximitor

Select this option when connecting a 3000 Series proximitor directly to a
3500 monitor. A default scale factor of 285 mV/mil will be selected. This
may be adjusted 15 %. Note that the buffered transducers on the front
of the monitors and to the Data Manager are not compensated and
should be interpreted at 285 mV/mil.
3500 monitor, but supplying proximitor power from an external 18 volt
source. A default scale factor of 200 mV/mil will be selected. This may
be adjusted 15 %. Note that the buffered transducers on the front of
the monitors and to the Data Manager are not compensated and should
be interpreted at 200 mV/mil.
3.1.2.2
Setpoints may only be set on proportional values which are enabled.

Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example Channels 1 and 2
may be configured as Radial Vibration and Channels 3 and 4 may be
configured as Thrust Position).
When a full-scale range is modified, the setpoints associated with this
proportional value should be readjusted.
It is best to set the Scale Factor value and the Trip Multiply value before the
Zero Position value.
3000 (-18V), 3000 (-24V), and 3300 RAM Proximitors have limited linear
ranges. Therefore, you should use caution when selecting the Full-scale
range of the Direct, 1X Amplitude (Ampl), 2X Amplitude (Ampl), Not 1X
Amplitude (Ampl) and Smax Amplitude (Ampl) PPLs. Full-scale value x Trip
Multiply should not exceed the linear range of the transducer.
Radial Vibration Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Radial Vibration Channel
CP Mod
Selecting the CP Mod button Channel Options Dialog Box, allows a Custom
channel configuration to be downloaded to the monitor. Custom configuration
data is stored in a Custom Products Modification File. Custom Products
Modification files follow the naming convention <modification #.mod>. These
files must be located in the \3500\Rackcfg\Mods\ directory. When a CP Mod file
is selected, a window is displayed which describes the function of the
modification. CP Mod files are available through Bently Nevada's Custom
Products Division. Contact your local Bently Nevada Sales Representative for
details.
13
Timed OK Channel Defeat

This prevents a channel from returning to an OK status until that channel's
transducer has remained in an OK state for 30 seconds. This feature is always
enabled in the Radial Vibration Channels. The option protects against false trips
caused by intermittent transducers.
These fields contain information that indicates which channel you are
configuring.
Channel
The number of the channel being configured (1 through 4).
Slot
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack. This field is always
set to Standard since the Proximitor Monitor can only be installed in a
Standard rack.
14
Enable
An enabled proportional value specifies that the value will be provided by the
channel ( enabled, disabled).
Direct
Data which represents the overall peak to peak vibration. All frequencies
within the selected Direct Frequency Response are included in this
proportional value.
Gap
The physical distance between the face of a proximity probe tip and the
observed surface. The distance can be expressed in terms of displacement
(mils, micrometres) or in terms of voltage. Standard polarity convention
dictates that a decreasing gap results in an increasing (less negative) output
signal.
1X Ampl
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the amplitude component that
occurs at the rotative speed frequency.
1X Phase Lag
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the phase lag component that
2X Ampl
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the amplitude component having a
frequency equal to two times the shaft rotative speed.
2X Phase Lag
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the phase lag component having a
frequency equal to two times the shaft rotative speed. 2X phase lag is the
angular measurement from the leading or trailing edge of the Keyphasor
pulse to the following positive peak of the 2X vibration signal.
Not 1X Ampl
occurs at frequencies other than rotative speed.
Smax Ampl
Single peak measurement of XY (orthogonal) probes, in the measurement
planes, against a calculated "quasi zero" point. Only one S max Ampl value is
returned per channel pair (channel 1 or channel 3).
Full Scale Range

Each selectable proportional value provides the ability to set a Full Scale
value. If the desired full scale value is not in the pull down list, then the
Custom selection can be chosen. The values in the following table are the
same for all transducer types.
15
Direct
1X Ampl
2X Ampl
Not 1X Ampl
0-3 mil pp
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-15 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-150 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-400 m pp
0-500 m pp
Custom
Smax Ampl
0-3 mil
0-5 mil
0-10 mil
0-15 mil
0-20 mil
0-100 m
0-150 m
0-200 m
0-400 m
0-500 m
Custom
Gap Full-scale Range by transducer type

3300XL-8mm Proximitor
3300 - 5mm Proximitor
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
25-0-25 mil
300-0-300 m
600-0-600 m
Custom
3300 - 16mm HTPS

Nonstandard

3300 RAM Proximitor
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
25-0-25 mil
50-0-50 mil
300-0-300 m
600-0-600 m
1000-0-1000 m
Custom
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
300-0-300 m
Clamp Value
The value that a proportional value goes to when that channel or proportional
value is bypassed or defeated (For example, when a problem occurs with the
transducer). The selected value can be between the minimum and
maximum full-scale range values. (The 1X and 2X Phase Lag has available
values of 0 to 359 degrees.) Only the values available from the
Communication Gateway and Display Modules are clamped to the specified
value when the proportional value is invalid.
Recorder Output
4 to 20 mA recorders are not available on the 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor. If
4 to 20 mA recorders are desired, use a Proximitor/Seismic Monitor
(3500/42).
16
Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an over alarm level
or below an under alarm level before an alarm is declared as active.
Alert
First level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the
selected Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint. This setpoint can be set on the Setpoint
screen. The Alert time delay is always set at one second intervals (from 1 to
60) for all available proportional values.
Danger
Second level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the
selected Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint. This setpoint can be set on the Setpoint
screen.
100 ms option
The 100 ms option applies to the Danger time delay only and has the
following results:
If the 100 ms option is off ( ):

The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals (from 1 to 60).
The Danger time delay can be set for up to two available proportional
values.
If the 100 ms option is on ( ):

The Danger time delay is set to 100 ms.
The Danger time delay can only be set for the primary proportional value.
Zero Position (Gap)
Represents the zero position (in volts) when the gap scale is to read the
engineering units of displacement. To ensure maximum amount of zero
adjustment, gap the probe as close as possible to the center gap voltage
specified in the OK Limit table. This field is not available for Voltage Gap Scale.
Adjust Button
Adjust the Zero Position voltage. When this button is clicked, a utility starts that
helps you set the gap zero position voltage. Since this utility provides active
feedback from the 3500 rack, a connection with the rack is required. Refer to
Section 5.2 (Adjusting the Scale Factor and the Zero Position).
Trip Multiply
The value selected to temporarily increase the alarm (Alert and Danger) setpoint
values. This value is normally applied by manual (operator) action during startup
to allow a machine to pass through high vibration speed ranges without monitor
alarm indications. Such high vibration speed ranges may include system
resonances and other normal transient vibrations.
17
Direct Frequency Response

Defines the upper and lower corners for the band-pass filter used with direct
vibration measurements. The available ranges are 240 to 240,000 cpm and 60
to 36,000 cpm.
Transducer Selection
The following transducer types are available for the Radial Vibration Channel
(non-barrier I/O module):
3300XL 8 mm
3300 - 5 mm, 8 mm, 16 mm HTPS, and RAM Proximitor
7200 - 5 mm, 8mm, 11 mm, and 14 mm Proximitor
3000 (-18V and -24V) Proximitor
Nonstandard
(barrier I/O module):
3300 XL 8mm
3300 - 5 mm, 8 mm, and RAM Proximitor
7200 - 5 mm, 8mm Proximitor
Nonstandard
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale
Factor for transducers. If
Nonstandard is selected
as the transducer type,
the OK Limits can also be
adjusted. The
Nonstandard transducer's
scale factor must be
between 85 and 230
mV/mil. Also, there must
be at least 2 volts
between the Upper and
Lower OK Limits.
18
Scale Factor
Transducer
Without Barriers
With Bently
Nevada Internal
Barriers
With nonBently Nevada

Barriers
3300XL 8mm
3300 5mm and 8mm
7200 5mm and 8mm
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
3300 16mm HTPS,

7200 11mm,
7200 14mm
100 mV/mil
3300 RAM
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
3000 (-24V)
285 mV/mil
3000 (-18V)
200 mV/mil
Note: 15 % scale factor adjustment allowed.

* Barriers are not supported with this transducer option.
19
OK Limits
Upper
Transducer
Lower
Center Gap Voltages
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
3300XL 8mm,
3300 5mm,
3300 8mm,
7200 5mm,
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 RAM
-12.55
-12.15
-2.45
-2.45
-7.5
-7.3
-6.76
3300 16mm,
7200 14mm
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
-3.55
-11.6
3000 (-24V)
-15.75
-3.25
-9.5
3000 (-18V)
-12.05
-2.45
-7.25

Bently Nevada Internal Barrier Module.
Alarm Mode
Latching
Once an alarm is active it will remain active even after the proportional value
drops below the configured setpoint level. The channel will remain in alarm
until it is reset by using one of the following methods:
the switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module
the contact on the Rack Interface I/O Module
the Reset button in the Operator Display Software
the reset command through the Communication Gateway Module
the reset command through the Display Module
the reset command through the Rack Configuration Utility
Nonlatching
When an alarm is active it will go inactive as soon as the proportional value
drops below the configured setpoint level.
Alert should be the first level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal
level exceeds the selected value. Danger should be the second level alarm
that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected value.
The Alert and Danger values are set on the Setpoint screen.
20
Transducer Orientation
Degrees
The location of the transducer on the machine. The range for orientation
angle is 0 to 180 degrees left or right as observed from the driver end to the
driven end of the machine train. Refer to the following figure:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Shaft.
Driver end.
Driven end.
0 degrees.
90 degrees
right.
6) 180 degrees.
7) 90 degrees left.
Barriers
Select the MTL 796(-) Zener External option, Galvanic Isolators, or Internal
option if external safety barriers are connected between the monitor and the
transducer. These devices are used to restrict the amount of energy that can
flow into a hazardous area.
3.1.3
Thrust Position Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Thrust Position Channel.
3.1.3.1
Thrust Position Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Thrust Position Channel:
Internal Barrier I/O Modules are not currently supported with 7200 11 mm, 14
mm, or 3000 Proximitors or the 3300 16 mm HTPS.
The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type.
No Keyphasors are required.
The Thrust Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the transducer type.
21
The Zero Position voltage range is dependent upon the direct full-scale
range and the thrust direction.
may be configured as Thrust Position and Channels 3 and 4 may be
configured as Radial Vibration).
There are two selections for 3000 Series transducers:
3000(-24V) Proximitor
be adjusted 15 %. Note that the buffered transducers on the front of
the monitors and to the Data Manager are not compensated and should
be interpreted at 200 mV/mil.
22
3.1.3.2
Thrust Position Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Thrust Position Channel
CP Mod
Selecting the CP Mod button in the Channel Options Dialog Box, allows a
Custom channel configuration to be downloaded to the monitor. Custom
configuration data is stored in a Custom Products Modification File. Custom
Products Modification files follow the naming convention <modification #.mod>.
These files must be located in the \3500\Rackcfg\Mods\ directory. When a CP
Mod file is selected, a window is displayed which describes the function of the
details.
configuring.
23
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
Standard rack.
Enable
Direct
Average position, or change in position, of a rotor in the axial direction with
respect to some fixed reference. This value may be displayed in mils or m.
This proportional value support both center zero and non-center zero Full
Scale Ranges.
Gap
observed surface. The distance is expressed in terms of voltage. Standard
polarity convention dictates that a decreasing gap results in an increasing
(less negative) output signal.
Direct Full-scale Ranges by transducer type

3300XL-8mm Proximitor
25-0-25 mil
30-0-30 mil
40-0-40 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
1.0 - 0 - 1.0 mm
Custom
3300 - 16mm HTPS

Nonstandard
3300 RAM Proximitor

25-0-25 mil
30-0-30 mil
40-0-40 mil
50-0-50 mil
75-0-75 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
1.0 - 0 - 1.0 mm
2.0 - 0 - 2.0 mm
Custom
25-0-25 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
Custom
The Gap Full-scale Ranges are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
24
Clamp Value
value is bypassed or defeated (for example, when a problem occurs with the
transducer). The selected value can be between the minimum and maximum
full-scale range values. Only the values available from the Communication
Gateway and Display Modules are clamped to the specified value when the
proportional value is invalid.
Recorder Output
4 to 20 mA recorders are not available on the 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor. If 4 to
20 mA recorders are desired, use a Proximitor/Seismic Monitor (3500/42).
OK Mode
Latching
If a channel is configured for Latching OK, once the channel has gone not OK
the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. Latched not OK may be reset by
using one of the following methods:
Nonlatching
The OK status of the channel will track the defined OK status of the transducer.
Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an over alarm level or
below an under alarm level before an alarm is declared as active.
Alert
selected Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint. This setpoint can be set on the Setpoint screen.
The Alert time delay is always set at one second intervals (from 1 to 60) for all
available proportional values.
Danger
screen.
100 ms option
following results:
25

The Danger time delay can be set for all available proportional values.

Zero Position (Direct)
Represents the transducer DC voltage corresponding to the zero indication on
the channel's meter scale for the direct proportional value. The amount of
adjustment allowed is dependent upon the Direct Full Scale Range and the
transducer OK limits. To ensure maximum amount of zero adjustment, gap the
probe as close as possible to the center gap voltage specified in the OK Limit
table.
Adjust Button
helps you set the direct zero position voltage. Since this utility provides active
Transducer
The following transducer types are available for the Thrust Position Channel
3300XL 8mm
3300 - 5mm, 8mm, 16mm HTPS, and RAM Proximitor
7200 - 5mm, 8mm, 11mm, and 14mm Proximitor
3000 (-18V and -24V) Proximitor
Nonstandard
3300XL 8mm
3300 - 5mm, 8mm, and RAM Proximitor
7200 - 5mm, 8mm Proximitor
Nonstandard
26
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor
for transducers. If Nonstandard
is selected as the transducer
type, the OK Limits can also be
adjusted. The Nonstandard
transducer's scale factor must be
between 85 and 230 mV/mil.
Also, there must be at least 2
volts between the Upper and
Lower OK Limits.
Transducer
Scale Factor
Without Barriers
With Bently Nevada

Internal Barriers
With non-Bently
Nevada Barriers
3300XL 8mm,
3300 5mm and 8mm,
7200 5mm and 8mm
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
3300 16mm HTPS,

7200 11mm,
7200 14mm
100 mV/mil
3300 RAM
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
3000 (-24V)
285 mV/mil
3000 (-18V)
200 mV/mil

27
OK Limits
Upper
Transducer
Lower
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
3300XL 8mm,
3300 5mm,
3300 8mm,
7200 5mm,
7200 8mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
3300 16mm,
7200 14mm
-18.05
-1.65
3300 RAM
-13.14
-12.35
-1.16
Center Gap Voltage

With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
-1.1
-9.75
-9.75
-9.75
-1.05
-7.15
-6.7
-1.28
-1.16
7200 11mm
-20.39
-3.55
-11.60
-6.76
*
3000 (-24V)
-16.85
-2.25
-9.55
3000 (-18V)
-13.14
-1.16
-7.15

Bently Nevada Internal Barrier modules.
Alarm Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
28
Barriers
Normal Thrust Direction
Towards the active thrust bearing (for example towards or away from the probe
mounting). This field defines whether rotor movement toward or away from the
thrust probe corresponds to a more positive thrust reading (for example upscale
on a bar graph). If this field is set to "Toward Probe", then as the rotor moves
toward the thrust probe the thrust direct proportional value will increase and go
upscale on a bar graph.
3.1.4
Differential Expansion Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Differential Expansion
Channel.
3.1.4.1
Differential Expansion Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Differential Expansion
Channel:
The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type.
The Differential Expansion Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the
transducer type.
The Zero Position voltage range is dependent upon the direct full-scale
range and the thrust direction.
may be configured as Differential Expansion and Channels 3 and 4 may be
The Latching OK Mode and the Timed OK Channel Defeat options are not
compatible.

None of the Differential Expansion channel transducers are able to support

Discrete Internal Barrier I/O.
29
3.1.4.2
Differential Expansion Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Differential Expansion
Channel configuration screen.
CP Mod
details.
configuring.
30
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
Standard rack.
Enable
Direct
Change in position of the shaft due to the thermal growth relative to the
machine casing. This value may be displayed in mils or m. This
proportional value supports both center zero and noncenter zero Full Scale
Ranges.
Gap
Direct Full-scale Ranges by transducer type
25mm Extended Range Proximitor

Nonstandard
5-0-5 mm
0-10 mm
0.25 - 0 - 0.25 in
0.0 - 0.5 in
Custom
5-0-5 mm
0-10 mm
10-0-10 mm
0-20 mm
0.25 - 0 - 0.25 in
0.0 - 0.5 in
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 in
0.0 - 1.0 in
Custom
The Gap Full-scale Ranges are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
31
Clamp Value
value is bypassed or defeated (For example, when a problem occurs with the
full-scale range values. Only the values available from the Communication
Gateway and Display Modules are clamped to the specified value when the
proportional value is invalid.
Recorder Output
(3500/42).
OK Mode
Latching
If a channel is configured for Latching OK, once the channel has gone not
OK the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. Latched not OK may be
reset by using one of the following methods:
Nonlatching
The OK status of the channel will track the defined OK status of the
transducer.
An option that prevents a channel from returning to an OK status until that
channel's transducer has remained in an OK state for the specified period of
time. If the option is enabled, the time is set to 10 seconds. The option protects
against false trips caused by intermittent transducers.
Delay
Alert
60) for available proportional values.
Danger
screen.
32
100 ms option
following results:

The Danger time delay can be set for all available proportional values.

table.
Adjust Button
Adjust the Zero Position voltage. When this button is clicked a utility starts that
Transducer
The following transducer types are available for the Differential Expansion
Channel:
Nonstandard
33
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor for
transducers. If Nonstandard is
selected as the transducer type, the
OK Limits can also be adjusted. The
Nonstandard transducer's scale
factor must be between 8.5 and 23
mV/mil. Also, there must be at least
2 volts between the Upper and Lower
OK Limits.
Scale Factor
Transducer
Without Barriers
25 mm
20 mV/mil
35 mm
20 mV/mil
50 mm
10 mV/mil
OK Limits
Transducer
34
25 mm
Upper
(V)
-12.55
Lower
(V)
-1.35
Center Gap Voltage

(V)
-6.95
35 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.95
50 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.95
Alarm Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
When an alarm is active, it will go inactive as soon as the proportional value
Upscale Direction
Towards or away from the probe mounting. This field defines whether rotor
movement toward or away from the differential expansion probe corresponds to
a more positive differential expansion reading (for example upscale on a bar
graph). If this field is set to "Toward Probe", then as the rotor moves toward the
differential expansion probe the differential expansion direct proportional value
will increase and go upscale on a bar graph.
3.1.5
Eccentricity Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Eccentricity Channel.
3.1.5.1
Eccentricity Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring an Eccentricity Channel:
Internal Barrier I/O Modules are not currently supported with 7200 11 mm, 14
mm, or 3000 Proximitors or the 3300 16 mm HTPS.
If a Keyphasor channel is selected, a Keyphasor Module must be installed in
the rack.
The full-scale options allowed for each proportional value is dependent upon
External barriers are not currently supported with 7200 11mm and 14mm
Proximitors or 3300 16mm HTPS.
35
36

may be configured as Eccentricity and Channels 3 and 4 may be configured
as Thrust Position).
The Peak to Peak proportional value is disabled when "No Keyphasor" is
selected on the Four Channel Proximitor Monitor screen.
The Latching OK Mode and the Timed OK Channel Defeat options are not
compatible.
3.1.5.2
Eccentricity Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Eccentricity Channel
CP Mod
details.
configuring.
37
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack. This fields is always
Standard rack.
Enable
Peak to Peak
The difference between the positive and negative extremes of the rotor bow.
This proportional value is only available when a Keyphasor channel has been
selected. This value may be displayed in mils or m.
Direct
The instantaneous eccentricity value. The direct value can be displayed
three ways:
At shaft rotative speeds greater than 600 rpm, the direct value is the average
distance between the probe tip and the shaft and is displayed in a way
similar to a thrust measurement. This direct measurement is displayed only
when Direct Channel Above 600 RPM is enabled.
At shaft rotative speeds between 600 rpm and the rpm setting for
Instantaneous Crossover, the direct measurement consists of two values:
a maximum and minimum value relative to a zero reference. These two
direct values are called Direct Max and Direct Min.
At shaft rotative speeds less than the rpm setting for Instantaneous
Crossover, the direct measurement consists of an instantaneous
measurement relative to a zero reference. This type of direct measurement
is called instantaneous gap.
Instantaneous Crossover
The value for shaft rotative speed where the direct eccentricity measurement
changes from Direct Max/ Direct Min to instantaneous gap. The value for
Instantaneous Crossover must be between 1 and 10 rpm.
Gap
polarity convention dictates that a decreasing gap results in an increasing (less
negative) output signal.
38
Peak to Peak Full Scale Ranges by transducer type

3300XL 8mm
3300 - 5 mm, 8 mm Proximitor
3300 - 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-30 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-500 m pp
Custom
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-30 mil pp
0-50 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-500 m pp
0-1000 m pp
Custom
Direct Full Scale Ranges by transducer type

3300XL 8mm
3300 - 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
5-0-5 mil
10-0-10 mil
20-0-20 mil
30-0-30 mil
100-0-100 m
200-0-200 m
500-0-500 m
Custom
5-0-5 mil
10-0-10 mil
20-0-20 mil
30-0-30 mil
50-0-50 mil
100-0-100 m
200-0-200 m
500-0-500 m
1000-0-1000 m
Custom
The Gap values are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
39
Clamp Value
value is bypassed or defeated (For example when a problem occurs with the
transducer). The selected value can be between the minimum and
maximum full-scale range values. Only the values available from the
Communication Gateway and Display Modules are clamped to the specified
value when the proportional value is invalid.
Recorder Output
(3500/42).
Delay
Alert
Danger
screen.
100 ms option
following results:

The Danger time delay can be set for any two available proportional
values.

Direct Channel Above 600 RPM
These options are only available when a Keyphasor channel has been
selected.
40
Disabled
Display and alarming of the Direct proportional value will be disabled when
the shaft rotative speed exceeds 600 rpm.
Enabled
Display and alarming of the Direct proportional value will remain active when
shaft rotative speed exceeds 600 rpm.
table.
Adjust Button
Transducer
The following transducer types are available for the Eccentricity Channel
3300XL 8 mm Proximitor
3300 - 5 mm Proximitor
3300 - 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
The following transducer types are available for the Eccentricity Channel
3300XL 8 mm Proximitor
Nonstandard
41
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor for transducers. If Nonstandard is selected
as the transducer type, the OK Limits can also be adjusted. The
Nonstandard transducer's scale factor must be between 85 and 230 mV/mil.
Also, there must be at least 2 volts between the Upper and Lower OK Limits.
42
Transducer
Scale Factor
Without
Barriers
With Bently Nevada

Internal Barriers
3300XL 8 mm
3300 5 mm,
3300 8 mm,
7200 5 mm,
7200 8 mm
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
With nonBently Nevada

Barriers
192 mV/mil
7200 11 mm
100 mV/mil
3300 16 mm,
7200 14 mm
100 mV/mil

OK Limits
Upper
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
W/O
Barrier
s
(V)
W/
Barrier
s
(V)
W/O
Barrier
s
(V)
W/
Barrier
s
(V)
W/O
Barriers
(V)
W/
Barriers
(V)
3300 5mm,
3300 8mm,
7200 5mm,
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 16mm,
7200 14mm
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
-3.55
-11.6
Transducer
43
Alarm Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
Barriers
OK Mode
Latching
OK the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. Latched not OK may be
reset by using one of the following methods:
Nonlatching
transducer.

44
3.2
Setpoints
This section specifies the available setpoints for each type of channel. A
setpoint is the level within the full-scale range that determines when an alarm
occurs. The 3500 Monitoring System allows Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints to be set for
every proportional value on each channel. The channel will drive an Alert/Alarm
1 indication if one or more of the channel proportional values exceeds its
setpoints. The 3500 Monitoring System also allows up to four Danger/Alarm 2
setpoints (two over setpoints and two under setpoints) to be set for up to two of
the proportional values. You may select any two of the available proportional
values for the channel if the 100 ms delay has not been selected.
Note
The setpoint over and under limits can only be placed within the OK Limits of
the specified transducer.
Use the following screen in the Rack Configuration Software to adjust

Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints. This screen will vary depending
upon the type of channel.
45
The following table shows the Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints

available for each channel pair type. The setpoint number is used in the
Communication Gateway and Display Modules.
Setpoint
Number
1
Radial
Vibration
Over Direct
Thrust
Position
Over Direct
Differential
Expansion
Over Direct
Peak to Peak
Over Gap
Under Direct
Under Direct
Over Gap
Under Gap
Over Gap
Over Gap
Under Gap
Over 1X
Ampl
Under 1X
Ampl
Over 1X
Phase Lag
Under 1X
Phase Lag
Over 2X
Ampl
Under 2X
Ampl
Over 2X
Phase Lag
Under 2X
Phase Lag
Over Not
1X Ampl
Over Smax
Ampl
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Under Gap
Under Gap
Over Direct Max
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Under Direct Max
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Eccentricity
Over Direct Min

Under Direct Min
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
All the Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints are provided first, followed by the configured
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints.
Example 1:
Radial Vibration with the Danger/Alarm 2 Over 2X Ampl setpoint and the
Danger/Alarm 2 Under 2X Ampl setpoint selected.
46
Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints:
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints:
setpoints 1 through 13
setpoint 14 is Over 2X Ampl (Danger)
setpoint 15 is Under 2X Ampl (Danger)
Example 2:
Thrust Position with the Danger/Alarm 2 Over Gap setpoint and the
Danger/Alarm 2 Under Gap setpoint selected.
3.3
setpoint 5 is Over Gap (Danger)
setpoint 6 is Under Gap (Danger)
Software Switches
The Proximitor Monitor supports two module software switches and four channel
software switches. These switches let you temporarily bypass or inhibit monitor
and channel functions. These may be set on the Software Switches screen
under the Utilities Option on the main screen of the Rack Configuration
Software.
47
Module Switches
Configuration Mode
A switch that allows the Proximitor Monitor to be configured. To configure
the monitor, enable ( ) this switch and set the key switch on the front of the
Rack Interface Module in the PROGRAM position. When downloading a
configuration from the Rack configuration Software, this switch will
automatically be enabled and disabled by the Rack Configuration Software. If
the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration process, use this
switch to remove the module from Configuration Mode.
Monitor Alarm Bypass

When enabled, the Proximitor Monitor does not perform alarming functions.
All proportional values are still provided.
The monitor switch number is used in the Comm. Gateway or Display Interface
Module.
Monitor Switch Number
Switch Name
1
Configuration Mode
Channel Switches
Alert Bypass
When enabled, the channel does not perform Alert alarming functions.
Danger Bypass
When enabled, the channel does not perform Danger alarming functions.
When enabled, all non-primary Alert alarms are inhibited.
Bypass
When enabled, the channel provides no alarming functions and supplies no
proportional values.
The channel switch number is used in the Comm. Gateway or Display Interface
Module.
Switch Name
48
Alert Bypass
Danger Bypass
Bypass
4.

The Proximitor I/O Module receives signals from the transducers and routes
the signals to the Proximitor Monitor. The I/O module also supplies power to the
transducers. Only one I/O module can be installed at any one time and must be
installed behind the Proximitor Monitor (in a Rack Mount or Panel Mount rack) or
above the Proximitor Monitor (in a Bulkhead rack).
In addition, Internal Barrier I/O Modules provide four channels of intrinsically safe
signal conditioning for Proximitor transducers. There are two internally mounted
zener barrier modules, one for each pair of transducer channels.
This section describes how to use the connectors on the I/O modules, lists what
cables to use, and shows the pin outs of the cables. The 3500 Field Wiring
Diagram Package (part number 130432-01) shows how to connect transducers
to the I/O module or the External Termination Block.
49
4.1
Proximitor I/O Module (Internal Termination)

Internal Termination I/O modules require you to wire each transducer to the I/O
module individually. This section shows what this Internal Termination I/O
module looks like and how to connect the wires to the Euro Style connector.
1) Connect the wires from the transducers

associated with Channels 1 and 2 to the
Proximitor I/O Module.
2) Connect the wires from the transducers

associated with Channels 3 and 4 to the
3) INHB/RET: Connect to an external switch.

Used to inhibit all non-primary Alert/Alarm
1 functions for all four channels.
50
4.2
Proximitor Internal Barrier I/O Module

Internal Barrier I/O modules require you to wire each transducer to the I/O
module individually. This section shows what this Internal Termination Barrier
I/O module looks like and how to connect the wires to the Euro Style connector.
1) Connect the wire from the transducers

associated with Channel 1 and 2 to the
Proximitor Barrier I/O Module.
2) Connect the wire from the transducers

associated with Channel 3 and 4 to the
Proximitor Barrier I/O Module.
3) INHB/RET: Connect to an external

switch. Used to inhibit all nonprimary
Alert/Alarm 1 functions for all four
channels.
51
4.2.1

Typical I/O module

Do not remove more than 6 mm (0.25 inches) of insulation from the wires.
52
4.3
Proximitor I/O Module (External Termination)

External Termination I/O modules let you simplify the wiring to the I/O modules
in a 3500 rack by using a 25-pin cable to route the signals from the four
transducers to the I/O module. This section describes the External Termination
I/O module, the External Termination Blocks, and the pin outs for the 25-pin
cable.
1) Connect the Proximitor I/O Module to the

Proximitor External Termination Block using
cable 129525-XXXX-XX.
53
4.3.1

The two types of External Termination Blocks used with a Proximitor I/O Module
are the Proximitor External Termination Block with Terminal Strip connectors and
with Euro Style connectors.
4.3.1.1
Proximitor External Termination Block (Terminal Strip connectors)
1) Connect the wires from the

transducers associated with
Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
Proximitor External Termination
Block. INHB/RET: Connect to an
external switch. Used to inhibit all
non-primary Alert/Alarm 1 functions
for all four channels.
2) Connect the Proximitor I/O Module
to the Proximitor External
Termination Block using cable
129525-XXXX-XX.
3) Channel 3 and Channel 4.
54
4.3.1.2
Proximitor External Termination Block (Euro Style connectors)
1) Connect the wires from the

Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 to
the Proximitor External
Termination Block.
INHB/RET: Connect to an
external switch. Used to
inhibit all non-primary
Alert/Alarm 1 functions for
all four channels.
2)
Connect the Proximitor I/O

Module to the Proximitor
External Termination Block
using cable 129525-XXXXXX.
3)
Channel 3 and Channel 4.
55
4.3.2
Cable Pin Outs

3500 Transducer Signal to External Termination Block Cable
56
5.
5 Maintenance
Maintenance
This section shows how to verify the operation of channels in a Proximitor
Monitor (Section 5.1) and how to adjust the scale factor (Section 5.2.1) and zero
position (Section 5.2.3), and how to upgrade firmware (Section 5.3).
5.1
Verifying a 3500 Rack Proximitor Monitor

Module
calibration. The functions of monitor channels, however, must be verified at
regular intervals. At each maintenance interval, we recommend that you use the
procedures in this section to verify the operation of all active channels in the
monitor. It is only necessary to verify the alarms and accuracy of channel
proportional values that are active.
Section
Number
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.1
58
5.1.2
58
5.1.3
59
5.1.4
60
5.1.5
Radial Vibration Channels
62
5.1.6
91
5.1.7
Thrust Position and Differential

Expansion Channels
Eccentricity Channels
102
5.1.8
115
57
5 Maintenance
5.1.1

the monitored machine is classified as critical
the 3500 rack is operating in a harsh environment such as in
extreme temperature, high humidity, or in a corrosive atmosphere.
5.1.2
Procedure 10012-1 to adjust the interval.

The verification procedures in this section require the following test equipment.
Power Supply (single channel)
Multimeter - 4 digits
Function Generator
100 F capacitor
40 k resistor
Bently Nevada Corporation TK 16 Keyphasor Multiplier/Divider or
equivalent (Instructions in this manual refer to the TK 16)
Additional -18 Vdc Supply for use with the TK 16
2 channel Oscilloscope
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Channels
Function Generator
100 F capacitor
40 k resistor
58
5.1.3
5 Maintenance

The following figure shows the typical test setup for verifying a Proximitor
Monitor. The test equipment is used to simulate the transducer signal and the
laptop computer is used to observe the output from the rack.
General layout for Maintenance

1) Test Equipment.
2) 3500 Rack.
3) Laptop Computer.
4) RS-232 Communications.
59
5 Maintenance
Transducers can be connected to a 3500 rack in a variety of ways. Depending on

the wiring option for the I/O module of your monitor, connect the test equipment
to the monitor using one of the following methods:
1) Proximitor Internal Barrier I/O Module (Internal Termination).

2) Proximitor I/O Module (Internal Termination).
3) External termination Block (Euro style connectors).
4) External Termination Block (Terminal Strip Connectors).
5) Connect test equipment here.
5.1.4

be familiar with the following features of the Rack Configuration Software.
upload, download, and save configuration files
enable and disable channels and alarms
bypass channels and alarms
display the Verification screen
Note
It is important to save the original rack configuration before doing any
Maintenance and/or Troubleshooting Procedures. It may be necessary
during these procedures to change setpoints, etc. which must be
restored to their original values at the conclusion of the procedures. At
that time the original configuration should be downloaded to the rack.
60
5 Maintenance
The following figures show how the Verification screen displays output from a
3500 rack:
1) OK Limit Verification Fields:

These fields display output for verifying OK limits.
2) Current Value Verification Fields:
The current proportional value is displayed in this box. These fields display output
for verifying channel output.
3) Alarm Verification Fields:
These fields display output for verifying channel alarms. Alert/Alarm 1 alarms are
displayed in yellow in the bar graph and with the word Alarm under the current
value box. Danger/Alarm 2 alarms are displayed in red in the bar graph and with
the word Alarm under the current value box.
Any channel bar graph value that enters Alert/Alarm 1 or Danger/Alarm 2 will
cause the alarm lines in the Channel Status box to indicate an alarm. Any
channel that enters alarm will cause the alarm lines in the Module Status box to
indicate an alarm.
61
5 Maintenance
Setpoints are indicated by lines on the bargraph display:

Danger/Alarm 2 Over = Solid Red Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Over = Solid Yellow Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Under = Dashed Yellow Line
Danger/Alarm 2 Under = Dashed Red Line
Zero Position Voltage:
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading on the
bar graph display and current value box to be zero. The Zero Position volts value
is displayed in the Z.P. Volts box above each channel value bar graph.
5.1.5

The following sections describe how to test alarms, verify channels, and test OK
limits for channels configured as Radial Vibration. The output values and alarm
setpoints are verified by varying the input vibration signal level (both peak to peak
amplitude and DC voltage bias) and observing that the correct results are
reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
Radial Vibration channels can be configured for the following channel values and
alarms:
Channel Values
Alarms
Over
Direct
Gap
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
5.1.5.1

Under

Test Equipment and Software Setup - Radial Vibration

The following test equipment and software set up can be used as the initial set up
needed for all the Radial Vibration channel verification procedures (Test Alarms,
Verify Channels, and Test OK Limits).
62
5 Maintenance
WARNING
High voltage present.
Contact could cause
shock, burns, or death.
Do not touch exposed
wires or terminals.
Application Alert
Tests will exceed alarm
setpoint levels causing
alarms to activate. This
could result in a relay
contact state change.
Application Alert
Disconnecting the field
wiring will cause a not OK
condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Radial Vibration

Simulate the transducer signal by connecting the power supply, function
generator, and multimeter to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as shown in
the figure on page 64(Radial Vibration Test Setup). Set the test equipment as
specified below.
Power
Supply
-7.00 Vdc
Function Generator
Keyphasor
Multiplier/Divider
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
Amplitude level: Minimum
(above zero)
Multiply Switch: 001

Divide Switch: 001
63
5 Maintenance
Radial Vibration Test Setup
The Test Equipment outputs should be floating relative to earth ground. For
external termination I/O modules, the test setup is identical except that the test
equipment outputs connect to the external termination block.
64
5 Maintenance
The equipment shown in the dashed box is required for 1X Amplitude and Phase,
2X Amplitude and Phase, Not 1X Amplitude, and Smax Amplitude.
1) Keyphasor Signal.
2) Keyphasor I/O Module.
3) 40 Kohm Resistor.
4) 100 uF Capacitor.
5) Keyphasor Multiplier/Divider.
6) Input Signal.
7) Multimeter.
8) Proximitor I/O Module.
9) Function Generator.
10) Power Supply.
Verification Screen Setup - Radial Vibration
Run the Rack Configuration Software on the test computer. Choose Verification
from the Utilities menu and choose the proper Slot number and Channel number
then click on the Verify button.
Note
Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled for Radial Vibration channels. It will take
30 seconds for a channel to return to the OK status from a not OK condition.
65
5 Maintenance
The following table directs you to the starting page of each maintenance section
associated with the Radial Vibration Channels:
Section
Number
5.1.5.2
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Direct
67
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Gap
68
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - 1X Amplitude
69
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - 1X Phase
70
5.1.5.2
71
5.1.5.2
73
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Not 1X Amplitude
74
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Smax Amplitude
75
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Direct
76
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Gap
78
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - 1X Amplitude
80
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - 1X Phase
81
5.1.5.3
83
5.1.5.3
84
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Not 1X Amplitude
86
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Smax Amplitude
87
5.1.5.4
Test OK Limits
89
Test Alarms - Radial Vibration

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the vibration and
Keyphasor signal with a function generator. The alarm levels are tested by
varying the vibration signal (both peak to peak amplitude and DC voltage bias)
and observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen on
the test computer. It is only necessary to test those alarm parameters that are
configured and being used. The general test procedure to verify current alarm
operation will include simulating a transducer input signal and varying this signal:
1. to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints and
2. to drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints and
3. to produce a nonalarm condition.
When varying the signal from an alarm condition to a nonalarm condition, alarm
hysteresis must be considered. Adjust the signal well below the alarm setpoint for
the alarm to clear.
66
5 Maintenance
Direct
1. Disconnect PWR, COM, and SIG field wiring from the channel terminals on
the Proximitor I/O Module.
2. Connect test equipment and run software as described in Section 5.1.5.1
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Radial Vibration).
3. Set the Keyphasor multiplier/divider so that the multiply setting is one and the
divide setting is one. Adjust the function generator amplitude to produce a
reading that is below the Direct setpoint levels on the Direct bar graph display
of the Verification screen.
4. Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM). Verify that the
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Direct is green and that the Current
Value Field contains no alarm indication.
5. Adjust the function generator amplitude such that the signal just exceeds the
Direct Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Direct
changes color from green to yellow and the Current Value Field indicates an
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Direct remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
still indicates an Alarm.
Direct Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
changes color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Direct remains red and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
9. Adjust the function generator amplitude such that the signal reads below the
Over Alarm setpoint levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe
that the bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green and that the
Current Value Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch
on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
10. If you cannot verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured setpoints. If
the monitor still does not alarm properly or fails any other part of this test, go
to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel Fails a Verification Test).
11. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the PWR, COM, and SIG field
wiring to the channel terminals on the Proximitor I/O Module. Verify that the
OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on
the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK LED.
67
5 Maintenance
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 for all configured channels.
Gap
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage that is within the Gap setpoint
levels on the Gap bar graph display of the Verification screen.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Gap is green, and that the Current
Value Field has no alarm indication.
5. Adjust the power supply voltage such that the signal just exceeds the Gap
Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm time
delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Gap changes color
from green to yellow and that the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Gap remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
7. Adjust the power supply such that the signal just exceeds the Gap Over
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm time
from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Gap remains red and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
9. Adjust the power supply voltage such that the signal reads below the Over
Alarm setpoint levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe that the
bar graph indicator for Gap changes color to green and that the Current Value
Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 to test the Under Alert/Alarm 1 and Under
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints by adjusting the power supply to exceed the Under
Alarm setpoint levels.
68
5 Maintenance
1X Amplitude (1X Ampl)
Note
The Keyphasor must be triggering and have a valid rpm value to check
this parameter.
reading that is within the 1X Ampl setpoint levels on the 1X Ampl bar graph
display of the Verification screen.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl is green, and that the
Current Value Field contains no alarm indication.
1X Ampl Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 to 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl remains yellow and that the Current Value
Field still indicates an Alarm.
1X Ampl Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 to 3 seconds after
the alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for 1X
Ampl changes color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field
indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl remains red and that the Current Value Field
69
5 Maintenance
that the bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl changes color to green and that the
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints by adjusting the function generator amplitude to
exceed the Under Alarm setpoint levels.
1X Phase
Note
If you cannot change the phase output, change the phase alarm setpoints to
activate the over and under phase alarms. The setpoints must be downloaded
to the monitor to take effect.
divide setting is one. Adjust the phase to produce a reading that is within the
1X Phase setpoint levels on the 1X Phase bar graph display of the Verification
screen.
Note
The 1X Amplitude needs to be a minimum of 100 mV to get a valid 1X Phase
reading.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for 1X Phase is green, and the Current
Value Field contains no alarm indication.
70
5 Maintenance
5. Adjust the phase such that the reading just exceeds the 1X Phase Over
Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm time
delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for 1X Phase changes
color from green to yellow and that the Current Value Field indicates an
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 1X Phase remains yellow and that the Current Value
Field indicates an Alarm.
color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 1X Phase remains red and that the Current Value Field
9. Adjust the phase such that the reading is below the Over Alarm setpoint
levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe that the bar graph
indicator for 1X Phase changes color to green and that the Current Value
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints by adjusting the phase to exceed the Under Alarm
setpoint levels.
Note
this parameter.
71
5 Maintenance

divide setting is two. Adjust the function generator amplitude to produce a
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for 2X Ampl is green, and the Current
2X Ampl Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait 2 or 3 seconds after the
changes color from green to yellow and that the Current Value Field indicates
an Alarm.
2X Ampl Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after
indicates an Alarm.
72
5 Maintenance
2X Phase
Note
If you cannot change the phase output, change the phase alarm setpoints to
divide setting is two. Adjust the phase to produce a reading that is within the
2X Phase setpoint levels on the 2X Phase bar graph display of the Verification
screen.
Note
The 2X Amplitude needs to be a minimum of 100 mV to get a valid 2X
Phase reading.
delay and verify that the bar graph indicator for 2X Phase changes color from
green to yellow and that the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 2X Phase remains red and that the Current Value Field
indicator for 2X Phase changes color to green and that the Current Value
73
5 Maintenance
setpoint levels.
OK LED comes on and that the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch
on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK LED.
Not 1X Amplitude (Not 1X)
Note
The Keyphasor must be triggering and have a valid rpm value to check this
parameter.
reading that is below the Not 1X setpoint levels on the Not 1X bar graph
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Not 1X is green, and that the
Current Value Field has no alarm indication.
Not 1X Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Not 1X
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Not 1X remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
Not 1X Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
74
5 Maintenance
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Not 1X remains red and that the Current Value Field
that the bar graph indicator for Not 1X changes color to green and that the
Smax Amplitude
Note
The Keyphasor must be triggering and have a valid RPM value to check this
parameter.
1. Disconnect PWR, COM, and SIG field wiring from the channel pair terminals
on the Proximitor I/O Module.
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Radial Vibration). Smax requires
input connections to both channel 1 and 2 or channel 3 and 4.
3. Adjust the function generator amplitude to produce a reading that is below the
Smax setpoint levels on the Smax bar graph display of the Verification screen.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Smax is green, and the Current
Smax Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Smax
an Alarm.
75
5 Maintenance
bar graph indicator for Smax remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
Smax Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Smax remains red and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
that the bar graph indicator for Smax changes color to green and that the
wiring to the channel pair terminals on the Proximitor I/O Module. Verify that
the OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Radial Vibration

The general approach for testing channel values is to simulate the vibration and
Keyphasor input signal with a function generator. The output values are verified
by varying the input vibration signal level (both peak to peak amplitude and DC
voltage bias) and observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification
screen on the test computer.
Note
These parameters have an accuracy specification of 1% of full scale
for amplitude and 3 degrees for phase.
Direct
76
5 Maintenance

3. Calculate the full-scale voltage according to the equation and examples

shown below. Adjust the amplitude of the function generator to the calculated
voltage.
Full-scale Voltage = Direct Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
Use the Transducer Scale Factor displayed in the Scale Factor Box on the
Verification Screen.
Example1:
Direct Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Transducer Scale Factor = 200 mV/mil
Full Scale = ( 10 X 0.200 )
= 2.000 V pp
For V rms input:
V rms = ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( V pp ), for a sinewave input
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2 )
= 0.707 V rms
Example 2:
Direct Meter Top Scale = 200 m
Transducer Scale Factor = 7,874 mV/mm
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X 0.007874 )
= 1.5748 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 1.574 )
= 0.5566 V rms
divide setting is one. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and the Current
Value Box is reading 1% of full scale.
5. If the reading does not meet specifications, check that the input signal is
correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications or fails any other part
of this test, go to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel Fails a Verification Test).
77
5 Maintenance
OK LED comes on and that the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch
Gap
3. If Gap is configured to read in volts, adjust the power supply to produce a
voltage equal to -18.00 Vdc on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap
bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1% of -18.00 Vdc.
4. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to mid-scale on the Gap
bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and the Current
Value Box is reading 1% of the mid-scale value. Go to step 9.
5. If Gap is configured to read in displacement units, calculate the full-scale
and bottom-scale voltage using the following equation:
Note
Use the Transducer Scale Factor displayed in the Scale Factor Box on
the Verification Screen.
Gap Full-Scale =
Gap Zero Position Volts + (Gap Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale
Factor)
Example 1:
Scale Range is 15-0-15 mil (Gap Top Scale = 15 mil)
Gap Zero Position Volts = -9.75 Vdc
Gap Full Scale input = -9.75 Vdc + ( 15 X 0.200 )
= -6.75 Vdc
78
5 Maintenance
Example 2:
= 7.874 mV/m
Scale Range is 300-0-300 um (Gap Top Scale = 300 m )
Gap Full Scale input = -9.75 Vdc + ( 300 X 0.007874 )
= -7.3878 Vdc
Gap Bottom-Scale =
Gap Zero Position Volts - (Gap Meter Bottom Scale X Transducer Scale
Factor)
Example 1:
Scale Range is 15-0-15 mil (Gap Bottom Scale = 15 mil)
Gap Bottom Scale input
= -9.75 Vdc - ( 15 X 0.200 )

= -12.75 Vdc
Example 2:
Transducer Scale Factor
= 7,874 mV/mm
= 7.874 mV/m
Scale Range is 300-0-300 um (Gap Bottom Scale = 300 m )
= -9.75 Vdc - ( 300 X 0.007874 )

= -12.1122 Vdc
6. Adjust the power supply voltage to match the voltage displayed in the Gap
Zero Position Volts Box. The Gap bar graph display and the Current Value
Box should read 0 mil (0 mm) 1%.
7. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to top scale (from step 3)
on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and the
Current Value Box is reading 1% of top scale.
8. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to bottom scale (from step
3) on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and
the Current Value Box is reading 1% of bottom scale.
79
5 Maintenance
Note
this parameter.
shown below. Adjust the function generator amplitude to the calculated
voltage.
Full-scale Voltage = 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
Example1:
1X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale
= ( 10 X 0.200 )
= 2.000 V pp
For V rms input:

V rms = ( 0.707 / 2 ) X
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X
= 0.707 V rms
Example 2:
1X Ampl Meter Top Scale
Transducer Scale Factor
( V pp ), for a sinewave input

( 2 )
= 200 m
= 7,874 mV/mm
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X 0.007874 )

= 1.5748 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 1.574 )
= 0.5566 V rms
80
5 Maintenance
divide setting is one. Verify that the 1X Ampl bar graph display and the
Current Value Box is reading 1% of full scale.
1X Phase
Note
If the test equipment is not capable of changing the phase output to a known
value, use the following procedure. If your test equipment can change the
phase output to a known value, use the procedure on page 82.
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Radial Vibration). Set the Keyphasor
multiplier/divider so that the multiply setting is one and the divide setting is
one.
3. Attach one channel of a two channel oscilloscope to the vibration signal
buffered output and attach the other channel to the associated Keyphasor
signal buffered output and observe the two signals simultaneously.
4. Measure the phase. 1X Phase will be measured from the leading edge of the
Keyphasor pulse to the first positive peak of the vibration signal. See the
example below (on page 82) which illustrates a phase of 45. Observe the 1X
Phase bar graph display and the Current Value Box; it should read
approximately what was measured above.
81
5 Maintenance
Example (1X = one cycle of vibration signal per shaft revolution):
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1X Vibration Signal.
Keyphasor Signal.
Time Scale.
0 degree mark.
One Shaft Revolution = One Cycle.
360 degree mark.
Shown Phase Lag = 45 degrees.
Note
If the test equipment has the capability to change the phase output to a known value, use
the following procedures.
one.
82
5 Maintenance
3. Adjust the phase for mid-scale. Verify that the 1X Phase bar graph display
and the Current Value Box is reading 1.5% of mid-scale.
4. If the reading does not meet specifications, double check the input signal to
ensure it is correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications fails any
other part of this test, go to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel Fails a Verification
Test).
Note
The Keyphasor must be triggering and have a valid rpm value to check this parameter.
voltage.
Full-scale Voltage = 2X Ampl Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
Example1:
Full Scale = ( 10 X 0.200 )
= 2.000 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2 )
= 0.707 V rms
83
5 Maintenance
Example 2:
2X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X 0.007874 )
= 1.5748 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 1.574 )
= 0.5566 V rms
divide setting is two. Verify that the 2X Ampl bar graph display and the
Current Value Box is reading 1% of full scale.
2X Phase
Note
two.
3. Attach one channel of the two-channel oscilloscope to the vibration signal
example below (on page 85) which illustrates a phase of 90. Observe the 2X
84
5 Maintenance
Phase bar graph display and the Current Value Box; it should read
Example (2X = two cycles of vibration signal per shaft revolution):
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
0 Degree Mark.
First Cycle.
One Shaft Revolution.
Second Cycle.
2X Vibration Signal.
Phase Lag = 90 Degrees.
Keyphasor Signal.
360 Degree Mark.
Time Scale.
2X Phase
Note
If the test equipment has the capability to change the phase output to a
known value, use the following procedure.
85
5 Maintenance

two.
and the Current Value Box is reading 1.5% of mid-scale.
ensure it is correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications or fails
any other part of this test, go to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel Fails a Verification
Test).
Not 1X Amplitude
Note
parameter.
3. Calculate the full-scale voltage according to the equation and example shown
below. Adjust the function generator amplitude to the calculated voltage.
Full-scale Voltage =
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
86
5 Maintenance
Example1:
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale = ( 10 X 0.200 )
= 2.000 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2 )
= 0.707 V rms
Example 2:
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X 0.007874 )
= 1.5748 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 1.574 )
= 0.5566 V rms
divide setting is two. Verify that the Not 1X bar graph display and the Current
Value Box is reading 1% of full scale.
Smax Amplitude
Note
parameter.
on the Proximitor I/O Module.
87
5 Maintenance

3. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the equation and example shown below.
Full-scale Voltage =
( Smax Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor ) X 1.414
Note
Example1:
Smax Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale = ( 10 X 0.200 ) X 1.414
= 2.828 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2.828 )
= 0.999 V rms
Example 2:
Smax Meter Top Scale = 200 m
Transducer Sacle Factor = 7,874 mV/mm
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X .007874 ) X 1.414
= 2.2267 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2.2267 )
= 0.7871 V rms
4. Set the Keyphasor multiplier/divider so that the multiply setting is set to one
and the divide setting is set to one. Adjust the function generator amplitude
for full scale. Verify that the Smax bar graph display and the Current Value
Box is reading 1% of full scale.
88
5 Maintenance
wiring to the channel pair terminals on the Proximitor I/O Module. Verify that
5.1.5.4
Test OK Limits
The general approach for testing OK limits is to input a DC voltage and adjust it
above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This will cause a
channel not OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize). The
Upper and Lower OK limits are displayed in the Verification screen on the test
computer.
3. Bypass all other configured channels.
4. Adjust the power supply voltage to -7.00 Vdc.
monitor OK LED is on and that the Channel OK State line in the Channel
Status box of the Verification screen reads OK.
Note
If the Danger Bypass has been activated, then the BYPASS LED will be
on. All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the relay
to be energized.
6. Verify that the OK relay on the Rack Interface I/O Module indicates OK
(energized). See 3500/20 Rack Interface Module Operation and Maintenance
Manual, part number 129768-01.
7. Increase the power supply voltage (more negative) until the OK LED just goes
off (upper limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the Channel Status
box reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify that the
Upper OK limit voltage displayed on the Verification screen is equal to or
more positive than the input voltage.
8. Decrease the power supply voltage (less negative) to -7.00 Vdc.
89
5 Maintenance
OK LED comes back on and the OK relay energizes. Verify that the Channel
OK State line in the Channel Status box reads OK.
10. Gradually decrease the power supply voltage (less negative) until the OK LED
just goes off (lower limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the
Channel Status box reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK.
Verify that the Lower OK limit voltage displayed on the Verification screen is
equal to or more negative than the input voltage.
11. Increase the power supply voltage (more negative) to -7.00 Vdc.
OK LED comes back on, the OK relay energizes, and that the Channel OK
State line in the Channel Status box reads OK.
13. If you cannot verify any configured OK limit, go to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel
Fails a Verification Test).
wiring to the channel terminals on the Monitor I/O Module. Press the RESET
switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) and verify that the OK LED comes
on and the OK relay energizes.
16. Return the bypass switch for all configured channels to their original setting.
90
5 Maintenance
Radial Vibration Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(Volts)
Upper OK Limit
(Volts)
3300XL 8 mm w/ barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3300XL 8 mm w/o barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3300 RAM w/o barriers
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.5 to -12.6
3300 RAM w/ barriers
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.1 to -12.2
3300 8 mm w/ barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3300 8 mm w/o barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
-3.5 to -3.6
-19.6 to -19.7
7200 5&8 mm w/o barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
7200 5&8 mm w/ barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3000 (-24V) w/o barriers
-3.2 to -3.3
-15.7 to -15.8
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.0 to -12.1
Note: Assume 50 mV accuracy for check tolerance.
5.1.6

limits for channels configured as Thrust Position and Differential Expansion. The
output values and alarm setpoints are verified by varying the input DC voltage
from a power supply and observing that the correct results are reported in the
Verification screen on the test computer.
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion channels can be configured for the
following channel values and alarms:
Channel Values
Alarms
Over
Under
Direct
Gap
91
5 Maintenance
5.1.6.1
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Thrust Position and Differential

Expansion
The following test equipment and software setup can be used as the initial setup
needed for all the Thrust Position and Differential Expansion channel verification
procedures (Test Alarms, Verify Channels, and Test OK Limits).
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.
Application Alert
Disconnecting field wiring
will cause a not OK
condition.
92
Application Alert
5 Maintenance
Test Equipment Setup - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

Simulate the transducer signal by connecting power supply (output terminals) and
multimeter (input terminals) to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as shown
in the figure on page 93(Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Test Setup).
1) Proximitor I/O
Module.
2) Internal Barrier
I/O Module.
3) Multimeter.
4) Power Supply.
ThHrust Position and Differential Expansion Test Setup: The Test Equipment
outputs should be floating relative to earth ground. For external termination I/O
modules, the test setup is identical except that the test equipment outputs are
connected to the external termination block.
Verification Screen Setup - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion
93
5 Maintenance
associated with the Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Channels.
Section
Number
5.1.6.2
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.6.2
94
5.1.6.2
Test Alarms - Gap
95
5.1.6.3
97
5.1.6.3
99
5.1.6.4
Test OK Limits
100
Test Alarms - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the Thrust
Position and Differential Expansion signal with a power supply. The alarm levels
are tested by varying the DC voltage and observing that the correct results are
reported in the Verification screen on the test computer. It is only necessary to
test those alarm parameters that are configured and being used. The general
test procedure to verify current alarm operation will include simulating a
transducer input signal and varying this signal:
Direct
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Thrust Position and Differential
Expansion).
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage that is within the Direct setpoint
levels on the Direct bar graph display of the Verification screen.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Direct is green, and that the Current
5. Adjust the power supply voltage such that the signal just exceeds the Direct
delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Direct changes color
94
5 Maintenance
7. Adjust the power supply such that the signal just exceeds the Direct Over
indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green and that the Current
Value Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on the
Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
Gap
Expansion).
levels on the Gap bar graph display.
95
5 Maintenance
Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds until the alarm time
indicates an Alarm.
11. If you cannot verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured setpoints
and the status of Trip Multiply. If the monitor still does not alarm properly or
fails any other part of this test, go to Section 5.1.8 (If a Channel Fails a
Verification Test).
5.1.6.3
Verify Channel Values - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the Thrust
Position and Differential Expansion signal with a power supply. The output values
are verified by varying the input DC voltage and observing that the correct results
are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
96
5 Maintenance
Direct
Expansion).
3. Calculate the full-scale and bottom scale values. These values can be
calculated in the following way:
Full-scale Value, Bottom Scale Value =
Zero Position Voltage (Transducer Scale Factor X Scale Range)
Note
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading
on the bar graph display and the Current Value Box to be zero. The
Zero Position Volts value is displayed in the Z.P. Volts box above each
channel value bar graph.
Note
If the bottom scale range is zero (for example 0 to 80 mil), use the Fullscale Value formula.
Note
If Upscale direction ( Normal for Thrust, Long for Differential Expansion ) is

toward the probe:
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor X Top Meter Scale )
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor X ABS( Bottom Meter
Scale)
97
5 Maintenance
Example 1 :
Transducer scale factor = 200 mV/mil
Meter scale range = 25 - 0 - 25 mil
Zero Position Voltage = - 9.75 Vdc
Full Scale Value = ( -9.75 ) + ( 0.200 X 25 )
= -4.75 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= ( -9.75 ) - ( 0.200 X 25 )
= -14.75 Vdc
Example 2 :
Transducer scale factor = 7,874 mV/mm
Meter scale range = 1 - 0 - 1 mm
Zero Position Voltage = -10.16 Vdc
Full Scale Value = ( -10.16 ) + ( 7.874 X 1 )
= -2.286 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= ( -10.16 ) - ( 7.874 X 1 )
= -18.03 Vdc
If Upscale direction (Normal for Thrust, Long for Differential Expansion ) is

away from the probe:
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor X Top Meter Scale )
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor X ABS( Bottom Meter
Scale )
Example 1 :
Full Scale Value = ( -9.75 ) - ( 0.200 X 25 )
= -14.75 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
98
= ( -9.75 ) + ( 0.200 X 25 )
= -4.75 Vdc
5 Maintenance
Example 2 :
Meter scale range = 1 - 0 - 1 mm
= -18.03 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= ( -10.16 ) + ( 7.874 X 1 )
= -2.286 Vdc
4. Adjust the power supply voltage to match the voltage displayed in the Z.P.
Volts box. The Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box should
read 0 mil (0 mm) 1%.
5. Adjust the power supply voltage for the calculated full scale. Verify that the
Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1% of full
scale.
6. Adjust the power supply voltage for the calculated bottom scale. Verify that
the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1% of
bottom scale.
Gap
Expansion).
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to -18.00 Vdc on the Gap
Value Box is reading 1% of -18.00 Vdc.
99
5 Maintenance
5. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to the mid-scale on the
Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and Current
Value Box is reading 1% of the mid-scale value.
5.1.6.4
Test OK Limits - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

computer.
Expansion).
Note
on. All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the OK
relay to be energized.
100
5 Maintenance

OK LED comes back on and the OK relay energizes and that the Channel OK
OK LED comes back on, the OK relay energizes, and that the Channel OK
16. Return the bypass switch for all configured channels back to their original
settings.
101
5 Maintenance
Thrust Position Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(Volts)
-1.23 to -1.33
Upper OK Limit
(Volts)
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.05 to -1.15
*
-1.23 to -1.33
-1.11 to -1.21
-18.15 to -18.25
-1.0 to -1.1
*
-1.11 to -1.21
-1.23 to -1.33
-12.3 to -12.4
-13.09 to -13.19
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.05 to -1.15
*
-1.23 to -1.33
-1.6 to -1.7
-18.15 to -18.25
-18.0 to -18.1
-3.50 to -3.60
-20.34 to -20.44
7200 5 & 8 mm w/o barriers
-1.23 to -1.33
-18.99 to -19.09
7200 5 & 8 mm w/ barriers
-18.15 to -18.25
-1.05 to -1.15
*
-1.23 to -1.33
-2.2 to -2.3
-1.11 to -1.21
-13.09 to -13.19
-16.8 to -16.9

*
: BNC Internal Barrier I/O Module.
Differential Expansion Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
25 mm w/o barriers
Lower OK Limit
(Volts)
-1.30 to -1.40
Upper OK Limit
(Volts)
-12.5 to -12.6
35 mm w/o barriers
-1.30 to -1.40
-12.5 to -12.6
50 mm w/o barriers
-1.30 to -1.40
-12.5 to -12.6
5.1.7
limits for channels configured as Eccentricity. The output values and alarm
setpoints are verified by varying the input Eccentricity signal level (both peak to
peak amplitude and DC voltage bias) and observing that the correct results are
102
5 Maintenance
Eccentricity channels can be configured for the following channel values and
alarms:
Channel Values
Alarms
Over
5.1.7.1
Under
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Eccentricity

needed for all the Eccentricity channel verification procedures (Test Alarms,
WARNING
Contact could cause
Application Alert

wires or terminals.
Application Alert
Disconnecting field
wiring will cause a not
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Eccentricity
generator, and multimeter to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as shown in
the figure on page 104 (Eccentricity Test Setup). Set the test equipment as
specified below:
103
5 Maintenance
Eccentricity Test Setup: The Test Equipment outputs should be floating relative to
earth ground. For external termination I/O modules, the test setup is identical
except that the test equipment outputs connect to the external termination block.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
104
Multimeter.
Internal Barrier I/O Module.
Power Supply.
Input Signal.
6) Function Generator.
7) Keyphasor Signal.
8) Keyphasor I/O Module.
9) Resistor, 40 Kohm.
10) Capacitor, 100 uFarad.
5 Maintenance
Power Supply
-7.00 Vdc
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 5 Hz
Amplitude level: Minimum (Above Zero)
Verification Screen Setup - Eccentricity

Note
If the Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled, the OK LED will not come on
immediately after you connect the test equipment. It will take 60 seconds for a
channel to return to the OK status from not OK. If OK mode is configured for
latching, press the RESET button on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to return
to the OK status.
associated with the Eccentricity Channels.
Section
Number
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.7.2
Test Alarms - Peak to Peak
106
5.1.7.2
Test Alarms - Gap
107
5.1.7.2
108
5.1.7.3
Verify Channel Values - Peak to Peak
109
5.1.7.3
110
5.1.7.3
111
5.1.7.4
Test OK Limits
113
105
5 Maintenance
5.1.7.2
Test Alarms - Eccentricity

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the eccentricity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The alarm levels are tested by
varying the output from the test equipment and observing that the correct results
are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer. It is only necessary
to test those alarm parameters that are configured and being used. The general
Peak to Peak
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Eccentricity).
3. Adjust the function generator amplitude such that the signal level does not
exceed any setpoint value for the pp mil bar graph.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for pp is green, and the Current Value
Field has no alarm indication.
pp Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for pp changes color
bar graph indicator for pp remains yellow and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
pp Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for pp changes
bar graph indicator for pp remains red and the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
that the bar graph indicator for pp changes color to green and that the Current
106
5 Maintenance
OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the
Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK LED.
Gap
indicates an Alarm.
107
5 Maintenance
Direct
Note
this parameter.
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a reading that is within the Direct setpoint
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Direct is green, and the Current
108
5 Maintenance
indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green and that the Current
5.1.7.3
Verify Channel Values - Eccentricity

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the eccentricity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The output levels are verified
by varying the output from the test equipment and observing that the correct
results are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
Peak to Peak
3. Calculate the full-scale voltage according to the following equation and
examples. Adjust the function generator amplitude.
Verification Input Signal =
Peak to Peak Meter Full-scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
109
5 Maintenance
Example1:
Peak to Peak Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale = ( 10 X 0.200 )
= 2.000 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 2 )
= 0.707 V rms
Example 2:
Peak to Peak Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = ( 200 X 0.007874 )
= 1.5748 V pp
For V rms input:
= ( 0.707 / 2 ) X ( 1.574 )
= 0.5566 V rms
4. Adjust the function generator amplitude for the calculated full scale. Verify
that the pp bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1% of full
scale.
of this test, go to Section 5.1.8(If a Channel Fails a Verification Test).
Gap
110
5 Maintenance
Value Box is reading 1% of -18.00 Vdc.
bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and Current Value
Box is reading 1% of the mid-scale value.
Direct
Note
this parameter.
3. Calculate the full scale and bottom scale values. These values can be
Full / Bottom Scale Value =
Zero Position Voltage (Transducer Scale Factor X Scale Range)
111
5 Maintenance
Note
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading
on the bar graph display and the Current Value Box to be zero. The Zero
Position Volts value is displayed in the Z.P. Volts box above each channel
value bar graph.
Note
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor X Top Meter Scale)
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor X ABS Bottom Meter
Scale )
Example 1 :
= -13.75 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= ( -9.75 ) + ( 0.200 X 20 )
= -5.75 Vdc
Example 2 :
= 7.874 mV/m
Meter scale range = 200 - 0 - 200 m
= -11.3248 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= ( -9.75 ) + ( 0.007874 X 200 )

= -8.1752 Vdc
Volts Box. The Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box should
read 0 mil (0 mm) 1%.
112
5 Maintenance
5. Adjust the power supply voltage for full scale. Verify that the Max value in the
Current Value Box (the value on the left of the divider bar) is reading 1% of
full scale.
6. Adjust the power supply voltage for bottom scale. Verify that the Min value in
the Current Value Box (the value on the right of the divider bar) is reading
1% of bottom scale.
8. Disconnect the power supply and multimeter and reconnect the PWR, COM,
and SIG field wiring to the channel terminals on the Proximitor I/O Module.
Verify that the OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the
RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK LED.
5.1.7.4
Test OK Limits - Eccentricity

computer.
Note
on. All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the relay
to be energized.
113
5 Maintenance
OK LED comes back on, the OK relay energizes, and the Channel OK State
line in the Channel Status box reads OK.
wiring to the channel 1 terminals on the Monitor I/O Module. Press the
RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) and verify that the OK
LED comes on and the OK relay energizes.
setting.
114
5 Maintenance
Eccentricity Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(Volts)
-1.23 to -1.33
Upper OK Limit
(Volts)
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.05 to -1.15
-18.15 to -18.25
-1.23 to -1.33
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.05 to -1.15
-18.15 to -18.25
-1.6 to -1.7
-18.0 to -18.1
-3.50 to -3.60
-20.34 to -20.44
-1.23 to -1.33
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.05 to -1.15
-18.15 to -18.25
5.1.8

When handling or replacing circuit boards always be sure to adequately protect
strap and work on a grounded conductive work surface.
1. Save the configuration for the module using the Rack Configuration Software.
2. Replace the module with a spare. Refer to the installation section in the 3500
129766-01).
3. Return the faulty board to Bently Nevada Corporation for repair.
115
5 Maintenance
5.2
Adjusting the Scale Factor and the Zero

Position
This section shows how to adjust the transducer scale factor and the transducer
position, or "zero". The Scale Factor Adjustment can be used to accommodate
any deviations in transducer scale factor as measured on the installed
transducers. Do not use the procedure to compensate for any errors within the
monitor and the I/O module. If a monitor does not meet specifications, exchange
it with a spare and return the faulty module to Bently Nevada Corporation for
repair. The newly installed spare module should be properly configured and
tested.
Adjusting the scale factor affects the readings of all configured parameters
associated with the channel. If you change the scale factor, be sure to use the
new value when calculating inputs for verification of channel values.
The Zero Position Adjustment is used for Thrust, Eccentricity, and Differential
Expansion measurements as well as for Gap measurements when Gap is
configured to read in displacement units (not volts). Adjust the zero position after
the probe is gapped and its target is in the proper position.
Both adjustment procedures consist of using the Rack Configuration Software to
upload the configuration from the rack, change the setting for scale factor or zero
position, and then downloading the new configuration back to the rack. You can
adjust these settings using the following two methods:
enter a new value in the scale factor box on the transducer screen or the
zero position box on the Channel Options screen
use Adjust to get immediate feedback from the channel on the Verification
screen
The advantage of using the Verification screen is that you can use the bar graphs
to see the effect of your adjustments on the output signals of the channel. The
following procedures show how to use the methods.
5.2.1
Adjusting the Scale Factor

1.
Connect the configuring computer to the rack using one of the methods
listed in the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide
(part number 129777-01).
2.
Run the Rack Configuration Software.
3. Initiate communication with the rack by clicking on the Connect option in the
File menu and then selecting the connection method that you used in step 1.
4. Upload the configuration from the rack by clicking on the Upload option in the
File menu.
5. Click on the Options button on the 3500 System Configuration screen.
116
5 Maintenance
6. Select the monitor you want to adjust. The Monitor screen will appear.
7. Select the Options button under the appropriate Channel. The configured
Channel Options screen will appear.
8. Select the Customize button in the Transducer Selection box. A Transducer
screen will appear.
9. Enter a value for scale factor in the Scale Factor box. If you go to the
Verification screen by selecting Adjust, you can adjust the scale factor and
see the results.
10. Return to the 3500 System Configuration screen by clicking on the OK
buttons of the successive screens. The new scale factor is now added to the
configuration for this channel.
11. Download the new configuration to the appropriate monitor by selecting
Download from the File menu. The new setting for scale factor will take
effect when the "Download successful" prompt appears.
5.2.2
Zero Position Adjustment Description

When adjusting the Zero Position voltage, you
are defining the transducer voltage
corresponding to the position of the zero
indication on a bar graph display (refer to the
adjacent figure).
For maximum amount of zero adjustment, gap

the transducer as close as possible to the center
of the transducer linear range. The tables below
specify the center of the range for each
transducer and monitor type.
117
5 Maintenance
Radial Vibration OK Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Transducer
Upper OK Limits
w/ barrier
(v)
3300XL 8mm
w/o
barrier
(v)
-16.75
3300 RAM
Lower OK Limits
w/ barrier
(v)
-16.75
w/o
barrier
(v)
-2.75
-12.55
-12.15
3300 5mm
-16.75
3300 8mm
Center Gap Voltage

w/ barrier
(v)
-2.75
w/o
barrier
(v)
-9.75
-2.45
-2.45
-7.5
-7.3
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 RAM
-12.55
-12.15
-2.45
-2.45
-7.5
-7.3
3300 16mm HTPS
-16.75
N/A
-2.75
N/A
-9.75
N/A
7200 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
N/A
-3.55
N/A
-11.6
N/A
7200 14mm
-16.75
N/A
-2.75
N/A
-9.75
N/A
3000 (24V)
-15.75
N/A
-3.25
N/A
-9.5
N/A
3000 (18V)
-12.05
N/A
-2.45
N/A
-7.25
N/A
118
-9.75
5 Maintenance
Thrust Position OK Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Upper OK
Lower OK
Center Gap
Transducer
Limits
Limits
Voltage
w/o barrier
w/
w/o
w/ barrier w/o barrier
(V)
barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
3300XL
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-9.75
8mm
3300 5mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-9.75
w/ barrier
(V)
-9.75
-9.75
3300 8mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-9.75
-9.75
3300 RAM
-13.14
-12.35
-1.6
-1.05
-7.15
-6.7
3300 16mm
HTPS
7200 5mm
-18.05
N/A
-1.65
N/A
-9.75
N/A
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-9.75
-9.75
7200 8mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-20.39
N/A
-3.55
N/A
-11.6
N/A
7200 14mm
-18.05
N/A
-1.65
N/A
-9.75
N/A
3000 (24V)
-16.85
N/A
-2.25
N/A
-9.55
N/A
3000 (18V)
-13.14
N/A
-1.16
N/A
-7.15
N/A
Transducer
Upper OK Limits
Lower OK Limits
Center Gap Voltage
25 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.5
35 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.5
50 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.5
Differential Expansion OK Limits and Center Gap Voltage
119
5 Maintenance
Transducer
Upper
OK
Limits
w/
barrier
(V)
-16.75
Eccentricity OK Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Lower OK
Center Gap Voltage
Limits
w/o
barrier
(V)
-16.75
w/ barrier
(V)
-16.75
w/
barrier
(V)
-9.75
w/o barrier
(V)
-2.75
w/o
barrier
(V)
-2.75
N/A
-2.75
N/A
-9.75
N/A
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
N/A
-3.55
-11.6
N/A
7200 14mm
-16.75
N/A
-2.75
-9.75
N/A
3300XL
8mm
3300 16mm
HTPS
3300 5mm
N/A
N/A
-9.75
When increasing or decreasing the zero position voltage, you are actually
mapping the monitor full scale range to a portion of the transducer linear range.
The zero position voltage adjustment range is dependent upon the full-scale
range of the proportional value being adjusted, the transducer scale factor, and
the transducer OK limits. The following example shows how these parameters
are related to the zero position voltage range.
Channel Pair Type:
Direct Full Scale Range:
Transducer Type:
Scale Factor:
OK Limits: -
120
Thrust Position
-40 - 0 - 40 mils
3300 8mm
200 mV/mil
19.04 (upper)
-1.28 (lower)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
5.2.3
5 Maintenance
Zero Position Range.

Upper OK Limit.
Maximum Zero Adjustment.
Center of Range.
Minimum Zero Adjustment.
Lower OK Limit.
Scale at Maximum Zero Adjustment.
Scale at Minimum Zero Adjustment.
Adjusting the Zero Position

1. Connect the configuring computer to the rack using one of the methods listed
in the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (part
number 129777-01).
2. Run the Rack Configuration Software.
File menu.
5. Select the Options button on the 3500 System Configuration screen.
7. Select the Options button under the appropriate Channel. The Channel
Options screen will appear.
8. Enter the voltage in the Zero Position or the Gap Position box. Changes are
limited to the values listed adjacent to the box. If you go to the Verification
121
5 Maintenance
screen by selecting Adjust, you can adjust the Zero Position and see the
results.
9. Return to the 3500 System Configuration screen by clicking on OK buttons in
the successive screens. The new Zero Position or Gap Position is now added
to the configuration for this channel.
10. Download the new configuration to the appropriate monitor by selecting the
Download option in the File menu and then selecting the appropriate monitor.
The new setting for Zero Position will take effect when the "Download
successful" prompt appears.
5.3

with the 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor. The following instructions describe how to
remove the existing firmware and replace it with upgrade firmware. The monitor
will need to be reconfigured using the 3500 Rack Configuration software after
having its firmware upgraded.
The following items will be required to perform a firmware upgrade to the monitor:
IC Removal Tool.*
Upgrade Firmware IC.*
*Refer to Section 7 (Ordering Information) for part numbers. Users may use their
5.3.1
Installation Procedure
upgrade:
122
5 Maintenance
Top Shield Removal
1) Top Shield.
2) Standoff.
3) Screwdriver.
Step 1. Place the large flathead screwdriver under the top shield and on the ridge
of the rear standoffs and lift upward on the screwdriver to pop the cover loose
from the rear standoffs.
standoffs.
123
5 Maintenance

124
5 Maintenance
125
6 Troubleshooting
6. Troubleshooting
This section describes how to use the information provided by the self-test, the
LEDs, the System Event List, and the Alarm Event List to troubleshoot a problem
with the Proximitor Monitor or the Proximitor I/O Modules.
6.1
Self-test
To perform the Proximitor Monitor self-test:
rack (if needed).
Application Alert
will be lost while the
self-test is being
performed.
5. Select the slot that contains the Proximitor Monitor and press the OK button.
The Proximitor Monitor will perform a full self-test and the System Events
screen will be displayed. The list will not contain the results of the self-test.
to include the Proximitor Monitor self-test results.
8. Verify if the Proximitor Monitor passed the self-test. If the monitor failed the
self-test, refer to Section 6.3 (System Event List Messages).
126
6.2
6 Troubleshooting

problems.
OK Led
1 Hz
TX/RX
BYPASS
1 Hz
Monitor is not configured,

or is in Configuration
Mode, or in Calibration
Mode.
Monitor error
Flashing
Monitor is operating
correctly.
Monitor is not operating
correctly or the transducer
has faulted and has
stopped providing a valid
signal.
Monitor is configured for
OK Channel Defeat and
has been not OK since the
last time the RESET
button was pressed.
5 Hz
ON
Condition
OFF
2 Hz
Not
flashing

correctly.
OFF
Alarm Enabled
ON
Some or all Alarming

Disabled
Solution
Reconfigure the
Monitor, or exit
Configuration, or
Calibration Mode.
Check the System
Event List for
severity.
No action
required.
Check the System
Event List and the
Alarm Event List.
Press the Reset

button on the
Rack Interface
Module. Check
System Event
List.
Monitor is not
executing
alarming
functions.
Replace
immediately.
No action
required.
No action
required.
127
6 Troubleshooting
6.3

Proximitor Monitor and gives an example of one.
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
00000001
23
Device Not
Communicating
32
Event
Time
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Slot
5L
Sequence Number:

example 123)
Event Information:
The name of the event (for example Device Not

Communicating)
Event Number:
Identifies a specific event
Class:
Used to display the severity of the event. The following

Class Value
0
1
2
3
128
Event
Date
DDMMYY
02/01/90
Classification
Severe/Fatal Event
Reserved
Event Date:
Event Time:
Event Specific:

this field.
Slot:

full-height module is installed, the field will be 0 to 15. If
a half-height module is installed in the lower slot then
the field will be 0L to 15L. For example, a module
installed in the lower position of slot 5 would be 5L.
6 Troubleshooting
Proximitor Monitor and are listed in numerical order. If an event marked with a
star (*) occurs the Proximitor Monitor will stop alarming. If you are unable to solve
any problems contact your nearest Bently Nevada Corporation office.
Flash Memory Failure

Event Number: 11
Action:
Replace the Monitor Module as soon as possible.
Event Number: 13
Action:
Event Number: 32
Action:
the Monitor Module
the rack backplane
Event Number: 33
Action:
the Monitor Module
the rack backplane
* Neuron Failure
Event Number: 34
Action:
Replace the Monitor Module immediately.
Monitor Module will stop alarming.
* I/O Module Mismatch
Event Number: 62
Action:
Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches what was
selected in the software. If the correct I/O module is installed,
there may be a fault with the Monitor Module or the Monitor I/O
module.
129
6 Troubleshooting
I/O Module Compatible

Event Number: 63
Action:
Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches what was
selected in the software. If the correct I/O module is installed,
there may be a fault with the Monitor Module or the Monitor I/O
module.
Event Number: 100
Action:
the Monitor Module
Event Number: 101
Action:
the Monitor Module
Event Number: 102
Action:
the Monitor Module
Event Number: 103
Action:
the Monitor Module
130
6 Troubleshooting

Supplies)
Event Number: 104

Action:
the Monitor Module
(Pass Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 105

Action:
the Monitor Module
Fail Main Board -24V-A
(Fail Main Board -24V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 112
Action:
the Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -24V-A
(Pass Main Board -24V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 113
Action:
the Monitor Module
131
6 Troubleshooting

(Fail Main Board -24V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 114
Action:
the Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -24V-B
(Pass Main Board -24V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 115
Action:
the Monitor Module
* Fail Main Board -24V-AB
(Fail Main Board -24V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 116

Action:
the Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -24V-AB
(Pass Main Board -24V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 117

Action:
the Monitor Module
Device Configured
Event Number: 300
Action:
No action required.
132
6 Troubleshooting
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Monitor Module. If the
problem still exists, replace the Monitor Module immediately.
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Monitor Module. If the
problem still exists, replace the Monitor Module as soon as
possible.
* Module Entered Cfg Mode (Module Entered Configuration Mode)
Event Number: 302
Action:
No action required.
Event Number: 305
Action:
Download the software switches to the Monitor Module. If the
software switches are not correct, replace the Monitor Module as
soon as possible.
Internal Cal Reset
(Internal Calibration Reset)
Event Number: 307
Event Classification: Severe / Fatal
Event Specific: Ch pair x
Action:
Replace Monitor Module immediately.
Module Reboot
Event Number: 320
Action:
No action required.
* Module Removed from Rack
Event Number: 325
Action:
No action required.
133
6 Troubleshooting
Module Inserted in Rack

Event Number: 326
Action:
No action required.
Device Events Lost
Event Number: 355
Action:
No action required.
This may be due to the removal of the Rack Interface Module for
an extended period of time.
Module Alarms Lost
Event Number: 356
Action:
No action required.
This may be due to the removal of the Rack Interface Module for
an extended period of time.
* Module Entered Calibr.
Event Number: 365
Action:
No action required.
Module Exited Calibr.
Event Number: 366
Action:
No action required.
Event Number: 410
Action:
No action required.
* Enabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 416
Event Specific:
Ch x
Action:
No action required.
Alarming has been inhibited by this action.
134
6 Troubleshooting
Disabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 417
Event Specific: Ch x
Action:
No action required.
* Enabled Alert Bypass
Event Number: 420
Action:
No action required.
Disabled Alert Bypass
Event Number: 421
Action:
No action required.
* Enabled Danger Bypass
Event Number: 422
Action:
No action required.
Disabled Danger Bypass
Event Number: 423
Action:
No action required.
* Enabled Special Inh
(Enabled Special Inhibit)
Event Number: 424
Action:
No action required.
Disabled Special Inh
(Disabled Special Inhibit)
Event Number: 425
Action:
No action required.
135
6 Troubleshooting
* Enabled External Byp

(Enabled Monitor Alarm Bypass)
Event Number: 426
Action:
No action required.
Disabled External Byp
(Disabled Monitor Alarm Bypass)
Event Number: 427
Action:
No action required.
* Fail Slot Id Test
Event Number: 461
Action:
Verify that the Monitor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Monitor Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the
the Monitor Module
the rack backplane
Pass Slot Id Test
Event Number: 462
Action:
Verify that the Monitor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
the Monitor Module
the rack backplane
* Enabled Test Signal
Event Number: 481
Action:
No action required.
Disabled Test Signal
Event Number: 482
Action:
No action required.
136
6 Troubleshooting
Switch To Primary Kph

Event Number: 491
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
Check to see if one of the following is faulty:
the secondary Keyphasor transducer on the machine
the Monitor Module
Switch To Backup Kph
Event Number: 492
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
the primary Keyphasor transducer on the machine
the Monitor Module
* Kph Lost
Event Number: 493
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
both Keyphasor transducers on the machine
the Monitor Module
For vector and Keyphasor based alarms, the Monitor Module will
stop alarming.
DSP Reset Attempted
Event Number: 501
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
If the message is seen repeatedly in the System Event List, then
replace the Monitor Module immediately.
* DSP Self-test Failure
Event Number: 502
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
* DSP Failure
Event Number: 503
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action:
137
6 Troubleshooting
6.4

The following Alarm Event List Messages are returned by the Proximitor Monitor.
Alarm Event List
Message
138
Entered Alert / Alarm 1
A proportional value in the channel has

entered Alert / Alarm 1 and changed the
channel Alert / Alarm 1 status
Left Alert / Alarm 1
A proportional value in the channel has left

Alert / Alarm 1 and changed the channel
Alert / Alarm 1 status
Entered Danger / Alarm 2

entered Danger / Alarm 2 and changed the
channel Danger / Alarm 2 status
Left Danger / Alarm 2
A proportional value in the channel has left

Danger / Alarm 2 and changed the channel
Danger / Alarm 2 status
Entered not OK
Module went not OK
Left not OK
7.
A
Part number 3500/40- -

A
I/O Module Type

01
02
03
Discrete I/O Module with Internal Terminations

Discrete I/O Module with External Terminations*
Discrete I/O Module with Internal Barriers

00
01
None
CSA-NRTL/C
Note
If the Monitor is to be used with the Internal Barrier I/O option, then the following
software version (or later) is required:
3500 Rack Configuration Software Version 2.30
139
Spares
Proximitor Monitor
125672-01
Discrete I/O Module Internal Terminations
125680-01
Discrete I/O Module External Terminations
126615-01*
Discrete I/O Module with Internal Barriers

(Internal Terminations)
135481-01
Proximitor External Termination Module

(Euro Style Connectors)
125808-01*
Proximitor External Termination Module

(Terminal Strip Connectors)
128015-01*
Proximitor Monitor Manual
129772-01
Firmware IC
133102-01
04425545
IC Removal Tool
04400037
*Note
External Termination Blocks can not be used with Internal Termination I/O
Modules.
When ordering I/O Modules with External Termination, the External Termination
Blocks and Cables must be ordered separately.
140
3500 Transducer (XDCR) Signal to External Termination (ET) Block Cable

A
Part number129525 - -

A
Cable Length

0005
0007
0010
0025
0050
0100
5 feet (1.5 meters)

7 feet (2.1 meters)
10 feet (3 meters)
25 feet (7.5 meters)
50 feet (15 meters)
100 feet (30.5 meters)
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
141
8 Specifications
8.
Specifications
INPUTS
Signal:
Accepts from one to four proximity probe

signals.
Input Impedance:
10 k
Power:
Nominal Consumption of 7 watts.
Sensitivity:
Radial Vibration:
Thrust:
Eccentricity:
Differential Expansion:
3.94 mV/m (100 mV/mil) or

7.87 mV/m (200 mV/mil)
7.87 mV/m (200 mV/mil)
7.87 mV/m (200 mV/mil)
0.394 V/mm (10 mV/mil) or
0.787 V/mm (20 mV/mil)
OUTPUTS
Front Panel LEDs:
OK LED:
TX/RX LED:
Bypass LED:
Indicates when the 3500/40 is operating

properly.
Indicates when the 3500/40 is
communicating with other modules in the
3500 rack.
Indicates when the 3500/40 is in Bypass
Mode.
Buffered Transducer Outputs:

The front of each monitor has one
coaxial connector for each channel.
Each connector is short circuit protected.
142
Output Impedance:
550
Transducer Power Supply:
-24 Vdc
8 Specifications
SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Specified at +25o C (77o F)
Radial Vibration
Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
Gap Filter:
*Not 1X Filter:
*Smax:
*1X & 2X Vector Filter:
User programmable, 4 Hz to 4000 Hz or

1 Hz to 600 Hz.
-3 dB at 0.09 Hz.
60 cpm to 16 times running speed.
Constant Q notch filter. Minimum
rejection in stopband of -34.9 dB.
0.125 to 16 times running speed.
Constant Q Filter. Minimum rejection in
stopband of -57.7 dB.
*Note - 1X & 2X Vector, Not 1X, and Smax parameters are valid
for machine speeds of 60 cpm to 60,000 cpm.
Minimum Signal amplitude for phase measurements is 42.7 mV.
Accuracy:
Direct and Gap:
1X & 2X:
Smax:
Not 1X:
Thrust and Differential Expansion:

Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
Gap Filter:
Accuracy:
EIPP Monitor
Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
Gap Filter:
Accuracy:
Within 0.33% of full scale typical, 1%

maximum.
Within +/- 0.33% of full scale typical, +/1% maximum.
Within +/- 5% maximum.
+/- 3% for machine speeds less than
30,000 cpm.
+/-8.5% for machine speeds greater
than 30,000 cpm.
-3 dB at 1.2 Hz.
-3 dB at 0.41 Hz.
maximum.
-3 dB at 15.6 Hz.
-3 dB at 0.41 Hz.
maximum.
143
8 Specifications
ALARMS
Alarm Setpoints:
Alert levels can be set for each value

measured by the monitor. In addition,
Danger setpoints can be set for any two
of the values measured by the monitor.
All alarm setpoints are set using software
configuration. Alarms are adjustable and
can normally be set from 0 to 100% of
Full Scale for each measured value. The
exception is when the Full-scale range
exceeds the range of the transducer. In
this case, the set point will be limited to
the range of the transducer. Accuracy of
alarms are to within 0.13% of the desired
value.
Alarm Time Delays:
Alarm delays can be programmed using

software and can be set as follows:
From 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second
intervals
0.1 seconds or from 1 to 60 seconds in 1
second intervals
Alert:
Danger:
PROPORTIONAL VALUES
The Proximitor Monitor returns the following proportional values:
Radial Vibration
Thrust
Position
Differential
Expansion
Eccentricity
Direct *
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Direct *
Gap
Direct *
Gap
Peak to Peak *
Gap
Direct Min
Direct Max
* The primary value for each channel pair type.
144
8 Specifications
Temperature:
-30 to 65 C (-22 to 150 F) operating, when

used with Internal/External Termination
0 to 65 C (32 to 150 F) operating, when
used with Proximitor Internal Barrier I/O
Module (Internal Termination).
-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) storage
Humidity:
95 % non-condensing
BARRIER PARAMETERS
The following parameters apply for both CSA-NRTL/C and CENELEC approvals.
Circuit Parameters:
Vmax (PWR) = 26.80 V

(SIG) = 14.05 V
Imax (PWR) = 112.8 mA
(SIG) = 2.82 mA
Rmin (PWR) = 237.6
(SIG) = 4985
Channel Parameters
(Entity):
Vmax = 28.0 V
Imax = 115.62 mA
Rmin (PWR) = 237.6
(SIG) = 4985
145
8 Specifications
CE MARK DIRECTIVES
EMC Directives:
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:
EN 61000-4-2 (1995), Criteria B

ENV 50140 (1993), Criteria A

Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
Power Supply Dip:

Radio Telephone:

EN 61010-1 (1993)

CSA-NRTL/C:
When used with
Internal/External Termination
I/O Module
When used with Internal
Barrier I/O Module (Internal
Termination)
CENELEC:
Termination)
146

Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Class III
[EEx ia] IIC
8 Specifications
PHYSICAL
Main Board:
Width x Depth)
Weight:
0.91 kg (2.0 lbs)
I/O Modules (non-barrier):

Width x Depth)
I/O Modules (barrier):
Width x Depth)
Weight:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 241.8 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52 in)
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 163.1 mm
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 6.42 in)
0.20 kg (0.44 lbs), non-barrier
0.46 kg (1.01 lbs), barrier

Monitor Module:
I/O Modules:
147
8 Specifications
148

Revision G, November 1998
3500/42
PROXIMITOR /SEISMIC
MONITOR MODULE
MANUAL
3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Module
1998 Bently Nevada Corporation

No part of this publication my be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any
human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical,
manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner,
Bently Nevada Corporation

1617 Water Street
Telephone (800) 227-5514 or (702) 782-3611
Fax (702) 782-9259
Copyright infringement is a serious matter under the United States of America and foreign copyright laws.
Keyphasor and Proximitor are registered trademarks of Bently Nevada Corporation.
ii
Notice:
maintain the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor. Refer to the Following manuals
instructions for installing the removing the module from a 3500 rack
Guidelines for using the 3500 test utilities to verify that the input and output terminals on
3500 Monitoring system Computer Hardware and Software Manual (128158-01)
iii
Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
iv

1.2 Handling and Storing Considerations
1
1
General Information
2.1 Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description

2.2 Available Data
2.2.1 Statuses
2.2.2 Proportional Values
3
4
4
8
9
10
3.1 Software Configuration Options

3.1.1 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Configuration Options
3.1.2 Radial Vibration Channel Options
3.1.3 Thrust Position Channel Options
3.1.4 Differential Expansion Channel Options
3.1.5 Eccentricity Channel Options
3.1.6 Acceleration Channel Options
3.1.7 Velocity Channel Options
3.2 Setpoints
10
10
14
24
33
39
47
57
66
70
I/O Module Descriptions
72
4.1 Setting the I/O Jumper

4.2 Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module (Internal Termination)
4.3 Proximitor/Seismic Internal Barrier I/O Module (Internal Termination)
4.3.1 Wiring Euro Style Connectors
4.4 External Termination I/O Modules
4.4.1 Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module (External Termination)
4.4.2 Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Module (External Termination)
4.4.3 External Termination Blocks
4.4.4 Cable Pin Outs
72
77
78
79
80
80
81
82
88
Maintenance
90
5.1 Verifying a 3500 Rack - Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Module

5.1.1 Choosing a Maintenance Interval
5.1.2 Required Test Equipment
5.1.3 Typical Verification Test Setup
5.1.4 Using the Rack Configuration Software
5.1.5 Radial Vibration Channels
5.1.6 Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Channels
5.1.7 Eccentricity Channels
5.1.8 Velocity Channels
5.1.9 Acceleration Channels
5.1.10 Verify Recorder Outputs
5.1.11 If a Channel Fails a Verification Test
90
91
91
92
93
96
125
135
148
168
182
183
5.2 Adjusting the Scale Factor and the Zero Position

5.2.1 Adjusting the Scale Factor
5.2.2 Zero Position Adjustment Description
5.2.3 Adjusting the Zero Position
6.
Troubleshooting
6.1 Self-test
6.2 LED Fault Conditions
184
184
185
190
192
192
193
194
205
7.
206
8.
Specifications
209
vi
1.
1.1

Corporation.
1.2

order given:
Application Alert
will be lost when this
module is removed from
the rack.
- Do not discharge static electricity onto the circuit board. Avoid tools or
- Personnel must be grounded with a suitable grounding strap (such as 3M
- Transport and store circuit boards in electrically conductive bags or foil.
- Use extra caution during dry weather. Relative humidity less than 30 % tends
General Information
2.
General Information
The 3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor is a four channel monitor that accepts
input from Proximitor and Seismic Transducers and uses this input to drive
alarms. The monitor can be programmed using the 3500 Rack Configuration
Software to perform any of the following functions: Radial Vibration, Thrust
Position, Eccentricity, Differential Expansion, Acceleration, and Velocity. The
monitor can receive input from many types of transducers including the following
Bently Nevada transducers:
Proximitor Transducers
7200 5, 8, 11, & 14 mm
3300 5, 8 mm, & 16 mm HTPS
RAM
3000
Acceleration
Velocity
Std. Accel Interface Module

High Frequency Interface
Module
Front Panel
9200, 47633, 86205

Velomitor
High Temperature Velomitor
I/O Modules without Barriers
Status LEDs,
refer to Section
2.3
Buffered
Transducer
Outputs
Provides an
unfiltered output
for each of the
four transducers.
All are short
circuit protected.
I/O Module,
Internal
Termination,
refer to
Section 4.2
I/O Module,
External
Termination,
refer to
Section 4.5
TMR I/O Module,

External
Termination, refer
to Section 4.5
General Information
I/O Modules with Barriers
Internal Proximitor Barrier

I/O Module, Internal
Termination, refer to
Section 4.3
Internal Prox/Seismic
Barrier I/O Module,
Internal Termination,
refer to Section 4.3
Internal Seismic Barrier

I/O Module, Internal
Termination, refer to
section 4.3
The primary purpose of the 3500/42 monitor is to provide 1) machinery protection

by continuously comparing current machine vibration against configured alarm
setpoints to drive alarms and, 2) essential machine vibration information to both
operator and maintenance personnel. Alarm setpoints are configured using the
3500 Rack Configuration Software. Alarm setpoints can be configured for each
active proportional value and danger setpoints can be configured for two of the
active proportional values.
When shipped from the factory, the 3500/42 is delivered unconfigured. When
needed, the 3500/42 can be installed into a 3500 rack and configured to perform
the required monitoring function. This lets you stock a single monitor for use as
a spare for many different applications.
2.1

When used in a TMR configuration, 3500/42 monitors and Proximitor/Seismic
TMR I/O Modules must be installed adjacent to each other in groups of three.
When used in this configuration, two types of voting are employed to ensure
accurate operation and to avoid single point failures.
The first level of voting occurs on the TMR Relay Module. With this voting, the
selected alarm outputs for the three monitors are compared in a 2 out of 3
method. Two monitors must agree before the relay is driven. Refer to the
3500/32 & 34 Relay Module Operation and Maintenance Manual for more
information on this voting.
General Information
The second type of voting is referred to as "Comparison" voting. With this type
of voting, the proportional value outputs of each monitor in the group are
compared with each other. If the output of one monitor differs from the output of
the other monitors in the group by a specified amount, that monitor will add an
entry to the System Event list. Configure comparison voting by setting
Comparison and % Comparison in the Rack Configuration Software.
Comparison: The enabled proportional value of the TMR monitor group that is
used to determine how far apart the values of the three monitors can be to
each other before an entry is added to the System Event List.
% Comparison: The highest allowed percent difference between the middle
value of the three monitors in a TMR group and the individual values of each
monitor.
For TMR applications, two types of input configurations are available: bussed or
discrete. Bussed configuration uses the signal from a single nonredundant
transducer and provides that signal to all modules in the TMR group through a
single 3500 Bussed External Termination Block.
Discrete configuration requires three redundant transducers at each
measurement location on the machine. The input from each transducer is
connected to separate 3500 External Termination Blocks.
2.2
Available Data
The Proximitor/Seismic Monitor returns specific proportional values dependent
upon the type of channel configured. This monitor also returns both monitor and
channel statuses which are common to all types of channels.
2.2.1
Statuses
The following statuses are provided by the monitor. This section describes the
available statuses and where they can be found.
Monitor Status
OK
This indicates if the monitor is functioning correctly. A not OK status is
returned under any of the following conditions:
Module Hardware Failure
Transducer Failure
Slot ID Failure
Keyphasor Failure (if Keyphasor signals are assigned to channel pairs)
Channel not OK
If the Monitor OK status goes not OK, then the system OK Relay on the Rack
General Information
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether the monitor has entered Alert/Alarm 1. A monitor will
enter the Alert/Alarm 1 state when any proportional value provided by the
monitor exceeds its configured Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint.
Danger/Alarm 2
This indicates whether the monitor has entered Danger/Alarm 2. A monitor
will enter the Danger/Alarm 2 state when any proportional value provided by
the monitor exceeds its configured Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint.
Bypass
This indicates when the monitor has bypassed alarming for one or more
proportional values at a channel. When a channel bypass status is set, this
monitor bypass status will also be set.
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the monitor configuration is valid.
associated monitor channel are inhibited.
The Channel Special Alarm Inhibit function is active when:
- The Alarm Inhibit contact (INHB/RET) on the I/O Module is closed
(active).
- A Channel Special Alarm Inhibit software switch is enabled.
Channel Status
OK
This indicates that no fault has been detected by the associated monitor
channel.
There are three types of channel OK checking: Transducer Input Voltage,
Transducer Supply Voltage, and Keyphasor OK. Keyphasor OK only affects
channel pairs that have Keyphasor signals assigned to them. A channel OK
status will be deactivated if any of the three OK types goes not OK.
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether the associated monitor channel has entered
Alert/Alarm 1. A channel will enter the Alert/Alarm 1 state when any
proportional value provided by the channel exceeds its configured Alert/Alarm
1 setpoint.
Danger/Alarm 2
This indicates whether the associated monitor channel has entered
Danger/Alarm 2. A channel will enter the Danger/Alarm 2 state when any
proportional value provided by the channel exceeds its configured
General Information
Bypass
This indicates that the channel has bypassed alarming for one or more of its
proportional values. A channel bypass status may result from the following
conditions:
- A transducer is not OK, and the channel is configured for Timed OK
Channel Defeat.
- The Keyphasor associated with the channel has gone invalid causing all
proportional values related to the Keyphasor signal (for example 1X
Amplitude, 1X Phase, Not 1X, ...) to be defeated and their associated
alarms bypassed.
- The monitor has detected a serious internal fault.
- A software switch is bypassing any channel alarming function.
- The Special Alarm Inhibit is active and causing enabled alarms not to be
processed.
associated monitor channel are inhibited.
The Channel Special Alarm Inhibit function is active when:
- The Alarm Inhibit contact (INHB/RET) on the I/O Module is closed
(active).
- A Channel Special Alarm Inhibit software switch is enabled.
Off
This indicates whether the channel has been turned off. The monitor
Software.
General Information
The following table shows where the statuses can be found:
Statuses
Communication
Gateway Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Monitor OK
Monitor Alert/Alarm 1
Monitor Danger/Alarm 2
Monitor Bypass
Monitor Configuration Fault
Monitor Special Alarm Inhibit
Operator
Display
Software
Channel OK
Channel Bypass
Channel Off
General Information
2.2.2
Proportional Values
The Proximitor/Seismic Monitor returns the following proportional values:
Radial
Vibration
Direct *
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Thrust
Position
Direct *
Gap
Differential
Expansion
Direct *
Gap
Smax Amplitude
Eccentricity
Peak to Peak *
Gap
Direct Min
Direct Max
Acceleration
Direct *
Velocity
Direct *
* The primary value for the channel pair type. You can place these values into
contiguous registers in the Communication Gateway or Display Interface Module.
2.3
General Information
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor indicate the
operating status of the module as shown in the following figure. Refer to Section
6.2 (LED Fault Conditions)for all of the available LED conditions.
OK
Indicates that the Proximitor/Seismic
Monitor and the Proximitor/Seismic I/O
TX/RX
Flashes at the rate that messages are
received and transmitted.
BYPASS
Indicates that some of the monitor
functions are temporarily suppressed.
3.
This section describes how the 3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor is

configured using the Rack Configuration Software. It also describes any
configuration restrictions associated with this module. Refer to the 3500
Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide and the Rack
Configuration Software for the details on how to operate the software.
3.1

This section shows the configuration screens of the Rack Configuration Software
that are associated with the monitor and discusses the configuration
considerations. It will show a copy of the software screens and will explain the
options that are available.
3.1.1
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor
10
Slot
The location of the monitor in the 3500 rack (2 through 15).
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack (Standard or TMR).
Configuration ID
A unique six character identifier which is entered when a configuration is
downloaded to the 3500 rack.
The I/O field lets you identify the type of I/O Module that is attached to the
monitor (The option selected must agree with the I/O module installed).
Discrete I/O
Used when each Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and a Proximitor/Seismic
Discrete I/O Module are installed for a standard or nonredundant application.
Discrete Internal I/O
The transducer field wiring is connected directly to the I/O module.
Discrete External I/O
The transducer field wiring is connected to an External Termination Block and
then routed from the External Termination Block to the I/O module through a
25-pin cable. The recorder field wiring is connected to an External
Termination Block and then routed from the External Termination Block to the
I/O module through a 9-pin cable.
Prox/Accel Internal Barrier I/O
The transducer field wiring is connected directly to the Proximitor/Seismic
Monitor Internal Barrier I/O Module. Note that selecting the Prox/Accel
Internal Barrier I/O option will disable certain transducer type options.
11
Prox/Velom Internal Barrier I/O

Monitor Internal Barrier I/O Module. Note that selecting the Prox/Velom
Internal Barrier I/O option will disable certain transducer type options.
Velom Internal Barrier I/O
Monitor Internal Barrier I/O Module. Note that selecting the Velom Internal
Barrier I/O option will disable certain transducer type options.
TMR I/O
Used when three identical adjacent monitors and three TMR I/O Modules are
installed for a TMR application. Both the discrete and bussed configurations
use the same external I/O modules but are wired differently as per the
following paragraphs.
TMR I/O (Discrete)
This option is used when redundant transducers and field wiring are required.
A set of twelve transducers are used to provide input signals to three identical
adjacent monitors. Each transducer is connected to an External Termination
Block and then routed to the Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Module using a 25pin cable. The recorder field wiring is connected to an External Termination
Block and then routed from the External Termination Block to the
Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Module through a 9-pin cable.
TMR I/O (Bussed)
This option is used when redundant transducers and field wiring are not
required. A single set of four transducers are sent to three identical adjacent
monitors. Each transducer is connected to a Bussed External Termination
Block and then the Bussed External Termination Block is connected to the
Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Modules using three 25-pin cables. The
recorder field wiring is connected to an External Termination Block and then
routed from the External Termination Block to the Proximitor/Seismic TMR
I/O Module through a 9-pin cable.
12

The fields within these boxes pertain to both channels of the channel pair.
Channel Pair Type
The type of monitoring which is to be performed by the channel pair. The
following Channel Pair types are available in the monitor:
- Radial Vibration
- Thrust Position
- Differential Expansion
- Eccentricity
- Acceleration
- Velocity
Keyphasor Association
No Keyphasor
Can be used when a Keyphasor is not available. If this is marked then
the only data that will be available is Direct and Gap. This field will
automatically be marked for channel pairs which do not require a
Keyphasor transducer (for example Thrust Position and Differential
Expansion).
Primary
The Keyphasor channel selected that is normally used for measurement.
When this Keyphasor transducer is marked invalid, the backup
Keyphasor transducer will provide the shaft reference information.
Backup
The Keyphasor channel selected that will be used if the primary
Keyphasor fails. If you do not have a backup Keyphasor, select the same
Keyphasor channel as the primary Keyphasor.
Note
For TMR applications, set Channel Pair 1 and 2 as primary Keyphasor
and Channel Pair 3 and 4 as backup Keyphasor.
Active
Select whether the functions of the channel will be turned on ( ) or off ( ).
Options
A button to display the configuration options for the selected channel type.
13
Notes:
The alarming hysteresis for all channel configurations for a 42 Monitor is 1/64
of Full Scale. When a channel exceeds an alarm setpoint, it must fall back
below the setpoint less the hysteresis before it can go out of alarm. For
example, consider a channel configuration with a 010 mils full scale and an
alarm setpoint at 6 mils as illustrated below:
The hysteresis = 10 mils/64 = 0.16 mils. The channel input must fall below 6
mils - 0.16 mils (5.84 mils) before the channel is out of alarm.
3.1.2
Radial Vibration Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Radial Vibration Channel.
3.1.2.1
Radial Vibration Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Radial Vibration Channel:
- Internal Barrier I/O Modules and External barriers are not currently supported
with 7200 11 mm or 14 mm, or 3000 Proximitors, or the 3300 16 mm HTPS.
- When "No Keyphasor" is selected, the 1X Amplitude (Ampl) and Phase Lag, 2X
Amplitude (Ampl) and Phase Lag, Not 1X Amplitude (Ampl), and Smax
Amplitude (Ampl) can not be selected.
- If a Keyphasor channel is selected, a Keyphasor Module must be installed in
the rack.
- The full scale options allowed for each proportional value is dependent upon
- If a Non-Standard transducer is selected, the setpoint OK limits are set to 1
14
- There are two selections for 3000 Series transducers:

be adjusted 15 %. Note that the buffered transducers on the front of the
monitors and to the Data Manager are not compensated and should be
interpreted at 200 mV/mil.
- Setpoints may only be set on proportional values which are enabled.
Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example, Channels 1 and 2
may be configured as Radial Vibration and Channels 3 and 4 may be
- When a full-scale range is modified, the setpoints associated with this
- It is best to set the Scale Factor value and the Trip Multiply value before the
Zero Position value.
- 3000 (-18V), 3000 (-24V), and 3300 RAM Proximitors have limited linear
ranges. Therefore, you should use caution when selecting the Full-scale
range of the Direct, 1X Amplitude (Ampl), 2X Amplitude (Ampl), Not 1X
Amplitude (Ampl) and Smax Amplitude (Ampl) PPLs. Full-scale value x Trip
Multiply should not exceed the linear range of the transducer.
15
3.1.2.2
Radial Vibration Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Radial Vibration Channel

This prevents a channel from returning to an OK status until that channel's
transducer has remained in an OK state for 30 seconds. This feature is always
enabled in the Radial Vibration Channels. The option protects against false trips
caused by intermittent transducers.
CP Mod
Selecting the CP Mod button Channel Options Dialog Box, allows a Custom
channel configuration to be downloaded to the monitor. Custom configuration
data is stored in a Custom Products Modification File. Custom Products
Modification files follow the naming convention <modification #.mod>. These
files must be located in the \3500\Rackcfg\Mods\ directory. When a CP Mod file
is selected, a window is displayed which describes the function of the
details.
16
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
Identifies the type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack (Standard or
TMR).
Enable
An enabled proportional value specifies that the value will be provided by the
channel ( enabled, disabled).
Direct
Data which represents the overall peak to peak vibration. All frequencies
within the selected Direct Frequency Response are included in this
proportional value.
Gap
observed surface. The distance can be expressed in terms of displacement
(mils, micrometres) or in terms of voltage. Standard polarity convention
dictates that a decreasing gap results in an increasing (less negative) output
signal.
1X Ampl
1X Phase Lag
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the phase lag component that
2X Ampl
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the amplitude component having a
frequency equal to two times the shaft rotative speed.
2X Phase Lag
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the phase lag component having a
frequency equal to two times the shaft rotative speed. 2X phase lag is the
angular measurement from the leading or trailing edge of the Keyphasor
pulse to the following positive peak of the 2X vibration signal.
17
Not 1X Ampl
In a complex vibration signal, notation for the amplitude component that occurs
at frequencies other than rotative speed.
Smax Ampl
Single peak measurement of unfiltered XY (orthogonal) probes, in the
measurement planes, against a calculated "quasi zero" point. Only one Smax
Ampl value is returned per channel pair (channel 1 or channel 3).
Full Scale Range
Each selectable proportional value provides the ability to set a full scale value. If
the desired full scale value is not in the pull down list, then the custom selection
can be chosen.
The values in the following table are the same for all transducer types.
Direct
1X Ampl
2X Ampl
Not 1X Ampl
Smax Ampl
0-3 mil pp
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-15 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-150 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-400 m pp
0-500 m pp
Custom
18
Gap Full Scale Ranges by transducer type

33005 mm Proximitor
33008 mm Proximitor
72005 mm Proximitor
72008 mm Proximitor
720011 mm Proximitor
720014 mm Proximitor
330016 mm HTPS
Nonstandard

3300 RAM Proximitor
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
25-0-25 mil
300-0-300 m
600-0-600 m
Custom
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
25-0-25 mil
50-0-50 mil
300-0-300 m
600-0-600 m
1000-0-1000 m
Custom
-24 Vdc
15-0-15 mil
300-0-300 m
Clamp Value
full-scale range values. (1X and 2X Phase Lag have available values of 0 to
359 degrees.) Only the values available from the Recorder Outputs,
Communication Gateway and Display Interface Module are clamped to the
specified value when the proportional value is invalid.
Recorder Output
The proportional value of a channel that is sent to the 4 to 20 mA recorder.
The recorder output is proportional to the measured value over the channel
full scale range. An increase in the proportional value that would be indicated
as upscale on a bar graph display results in an increase in the current at the
recorder output.
If 1X Phase Lag or 2X Phase Lag are selected then the two options available
are with and without Hysteresis. If the channel is Bypassed, the output will
be clamped to the selected clamp value or to 2 mA (if the 2 mA clamp is
selected).
The Hysteresis option helps prevent the Recorder Output from jumping from
Full to Bottom Scale when the phase measurement is near 0 or 359 degrees.
When the Hysteresis option is checked, the recorder signal operates as
follows:
- The recorder output is scaled such that 4 mA corresponds to 0 degrees and
20 mA corresponds to 380 degrees (360 plus 20 degrees).
- The transition of a phase measurement that is increasing does not occur
until the measurement has gone 20 degrees past 360 degrees. At this
point, the recorder signal switches from 20 mA to a signal that
corresponds to 20 degrees or 4.842 mA.
19
- The transition of a phase measurement that is decreasing occurs at 0

degrees (4 mA). At this point, the recorder signal switches from 4 mA to
a signal that corresponds to 360 degrees or 19.158 mA.
Delay
Alert
Danger
screen.
100 ms option
The 100 ms (typical) option applies to the Danger time delay only and has
the following results:

- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals (from 1 to
60).
- The Danger time delay can be set for up to two available proportional
values.

- The Danger time delay is set to 100 ms.
- The Danger time delay can only be set for the primary proportional
value.
Zero Position (Gap)
Represents the zero position (in volts) when the gap scale is to read the
engineering units of displacement. To ensure maximum amount of zero
adjustment, the probe should be gapped as close as possible to the center gap
voltage specified in the OK Limit table. This field is not available for Voltage Gap
Scale.
Adjust Button
helps you set the gap zero position voltage. Since this utility provides active
20
Trip Multiply
Direct Frequency Response
The upper and lower corners for the band-pass filter used with direct vibration
measurements. The available ranges are 240 to 240,000 cpm and 60 to 36,000
cpm.
3300 5 mm Proximitor
3000 (-18 V) Proximitor
3000 (-24 V) Proximitor
3300 RAM Proximitor
3300 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
3300 RAM Proximitor
Nonstandard
21
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor for transducers. If Non-standard is selected as
the transducer type, the OK Limits can also be adjusted. The Non-standard
transducer's scale factor must be between 85 and 230 mV/mil. Also, there must
be at least 2 volts between the Upper and Lower OK Limits.
Transducer
3300 5 and 8 mm
7200 5 and 8 mm
7200 11 mm
7200 14 mm
3000 (-18V)
3000 (-24V)
3300 RAM
3300 16 mm HTPS
Scale Factor
Without
Barriers
With Bently
Nevada Internal
Barriers
Standard I/O
With
Barriers
Discrete TMR
I/O With
Barriers
Bussed TMR
I/O With
Barriers
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
199 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
285 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
200 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
192 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
200 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
199 mV/mil
*

22
OK Limits
Transducer
Upper
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
3300 8 mm
3300 5 mm
7200 5 mm
7200 8 mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11 mm
-19.65
-3.55
-11.6
7200 14 mm
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75
3000 (-18V)
-12.05
-2.45
-7.25
3000 (-24V)
-15.75
-3.25
-9.5
3300 RAM
-12.55
-12.15
-2.45
-2.45
-7.5
-7.3
3300 16 mm
HTPS
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75

Note: With Barriers includes BNC Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
Transducer Jumper Status (on I/O Module)

Returns the position of the Transducer Jumper on the Proximitor/Seismic I/O
Module. Refer to Section 4.1(Setting the I/O Jumper)for the function of this
jumper.
Alarm Mode
Latching
until it is reset using one of the following methods:
- the reset switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module
- the contact on the Rack Interface I/O Module
- the Reset button in the Operator Display Software
- the reset command through the Communication Gateway Module
- the reset command through the Display Interface Module
- the reset command in the Rack Configuration Software
Nonlatching
23
Transducer Orientation
Degrees
The location of the transducer on the machine. The range for orientation
angle is 0 to 180 degrees left or right as observed from the driver to the
driven end of the machine train. Refer to the following figure:
shaft
driven end
0
90 left
90 right
driver end
180
This drawing is for horizontal shafts.

Barriers
Select the MTL 796(-) Zener External option, or Galvanic Isolators if external
safety barriers are connected between the monitor and the transducer. If using
an Internal Barrier I/O Module, select the internal option. These devices are
used to restrict the amount of energy that can flow into a hazardous area.
3.1.3
Thrust Position Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Thrust Position Channel.
3.1.3.1
Thrust Position Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Thrust Position Channel:
- Internal Barrier I/O Modules are not currently supported with 7200 11 mm or
14 mm, or 3000 Proximitors, or the 3300 16 mm HTPS.
- The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type.
- The Thrust Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the transducer type.
- The Zero Position voltage range is dependent upon the direct full-scale
24
range and the upscale direction.

- Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example, Channels 1 and
2 may be configured as Thrust Position and Channels 3 and 4 may be
- If a Non-Standard transducer is selected, the setpoint OK limits are set to
1 volt from the Upper and Lower OK limits that are selected.
- There are two selections for 3000 Series transducers:
be adjusted 15 %. Note that the buffered transducers on the front of the
monitors and to the Data Manager are not compensated and should be
interpreted at 200 mV/mil.
25
3.1.3.2
Thrust Position Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Thrust Position Channel
CP Mod
details.
26
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
TMR).
Enable
Direct
Average position, or change in position, of a rotor in the axial direction with
respect to some fixed reference. This value may be displayed in mils or m.
This proportional value supports both center zero and noncenter zero Full
Scale Ranges.
Gap
3300 - 5 and 8 mm Proximitor

3300 - 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard

3300 RAM Proximitor
25-0-25 mil
30-0-30 mil
40-0-40 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
1.0 - 0 - 1.0 mm
Custom
25-0-25 mil
30-0-30 mil
40-0-40 mil
50-0-50 mil
75-0-75 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
1.0 - 0 - 1.0 mm
2.0 - 0 - 2.0 mm
Custom
25-0-25 mil
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 mm
Custom
The Gap Full Scale Ranges are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
27
Clamp Value
value is Bypassed or defeated. The selected value can be between the
minimum and maximum full-scale range values. Only the values available
from the Recorder Outputs, Communication Gateway and Display Interface
Module are clamped to the specified value when the proportional value is
invalid.
Recorder Output
full scale range. An increase in the proportional value that would be indicated
as upscale on a bar graph display results in an increase in the current at the
recorder output. If the channel is bypassed, the output will be clamped to the
selected clamp value or to 2 mA (if the 2 mA clamp is selected).
OK Mode
Latching
OK the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. Reset a latched not OK by
Nonlatching
The OK status of that channel will track the defined OK status of the
transducer.
Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an over alarm
level or below an under alarm level before an alarm is declared as active.
Alert
28
Danger
screen.
100 ms option

- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals (from 1
through 60).
- The Danger time delay can be set for all available proportional values.

value.
transducer OK limits. For maximum amount of zero adjustment, gap the
transducer as close as possible to the ideal zero position voltage based on the
full-scale range, the transducer scale factor, and the Upscale Direction. For a
mid-scale zero the ideal gap is the center of the range.
Adjust Button
Transducer
3300 RAM Proximitor
3300 - 16mm HTPS
Nonstandard
29
3300 RAM Proximitor
Nonstandard
Customize button
30
Transducer
3300 5 and 8 mm
7200 5 and 8 mm
7200 11 mm
7200 14 mm
3000 (-18V)
3000 (-24V)
3300 RAM
3300 16 mm HTPS
Scale Factor
Without
Barriers
With Bently
Nevada Internal
Barriers
Standard I/O
With
Barriers
Discrete TMR
I/O With
Barriers
Bussed TMR
I/O With
Barriers
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
199 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
285 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
200 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
192 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
200 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
199 mV/mil
*

OK Limits
Transducer
Upper
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
3300 8 mm
3300 5 mm
7200 5 mm
7200 8 mm
-19.04
-18.20
-1.28
-1.10
-1.28
-10.16
-9.65
-9.74
7200 11 mm
-20.39
-3.55
-11.97
7200 14 mm
-18.05
-1.65
-9.85
3000 (-18V)
-13.14
-1.16
-7.15
3000 (-24V)
-16.85
-2.25
-9.55
3300 RAM
-13.14
-12.35
-1.16
-1.05
-1.16
-7.15
-6.7
-6.76
3300 16 mm
HTPS
-18.05
-1.65
-9.85
BNC Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
31

Module. Refer to Section 4.1 (Setting the I/O Jumper) for the function of this
jumper.
Alarm Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
Barriers
Normal Thrust Direction
Towards the active thrust bearing (for example towards or away from the probe
mounting). This field defines whether rotor movement toward or away from the
thrust probe corresponds to a more positive thrust reading (for example upscale
on a bar graph). If this field is set to "Toward Probe", then as the rotor moves
toward the thrust probe the thrust position direct proportional value will increase
and go upscale on a bar graph.
32
3.1.4
Differential Expansion Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Differential Expansion
Channel.
3.1.4.1
Differential Expansion Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Differential Expansion Channel:
- None of the differential expansion channel transducers are able to support
discrete Internal Barrier I/O modules.
- The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type.
- The Differential Expansion Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the
transducer type.
- The Zero Position voltage range is dependent upon the direct full-scale
range.
- Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example, Channels 1 and
2 may be configured as Differential Expansion and Channels 3 and 4 may
be configured as Thrust Position).
- The Latching OK Mode and the Timed OK Channel Defeat options are not
compatible.
33
3.1.4.2
Differential Expansion Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Differential Expansion
Channel configuration screen.
CP Mod
details.
Channel
Slot
34
Rack Type
TMR).
Enable
Direct
Change in position of the shaft due to the thermal growth relative to the
machine casing. This value may be displayed in inches or mm. This
proportional value supports both center zero and noncenter zero Full Scale
Ranges.
Gap
25 mm Extended Range Proximitor

Nonstandard
5-0-5 mm
0-10 mm
0.25 - 0 - 0.25 in
0.0 - 0.5 in
Custom
5-0-5 mm
0-10 mm
10-0-10 mm
0-20 mm
0-25 mm
0.25 - 0 - 0.25 in
0.0 - 0.5 in
0.5 - 0 - 0.5 in
0.0 - 1.0 in
Custom
The Gap Full Scale Ranges are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
Clamp Value
value is Bypassed or defeated (For example when a problem occurs with the
full-scale range values. Only the values available from the Recorder Outputs,
35
Recorder Output
full-scale range. An increase in the proportional value that would be
indicated as upscale on a bar graph display results in an increase in the
current at the recorder output. If the channel is Bypassed, the output will be
clamped to the selected clamp value or to 2 mA (if the 2 mA clamp is
selected).
OK Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
transducer.
Delay
Alert
selected Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint. This setpoint can be set on the Setpoint screen.
The Alert time delay is always set at one second intervals (from 1 to 60) for all
available proportional values.
36
Danger
screen.
100 ms option
The 100 ms (typical) option applies to the Danger time delay only and has the
following results:

- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals (from 1 to 60).

- The Danger time delay can only be set for the primary proportional value.
transducer OK limits. For maximum amount of zero adjustment, gap the
transducer as close as possible to the ideal zero position voltage based on the
full-scale range, the transducer scale factor, and the Upscale Direction. For a
mid-scale zero the ideal gap is the center of the range.
Adjust Button
Transducer
The following transducer types are available for the Differential Expansion
Channel:
Nonstandard
37
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor of transducers. If Non-standard is selected as
transducer's scale factor must be between 8.5 and 23 mV/mil. Also, there must
Scale Factor
Transducer
Without Barriers
25 mm
35 mm
50 mm
20 mV/mil
20 mV/mil
10 mV/mil

OK Limits
38
Transducer
Upper (V)
Lower (V)
Center Gap Voltage

(V)
25mm
35mm
50mm
-12.55
-12.55
-12.55
-1.35
-1.35
-1.35
-6.95
-6.95
-6.95

Module. Refer to Section 4.1(Setting the I/O Jumper)for the function of this
jumper.
Alarm Mode
Latching
Once an alarm is active, it will remain active even after the proportional value
drops below the configured setpoint level. The channel will remain in alarm until
it is reset using one of the following methods:
Nonlatching
drops below the configured setpoint level. Alert should be the first level alarm
Danger should be the second level alarm that occurs when the transducer
signal level exceeds the selected value. The Alert and Danger values are set
on the Setpoint screen.
Upscale Direction
Towards or away from the probe mounting. This field defines whether rotor
movement toward or away from the differential expansion corresponds to a more
positive differential expansion (for example upscale on a bar graph). If this field
is set to "Toward Probe", then as the rotor moves toward the differential
expansion probe the differential expansion direct proportional value will increase
and go upscale on a bar graph.
3.1.5
Eccentricity Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Eccentricity Channel.
3.1.5.1
Eccentricity Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring an Eccentricity Channel:
- Internal Barrier I/O Modules are not currently supported with 7200 11 mm or
14 mm, 3000 Proximitors, 3300 16 mm HTPS, or 3300 RAM.
- If a Keyphasor channel is selected, a Keyphasor Module must be installed
in the rack.
- The full-scale options allowed for each proportional value is dependent
upon the transducer type.
39
- External barriers are not currently supported with 7200 11 mm, 14 mm, or
3300 16 mm HTPS.
- Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example Channels 1 and
2 may be configured as Eccentricity and Channels 3 and 4 may be
- The Peak to Peak proportional value is disabled when "No Keyphasor" is
selected on the Four Channel Proximitor/Seismic Monitor screen.
compatible.
3.1.5.2
Eccentricity Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Eccentricity Channel
40
CP Mod
details.
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
Identifies the type of Rack Interface Module installed (Std or TMR).
Enable
Peak to Peak
The difference between the positive and the negative extremes of the rotor
bow. The proportional value is only available when a Keyphasor channel has
been selected. This value may be displayed in mils or m.
Direct
The instantaneous eccentricity value. The direct value can be displayed
three ways:
- At shaft rotative speeds greater than 600 rpm, the direct value is the
average distance between the probe tip and the shaft and is displayed
in a way similar to a thrust measurement. This direct measurement is
displayed only when Direct Channel Above 600 rpm is enabled.
- At shaft rotative speeds between 600 rpm and the rpm setting for
Instantaneous Crossover, the direct measurement consists of two
values: a maximum and minimum value relative to a zero reference.
These two direct values are called Direct Max and Direct Min.
- At shaft rotative speeds less than the rpm setting for Instantaneous
Crossover, Direct Max and Direct Min are equal and the direct
measurement consists of an instantaneous measurement relative to a
zero reference. This type of direct measurement is called
instantaneous gap.
41
Instantaneous Crossover
The value for shaft rotative speed where the direct eccentricity measurement
changes from Direct Max/ Direct Min to instantaneous gap. The value for
Instantaneous Crossover must be between 1 and 10 rpm.
Gap
Peak to Peak Full Scale Ranges by transducer type

3300 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-30 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-500 m pp
Custom
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-30 mil pp
0-50 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-500 m pp
0-1000 m pp
Custom
42


3300 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
5-0-5 mil
10-0-10 mil
20-0-20 mil
30-0-30 mil
100-0-100 m
200-0-200 m
500-0-500 m
Custom
5-0-5 mil
10-0-10 mil
20-0-20 mil
30-0-30 mil
50-0-50 mil
100-0-100 m
200-0-200 m
500-0-500 m
1000-0-1000 m
Custom
The Gap values are the same for all transducer types.
Gap
-24 Vdc
Custom
Clamp Value
Recorder Output
selected).
Delay
Alert
Danger
screen.
100 ms option
- If the 100 ms option is off ( ):
- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals (from 1 to
60).
- The Danger time delay can be set for any two available proportional
values.
43

value.
Direct Channel Above 600 RPM
Disabled
Display and alarming of the Direct proportional value will be disabled when
the shaft rotative speed exceeds 600 rpm.
Enabled
Display and alarming of the Direct proportional value will remain active when
shaft rotative speed exceeds 600 rpm.
table.
Adjust Button
Transducer
The following transducer types are available for the Eccentricity Channel (nonbarrier I/O module):
3300 16 mm HTPS
Nonstandard
The following transducer types are available for the Eccentricity Channel (barrier
I/O module):
Nonstandard
44
Customize button
45
Scale Factor
Transducer
Without
Barriers
With Bently
Nevada Internal
Barriers
Standard I/O
With
Barriers
Discrete TMR
I/O With
Barriers
Bussed TMR
I/O With
Barriers
3300 5 and 8 mm
7200 5 and 8 mm
7200 11 mm
7200 14 mm
3300 16 mm HTPS
200 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
192 mV/mil
200 mV/mil
199 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
100 mV/mil
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

OK Limits
Transducer
Upper
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
3300 8 mm
3300 5 mm
7200 5 mm
7200 8 mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11 mm
-19.65
-3.55
-11.60
7200 14 mm
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75
3300 16 mm
HTPS
-16.75
-2.75
-9.75


jumper.
Alarm Mode
Latching
46
Nonlatching
Barriers
OK Mode
Latching
Nonlatching
If a channel is configured for Nonlatching OK, the OK status of that channel
will track the defined OK status of the transducer.
3.1.6
Acceleration Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Acceleration Channel.
3.1.6.1
Acceleration Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring an Acceleration Channel:
- The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type. No
Keyphasors are required.
- The Acceleration Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the transducer type.
- Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example, Channels 1 and 2
47
may be configured as Acceleration and Channels 3 and 4 may be configured

as Radial Vibration).
- When integration is selected, the available Direct Full-scale ranges will change
to reflect this.
- When band-pass filtering is selected, the high-pass and low-pass filters must be
set a minimum of two octaves apart.
- When two channels of acceleration are activated, the maximum channel
frequency supported is as shown:
Dual Channel
Configuration Settings**
Frequencies
Filtering
RMS
3 to 30 kHz
No
No
10 to 30 kHz
No
Yes
3 to 9115 Hz
Yes
No
10 to 9115 Hz
----10 to 9115 Hz
Yes
Yes
** Three dashes represent both yes and no
Integration
No
No
No
Yes
No
- When a single channel of acceleration is activated, the maximum channel

Single Channel
Configuration Settings**
Frequencies
Filtering
RMS
3 to 30 kHz
--No
10 to 30 kHz
--Yes
3 to 9115 Hz
----** Three dashes represent both yes and no
Integration
No
No
Yes
compatible.
- Internal Barrier I/O Modules and External Barriers are not supported with high
frequency accelerometer transducers.
- Only 18 high frequency accelerometer transducers can be installed along with a
full rack of standard transducers. This is due to the fact that the rack can
only power 18 high frequency Accelerometer transducers.
48
3.1.6.2
Acceleration Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Acceleration Channel
CP Mod
details.
49
Channel
Slot
Rack Type
TMR).
Channel Frequency Support
Supported frequency range of the selected transducer depends upon the number
of channels selected. See 3.1.6.1 (Acceleration Channel Configuration
Considerations).
Enable
Direct
Machine data using accelerometers for the transducer inputs and generally
used for high frequency measurements. The signal will be changed if filtering
is selected (High-pass, Low-pass or High-pass and Low-pass selected).
50

23733-03 Std Acceleration
Interface Module
24145-02 Hi Freq
Acceleration Interface
Module
330400 Std Integral
Accelerometer
Nonstandard
49578-01 Std Acceleration

Interface Module
155023-01 Hi Freq
Acceleration Interface
Module
330425 Std Integral

Accelerometer
0-2 g pk
0-5 g pk
0-10 g pk
0-20 g pk
0-25 g pk (23733-03 and
Nonstandard Only)
0-40 g pk (23733-03 and
Nonstandard Only)
0-45 g pk (23733-03 and
Nonstandard Only)
0-2 g rms
0-5 g rms
0-10 g rms
0-20 g rms (Not 24145-02)
0-20 m/s2 pk
0-50 m/s2 pk
0-100 m/s2 pk
0-200 m/s2 pk
0-250 m/s2 pk (23733-03 and
Nonstandard Only)
0-400 m/s2 pk (23733-03 and
Nonstandard Only)
0-450 m/s2 pk (Nonstandard
Only)
0-20 m/s2 rms
0-50 m/s2 rms
0-100 m/s2 rms
0-200 m/s2 rms (Not 2414502)
Custom
0-20 g pk (49578-01 Only)

0-25 g pk (49578-01 Only)
0-40 g pk (49578-01 Only)
0-50 g pk (49578-01 Only)
0-20 g rms
0-25 g rms
0-40 g rms
0-50 g rms
0-20 m/s2 rms (49578-01
Only)
0-50 m/s2 rms (49578-01
Only)
0-100 m/s2 rms (49578-01
Only)
0-200 m/s2 rms
0-250 m/s2 rms
0-400 m/s2 rms
0-500 m/s2 rms
0-20 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-50 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-100 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-200 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-250 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-400 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
0-500 m/s2 pk (49578-01
Only)
Custom
0-20 g pk
0-25 g pk
0-40 g pk
0-50 g pk
0-20 g rms
0-25 g rms
0-40 g rms
0-50 g rms
0-20 m/s2 pk
0-50 m/s2 pk
0-100 m/s2 pk
0-200 m/s2 pk
0-250 m/s2 pk
0-400 m/s2 pk
0-500 m/s2 pk
0-20 m/s2 rms
0-50 m/s2 rms
0-100 m/s2 rms
0-200 m/s2 rms
0-250 m/s2 rms
0-400 m/s2 rms
Custom
51
Integrate
When Integrate is enabled, the Direct Full-scale range selections change to
the following:
Direct values (Integrated) by transducer types
23733-02 Std Acceleration Interface
Module
24145-02 Hi Freq Acceleration Interface
Module
330400 Std Integral Accelerometer
Nonstandard
49578-01 Std Acceleration Interface

Module
155023-01 Hi Freq Acceleration Interface
Module
0-1 in/s pk
0-2 in/s pk
0-1 in/s rms
0-2 in/s rms
0-25 mm/s pk
0-50 mm/s pk
0-100 mm/s pk (Not 330400)
0-25 mm/s rms
0-50 mm/s rms
Custom
0-2 in/s pk (Not 155023-01)

0-2 in/s rms (Not 155023-01)
0-100 mm/s pk (Not 155023-01)
0-100 mm/s rms
Clamp Value
value is bypassed or defeated (for example when a problem occurs with the
Recorder Output
clamped to the current proportional to the selected clamp value or to 2 mA (if
the 2 mA clamp is selected).
52
Corner Frequencies
High-pass Filter
A four-pole filter that must be at least two octaves away from the Low-pass
Filter.
HPF = High-pass Filter; LPF = Low-pass Filter
HPF ( LPF / 4 )
Low-pass Filter
A four-pole filter that must be at least two octaves away from the High-pass
Filter.
LPF ( HPF * 4 )
Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an alarm level or
outside an acceptance region before an alarm is declared as active.
Alert
selected value. The Alert time delay is always set at one second intervals for
all available proportional values.
Danger
selected value.
100 ms option

- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals.

value.
Trip Multiply
53
The following transducer types are available for the Acceleration Channel
23733-03 Std Acceleration Interface Module
24145-02 Hi Freq Acceleration Interface Module
155023-01 Hi Freq Acceleration Interface Module
Nonstandard
The following transducer types are available for the Acceleration Channel
Nonstandard
54
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor for standard transducers. If Non-standard is
selected as the transducer type, the Scale Factor and the OK Limits can be
adjusted. The Non-standard transducer's scale factor must be between 21.2
and 115 mV/mil. Also, there must be at least 2 volts between the Upper and
Lower OK Limits.
55
Transducer
23733-03
24145-02
330400
330425
49578-01
155023-01
Without
Barriers
With Bently
Nevada Internal
Barriers
Scale Factor
Standard I/O
With
Barriers
Discrete TMR
I/O With
Barriers
Bussed TMR
I/O With
Barriers
100 mV/g
100 mV/g
100 mV/g
25 mV/g
25 mV/g
25 mV/g
100 mV/g
*
100 mV/g
25 mV/g
25 mV/g
*
95.6mV/g
*
95.6mV/g
23.9mV/g
23.9mV/g
*
100 mV/g
*
95.6 mV/g
23.9 mV/g
25 mV/g
*
99.4 mV/g
*
95.6 mV/g
23.9 mV/g
24.9 mV/g
*

OK Limits
Upper
Transducer
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
23733-03
-15.05
-13.85
-15.05
-2.75
-3.10
-2.75
-8.90
-8.475
-8.90
24145-02
-15.05
-2.75
-8.90
330400
-15.05
-13.85
-15.05
-2.75
-3.10
-2.75
-8.90
-8.475
-8.90
330425
-11.37
-10.86
-11.37
-5.63
-5.34
-5.63
-8.50
-8.10
-8.50
49578-01
-11.37
-10.86
-11.37
-5.63
-5.34
-5.63
-8.50
-8.10
-8.50
155023-01
-11.37
-5.63
-8.50

Module. Refer to Section 4.1 (Setting the I/O Jumper)for the function of this
jumper.
Alarm Mode
Latching
is no longer in alarm. The alarm state will continue until the channel is reset.
See Page 46.
56
Nonlatching
is no longer in alarm.
Alert is the first level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level
exceeds the selected value. Danger is the second level alarm that occurs
when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected value. The Alert and
Danger values are set on the Setpoint screen.
Barriers
safety barriers are connected between the monitor and the transducer. If
using an Internal Barrier I/O Module, select the internal option. These
devices are used to restrict the amount of energy that can flow into a
hazardous area.
OK Mode
Latching
If a channel is configured for Latching OK, once the channel has gone
not OK the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. See page 47.
Nonlatching
If a channel is configured for Nonlatching OK, the OK status of that
channel will track the defined OK status of the transducer.
time. If the option is enabled, the time is set to 30 seconds. This option prevents
false trips caused by intermittent transducers.
3.1.7
Velocity Channel Options

Configuration Software screens associated with the Velocity Channel.
3.1.7.1
Velocity Channel Configuration Considerations

Consider the following items before configuring a Velocity Channel:
- Internal Barrier I/O Modules are not currently supported with 9200, 47633,
86205, and non-standard 2-wire seismoprobes.
- The "No Keyphasor" option is automatically selected for this channel type. No
Keyphasors are required.
- The Velocity Direct full-scale range is dependent upon the transducer type.
- When a full-scale range is modified, readjust the setpoints associated with this
proportional value.
57
- Monitors must be configured in channel pairs (for example, Channels 1 and 2

may be configured as Velocity and Channels 3 and 4 may be configured as
Thrust Position).
- When integration is selected, the available Direct Full-scale Ranges will change
to reflect this.
- When band-pass filtering is selected, the high-pass and low-pass filters must be
set a minimum of a decade apart.
- The 100ms danger alarm is only available for the Velomitor and High
Temperature Velomitor options.
- When a single or dual channel of velocity is activated, the maximum channel
Channel
Configuration Settings
Frequencies
Filtering
RMS
Integration
3 to 5500 Hz
--No
--10 to 5500 Hz
--Yes
--** dashes represent both yes and no
compatible.
- If the monitor is configured to alarm on high velocity conditions on a
reciprocating machine, it is recommended that you disable the Timed
OK/Channel Defeat option.
58
3.1.7.2
Velocity Channel Configuration Options

This section describes the options available on the Velocity Channel
CP Mod
details.
Channel
59
Slot
Rack Type
TMR).
Channel Frequency Support
Supported frequency range of the selected transducer which depends upon the
number of channels selected. See 3.1.7.1 (Velocity Channel Configuration
Considerations).
Enable
Direct
The time rate of change of the displacement. When Integration is selected it
yields a peak to peak measurement of the displacement.
The Direct values are available for all transducer types.
Direct
0-0.5 in/s pk
0-1 in/s pk
0-2 in/s pk
0 - 0.5 in/s rms
0-1 in/s rms
0-2 in/s rms
0-10 mm/s pk
0-20 mm/s pk
0-50 mm/s pk
0-10 mm/s rms
0-20 mm/s rms
0-50 mm/s rms
Custom
60
Integrate
When Integrate is enabled, the Direct Full-scale Range selections change to
the following:
The Direct values (Integrated) are available for all transducer types.
Full-scale Range
Direct
0-5 mil pp
0-10 mil pp
0-20 mil pp
0-100 m pp
0-200 m pp
0-500 m pp
Custom
Clamp Value
value is bypassed or defeated (for example a problem with the monitor). The
selected value can be between the minimum and maximum full-scale range
values. Only the values available from the Recorder Outputs,
Recorder Output
current at the recorder output. If the channel is bypassed, the output will be
selected).
Corner Frequencies
High-pass Filter
A four-pole filter that must be at least a decade away from the Low-pass
Filter.
HPF ( LPF / 10 )
Low-pass Filter
A four-pole filter that must be at least a decade away from the High-pass
Filter.
LPF ( HPF * 10 )
61
Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an alarm level or
outside an acceptance region before an alarm is declared as active.
Alert
selected value. The Alert time delay is always set at one second intervals for
all available proportional values.
Danger
selected value.
100 ms option

- The Danger time delay can be set at one second intervals.
- The Danger time delay can be set for all available proportional
values.

value.
Trip Multiply
The following transducer types are available for the Velocity Channel (nonbarrier I/O module):
9200 2-wire Seismoprobe
Nonstandard 2-wire Seismoprobe
Velomitor
Nonstandard
The following transducer types are available for the Velocity Channel (barrier
I/O module):
Velomitor
Nonstandard
62
Customize button
Used to adjust the Scale Factor for standard transducers. If Non-standard is
selected as the transducer type, the Scale Factor and the OK Limits can be
adjusted. The Non-standard transducer's scale factor must be between 90
and 575 mV/mil. Also, there must be at least 2 volts between the Upper and
Lower OK Limits.
63
Scale Factor
Transducer
Without Barriers
With BNC Internal

Barriers
With Barriers
500 mV/(in/s)
490 mV/(in/s)
477 mV/(in/s)
145 mV/(in/s)
100 mV/(in/s)
145 mV/(in/s)
*
*
*
*
100 mV/(in/s)
145 mV/(in/s)
500 mV/(in/s)
490 mV/(in/s)
477 mV/(in/s)
145 mV/(in/s)
100 mV/(in/s)
145 mV/(in/s)
9200
47633
86205
Nonstandard 2 wire
Velomitor
High Temperature
Velomitor

OK Limits
Transducer
Upper
Lower
Center Gap Voltage
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
Without
Barriers
(V)
With
Barriers
(V)
9200
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
47633
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
86205
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
NonStandard
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
Velomitor
-19.85
-17.95
-19.85
-4.15
-2.05
-4.15
-12.00
-10.00
-12.00
High
Temperature
Velomitor
-21.26
-21.26
-2.74
-2.74
-12.00
-12.00

jumper.
Take Input From Channel A (1 or 3) Transducer
The Channel B (2 or 4) Velocity channel options screen has an extra control that appears
just above the transducer type list box (see figure below). It is the Take Input from Channel
A Transducer checkbox. When checked ( ), the channel pair uses Dual Path Input. That
is, input from the first channel (1 or 3) is used for both channels in the pair. The transducer
input, barrier, OK Mode, and Timed OK Channel Defeat input from channel A will be copied
to the second channel (2 or 4) in the channel pair.
64
Velocity Channel Options Screen for Channel B

Alarm Mode
Latching
is no longer in alarm. The alarm state will continue until the channel is reset.
See Page 46.
Nonlatching
is no longer in alarm.
Alert is the first level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level
exceeds the selected value. Danger is the second level alarm that occurs
when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected value. The Alert and
Danger values are set on the Setpoint screen.
Barriers
For Seismoprobes, select the MTL 764(-) Zener External option if external safety
barriers are connected between the monitor and the transducer. For Velomitor,
select the MTL 787(-) Zener External option if external safety barriers are being
used. If using an Internal Barrier I/O Module for Velomitor, select the internal
option. These devices are used to restrict the amount of energy that can flow
into a hazardous area.
65
OK Mode
Latching
OK, the status stays not OK until a reset is issued. See page 47.
Nonlatching
If a channel is configured for Nonlatching OK, the OK status of that channel
will track the defined OK status of the transducer.
time. If the option is enabled, the time is set to 30 seconds. This option prevents
false trips caused by intermittent transducers.
3.2
Setpoints
This section specifies the available setpoints for each type of channel. A setpoint
is the level within the full-scale range that determines when an alarm occurs.
The 3500 Monitoring System allows Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints to be set for every
proportional value on each channel. The channel will drive an Alert/Alarm 1
indication if one or more of the channel proportional values exceeds its setpoints.
The 3500 Monitoring System also allows up to four Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints
(two over setpoints and two under setpoints) to be set for up to two of the
proportional values. You may select any two of the available proportional values
for the channel.
Note
The setpoint over and under limits can only be placed within the OK limits of
the specified transducer.
66
Use the following screen in the Rack Configuration Software to adjust

Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints. This screen will vary depending
upon the type of channel.
67
The following table lists the Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints available
for each channel pair type. The setpoint number is used in the Communication
Gateway and Display Interface Modules.
68
Setpoint
Number
Radial Vibration
Thrust Position
Differential
Expansion
Over Direct
Over Direct
Over Direct
Over Gap
Under Direct
Under Direct
Under Gap
Over Gap
Over Gap
Over 1X Ampl
Under Gap
Under Gap
Under 1X Ampl
Danger (configurable)
Danger
(configurable)
Over 1X Phase Lag
Danger
(configurable)
Under 1X Phase Lag
Danger
(configurable)
Over 2X Ampl
Danger
(configurable)
Under 2X Ampl
10
Over 2X Phase Lag
11
Under 2X Phase Lag
12
Over Not 1X Ampl
13
Over Smax Ampl
14
15
16
17
Setpoint
Number
Eccentricity
Acceleration
Velocity
Over Peak to Peak
Over Direct
Over Direct
Over Gap
Danger (Over Direct)
Danger (Over Direct)
Under Gap
Over Direct Max
Under Direct Max
Over Direct Min
Under Direct Min
10
11
All the Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints are provided first, followed by the configured
danger setpoints.
Example 1:
Radial Vibration with the Danger/Alarm 2 Over 2X Ampl setpoint and the
Danger/Alarm 2 Under 2X Ampl setpoint selected.
setpoint 14 is Over 2X Ampl (Danger)
setpoint 15 is Under 2X Ampl (Danger)
Example 2:
Thrust Position with the Danger/Alarm 2 Over Gap setpoint and the
Danger/Alarm 2 Under Gap setpoint selected.
setpoint 5 is Over Gap (Danger)
setpoint 6 is Under Gap (Danger)
69
3.3
Software Switches
The Proximitor/Seismic Monitor supports two module software switches and four
channel software switches. These switches let you temporarily bypass or inhibit
monitor and channel functions. Set these switches on the Software Switches
screen under the Utilities Option on the main screen of the Rack Configuration
Software.

Module Switches
Configuration Mode
A switch that allows the monitor to be configured. To configure the monitor,
enable ( ) this switch and set the key switch on the front of the Rack
Interface Module in the PROGRAM position. When downloading a
configuration from the Rack Configuration Software, this switch will
automatically be enabled and disabled by the Rack Configuration Software.
If the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration process, use this
switch to remove the module from Configuration Mode.
70

When enabled, the monitor does not perform alarming functions. All
proportional values are still provided. The monitor switch number is used in
the Communication Gateway and Display Interface Modules.
Monitor Switch Number
Switch Name
Configuration Mode
Channel Switches
Alert Bypass
When enabled, the channel does not perform Alert alarming functions.
Danger Bypass
When enabled, the channel does not perform Danger alarming functions.
When enabled, all nonprimary Alert alarms are inhibited.
Bypass
When enabled, the channel provides no alarming functions and supplies no
The channel switch number is used in the Communication Gateway and Display
Interface Modules.
Switch Name
Alert Bypass
Danger Bypass
Bypass
71
4.

The Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module receives signals from the transducers and
routes the signals to the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor. The I/O module supplies
power to the transducers. The I/O module also provides a 4 to 20 mA recorder
output for each transducer input channels. Only one I/O module can be installed
at any one time and must be installed behind the monitor (in a rack mount or
panel mount rack) or above the monitor (in a Bulkhead rack).
The 3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor can operate with the following types of
I/O modules:
Internal Termination
External Termination
Block
Proximitor/Siesmic I/O
module
Proximitor/Siesmic I/O
module
Terminal strip
connectors
Proximitor/Siesmic
Internal Barrier I/O
module
Proximitor/Siesmic
TMR I/O module
Euro Style connectors
This section describes how to use the connectors on the I/O modules, lists what
cables should be used, and shows the pin outs of the cables. The 3500 Field
Wiring Diagram Package (part number 130432-01) shows how to connect
transducers and recorders to the I/O module or the External Termination Block.
4.1
Setting the I/O Jumper

The I/O jumper on the Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module is used to identify the type
of transducer connected to the I/O module.
Note
The connector shunt must be installed vertically on the top or bottom four
terminal posts to select the corresponding transducer type.
WARNING - Do not place shunt over NOT USED terminal posts. The
connector shunt must be placed over the terminal posts for which the channel
pair is configured, even when the channel pair is inactivated.
72
PROX/ACCL (Proximitor/Accelerometer):
The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the top left four terminal posts.
STANDARD
TMR
73
SEIS W/O BAR (Seismoprobe without a Barrier):

The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the top right four terminal
posts.
VELOM (Velomitor):
The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the bottom left four terminal
posts.
74
SEIS W/ BAR (Seismoprobe with Barrier):

The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the bottom right terminal
posts.
DISCRETE VELOM (Discrete Velomitor):

The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the bottom left four terminal
posts.
75
BUSSED VELOM (Bussed Velomitor):

The four-pin connector shunt must be installed on the bottom right terminal
posts.
76
4.2
Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module (Internal

Termination)
Internal Termination I/O modules require you to wire each transducer and
recorder directly to the I/O module. This section shows what this Internal
Termination I/O module looks like and how to connect the wires to the Euro Style
connector.
Connect the wire from the

Channel 1 and 2 to the I/O
module.
Use the jumper to

select the type of
transducer connected
to Channel 1 and 2 of
the I/O module.
Channel 3 and 4 to the I/O
module.
Use the jumper to
select the type of
transducer connected
to Channel 3 and 4 of
the I/O module.
external switch. Used to
inhibit all non-primary
Alert/Alarm 1 functions for all
four channels.
COM/REC: Connect each
channel of the I/O module to
a recorder.
77
4.3
Proximitor/Seismic Internal Barrier I/O Module

The Internal Barrier I/O modules requires that each transducer be connected to the Barrier
I/O module individually. This module provides four channels of intrinsically safe signal
conditioning for Proximitor and/or Seismic transducers and has two internally mounted
zener barrier modules, one for each pair of transducer channels. There are three types of
Internal Barrier I/O Module; the first variant provides four channels for Proximitor
transducers only, the second provides two channels for Proximitor transducers and two for
Seismic transducers, and the third provides four channels for Seismic transducers only. A
3500 Earthing Module is required for systems that use Internal Barrier I/O Modules to
provide an intrinsically safe earth connection for intrinsically safe applications. Refer to the
Rack Installation and Maintenance Manual for system requirements when using Internal
Barrier I/O Modules.
Connect the wires from

Proximitor transducers to
the Barrier I/O Module.
INHB/RET:
Connect to an
external switch.
Used to inhibit all
non-primary
Alert/Alarm 1
functions for all
four channels.
COM/REC:
Connect each
channel of the I/O
module to a
recorder.
78
Connect the wires

from Seismic
transducers to the
Barrier I/O Module.
4.4

terminal block to the base, grip the block firmly and pull. Do not pull the block out
by its wires because this could loosen or damage the wires or connector.
Typical I/O module

Do not remove more than 6 mm (0.25 in) of insulation from the wires.
79
4.5
External Termination I/O Modules

External Termination I/O modules let you simplify the wiring to the I/O modules in
a 3500 rack by using a 25-pin cable to route the signals from the four
transducers and a nine pin cable to route the signals from the recorders to the
I/O module. This section describes the External Termination I/O modules
available for use with the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor. It also shows what these
External Termination I/O modules look like, what the External Termination Blocks
look like, and the pin outs of the cables that go between the External Termination
I/O modules and the External Termination Blocks.
4.5.1
Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module (External Termination)

This section discusses the features of the Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module.
Connect the I/O module to

the External Termination
Block using cable 129525XXXX-XX.
Use the jumper to select
the type of transducer
connected to Channel 1
and 2 of the I/O module.
Use the jumper to select
the type of transducer
connected to Channel 3
and 4 to the I/O module.
the Recorder External
Termination Block using
80
4.5.2
Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Module (External Termination)

The Proximitor/Seismic TMR I/O Module is used in a TMR rack and can be
configured as TMR I/O Discrete or TMR I/O Bussed.
When configured as TMR I/O Discrete, twelve transducers send input signals to
three monitors so that each transducer signal of each channel is not shared by
other channels. Six External Termination Blocks are required: three are
Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Blocks used to wire the transducers; the
other three are Recorder External Termination Blocks used to wire the recorders.
When configured as TMR I/O Bussed, four transducers are bussed to three
monitors so that each transducer is shared by three channels, one channel from
each monitor. Four External Termination Blocks are required: one is a Bussed
Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Block used to wire the transducers; the
other three are Recorder External Termination Blocks used to wire the recorders.
Connect the I/O module to the External Termination

Block using cable 129525-XXXX-XX
Use the jumper to select the type of transducer

connected to Channel 1 and 2 of the I/O module.
Use the jumper to select the type of transducer
connected to Channel 3 and 4 of the I/O module.
Connect the I/O module to the Recorder External

Termination Blocks using cable 129529-XXXX-XX
81
4.5.3

The three types of External Termination Blocks used with a Proximitor/Seismic
I/O Module are the Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Blocks, the Bussed
Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Blocks, and the Recorder External
Termination Blocks. Each type comes with either Terminal Strip or Euro Style
connectors.
4.5.3.1
Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Block (Terminal Strip

connectors)

Channel 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
External Termination Block.
external switch.
Connect the I/O module to the

using cable 129525-XXXX-XX.
Channel 3 and Channel 4

82
4.5.3.2
Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Block (Euro Style

connectors)
Connect the wire from

the transducers
associated with
Channel 1, 2, 3, and 4
to the External
Termination Block.
Connect the I/O module to the


83
4.5.3.3
Bussed Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Block (Terminal

Strip connectors)

Channel 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
External Termination Block.
INHB_A/RET_A, INHB_B/RET_B,
and INHB_C/RET_C: Connect to a
common switch or individual
switches.
Connect the TMR I/O Module to

the External Termination Block

84
4.5.3.4
Bussed Proximitor/Seismic External Termination Block (Euro Style

connectors)

Connect the wire from the transducers

associated with Channel 1, 2, 3, and 4
to the External Termination Block.
INHB_A/RET_A, INHB_B/RET_B, and
INHB_C/RET_C: Connect to a common
switch or individual switches.
Connect the TMR I/O Module to the

External Termination Block using
85
4.5.3.5
Recorder External Termination Block (Terminal Strip connectors)

Connect the recorders
associated with Channel 1, 2, 3,
and 4 to the Recorder External
Termination Block.


86
4.5.3.6
Recorder External Termination Block (Euro Style connectors)

Connect the recorders
associated with Channel 1, 2, 3,
and 4 to the Recorder External
Termination Block.


87
4.5.4
Cable Pin Outs

3500 Transducer Signal to External Termination Block Cable
88
129529-XXXX-XX
3500 Recorder Output to ET Block Cable
89
Maintenance
5.
Maintenance
This section shows how to verify the operation of channels in an
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor (Section 5.1), how to adjust the scale factor
(Section 5.2.1), and zero position (Section 5.2.2).
5.1
Verifying a 3500 Rack - Proximitor/Seismic

Monitor Module
Section
Number
90
Topic
Page
Number
91
5.1.1
5.1.2
91
5.1.3
92
5.1.4
93
5.1.5
96
5.1.6
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

Channels
125
5.1.7
135
5.1.8
Velocity Channels
148
5.1.9
Acceleration Channels
168
5.1.10
Verify Recorder Outputs
182
5.1.11
183
5.1.1
Maintenance

- the monitored machine is classified as critical.
- the 3500 rack is operating in a harsh environment such as in extreme
temperature, high humidity, or in a corrosive atmosphere.
Procedure 10012-1 to adjust the interval.
5.1.2

- Power Supply (single channel)
- Multimeter - 4 digits
- Function Generator
- 100 F capacitor
- 40 k resistor
- Bently Nevada Corporation TK 16 Keyphasor Multiplier/Divider or equivalent
(Instructions in this manual refer to the TK 16)
- additional -18 Vdc Supply for use with the TK 16
- 2 Channel Oscilloscope
- 100 F capacitor
- 40 k resistor
Velocity Channels - Seismoprobe
- 2.49 k resistor
91
Maintenance
Velocity Channels - Velomitor

- 10 F capacitor
- 4 k resistor
5.1.3

The following figure shows the typical test setup for verifying a
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor. The test equipment is used to simulate the
transducer signal and the laptop computer is used to observe the output from the
rack.
3500 rack
Laptop computer
Test Equipment
RS-232 communications
General Layout for Maintenance
92
Maintenance

equipment to the monitor using one of the following methods:
Connect test
equipment
here.
Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module

and Internal Barrier I/O Module
5.1.4
Block (Euro Style
Connectors)
Block (Terminal Strip
Connectors)

be familiar with the following features of the Rack Configuration Software:
- upload, download, and save configuration files
- enable and disable channels and alarms
- bypass channels and alarms
- display the Verification screen
Note
Maintenance or Troubleshooting Procedures. It may be necessary during
these procedures to change setpoints, etc. which must be restored to their
original values at the conclusion of the procedures. At that time the original
configuration should be downloaded to the rack.
93
Maintenance
The following figures show how the Verification screen displays output from a 3500 rack:
Alarm Verification Fields:
These fields display output for verifying channel alarms. Alert/Alarm 1 alarms
are displayed in yellow in the bar graph and with the word Alarm under the
current value box. Danger/Alarm 2 alarms are displayed in red in the bar graph
and with the word Alarm under the current value box.
Current Value
The current proportional value is displayed in this box.
Setpoints are indicated by lines on the bargraph display:
Danger/Alarm 2 Over = Solid Red Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Over = Solid Yellow Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Under = Dashed Yellow Line
Danger/Alarm 2 Under = Dashed Red Line
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading on the
bar graph display and current value box to be zero. The Zero Position Volts
value is displayed in the Zero Position Volts box above each channel value bar
graph.
94
Maintenance
Any channel bar graph value that enters Alert/Alarm 1 or Danger/Alarm 2 will
cause the alarm lines in the Channel Status box to indicate an alarm. Any
channel that enters alarm will cause the alarm lines in the Module Status box to
indicate an alarm.
OK Limit Verification Fields
These fields display output for verifying OK limits.
Current Value Verification Fields:

These fields display output for verifying channel output.
95
Maintenance
5.1.5

limits for channels configured as Radial Vibration. The output values and alarm
setpoints are verified by varying the input vibration signal level (both peak to
Radial Vibration channels can be configured for the following channel values and
alarms:
Channel Values
Alarms
Over
5.1.5.1
Under
Direct
Gap
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Radial Vibration

The following test equipment and software setup can be used as the initial set up
needed for all the Radial Vibration channel verification procedures (Test Alarms,
Application Alert
96
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.
Maintenance
Application Alert
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Radial Vibration
generator, and multimeter to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as shown
in the figure below (Radial Vibration Test Setup). Set the test equipment as
specified below.
Power Supply
-7.00 Vdc
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
Amplitude level:
Minimum (above zero)
Keyphasor
Multiplier/Divider
Multiply Switch: 001
Divide Switch: 001
97
Maintenance
The equipment shown in the dashed box is required for 1X

Amplitude and Phase, 2X Amplitude and Phase, Not 1X
Amplitude, and Smax Amplitude.
Keyphasor
I/O Module
40 k
Keyphasor Multiplier/Divider
100 F
-18
Vdc
Keyphasor
Signal
Multimeter
Function Generator
Proximitor
Seismic I/O
Module
Power Supply
Input Signal
Radial Vibration Test Setup

The Test Equipment outputs should be floating relative to earth ground.
.
98
Maintenance
Verification Screen Setup - Radial Vibration

Note
Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled for Radial Vibration channels. It will
take 30 seconds for a channel to return to the OK status from a not OK
condition.
associated with the Radial Vibration Channels.
Section
Number
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.5.2
100
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Gap
101
5.1.5.2
102
5.1.5.2
103
5.1.5.2
105
5.1.5.2
106
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Not 1X Amplitude
107
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Smax Amplitude
108
5.1.5.3
110
5.1.5.3
111
5.1.5.3
113
5.1.5.3
115
5.1.5.3
116
5.1.5.3
118
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Not 1X Amplitude
119
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Smax Amplitude
121
5.1.5.4
Test OK Limits
122
99
Maintenance
5.1.5.2
Test Alarms - Radial Vibration

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the vibration and
Keyphasor signal with a function generator. The alarm levels are tested by
varying the vibration signal (both peak to peak amplitude and DC voltage bias)
and observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen on
the test computer. It is only necessary to test those alarm parameters that are
configured and being used. The general test procedure to verify current alarm
operation will include simulating a transducer input signal and varying this signal:
1. to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints, and
hysteresis must be considered. Adjust the signal well below the alarm setpoint
for the alarm to clear.
Direct
the I/O module.
reading that is below the Direct setpoint levels on the Direct bar graph display
of the Verification screen.
Value field contains no alarm indication.
an Alarm.
changes color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Direct remains red and that the Current Value Field
100
Maintenance

Current Value Box contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch
10. If you cant verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured setpoints. If
wiring to the channel terminals on the I/O module. Verify that the OK LED
comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK LED.
Gap
the I/O module.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Gap is green and that the Current
Value field has no alarm indication.
Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Gap changes
Alarm.
indicates an Alarm.
101
Maintenance
Alarm setpoint levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe that
the bar graph indicator for Gap changes color to green and that the Current
Value Box contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on the
11. If you can not verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured setpoints.
If the monitor still does not alarm properly or fails any other part of this test,
go to Section 5.1.11 (If a Channel Fails a Verification Test).
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for 1X Ampl is green and that the
Current Value field contains no alarm indication.
1X Ampl Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 to 3 seconds after the
Alarm.
102
Maintenance
1X Ampl Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 to 3 seconds after
Ampl changes color from yellow to red and the Current Value Field indicates
an Alarm.
1X Phase
the I/O module.
Note
If you can not change the phase output, change the phase alarm setpoints to
divide setting is one. Adjust the phase to produce a reading that is within the
1X Phase setpoint levels on the 1X Phase bar graph display of the
Verification screen.
103
Maintenance
Note
reading.
color from green to yellow and the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for 1X Phase remains red and that the Current Value
indicator for 1X Phase changes color to green and that the Current Value Box
contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
setpoint levels.
104
Maintenance
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for 2X Ampl is green, and the Current
2X Ampl Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait 2 or 3 seconds after the
an Alarm.
2X Ampl Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after
indicates an Alarm.
105
Maintenance
2X Phase
the I/O module.
Note
If you can not change the phase output, change the phase alarm setpoints to
divide setting is two. Adjust the phase to produce a reading that is within the
2X Phase setpoint levels on the 2X Phase bar graph display of the
Note
reading.
delay and verify that the bar graph indicator for 2X Phase changes color from
green to yellow and that the Current Value Field indicates an Alarm.
106
Maintenance
bar graph indicator for 2X Phase remains red and that the Current Value
indicator for 2X Phase changes color to green and that the Current Value Box
contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
setpoint levels.
Not 1X Amplitude (Not 1X)
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
reading that is below the Not 1X setpoint levels on the Not 1X bar graph
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Not 1X is green, and the Current
Not 1X Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
an Alarm.
107
Maintenance
bar graph indicator for Not 1X remains yellow and that the Current Value
Not 1X Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Not 1X remains red and that the Current Value Field
that the bar graph indicator for Not 1X changes color to green and the
Smax Amplitude
Note
parameter.
on the I/O module.
3. Adjust the function generator amplitude to produce a reading that is below
the Smax setpoint levels on the Smax bar graph display of the Verification
screen.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Smax is green, and the Current
108
Maintenance
Smax Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Smax remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
Smax Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for Smax remains red and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
that the bar graph indicator for Smax changes color to green and the Current
wiring to the channel pair terminals on the I/O module. Verify that the OK
LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the
109
Maintenance
5.1.5.3
Verify Channel Values - Radial Vibration

The general approach for testing channel values is to simulate the vibration and
Keyphasor input signal with a function generator. The output values are verified
by varying the input vibration signal level (both peak to peak amplitude and DC
voltage bias) and observing that the correct results are reported in the
Note
These parameters have an accuracy specification of 1 % of full scale for
amplitude and 3 degrees for phase.
Direct
the I/O module.
shown below. Adjust the amplitude of the function generator to the
calculated voltage.
Full Scale Voltage = Direct Meter Top Scale Transducer Scale Factor
Note
Example 1:
Direct Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale = (10 0.200)
= 2.000 Vpp
For Vrms input:
Vrms
= (0.707/2) (Vpp), for a sinewave input
= (0.707/2) (2)
= 0.707 Vrms
110
Maintenance
Example 2:
Direct Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = (200 0.007874)
= 1.5748 Vpp
For Vrms input:
Vrms = (0.707/2) (Vpp), for a sinewave input
= (0.707/2) (1.574)
= 0.5566 Vrms
divide setting is one. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and Current
Value Box is reading 1 % of full scale. If the recorder output is configured,
refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the
recorder output.
Gap
the I/O module.
3. If Gap is configured to read in volts, adjust the power supply to produce a
voltage equal to -18.00 Vdc on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the
Gap bar graph display and Current Value Box is reading 1 % of -18.00 Vdc.
If the recorder output is configured, Refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder
Outputs) for steps to verify recorder output.
bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and Current Value
Box is reading 1 % of the mid-scale value. If the recorder output is
configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to
verify the recorder output. Go to step 8.
111
Maintenance
If Gap is configured to read in displacement units, calculate the full-scale and

bottom-scale voltage using the following equation:
Note
Gap Full-Scale =
Gap Zero Position Volts + (Gap Meter Top Scale Transducer Scale Factor)
Example 1:
Scale Range is 15-0-15 mil (Gap Top Scale = 15 mil)
Gap Full Scale input = -9.75 Vdc + (15 0.200)
= -6.75 Vdc
Example 2:
= 7.874 mV/m
Scale Range is 300-0-300 m (Gap Top Scale = 300 m)
Gap Full Scale input = -9.75 Vdc + (300 0.007874)
= -7.3878 Vdc
Gap Bottom-Scale =
Gap Zero Position Volts - (Gap Meter Bottom Scale Transducer Scale
Factor)
Example 1:
Scale Range is 15-0-15 mil (Gap Bottom Scale = 15 mil)
= -9.75 Vdc - (15 0.200)
= -12.75 Vdc
Example 2:
= 7.874 mV/m
Scale Range is 300-0-300 m (Gap Bottom Scale = 300 m)
= -9.75 Vdc - (300 0.007874)
= -12.1122 Vdc
5. Adjust the power supply voltage to match the voltage displayed in the Gap
Zero Position Volts Box. The Gap bar graph display and Current Value Box
should read 0 mil (0 mm) 1 %.
112
Maintenance
6. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to top scale (from step 3)
on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and
Current Value Box is reading 1 % of top scale. If the recorder output is
verify recorder output.
7. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to bottom scale (from
step 3) on the Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display
and Current Value Box is reading 1 % of bottom scale. If the recorder
output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for
steps to verify recorder output.
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
voltage.
Full Scale Voltage = 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale X Transducer Scale Factor
Note
113
Maintenance
Example 1:
Full Scale
= (10 0.200)
= 2.000 Vpp
For V rms input:

V rms = (0.707/2) (Vpp), for a sinewave input
= (0.707/2) (2)
= 0.707 Vrms
Example 2:
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale
= (200 0.007874)
= 1.5748 Vpp
For V rms input:
= (0.707/2) (1.574)
= 0.5566 Vrms
divide setting is one. Verify that the 1X Ampl bar graph display and Current
refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify recorder
output.
114
Maintenance
1X Phase
Note
the I/O module.
one.
3. Attach one channel of a two channel oscilloscope to the vibration signal
example below (on page 115) which illustrates a phase of 45. Observe the
1X Phase bar graph display and Current Value Box; it should read
Example:
1X = one cycle of vibration signal per shaft revolution.
0
360
one cycle
1X
Vibration
Signal
Time
Keyphasor
Signal
Phase
Lag= 45
one shaft revolution
115
Maintenance

Note
If the test equipment has the capability to change the phase output to a known
value, use the following procedures.
the I/O module.
one.
and Current Value Box is reading 1.5 % of mid-scale. If the recorder output
is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to
verify recorder output.
4. If the reading does not meet specifications double check the input signal to
ensure it is correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications or fails
any other part of this test, go to Section 5.1.11 (If a Channel Fails a
Verification Test).
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
voltage.
Full Scale Voltage = 2X Ampl Meter Top Scale Transducer Scale Factor
116
Maintenance
Note
Example 1:
Full Scale
= (10 0.200)
= 2.000 Vpp
For V rms input:

= (0.707/2) (2)
= 0.707 Vrms
Example 2:
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale
= (200 0.007874)
= 1.5748 Vpp
For V rms input:
= (0.707/2) (1.574)
= 0.5566 Vrms
divide setting is two. Verify that the 2X Ampl bar graph display and Current
refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify recorder
output.
117
Maintenance
2X Phase
Note
the I/O module.
two.
3. Attach one channel of the two channel oscilloscope to the vibration signal
example below (on page 118) which illustrates a phase of 90. Observe the
2X Phase bar graph display and Current Value Box; it should read
Example:
360
second cycle
first cycle
2X
Vibration
Signal
Time
Keyphasor
Signal
Phase
Lag= 90
one shaft revolution

2X = two cycles of vibration signal per shaft revolution
118
Maintenance
Note
If the test equipment has the capability to change the phase output to a known
value, use the following procedure.
the I/O module.
two.
and Current Value Box is reading 1.5 % of mid-scale. If the recorder output
is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to
verify the recorder output.
ensure it is correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications and/or
fails any other part of this test, go to Section 5.1.11 (If a Channel Fails a
Verification Test).
Not 1X Amplitude
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
3. Calculate the full-scale voltage according to the equation and example shown
below. Adjust the function generator amplitude to the calculated voltage.
119
Maintenance
Full-Scale Voltage =
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale Transducer Scale Factor
Note
Example 1:
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale
= (10 0.200)
= 2.000 Vpp
For Vrms input:

= (0.707/2) (2)
= 0.707 Vrms
Example 2:
Not 1X Ampl Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale
= (200 0.007874)
= 1.5748 Vpp
For V rms input:

= (0.707/2) (1.574)
= 0.5566 Vrms
divide setting is two. Verify that the Not 1X bar graph display and Current
recorder output.
120
Maintenance
Smax Amplitude
Note
parameter.
on the I/O module.
3. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the equation and example shown
below.
Full-Scale Voltage =
(Smax Meter Top Scale Transducer Scale Factor) 1.414
Note
Example 1:
Smax Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale
= (10 0.200) 1.414

= 2.828 Vpp
For Vrms input:

= (0.707/2) (2.828)
= 0.999 Vrms
Example 2:
Smax Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale = (200 .007874) 1.414
= 2.2267 Vpp
For Vrms input:
= (0.707/2) (2.2267)
= 0.7871 Vrms
121
Maintenance
4. Set the Keyphasor multiplier/divider so that the multiply setting is set to one
and the divide setting is set to one. Adjust the function generator amplitude
for full scale. Verify that the Smax bar graph display and Current Value Box is
reading 1 % of full scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to
Section 5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder
output.
wiring to the channel pair terminals on the I/O module. Verify that the OK
5.1.5.4
Test OK Limits
computer.
the I/O module.
Note
If the Danger Bypass has been activated, then the BYPASS LED will be on.
All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the relay to be
energized.
(energized). See 3500/20 Rack Interface Module Operation and
Maintenance Manual, part number 129768-01.
122
Maintenance
7. Increase the power supply voltage (more negative) until the OK LED just
goes off (upper limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the Channel
Status box reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify that
the Upper OK limit voltage displayed on the Verification screen is equal to or
10. Gradually decrease the power supply voltage (less negative) until the OK
LED just goes off (lower limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the
OK LED comes back on, the OK relay energizes and that the Channel OK
13. If you can not verify any configured OK limit, go to Section 5.1.11 (If a
Channel Fails a Verification Test).
setting.
123
Maintenance
Radial Vibration Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit (volts)
Upper OK Limit
(volts)
7200 5&8 mm w/
barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
7200 5&8 mm w/o

barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
7200 11 mm w/o
barriers
-3.5 to -3.6
-19.6 to -19.7
7200 14 mm w/o
barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3300 5&8 mm w/
barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3300 5&8 mm w/o

barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
3000 (-18 V) w/o

barriers
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.0 to -12.1
3000 (-24 V) w/o

barriers
-3.2 to -3.3
-15.7 to -15.8
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.5 to -12.6
-2.4 to -2.5
-12.1 to -12.2
3300 16 mm HTPS w/o

barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-16.7 to -16.8
124
5.1.6
Maintenance

limits for channels configured as Thrust Position and Differential Expansion. The
output values and alarm setpoints are verified by varying the input DC voltage
from a power supply and observing that the correct results are reported in the
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion channels can be configured for the
following channel values and alarms:
Channel Values
5.1.6.1
Alarms
Over
Under
Direct
Gap
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Thrust Position and Differential

Expansion
needed for all the Thrust Position and Differential Expansion channel verification
procedures (Test Alarms, Verify Channels, and Test OK Limits).
Application Alert
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.

Application Alert
Disconnecting field
OK condition.
125
Maintenance
Test Equipment Setup - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

Simulate the transducer signal by connecting power supply (output terminals)
and multimeter (input terminals) to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as
shown in the figure on page 126 (Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Test
Setup).
Multimeter
Proximitor
Seismic I/O
Module
Power Supply
Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Test Setup

126
Maintenance
Verification Screen Setup - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

associated with the Thrust Position and Differential Expansion Channels.
Topic
Section
Number
5.1.6.2
Page
Number
5.1.6.2
127
5.1.6.2
Test Alarms - Gap
128
5.1.6.3
129
5.1.6.3
132
5.1.6.4
Test OK Limits
132
Test Alarms - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the Thrust
Position and Differential Expansion signal with a power supply. The alarm levels
are tested by varying the DC voltage and observing that the correct results are
reported in the Verification screen on the test computer. It is only necessary to
test those alarm parameters that are configured and being used. The general
1.
to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints.
2.
to drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints.
3.
to produce a nonalarm condition.
Direct
the I/O module.
Expansion).
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage that is within the Direct setpoint
127
Maintenance
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Direct changes
Alarm.
the bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green and that the Current
Gap
the I/O module.
Expansion).
levels on the Gap bar graph display.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Gap is green, and the Current
128
Maintenance

Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds until the alarm time
bar graph indicator for Gap remains yellow and that the Current Field still
indicates an Alarm.
indicates an Alarm.
5.1.6.3
Verify Channel Values - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the Thrust
Position and Differential Expansion signal with a power supply. The output
values are verified by varying the input DC voltage and observing that the correct
Direct
the I/O module.
129
Maintenance

Expansion).
3. Calculate the full-scale and bottom scale values. These values can be
Full-scale Value, Bottom Scale Value =
Zero Position Voltage (Transducer Scale Factor Scale Range)
Note
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading on
the bar graph display and the Current Value Box to be zero. The Zero Position
Volts value is displayed in the Z.P. Volts box above each channel value bar
graph.
Note
If the bottom scale range is zero (for example 0 to 80 mil), use the Full-scale
Value formula.
Note
If Upscale direction (Normal for Thrust, Long for Differential Expansion) is toward
the probe:
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor Top Meter Scale)
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor ABS (Bottom Meter
Scale)
Example 1:
Meter scale range = 25-0-25 mil
130
Full Scale Value
= (-9.75) + (0.200 25)

= -4.75 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= (-9.75) - (0.200 25)

= -14.75 Vdc
Maintenance
Example 2:
Meter scale range = 1-0-1 mm
Full Scale Value
= (-10.16) + (7.874 1)
= -2.286 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= (-10.16) - (7.874 1)
= -18.03 Vdc
If Upscale direction (Normal for Thrust, Long for Differential Expansion) is away
from the probe:
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor Top Meter Scale)
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor ABS(Bottom Meter
Scale)
Example 1:
Full Scale Value
= (-9.75) - (0.200 25)

= -14.75 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= (-9.75) + (0.200 25 )
= -4.75 Vdc
Example 2:
Meter scale range = 1-0-1 mm
Full Scale Value
= (-10.16) - (7.874 1)
= -18.03 Vdc
Bottom Scale Value
= (-10.16) + (7.874 1)
= -2.286 Vdc
Volts box. The Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box should
read 0 mil (0 mm) 1 %.
5. Adjust the power supply voltage for the calculated full scale. Verify that the
Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1 % of full
scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify
Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output.
131
Maintenance
6. Adjust the power supply voltage for the calculated bottom scale. Verify that
the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1 % of
bottom scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10
(Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output.
Gap
the I/O module.
Expansion).
Value Box is reading 1 % of -18.00 Vdc. If the recorder output is configured,
recorder output.
bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph and Current Value Box is
reading 1 % of the mid-scale value. If the recorder output is configured,
recorder output.
5.1.6.4
Test OK Limits - Thrust Position and Differential Expansion

132
Maintenance
computer.
the I/O module.
Expansion).
Note
All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the OK relay to be
energized.
133
Maintenance
16. Return the bypass switch for all configured channels to their original setting.
Thrust Position Default OK Limits Table
Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(volts)
Upper OK Limit
(volts)
-1.05 to -1.15
-1.23 to -1.33 *
-18.15 to -18.25
-1.23 to -1.33
-18.99 to -19.09
-3.50 to -3.60
-20.34 to -20.44
-1.6 to -1.7
-18.0 to -18.1
3300 5&8 mm w/ barriers
-1.05 to -1.15
-1.23 to -1.33 *
-18.15 to -18.25
3300 5&8 mm w/o barriers
-1.23 to -1.33
-18.99 to -19.09
-1.11 to -1.21
-13.09 to -13.19
-2.2 to -2.3
-16.8 to -16.9
-1.11 to -1.21
-13.09 to -13.19
-1.0 to -1.1
-1.11 to -1.21 *
-12.3 to -12.4
-1.6 to -1.7
-18.0 to -18.1
3300 16mm HTPS w/o barriers

* = BNC Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
134
Maintenance
Differential Expansion Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(volts)
Upper OK Limit
(volts)
25 mm w/o barriers
-1.30 to -1.40
-12.5 to -12.6
35 mm w/o barriers
-1.30 to -1.40
-12.5 to -12.6
50 mm w/o barriers
-1.30 to -1.40
-12.5 to -12.6
5.1.7
limits for channels configured as Eccentricity. The output values and alarm
setpoints are verified by varying the input Eccentricity signal level (both peak to
Eccentricity channels can be configured for the following channel values and
alarms:
Channel Values
Alarms
Over
5.1.7.1
Under
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Eccentricity

needed for all the Eccentricity channel verification procedures (Test Alarms,
135
Maintenance
Application Alert
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.

Application Alert
Disconnecting field
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Eccentricity
generator and multimeter to COM and SIG of channel 1 with polarity as shown in
the figure on page 137 Eccentricity Test Setup). Set the test equipment as
specified below:
Power Supply
-7.00 Vdc
136
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 5 Hz
Amplitude level: Minimum (Above
Zero)
Maintenance
Power Supply
Proximitor
Seismic I/O
Module
Multimeter
Function Generator
Keyphasor I/O Module
40 k
100 F
Keyphasor Signal
Eccentricity Test Setup

137
Maintenance
Verification Screen Setup - Eccentricity

Note
If the Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled, the OK LED will not come on
immediately after you connect the test equipment. It will take 60 seconds for a
channel to return to the OK status from not OK. If OK mode is configured for
to the OK status.
associated with the Eccentricity Channels.
Section
Number
5.1.7.2
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.7.2
Test Alarms - Peak to Peak
139
5.1.7.2
Test Alarms - Gap
140
5.1.7.2
141
5.1.7.3
Verify Channel Values - Peak to Peak
142
5.1.7.3
143
5.1.7.3
144
5.1.7.4
Test OK Limits
146
Test Alarms - Eccentricity

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the eccentricity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The alarm levels are tested
results are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer. It is only
necessary to test those alarm parameters that are configured and being used.
The general test procedure to verify current alarm operation will include
simulating a transducer input signal and varying this signal:
1.
to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints.
2.
to drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints.
3.
138
Maintenance
Peak to Peak
the I/O module.
3. Adjust the function generator amplitude such that the signal level does not
exceed any setpoint value for the pp mil bar graph.
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for pp is green, and the Current Value
field has no alarm indication.
pp Over Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for pp changes color
bar graph indicator for pp remains yellow and that the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
pp Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for pp
an Alarm.
bar graph indicator for pp remains red and the Current Value Field still
indicates an Alarm.
that the bar graph indicator for pp changes color to green and that the
139
Maintenance

Gap
the I/O module.
2. Connect test equipment and run software as described in section 5.1.7.1
OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Gap is green, and the Current
Value still has no alarm indication.
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator for Gap changes
Alarm.
indicates an Alarm.
140
Maintenance
Direct
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
3. Adjust the power supply to produce a reading that is within the Direct setpoint
Alarm.
the bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green and that the Current
141
Maintenance
5.1.7.3
Verify Channel Values - Eccentricity

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the eccentricity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The output levels are verified
Peak to Peak
the I/O module.
3. Calculate the full-scale voltage according to the following equation and
examples.
Verification Input Signal =
Peak to Peak Meter Full-scale Transducer Scale Factor
Note
142
Maintenance
Example 1:
Peak to Peak Meter Top Scale = 10 mil
Full Scale
= (10 0.200)
= 2.000 Vpp
For Vrms input:

Vrms
= (0.707/2) (2)
= 0.707 Vrms
Example 2:
Peak to Peak Meter Top Scale = 200 m
= 7.874 mV/m
Full Scale
= (200 0.007874)
= 1.5748 Vpp
For Vrms input:

Vrms
= (0.707/2) (1.574)
= 0.5566 Vrms
4. Adjust the function generator amplitude for the calculated full scale. Verify
that the pp bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading 1 % of
full scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify
Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify recorder outputs.
Gap
the I/O module.
143
Maintenance
Value Box is reading 1 % of -18.00 Vdc. If the recorder output is configured,
recorder output.
4. Adjust the power supply to produce a voltage equal to the mid-scale on the
Gap bar graph display. Verify that the Gap bar graph display and current
value box is reading 1 % of the mid-scale value. If the recorder output is
verify the recorder output.
Direct
Note
parameter.
the I/O module.
3. Calculate the full-scale and bottom-scale values. These values can be
Full / Bottom Scale Value =
Zero Position Voltage (Transducer Scale Factor Scale Range)
Note
The Zero Position Voltage is the voltage input that will cause the reading on
the bar graph display and the Current Value Box to be zero. The Zero Position
Volts value is displayed in the Z.P. Volts box above each channel value bar
graph.
144
Maintenance
Note
Full Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) - (Transducer Scale Factor Top Meter Scale)
Bottom Scale =
(Zero Position Voltage) + (Transducer Scale Factor ABS (Bottom Meter
Scale))
Example 1:
Full-Scale Value
= (-9.75) - (0.200 20)

= -13.75 Vdc
Bottom-Scale Value = (-9.75) + (0.200 20)

= -5.75 Vdc
Example 2:
Transducer scale factor
= 7,874 mV/mm
= 7.874 mV/m
Meter scale range = 200-0-200 m
Full-Scale Value
= (-9.75) - (0.007874 200)

= -11.3248 Vdc
Bottom-Scale Value = (-9.75) + (0.007874 200)

= -8.1752 Vdc
Volts Box. The Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box should
read 0 mil (0 mm) 1 %.
5. Adjust the power supply voltage for full scale. Verify that the Max value in the
Current Value Box (the value on the left of the divider bar) is reading 1 % of
full scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10 (Verify
Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output.
6. Adjust the power supply voltage for bottom scale. Verify that the Min value in
the Current Value Box (the value on the right of the divider bar) is reading
1% of bottom scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section
5.1.10 (Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output.
145
Maintenance
and SIG field wiring to the channel terminals on the I/O module. Verify that
5.1.7.4
Test OK Limits - Eccentricity

computer.
the I/O module.
Note
All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the relay to be
energized.
146
Maintenance
OK LED comes back on and the OK relay energizes and that the Channel
wiring to the channel 1 terminals on the Monitor I/O Module. Press the
RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) and verify that the OK
LED comes on and the OK relay energizes.
setting.
147
Maintenance
Eccentricity Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower OK Limit
(volts)
Upper OK Limit
(volts)
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
-3.50 to -3.60
-19.60 to -19.70
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
3300 16 mm HTPS w/o barriers
-2.70 to -2.80
-16.70 to -16.80
5.1.8
Velocity Channels
The following sections will describe how to test alarms, verify channels, verify
filter corner frequencies, and test OK limits for channels configured as Velocity.
The output values and alarm setpoints are verified by varying the input signal
level and observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen
on the test computer.
Velocity channels can be configured for the following channel values and alarms:
Channel Values
Direct
5.1.8.1
Alarms
Over
X
Under
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity

needed for all the verification procedures (Test Alarms, Verify Channels, Verify
Filter Corner Frequencies, and Test OK Limits).
148
Maintenance
Application Alert
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.

Application Alert
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Seismoprobe
generator, and multimeter to COM and SIG / A of channel 1 with polarity as
shown in the figure on page 150 (Seismoprobe Test Setup). Set the test
equipment as specified below:
Power Supply
Function Generator
-6.50 Vdc
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
Amplitude level: Minimum (above zero)
Test Equipment Setup - Velomitor (Standard I/O)

shown in the figure on page 151 (Velomitor Test Setup Standard I/O). Set the
test equipment as specified below.
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
149
Maintenance
Test Equipment Setup - Velomitor (TMR I/O)

generator, and multimeter to COM / A and SIG / B of channel 1 with polarity as
shown in the figure on page 153 (Velomitor Test Setup TMR I/O). Set the test
equipment as specified below.
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
Multimeter
Function Generator
Power Supply
2.49 k
Seismoprobe Test Setup

150
Maintenance
Multimeter
Function Generator
4 k
10 F
Velomitor Test Setup With Standard I/O

151
Maintenance
Multimeter
Power Supply
Test Setup for Verifying the OK Limits of a Velomitor With Standard I/O.
152
Multimeter
Maintenance
Function Generator
2.74 k
10 F
Velomitor Test Setup With TMR I/O

153
Maintenance
Multimeter
Power Supply
Test Setup for Verifying the OK Limits of a Velomitor With TMR I/O
154
Maintenance
Verification Screen Setup - Velocity

Note
If the Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled, it will take 30 seconds for a
channel to return to the OK status from not OK. If OK MODE is configured for
to OK status.
associated with the Velocity Channels.
Section
Number
5.1.8.2
Topic
Page Number
5.1.8.2
156
5.1.8.3
158
5.1.8.4
Verify Filter Corner Frequencies
159
5.1.8.7
Test OK Limits
164
Test Alarms - Velocity

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the Velocity
1.
to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm2 Setpoints, and
2.
to drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints, and
3.
155
Maintenance
Direct
1. Disconnect PWR / B, COM, and SIG / A (PWR, COM / A, and SIG / B for
TMR I/O) field wiring from the channel terminals on the I/O module.
2. Connect test equipment:
For Seismoprobe:
Connect test equipment and run software as described in section 5.1.8.1
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity), use the setup shown on
page 150 (Seismoprobe Test Setup). If no filtering has been configured,
leave the frequency of the function generator set to 100 Hz. If filtering is
configured, the needed frequency can be calculated from the following
formula:
Frequency = (0.89 HPF) + (0.1575 LPF)

HPF = High-pass Filter Corner Frequency
LPF = Low-pass Filter Corner Frequency
If no filtering is configured, set the frequency of the function generator to 100
Hz.
If a Low-pass Filter is configured and no High-pass Filter is configured, use
the following to determine the HPF to use in the formula:
-
If the units are RMS, use a HPF of 10 Hz. For any other
configuration, use a HPF of 3 Hz.
If a High-pass Filter is configured and no Low-pass Filter is configured, use a

LPF of 5,500 Hz.
Set the frequency of the function generator to this new value. The above is
done to obtain a test frequency in the center of the channel frequency range.
For Velomitor:
Connect test equipment and run software as described in section 5.1.8.1
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity), use the setup shown on
page 151 (Velomitor Test Setup, Standard I/O) or page 153 for TMR I/O. If
no filtering has been configured, leave the frequency of the function
generator set to 100 Hz. If filtering is configured, calculate the needed
frequency from the following formula:

156
Maintenance
If a low-pass filter is configured and no high-pass filter is configured, use HPF

= 3 Hz
If a high-pass filter is configured and no low-pass filter is configured, use LPF
= 5,500 Hz
Set the frequency of the function generator to this new value. The above is
done to obtain a test frequency in the center of the channel frequency range.
the Direct setpoint levels on the Direct bar graph display of the Verification
screen.
Alarm.
an Alarm.
157
Maintenance
11. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the PWR / B, COM, and SIG /
A (PWR, COM / A, and SIG / B for TMR I/O) field wiring to the channel
terminals on the I/O module. Verify that the OK LED comes on and the OK
relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module
(RIM) to reset the OK LED.
5.1.8.3
Verify Channel Values - Velocity

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the velocity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The channel values are
verified by varying the output from the test equipment and observing that the
correct results are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
Note
These parameters have an accuracy specification of 1 % of full-scale.
Direct
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity).
3. Calculate the verification frequency using the formulas in Section5.1.8.5,
page 160. Adjust the function generator frequency to the calculated value.
4. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the procedure in Section 5.1.8.6, page
160. Adjust the function generator (sinewave) amplitude to the calculated
value.
5. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box is reading
1 % of full-scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10
(Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output).
158
5.1.8.4
Maintenance

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the Velocity
signal with a function generator and power supply. The corner frequencies are
verified by varying the output from the test equipment and observing that the
correct results are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
Note
If the channel units are integrated, change the channel configuration to a nonintegrated scale for this test. When the test is complete, return the channel to
its original configuration.
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity).
3. Calculate the verification frequency using the formulas in Section 5.1.8.5,
page 160. Adjust the function generator frequency to the calculated value.
4. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the procedure in Section 5.1.8.6, page
value.
full-scale.
6. Adjust the function generator frequency to the low-pass filter corner
frequency. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box
is reading between 65 % and 75 % of full-scale.
7. Adjust the function generator frequency to the high-pass filter corner
frequency. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value Box
is reading between 65 % and 75 % of full-scale.
159
Maintenance
5.1.8.5
Calculating Verification Frequency

The procedures for verifying channel values and corner frequencies require that
you use the following formulas to calculate the verification frequency:
Find the center of the Band-pass frequency range. Input the configured Highpass Filter Corner Frequency and the Low-pass Filter Corner Frequency into the
formula below:
Vibration Frequency = (0.89 HPF) + (0.1575 LPF)

If no filtering is configured, set the frequency of the function generator to 100 Hz.
If a Low-pass Filter is configured and no High-pass Filter is configured, use the
following to determine the HPF to use in the formula:
-
If the units are RMS, use a HPF of 10 Hz. For any other configuration, use a
HPF of 3 Hz.
If a High-pass Filter is configured and no Low-pass Filter is configured, use a

LPF of 5,500 Hz.
5.1.8.6
Calculating the Input Voltage for Full-scale

you use the following formulas to calculate the input voltage for Full-scale. To
find the Full-scale input voltage, use appropriate table or formula for integrated or
non-integrated units.
Note
160
Maintenance
Full Scale Formulas - No Integration

Units
To Input RMS Volts
To Input Peak to Peak

Volts
in/s pk
(T.S.F x Full-scale) x 0.707
(T.S.F x Full-scale) x 2
mm/s pk
(T.S.F x Full-scale) x 2
in/s rms
(T.S.F x Full-scale)
mm/s rms
To use the formulas, the T.S.F. should be in volts and the T.S.F and full-scale
values should both be of the same unit system (metric or English). The
transducer Scale Factor will always be specified as volts per inch/second pk or
volts per millimetre/second pk.
Example 1:
Transducer Scale Factor = 500 mV/(in/s)
Full Scale = 0.5 in/s pk
For Peak to Peak input:
(0.500 0.5) 2 = 0.5 Vpp
For Vrms input:
(0.500 0.5) 0.707 = 0.1767 Vrms
Example 2:
Transducer Scale Factor = 19.69 mV/(mm/s)
Full Scale = 20 mm/s pk
(0.01969 20) 2 = 0.7876 Vpp
For RMS input:
(0.01969 20) 0.707 = 0.2784 Vrms
161
Maintenance
Full Scale Formulas - Integration

(For the following units: mil pp and m pp)
Input
Full - scale (English units)
x 0.07071
Voltage =
(V rms)
31
.
831
/ Velocity Frequency
Scale Factor
English
units
(
0.5V / (inch / s ) typical )
Input
Voltage =
x 0.2
(V pp)
31.831
ScaleFactor
(English units
0.5 V / (inch / s) typical)
To use the formulas, the Velocity Scale Factor should be in volts, and the Fullscale value and Velocity Scale Factor should be in English units. Use the
following conversion formulas to convert Metric units to English units:
Scale Factor:
V elocity S cale F actor

(inch / s)
V elocityScaleF actor
(m m / s)
Full-scale:
Full - Scale
Full - scale ( m)
=
(mil)
25.4
162
x 25.4
Maintenance
Example:
To calculate the input voltage for a channel with the following configuration:
Transducer Scale Factor = 19.69 mV/(mm/s)
Full Scale = 100 m pp
HPF = 3 Hz
LPF = 3000 Hz
1.
Convert Metric units to English units.

Scale Factor:
19.69 mV/(mm/s) 25.4 = 500 mV/(in/s)
Full-scale:
100 m
= 3.9370 mil
25.4
2.
Calculate the input voltage.
Input
3.9370
Voltage =
x 0.07071 = 0.4148 V rms
31.8309
(V rms)
0.500 / 94.8683
or
Input
3.9370
Voltage =
x 0.2 = 1.173 V pp
31.8309
(V pp)
0.500 / 94.8683
Note
The accuracy of the reading will be affected by frequency values less than 20
Hz and setting LPF 5.7 times away from the HPF.
163
Maintenance
5.1.8.7
Test OK Limits - Velocity
Note
energized.
For Seismoprobes:
The general approach for testing OK limit is to disconnect the input. This will
cause a not OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize).
1. Run the Verification Software as described in Section 5.1.8.1 (Test
Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity).
2. Disconnect the SIG / A field wiring from the channel terminals on the
Proximitor / Seismic Monitor I/O Module.
3. Verify that the OK relay changes state (de-energized).
4. Verify that the Channel OK State line on the Verification screen reads not
OK.
5. Reconnect the SIG / A field wiring to the channel terminals on the Monitor I/O
Module. Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) and
verify that the OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes.
6. Verify that the Channel OK State line on the Verification screen reads OK.
For Velomitors with Standard I/O Modules:
above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This will cause a not
OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize). The Upper and
Lower OK limits are displayed in the Verification screen on the test computer.
1. Disconnect PWR / B, COM, and SIG / A field wiring from the channel
terminals on the I/O module.
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity), page 152.
164
Maintenance
Status section of the Verification screen reads OK.
(energized). See the 3500/20 Rack Interface Module Operation and
goes off (upper limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line on the
Verification screen reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK.
Verify that the Upper OK limit voltage displayed on the Verification screen is
equal to or more positive than the input voltage.
OK State line in the Channel Status section reads OK.
Channel Status section reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not
OK. Verify that the Lower OK limit voltage displayed on the Verification
screen is equal to or more negative than the input voltage.
line in the Channel Status section reads OK.
and SIG field wiring to the channel terminals on the Monitor I/O Module.
Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) and verify that
the OK LED comes on and the OK relay energizes.
setting.
For Velomitors with TMR I/O Modules:
Due to the requirements for increased robustness in the TMR system, the TMR
I/O Module has a Velomitor interface that is different from the standard I/O
Module's Velomitor interface. The effect of this difference is that the Velomitor
signal input to the I/O Module is 180 degrees out of phase from the correct
Velomitor signal. This inversion is compensated for in the TMR I/O Module. This
means that when you input a test signal using a signal generator or DC power
165
Maintenance
supply the buffered outputs on the front panel will be inverted in phase and will
have a different DC voltage than the input. This will not affect the actual vibration
readings in the Monitor.
above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This will cause a not
OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize). The Upper and
Lower OK limits are displayed in the Verification screen on the test computer.
1. Disconnect PWR, COM / A, and SIG / B field wiring from the channel
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Velocity), page 154.
goes off (lower limit due to the inversion on the I/O Module). Verify that the
Channel OK State line on the Verification screen reads not OK and that the
OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify that the Lower OK limit voltage displayed
L o w er O K
- 2 0 .8 4 - V in p u t
L im it V o lta g e
on the Verification screen is equal to or more negative than the following

value.
166
Maintenance
LED just goes off (upper limit due to the inversion on the I/O Card). Verify
that the Channel OK State line in the Channel Status section reads not OK
and that the OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify that the Upper OK limit
voltage displayed on the Verification screen is equal to or more positive than
the following value.
U pper O K
L im it V o lta g e
11.
- 2 2 .0 2 - V in p u t
Increase the power supply voltage (more negative) to -7.00 Vdc.
14. Disconnect the power supply and multimeter and reconnect the PWR, COM /
A, and SIG / B field wiring to the channel terminals on the Monitor I/O
setting.
167
Maintenance
Velocity Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower Ok Limit
(volts)
Upper Ok Limit
(volts)
9200 w/ &w/o barriers
-2.0 to -2.1
-17.9 to -18.0
86205 w/ & w/o barriers
-2.0 to -2.1
-17.9 to -18.0
47633 w/ & w/o barriers
-2.0 to -2.1
-17.9 to -18.0
non std w/ &w/o barriers
-2.0 to -2.1
-17.9 to -18.0
Velomitor (standard with

Internal Barrier or standard
I/O Module)
-4.1 to -4.2
-19.8 to -19.9
Velomitor (high temp with

Internal Barrier or standard
I/O Module)
-2.69 to -2.79
-21.21 to -21.31
Velomitor (standard with

TMR I/O Module)
-4.1 to -4.2
-19.8 to -19.9
Velomitor (high temp with

TMR I/O Module)
-4.1 to -4.2
-19.8 to -19.9
5.1.9
The following sections will describe how to test alarms, verify channels, verify
filter corner Frequencies, and test OK limits for channels configured as
Acceleration. The output values and alarm setpoints are verified by varying the
input signal level and observing that the correct results are reported in the
Acceleration channels can be configured for the following channel values and
alarms:
Channel Values
Direct
5.1.9.1
Alarms
Over
X
Under
Test Equipment and Software Setup - Acceleration

needed for all the verification procedures (Test Alarms, Verify Channels, Verify
Filter Corner Frequencies, and Test OK limits).
168
Maintenance
Application Alert
WARNING
Contact could cause
wires or terminals.

Application Alert
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Acceleration
shown in the figure on page 170 (Acceleration Test Setup). Set the test
equipment as specified below.
Power Supply
-6.50 Vdc
Function Generator
Waveform: sinewave
DC Volts: 0 Vdc
Frequency: 100 Hz
Amplitude level: Minimum (above
zero)
169
Maintenance
Multimeter
Function Generator
Power Supply
Acceleration Test Setup

Verification Screen Setup - Acceleration
Note
If the Timed OK Channel Defeat is enabled, it will take 30 seconds for a
channel to return to the OK status from not OK. If OK MODE is configured for
to the OK status.
170
Maintenance
associated with the Acceleration Channels.
Section
Number
5.1.9.2
Topic
Page
Number
5.1.9.2
171
5.1.9.3
Verify Channels - Direct
173
5.1.9.4
174
5.1.9.7
Test OK Limits
179
Test Alarms - Acceleration

The general approach for testing alarm setpoints is to simulate the Acceleration
1. to exceed over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints, and
2. to drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints, and
Direct
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Acceleration). If no filtering has been
configured, leave the frequency of the function generator set to 100 Hz. If
filtering is configured, the needed frequency can be calculated from the
following formula:

If no filtering is configured, set the frequency of the function generator to 100
Hz.
171
Maintenance
If a low-pass filter is configured and no high-pass filter is configured, use the

-
If the units are integrated or rms, use a HPF of 10 Hz. For any other
If a high-pass filter is configured and no low-pass filter is configured, use the

following to determine the LPF to use in the formula:
-
If the configuration is a single channel with no integration, use a LPF

of 30 kHz.
If the configuration is a single channel with integration, use a LPF of

14.5 kHz.
If the configuration is a dual channel pair, use a LPF of 9.155 kHz.
Set the frequency of the function generator to this new value. The above is done
to obtain a test frequency in the center of the channel frequency range.
the Direct setpoint levels on the Direct bar graph display of the Verification
screen.
Alarm.
an Alarm.
that the bar graph indicator for Direct changes color to green. The Current
172
Maintenance
Value Box should contain no indication of Alarms. Press the RESET switch
A field wiring to the channel terminals on the I/O module. Verify that the OK
5.1.9.3
Verify Channel Values - Acceleration

The general approach for testing these parameters is to simulate the
Acceleration signal with a function generator and power supply. The channel
values are verified by varying the output from the test equipment and observing
that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen on the test
computer.
Note
These parameters have an accuracy specification of 1 % of full scale.
Direct
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - Acceleration).
3. Calculate the verification frequency using the method in Section 5.1.9.5, page
175. Adjust the function generator frequency to the calculated value.
4. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the formulas in Section 5.1.9.6, page
value.
1 % of full scale. If the recorder output is configured, refer to Section 5.1.10
(Verify Recorder Outputs) for steps to verify the recorder output.
173
Maintenance
5.1.9.4

Acceleration signal with a function generator and power supply. The corner
frequencies are verified by varying the output from the test equipment and
observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen on the
test computer.
Note
If the channel units are integrated, change the channel configuration to a nonintegrated scale for this test. When the test is complete, return the channel to
its original configuration.
3. Calculate the verification frequency using the method in Section 5.1.9.5, page
175. Adjust the function generator frequency to the calculated value.
4. Calculate the full-scale voltage using the formulas in Section 5.1.9.6, page
175. Adjust the function generator (sinewave) amplitude to the calculated.
full scale.
6. Adjust the function generator frequency to the Low-pass Filter Corner
Frequency. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and the Current Value
Box is reading between 65 % and 75 % of full scale.
7. Adjust the function generator frequency to the High-pass Filter Corner
Frequency. Verify that the Direct bar graph display and Current Value Box is
reading between 65 % and 75 % of full scale.
174
5.1.9.5
Maintenance
Calculating Verification Frequency

you use the following formulas to calculate the verification frequency.
Find the center of the Band-pass frequency range. Input the configured highpass filter corner frequency and the low-pass filter corner frequency into the
formula below:

If no filtering is configured, set the frequency of the function generator to 100 Hz.
If a low-pass filter is configured and no high-pass filter is configured, use the
-
If the units are integrated or rms, use a HPF of 10 Hz. For any other
If a high-pass filter is configured and no low-pass filter is configured, use the

following to determine the LPF to use in the formula:
5.1.9.6
If the configuration is a single channel with no integration, use a LPF of

30 kHz.
If the configuration is a single channel with integration, use a LPF of 14.5

kHz.
If the configuration is a dual channel pair, use a LPF of 9.155 kHz.
Calculating the Input Voltage for Full-scale

The procedures for verifying channel values and corner frequencies required that
you use the following formulas to calculate the input voltage for full-scale. To
find the full-scale input voltage, use appropriate table for integrated or nonintegrated units.
Note
Use the transducer scale factor displayed in the Scale Factor Box on the
175
Maintenance
Full Scale Formulas - No Integration

Units
To Input RMS Volts
To Input Peak to Peak

Volts
g peak
(T.S.F. x Full-scale) x 0.707
(T.S.F. x Full-scale) x 2
g rms
m/s2 peak
(T.S.F. x Full-scale) x 2
m/s2 rms
T.S.F = Transducer Scale Factor. To use the formulas, the T.S.F. should be in
volts and the T.S.F. and full-scale values should both be of the same unit
system (metric or English). The transducer Scale Factor will always be
specified as volts per g pk or volts per m/s2 pk.
Example 1:
Transducer Scale Factor = 100 mV/g
Full Scale = 2 g peak
(0.100 2) 2 = 0.4 Vpp
For Vrms input:
(0.100 2) 0.707 = 0.1414 Vrms
Example 2:
Transducer Scale Factor = 10.19 mV/( m/s2)
Full Scale = 20 m/s2 pk
(0.01019 20) 2 = 0.4076 Vpp
For RMS input:
(0.01019 20) 0.707 = 0.1440 Vrms
176
Maintenance
Full Scale Formulas - Integration

(For the Following units: in/s pk, in/s rms, mm/s pk, mm/s rms)
To input rms volts for peak full scale units:
Input
Voltage =
x 0.3535
(V rms)
30.72
Scale Factor
(English units
0.1 volts / g typical)
To input rms volts for rms full scale units:
Input
Voltage =
x 0.5
(V rms)
30.72
Scale Factor
(English units
To input peak to peak volts for peak full scale units:
Input
Voltage =
(V pp)
30.72
Scale Factor
(English units
To input
peak to
peak volts
for RMS
full scale
units:
Input
Voltage =
x 1.414
(V pp)
30.72
Scale Factor
(English units
177
Maintenance
To use the formulas, the acceleration scale factor should be in volts, and the fullscale value and acceleration scale factor should be in English units. Use the
following conversion formulas to convert metric units to English units:
Scale Factor:
Acceleration Scale Factor

Acceleration Scale Factor
=
x 9.8135
(mV / g)
(mV / (m / s2 ))
Full-scale:
Full - Scale
Full - Scale
=
x 0.39372
(inch / s)
(mm / s)
Example:
Transducer Scale Factor = 10.19 mV/( m/s2)
Full Scale = 25 mm/s
HPF = 10 Hz
LPF = 8000 Hz
1. Convert metric units to English units.
Scale Factor:
10.19 mV/(m/s2) 9.8135 = 100 mV/g
Full-scale:
25 mm/s 0.039372 = 1 in/s
2. Calculate the input voltage.
To Input RMS Volts for Peak Units
Input
1
Voltage =
x 0.3535 = 0.3254 V rms
30.72
(V rms)
0.1 / 282.84
178
Maintenance
To Input Peak to Peak Volts for Peak Units
Input
1
Voltage =
x 1 = 0.9207 V pp
30.72
(V pp)
0.1 / 282.84
5.1.9.7
Test OK Limits Acceleration
Note
energized.
above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This should cause a not
OK condition and cause the OK Relay to change state. The Upper and Lower
OK limits are displayed in the Verification screen on the test computer.
the I/O module.
Status section of the Verification Display screen reads OK.
(energized). See 3500/20 Rack Interface Module manual, part #129768-01.
equal to or more positive than the input voltage.
179
Maintenance
screen is equal to or more negative than the input voltage.
13. If you cant verify any configured OK limit, go to Section 5.1.11 (If a Channel
and SIG field wiring to the channel terminals on the Proximitor/Seismic I/O
setting.
180
Maintenance
Acceleration Default OK Limits Table

Transducer
Lower Ok Limit
(Volts)
Upper Ok Limit
(Volts)
23733-03 w/o barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-15.0 to -15.1
23733-03 w/ barriers
-3.05 to -3.15
-2.7 to -2.8 *
-13.8 to -13.9
-15.0 to -15.1 *
-5.58 to -5.68
-11.32 to -11.42
49578-01 w/ barriers
-5.29 to -5.39
-5.58 to -5.68 *
-10.81 to -10.91
-11.32 to -11.42 *
-2.7 to -2.8
-15.0 to -15.1
-5.58 to -5.68
-11.32 to -11.42
330400 w/ barriers
-3.05 to -3.15
-2.7 to -2.8 *
-13.8 to -13.9
-15.0 to -15.10 *
330400 w/o barriers
-2.7 to -2.8
-15.0 to -15.10
330425 w/ barriers
-5.29 to -5.39
-5.58 to -5.68 *
-10.81 to -10.91
-11.32 to -11.42 *
330425 w/o barriers
-5.58 to -5.68
-11.32 to -11.42

* = BNC Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
181
Maintenance
5.1.10
Verify Recorder Outputs

The following test equipment and procedure should be used in the verification of
the recorder outputs. Recorder outputs for the 3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic
Monitor Module are 4 to 20 mA.
Connect test
equipment
here.
Proximitor/
Seismic I/O
Module
(Internal
Termination)
Recorder External
Termination Block
(Euro Style
Connectors)
Recorder External
Termination Block
(Terminal Strip
Connectors)
1. Disconnect the COM and REC field wiring from the channel terminals on the
I/O module.
2. Connect a multimeter to the COM and REC outputs of the I/O module. The
multimeter should have the capability to measure 4 to 20 mA.
3
If the proportional value is not Gap:

Set the proportional value that the recorder is configured for to full-scale
(Refer to the proportional value of the channel pair type you are testing in the
Verify Channel Values portion of this manual). Verify that the recorder output
is reading 20 mA 1 %. Go to step 4.
If the proportional value is Gap:
Set the Gap proportional value to -18.00 Vdc (Refer to the proportional value
of the channel pair type you are testing in the Verify Channel Values portion
of this manual). Verify that the recorder output is reading 16 mA 1 %.
4. Set the proportional value that the recorder is configured for to mid-scale.
Verify that the recorder output is reading 12 mA 1 %.
182
Maintenance
5. Set the proportional value that the recorder is configured for to bottom-scale.
Verify that the recorder output is reading 4 mA 1 %.
6. Disconnect transducer input and verify that the recorder output is matches the
set monitor clamp value 1 %.
7. If you can not verify the recorder output, the recorder configuration and
connections should be checked. If the monitor recorder output still does not
verify properly, go to Section 5.1.11 (If a Channel Fails a Verification Test).
8. Disconnect the multimeter and reconnect the COM and REC field wiring to
the channel terminals on the I/O module.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for all configured recorder channels.
5.1.11

When handling or replacing circuit boards, always be sure to adequately protect
strap and work on a grounded conductive work surface.
129766-01).
3. Return the faulty board to Bently Nevada Corporation for repair.
183
Maintenance
5.2
Adjusting the Scale Factor and the Zero

Position
This section shows how to adjust the transducer scale factor and the transducer
position, or "zero". The Scale Factor Adjustment can be used to accommodate
any deviations in transducer scale factor as measured on the installed
transducers. Do not use the procedure to compensate for any errors within the
monitor and the I/O module. If a monitor does not meet specifications, exchange
it with a spare and return the faulty module to Bently Nevada Corporation for
repair. The newly installed spare module should be properly configured and
tested.
Adjusting the scale factor affects the readings of all configured parameters
associated with the channel. If you change the scale factor, be sure to use the
new value when calculating inputs for verification of channel values.
The Zero Position Adjustment is used for Thrust, Eccentricity, and Differential
Expansion measurements as well as for Gap measurements when Gap is
configured to read in displacement units (not volts). Adjust the zero position after
the probe is gapped and its target is in the proper position.
Both adjustment procedures consist of using the Rack Configuration Software to
upload the configuration from the rack, change the setting for scale factor or zero
position, and then downloading the new configuration back to the rack. You can
adjust these settings using the following two methods:
enter a new value in the scale factor box on the transducer screen or the zero
position box on the Channel Options screen.
use Adjust to get immediate feedback from the channel on the Adjust screen.
The advantage of using the Adjust screen is that you can use the bar graphs to
see the effect of your adjustments on the output signals of the channel. The
following procedures show how to use the methods.
5.2.1
Adjusting the Scale Factor

number 129777-01).
File menu.
5. Click on the Options button on the 3500 System Configuration screen.
184
Maintenance
7. Select the Options button under the appropriate Channel. The configured
Channel Options screen will appear.
8. Select the Customize button in the Transducer Selection box. A Transducer
screen will appear.
9. Enter a value for scale factor in the Scale Factor box. If you go to the Adjust
screen by selecting Adjust, be sure to adjust the input to the channel away
from the Zero Position so you can adjust the scale factor and see the results.
10. Return to the 3500 System Configuration screen by clicking on the OK
buttons of the successive screens. The new scale factor is now added to the
configuration for this channel.
11. Download the new configuration to the appropriate monitor by selecting
Download from the File menu. The new setting for scale factor will take
effect when the "Download successful" prompt appears.
5.2.2
Zero Position Adjustment Description

When adjusting the Zero Position voltage, you are
defining the transducer voltage corresponding to the
position of the zero indication on a bar graph display
(refer to the adjacent figure).
For maximum amount of zero adjustment, gap the
transducer as close as possible to the ideal zero
position voltage based on the full-scale range and
transducer scale factor. For a mid-scale zero, as in
the example, the ideal gap is the center of the range.
The tables below specify the center of the range for
each transducer and monitor type.
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
Thrust Position
Bargraph
185
Maintenance

Radial Vibration Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage
Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
Lower Ok Limits
w/o
barrier
(v)
w/ barrier
(v)
w/o
barrier(v)
w/ barrier
(v)
w/o
barrier (v)
w/ barrier
(v)
3300 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
n/a
-3.55
n/a
-11.6
n/a
7200 14mm
-16.75
n/a
-2.75
n/a
-9.75
n/a
3000 (18V)
-12.05
n/a
-2.45
n/a
-7.25
n/a
3000 (24V)
-15.75
n/a
-3.25
n/a
-9.5
n/a
3300 RAM
-12.55
-12.15
-2.45
-2.45
-7.5
-7.3
3300 16mm
HTPS
-16.75
n/a
-2.75
n/a
-9.75
n/a
186
Center Gap Voltage
Maintenance
Thrust Position Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
Lower Ok Limits
Center Gap Voltage
w/o
barrier
(V)
w/ barrier
(V)
w/o
barrier
(V)
w/ barrier
(V)
w/o
barrier (V)
w/ barrier
(V)
3300 5mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-1.28*
-10.16
-9.65
-9.74*
3300 8mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-1.28*
-10.16
-9.65
-9.74*
7200 5mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-1.28*
-10.16
-9.65
-9.74*
7200 8mm
-19.04
-18.2
-1.28
-1.1
-1.28*
-10.16
-9.65
-9.74*
7200 11mm
-20.39
n/a
-3.55
n/a
-11.97
n/a
7200 14mm
-18.05
n/a
-1.65
N/a
-9.85
n/a
3000 (-18V)
-13.14
n/a
-1.16
n/a
-7.15
n/a
3000 (-24V)
-16.85
n/a
-2.25
n/a
-9.55
n/a
3300 RAM
-13.14
-12.35
-1.16
-1.05
-1.16*
-7.15
-6.7
-6.76*
3300 16mm
HTPS
-18.05
n/a
-1.65
n/a
-9.85
n/a
* BNC Internal Barrier I/O Modules.
187
Maintenance

Differential Expansion Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage
Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
Lower Ok Limits
Center Gap Voltage
25 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.95
35 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.95
50 mm
-12.55
-1.35
-6.95
Eccentricity Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Lower Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Center Gap Voltage

w/o
w/ barrier
barrier (V)
(V)
3300 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
3300 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 5mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 8mm
-16.75
-16.75
-2.75
-2.75
-9.75
-9.75
7200 11mm
-19.65
n/a
-3.55
n/a
-11.6
n/a
7200 14mm
-16.75
n/a
-2.75
n/a
-9.75
n/a
3300 16mm
HTPS
-16.75
n/a
-2.75
n/a
-9.75
n/a
188
Maintenance
Acceleration Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage

Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Lower Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Center Gap Voltage

w/o
w/ barrier
barrier (V)
(V)
23733-03
-15.05
-13.85
-15.05*
-2.75
-3.10
-2.75*
-8.90
-8.475
-8.90*
24145-02
-15.05
n/a
-2.75
n/a
-8.90
n/a
330400
-15.05
-13.85
-15.05*
-2.75
-3.10
-2.75*
-8.90
-8.475
-8.90*
330425
-11.37
-10.86
-11.37*
-5.63
-5.34
-5.63*
-8.50
-8.10
-8.50*
49578-01
-11.37
-10.86
-11.37*
-5.63
-5.34
-5.63*
-8.50
-8.10
-8.50*
155023-01
-11.37
n/a
-5.63
n/a
-8.50
n/a

Velocity Ok Limits and Center Gap Voltage
Transducer
Upper Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Lower Ok Limits
w/o
w/ barrier
barrier
(V)
(V)
Center Gap Voltage

w/o
w/ barrier
barrier (V)
(V)
9200
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
47633
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
86205
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
Non
Standard
-17.95
-17.95
-2.05
-2.05
-10.00
-10.00
Velomitor
-19.85
-17.95
-19.85*
-4.15
-2.05
-4.15*
-12.00
-10.00
-12.00*
High Temp
Velomitor
-21.26
-21.26
-2.74
-2.74
-12.00
-12.00
189
Maintenance
When increasing or decreasing the zero position voltage, you are actually
mapping the monitor full scale range to a portion of the transducer linear range.
The zero position voltage adjustment range is dependent upon the full-scale
range of the proportional value being adjusted, the transducer scale factor, and
the transducer Ok limits. The following example shows how these parameters
are related to the zero position voltage range.
Channel Pair Type:
Direct Full Scale Range:
Transducer Type:
Scale Factor:
Ok Limits:
Upper Ok Limit
Thrust Position
-40-0-40 mils
3300 8mm
200 mV/mil
-19.04 (upper)
-1.28 (lower)
-19.04
40
-18.99V
30
Zero
Position
Range
Max Zero Adj

Center of Range
Min Zero Adj
-10.99
-10.16
-9.33
20
40
10
30
20
-10
10
-20
-30
-40
-2.99V
-17.
-10
-20
-30
Lower Ok Limit
-1.28
Scale at max
zero adj
-40
-1.3
Scale at min
zero adj
5.2.3
Adjusting the Zero Position

number 129777-01).
190
Maintenance
File menu.
5. Select the Options button on the 3500 System Configuration screen.
7. Select the Options button under the appropriate Channel. The Channel
Options screen will appear.
8. Enter the voltage in the Zero Position or the Gap Position box. Changes are
limited to the values listed adjacent to the box. If you go to the Adjust screen
by selecting Adjust, you can adjust the Zero Position and see the results.
9. Return to the 3500 System Configuration screen by clicking on OK buttons in
the successive screens. The new Zero Position or Gap Position is now
added to the configuration for this channel.
10. Download the new configuration to the appropriate monitor by selecting the
Download option in the File menu and then selecting the appropriate
monitor. The new setting for Zero Position will take effect when the
"Download successful" prompt appears.
191
Troubleshooting
6.
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor or the I/O module by using the information provided
by the self-test, the LEDs, the System Event List, and the Alarm Event List.
6.1
Self-test
To perform the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor self-test:
rack (if needed).
Application Alert
Machinery protection will
be lost while the self-test
is being performed.
5. Select the slot that contains the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and press the OK
button. The Proximitor/Seismic Monitor will perform a full self-test and the
System Events screen will be displayed. The list will not contain the results
of the self-test.
to include the results of the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor self-test.
8. Verify if the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor passed the self-test. If the monitor
failed the self-test, refer to Section 6.3 (System Event List Messages).
192
6.2
Troubleshooting

problems.
OK Led
1 Hz
TX/RX
BYPASS
1 Hz
Condition
Solution
Monitor is not
configured, is in
Configuration Mode, or
in Calibration Mode.
Reconfigure the
Monitor, or exit
Configuration, or
Calibration Mode.
Monitor error
Check the System

Event List for severity.
Module is operating
correctly
No action required.
OFF

correctly or the
transducer has faulted
and has stopped
providing a valid signal.
Check the System

Event List and the
Alarm Event List.
2 Hz
Monitor is configured for

Timed OK Channel
Defeat and has been not
OK since the last time
the RESET button was
pressed.
Press the Reset

button on the Rack
Interface Module.
Check the System
Event List.

correctly.
Monitor is not
executing alarming
functions. Replace
immediately.
OFF
Alarm Enabled
No action required.
ON

Disabled
No action required.
5 Hz
ON
Flashing
Not
flashing
= Behavior of the LED is not related to the condition.
193
Troubleshooting
6.3

Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and gives an example of one.
194
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
Event
Date
DDMMYY
Event
Time
0000000123
Device Not
Communicating
32
02/01/90
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Sequence Number:

example 123).
Event Information:

Communicating).
Event Number:
Class:

Class Value
Classification
0
1
2
3
Severe/Fatal Event
Reserved
Slot
5L
Event Date:
Event Time:
Event Specific:
It provides additional information for the events that use this

field.
Slot:
Identifies the module that the event is associated with. If a

half-height module is installed in the upper slot or a fullheight module is installed, the field will be 0 to 15. If a halfheight module is installed in the lower slot, then the field will
be 0L to 15L. For example, a module installed in the lower
position in slot 5 would be 5L.
Troubleshooting
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and are listed in numerical order. If an event marked with a star
(*) occurs the Proximitor/Seismic Monitor will stop alarming. If you are unable to solve any
problems contact your nearest Bently Nevada Corporation office.
Event Number: 11
Action: Replace the Monitor Module as soon as possible.
Event Number: 13
Event Classification: Potential Problem or Severe / Fatal Event
Action: Replace the Monitor Module as soon as possible.
Event Number: 32
Action: Check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
- the Monitor Module
- the rack backplane
Event Number: 33
Action: Check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
* Neuron Failure
Event Number: 34
Action: Replace the Monitor Module immediately.
* I/O Module Mismatch
Event Number: 62
Action: Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches what was selected
in the software. If the correct I/O module is installed, there may be a
fault with the Monitor Module or the Monitor I/O module.
195
Troubleshooting

Event Number: 63
* Fail I/O Jumper Check
Event Number: 64
Pass I/O Jumper Check
Event Number: 65
Event Number: 100
Action: Verify that noise from the power source is not causing the problem. If
the problem is not caused by noise, check to see if one of the following
- the Power Supply installed in the upper slot
Event Number: 101
Event Number: 102
- the Power Supply installed in the lower slot
196
Troubleshooting

Event Number: 103
(Fail Main Board +5V - upper and lower

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 104

(Pass Main Board +5V - upper and lower

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 105

Event Number: 106
Pass Main Board +15V-A (Pass Main Board +15V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 107
197
Troubleshooting

Event Number: 108
Pass Main Board +15V-B (Pass Main Board +15V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 109
* Fail Main Board +15V-AB (Fail Main Board +15V - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 110
(Pass Main Board +15V - upper and lower

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 111

Fail Main Board -24V-A
(Fail Main Board -24V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 112
198
Troubleshooting
Pass Main Board -24V-A

(Pass Main Board -24V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 113
(Fail Main Board -24V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 114
Pass Main Board -24V-B
(Pass Main Board -24V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 115
* Fail Main Board -24V-AB
(Fail Main Board -24V - upper and lower

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 116

Pass Main Board -24V-AB
(Pass Main Board -24V - upper and lower

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 117

199
Troubleshooting
Event Number: 301
Action: Download a new configuration to the Monitor Module. If the problem
still exists replace the Monitor Module immediately.
Event Number: 301
Action: Download a new configuration to the Monitor Module. If the problem
still exists replace the Monitor Module as soon as possible.
* Module Entered Cfg Mode
Event Number: 302
Action: No action required.
Event Number: 305
Action: Download the software switches to the Monitor Module. If the
software switches are not correct, replace the Monitor Module as soon
as possible.
Internal Cal Reset
(Internal Calibration Reset)
Event Number: 307
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action: Replace Monitor Module immediately.
Monitor TMR PPL Failed
(Monitor TMR Proportional value Failed)
Event Number: 310
Action: Replace the Monitor Module.
Monitor TMR PPL Passed (Monitor TMR Proportional value Passed)
Event Number: 311
Action: Replace the Monitor Module.
Module Reboot
Event Number: 320
200
Troubleshooting
* Module Removed from Rack

Event Number: 325
Event Number: 326
Device Events Lost
Event Number: 355
This may be due to the removal of the Rack Interface Module for an
extended period of time.
Module Alarms Lost
Event Number: 356
This may be due to the removal of the Rack Interface Module for an
extended period of time.
* Module Entered Calibr.
Event Number: 365
Module Exited Calibr.
Event Number: 366
Event Number: 410
* Enabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 416
Event Specific:
Ch x
201
Troubleshooting
Disabled Ch Bypass (Disabled Channel Bypass)

Event Number: 417
Event Specific:
Ch x
* Enabled Alert Bypass
Event Number: 420
Event Specific:
Ch x
Event Number: 421
Event Specific:
Ch x
* Enabled Danger Bypass
Event Number: 422
Event Specific:
Ch x
Event Number: 423
Event Specific:
Ch x
* Enabled Special Inh
(Enabled Special Inhibit)
Event Number: 424
Event Specific:
Ch x
Disabled Special Inh
(Disabled Special Inhibit)
Event Number: 425
Event Specific:
Ch x
202
Troubleshooting
* Enabled Mon Alarm Byp (Enabled Monitor Alarm Bypass)

Event Number: 426
Disabled Mon Alarm Byp (Disabled Monitor Alarm Bypass)
Event Number: 427
* Fail Slot Id Test
Event Number: 461
Action: Verify that the Monitor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
Pass Slot Id Test
Event Number: 462
Action: Verify that the Monitor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the
* Enabled Test Signal
Event Number: 481
Disabled Test Signal
Event Number: 482
Switch To Primary Kph
Event Number: 491
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action: Check to see if one of the following is faulty:
- the secondary Keyphasor transducer on the machine
203
Troubleshooting
Switch To Backup Kph

Event Number: 492
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
- the primary Keyphasor transducer on the machine
* Kph Lost
Event Number: 493
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
- both Keyphasor transducers on the machine
- the Keyphasor Module
For vector and Keyphasor based, alarms the Monitor Module will stop
alarming.
DSP Reset Attempted
Event Number: 501
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action: If the message is seen repeatedly in the System Event List, then
replace the Monitor Module immediately.
* DSP Self-test Failure
Event Number: 502
Event Specific:
Ch pair x
Action: Replace the Monitor Module immediately.
204
6.4
Troubleshooting

The following Alarm Event List Messages are returned by the Proximitor/Seismic
Monitor.
Alarm Event List
Message

entered Alert / Alarm 1 and changed the

left Alert / Alarm 1 and changed the

entered Danger / Alarm 2 and changed
the channel Danger / Alarm 2 status

left Danger / Alarm 2 and changed the
channel Danger / Alarm 2 status
Entered not OK
module went not OK
Left not OK
205
7.
A
Part number 3500/42A
B
-
I/O Module Type

01
02
03
04
05
06
Discrete I/O Module with Internal Terminations

Discrete I/O Module with External Terminations *
TMR I/O Module with External Terminations *
I/O Module with Internal Barriers (4 x Prox. Channels)
I/O Module with Internal Barriers (2 x Prox. + 2 x Velomitor Channels)
I/O Module with Internal Barriers (4 x Velomitor Channels)
* When ordering I/O modules with external terminations, the External

Termination Blocks and Cables must be ordered separately for each I/O
module.
B

00
01
None
CSA-NRTL/C
Note
If the Monitor is to be used with an Internal Barrier I/O option, then the following software
version (or later) is required:
206
Spares
3500/42 Monitor
Discrete I/O Module with Internal Terminations*
Discrete I/O Module with External Terminations**
125672-02
128229-01
128240-01
I/O Module with Internal Barriers (Internal Terminations)*

TMR I/O Module with External Terminations**
External Termination Block (Euro Style connectors)*
External Termination Block (Terminal Strip connectors)*
135489-01
126632-01
125808-02
128015-02
Recorder External Termination Block*

(Euro Style connectors)
Recorder External Termination Block*
(Terminal Strip connectors)
Bussed External Termination Block*,**
(Euro Style connectors)
Bussed External Termination Block*,**
(Terminal Strip connectors)
3500/42 I/O Module four pin connector shunt
3500/42 Monitor Manual
128702-01
128710-01
132242-01
132234-01
00530843
129773-01
Note
* External Termination Blocks can not be used with the Discrete I/O Module with
Internal Terminations (128229-01 and 135489-01).
** Use the two Bussed External Termination Blocks with the TMR I/O Module
only (126632-01).
--When ordering I/O Modules with External Termination, the External
Termination Blocks and Cables must be ordered separately.
207
3500 Transducer (XDCR) Signal to External Termination (ET) Block Cable

A
Part number 129525 A
B
-
Cable Length
0005
0007
0010
0025
0050
0100
5 feet (1.5 metres)

7 feet (2.1 metres)
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
00
01
Not Assembled
Assembled
3500 Recorder Output to Recorder External Termination (ET) Block Cable

A
Cable Length
0005
0007
0010
0025
0050
0100
5 feet (1.5 metres)

7 feet (2.1 metres)
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
00
01
208
Not Assembled
Assembled
8.
Specifications
Specifications
INPUTS
Signal:
Accepts from 1 to 4 signal inputs.
Input Impedance:
Standard I/O:
TMR I/O:
(Proximitor and Acceleration Inputs)

10 k
50 k (Bussed Transducer Configuration)
150 k (Discrete Transducer Configuration)
Power:
Nominal consumption of 7.7 watts
Sensitivity:
Radial Vibration:

7.87 mV/m (200 mV/mil)
Thrust:

7.87mV/m (200 mV/mil)
Eccentricity:

7.87 mV/m (200 mV/mil)
Differential Expansion:
.394 mV/m (10 mV/mil) or

.787 mV/m (20 mV/mil)
Acceleration:
10 mV/(m/s2) (100 mV/g)
Velocity:
20 mV/(mm/s) pk (500 mV/(in/s) pk),

5.8 mV/(mm/s) pk (145 mV/(in/s) pk),
4 mV/(mm/s) pk (100 mV/(in/s) pk)
209
Specifications
OUTPUTS
Front Panel LEDs:
OK LED:
210

properly.
TX/RX LED:
Indicates when the 3500/42 is communicating

with other modules in the 3500 rack.
Bypass LED:
Indicates when the 3500/42 is in Bypass

Mode.
Buffered Transducer
Outputs:
The front of each monitor has one coaxial

connector for each channel. Each connector
is short circuit protected.
Output Impedance:
550
Transducer Supply Values:
-24 Vdc
Recorder:
+4 to +20 mA. Values are proportional to

monitor full scale. Individual recorder values
are provided for each channel. Monitor
operation is unaffected by short circuits on
recorder outputs.
Voltage Compliance
(current output):
0 to +12 Vdc range across load. Load

resistance is 0 to 600 .
Resolution:
0.3662 A per bit

0.25 % error at room temperature
-0.66 to +0.70 % error over temperature
range updated rate 100 ms or less.
Specifications
SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Specified at +25 C (77 F)
Radial Vibration
Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
User-programmable for 4 to 4,000 Hz or 1

to 600 Hz.
Gap Filter:
-3 dB at .09 Hz.
*Not 1X Filter:
60 cpm to 16 times running speed.

Constant Q notch filter. Minimum rejection
in stopband of 34.9 dB.
*Smax:
0.125 to 16 times running speed.
*,**1X & 2X Vector Filter:
Constant Q Filter. Minimum rejection in

stopband of -57.7 dB.
* Note - 1X & 2X Vector, Not 1X, and Smax parameters are valid for
machine speeds of 60 to 60,000 cpm.
**Note - Minimum Signal Amplitude for Phase measurement is 42.7 mV
Accuracy:
Direct and Gap:
Within 0.33 % of full scale typical, 1 %

maximum.
1X & 2X:

maximum.
Smax:
Within 5 % maximum.
Not 1X:
3 % for machine speeds less than 30,000

cpm. 8.5 % for machine speeds greater
than 30,000 cpm.
Thrust and Differential Expansion:

Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
Gap Filter:
Accuracy:
-3 dB at 1.2 Hz.
-3 dB at 0.41 Hz.
maximum.
211
Specifications
EIPP Monitor
Frequency Response:
Direct Filter:
Gap Filter:
-3 dB at 15.6 Hz.
-3 dB at 0.41 Hz.
maximum.
Accuracy:
Acceleration Frequency Response

The following table represents the frequency ranges for the 3500/42 under
different filtering options. Resources used for filtering are assigned based
on channel pairs. It is possible to select different filtering options for the two
channels of a channel pair. However, the frequency response for both
channels will be limited to the worst case frequency response of the
individual channels. If added frequency range is required, the 3500/42 can
be configured as a two-channel monitor (use channels 1 and 3). This lets
you combine the resources normally used for filtering of two channels and
use them for one. See page 48
Dual Acceleration
Filter Quality:
High-Pass:
Low-Pass:
Quality:
Dual Velocity
Frequency Response:
Filter Quality:
High-Pass:
4-pole (80 dB per decade, 24 dB per

octave).
octave).
Within 0.33 % of full-scale typical, 1 %
maximum. Exclusive of filters.
See page 58

octave).
Low-Pass:
octave).
Quality:
212
Within 0.33 % of full-scale typical, 1 %

maximum. Exclusive of filters. For the
Velomitor:
Full Scale 0-0.5: 3 % typical.
Specifications
ALARMS
Alarm Setpoints:
Alert levels can be set for each value

measured by the monitor. In addition,
Danger setpoints can be set for any two of
the values measured by the monitor. All
alarm setpoints are set using software
configuration. Alarms are adjustable and
can normally be set from 0 to 100 % of Full
Scale for each measured value. The
exception is when the Full Scale range
exceeds the range of the transducer. In this
case, the set point will be limited to the
range of the transducer. Accuracy of alarms
are to within 0.13 % of the desired value.
Alarm Time Delays:
Alarm delays can be programmed using

software, and can be set as follows:
Alert:
From 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second intervals.
Danger:
0.1 seconds (typical) or from 1 to 60

seconds in 1 second intervals.
213
Specifications
PROPORTIONAL VALUES
Proportional values are vibration measurements used to monitor the
machine. The Proximitor/Seismic Monitor returns the following proportional
values:
Radial Vibration
Direct *
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Thrust Position
Direct *
Gap
Differential
Expansion
Direct *
Gap
Eccentricity
Acceleration
Peak to Peak *
Gap
Direct Min
Direct Max
Direct *
RMS Acceleration (or)
peak Acceleration (or)
RMS Velocity (or)
peak Velocity (or)
Band-pass peak Acceleration (or)
Band-pass peak Velocity
Velocity
Direct *
RMS Velocity (or)
peak Velocity
peak to peak Displacement (or)
Band-pass peak Velocity (or)
Band-pass peak to peak Displacement
* This is the primary value for each channel pair type.
214
Specifications
Temperature:
-30 to 65 C (-22 to 150 F) operating, when

used with Internal/External Termination
Proximitor/Seismic I/O Module.
0 to 65 C (32 to 150 F) operating, when
used with Proximitor/Seismic Internal Barrier
I/O Module (Internal Termination).
-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) storage.
Humidity:
95 % non-condensing.
BARRIER PARAMETERS
The following parameters apply for both CSA-NRTL/C and CENELEC approvals.
Proximitor Barrier:
Circuit Parameters:
Vmax (PWR) = 26.80 V

(SIG) = 14.05 V
Imax (PWR) = 112.8 mA
(SIG) = 2.82 mA
Rmin (PWR) = 237.6
(SIG) = 4985
Channel Parameters
(Entity):
Vmax = 28.0 V
Imax = 115.62 mA
Rmin (PWR) = 237.6
(SIG) = 4985
Seismic Barrier:
Circuit Parameters:
Vmax (B) = 27.25 V

Imax (B) = 91.8 mA
Rmin (B) = 297
Channel Parameters
(Entity):
Vmax = 27.25 V
Imax = 91.8 mA
Rmin = 297
215
Specifications
Note: The 3500 Monitoring System conforms to the specifications listed
below. The specific test setup, test levels, and pass criteria (monitor
accuracy) for these tests are defined in the 3500 Technical Construction File.
For copies of this file, contact your local Bently Nevada office.
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:
EN 61000-4-2 (1995), Criteria B
Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
Power Supply Dip:
Radio Telephone:
HAZARDOUS APPROVALS
CSA-NRTL/C:
When used with
Internal/External Termination
I/O Module
Termination) *

Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Class III
* Hazardous Approvals for Class I, Division 2, Groups A through D Pending.

CENELEC:
Termination)
216
[EEx ia] IIC
Specifications
PHYSICAL
Main Board:
Width x Depth)
Weight:
I/O Modules (non-barrier):
Width x Depth)
I/O Modules (barrier):
Width x Depth)
Weight:
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 241.8 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52 in)
0.91 kg (2.0 lbs)
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 163.1 mm
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 6.42 in)
0.20 kg (0.44 lbs), non-barrier
0.46 kg (1.01 lbs), barrier

Monitor Module:
I/O Modules:
217
Specifications
218

Revision NC, March 2006
3500/65 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Copyright 2006 Bently Nevada LLC

The following are trademarks of Bently Nevada in the United States and other
countries:
Actionable Information, Actionable Information
to the Right People at The Right Time, ADRE,
Bently Nevada, CableLoc, Data Manager,
Decision Support, DemoNet, Dynamic Data
Manager, Dynamic Transmitor, Engineer
Assist, FieldMonitor, FluidLoc, FlexiTIM,
FlexiTAM, Helping you Protect and Manage All
Your Machinery, HydroVU, Key ,
MachineLibrary, MicroPROX, Move Data, Not
People, Move Information, Not Data,
Performance Manager, PROXPAC,
Proximitor, REBAM, Seismoprobe, System
1, TDIXconnX, Tecknowledgy, TipLoc,
Xlerometer
The Bently Nevada Orbit Design is a trademark of
Bently Nevada LLC in the United States and other
countries.
The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada are provided for those times when
you cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address
Telephone
Fax
Internet
1631 Bently Parkway

South
Minden, NV 89423
USA
1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
1 775 215 2876
www.bently.com
ii
Notice:
This manual does not contain all the information required to operate
and maintain the 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor. Refer to
the following manuals for other required information.
General description of a standard system
General description of a Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) system
Drawings for all cables used in the 3500 Monitoring System
Guidelines for using the 3500 Rack Configuration software for setting the operating
Diagrams that show how to hook up a particular transducer
Lists of recommended wiring
iii
Contents
Additional Information ........................................................................iii
Contents ..............................................................................................iv
Figures .................................................................................................vi
Tables .................................................................................................vii
1.
Receiving and Handling Instructions ........................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Receiving Inspection................................................................................................. 1
Handling and Storing Considerations ........................................................................ 1
Disposal Statement................................................................................................... 1
2.
General Information ....................................................................2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
Software/Firmware Revision Requirements .............................................................. 3

Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description ........................................................... 3
Available Data........................................................................................................... 3
Statuses................................................................................................................ 4
Proportional Values............................................................................................... 5
LED Descriptions ...................................................................................................... 7
3.
Configuration Information ..........................................................8
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Hardware Considerations.......................................................................................... 8
Monitor Options......................................................................................................... 8
Transducer Setup Tab......................................................................................... 10
Variables + Alarms Setup Tab............................................................................. 11
Group Setup........................................................................................................ 15
Group Summary.................................................................................................. 16
Range Summary ................................................................................................. 17
Available Setpoints ................................................................................................. 17
Software Switches .................................................................................................. 20
Module Switches ................................................................................................. 20
Channel Switches ............................................................................................... 21
4.
I/O Module Descriptions ...........................................................23
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
Internal Termination I/O Modules ............................................................................ 23

RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, internal termination) .... 24
External Termination I/O Module............................................................................. 25
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, external termination) ... 25
External Termination Blocks.................................................................................... 26
External Termination Block (Euro style connectors) ............................................ 26
External Termination Cables ................................................................................... 27
5.
Maintenance ..............................................................................28
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
Verifying a 3500 Rack 16 Channel Temperature Monitor ..................................... 28

Choosing a Maintenance Interval ........................................................................ 28
Required Test Equipment.................................................................................... 29
iv
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.2
Typical Verification Setup.................................................................................... 29

Using the Rack Configuration Software............................................................... 30
Verifying RTD Temperature Channels................................................................. 32
Verifying Thermocouple Temperature Channels ................................................. 37
If a Channel Fails a Verification Test ................................................................... 44
Performing Firmware Upgrades .............................................................................. 45
6.
Troubleshooting........................................................................47
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Self-test................................................................................................................... 47
LED Indication of Monitor Status............................................................................. 48
System Event List Messages .................................................................................. 49
Alarm Event List Messages..................................................................................... 62
Advanced Diagnostics............................................................................................. 62
7.
Ordering Information ................................................................64
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.3
Ordering Options 3500/65 .................................................................................... 64

Ordering Options - Cables ...................................................................................... 64
Transducer Signal to External Termination Block Cable...................................... 64
Spares 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor............................................... 65
8.
Specifications............................................................................67
Figures
Figure 4-1 Front and Rear View............................................................................................ 2
Figure 4-2 LEDs................................................................................................................... 7
Figure 5-3 Transducer Orientation...................................................................................... 11
Figure 6-1 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, internal termination) .. 24
Figure 6-2 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, external termination) . 25
Figure 6-3 External Termination Block (Euro style connectors)........................................... 26
Figure 6-4 Transducer Signal to ET Block Cable, part number 134544-XXXX-XX .............. 27
Figure 7-1 Typical Verification Setup .................................................................................. 29
Figure 7-2 Connect test equipment to input terminals ......................................................... 30
Figure 7-3 RTD Temperature Test Setup........................................................................... 33
Figure 7-4 Thermocouple Temperature Test Setup ............................................................ 39
vi
Tables
Table 4-1 Module Statuses................................................................................................... 5
Table 5-2 Full Scale Ranges by Thermocouple Type ......................................................... 12
Table 5-3 Full Scale Ranges by RTD Sensor Type............................................................. 13
Table 5-4 Setpoints for Differential Temperature Channel Type ......................................... 19
Table 5-5 Module Software Switches.................................................................................. 21
Table 5-6 Channel Software Switches ................................................................................ 22
Table 7-1 RTD Transducer OK Limits................................................................................. 37
Table 7-2 Thermocouple Transducer OK Limit ................................................................... 44
Table 8-1 LED Indication of Monitor Status......................................................................... 48
Table 8-2 Sample System Event ........................................................................................ 49
Table 8-3 System Event Class Value Descriptions ............................................................. 49
Table 8-4 Alarm Event Message......................................................................................... 62
Table 10-1 Maximum Thermocouple Wire Length by Gauge .............................................. 67
vii
1.

apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada.
1.2 Handling and Storing Considerations

order given.
Application Alert
Machinery protection will be lost when this
module is removed from the rack.

1.3 Disposal Statement

Customers and third parties, who are not member states of the European Union,
who are in control of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use, are
solely responsible for the proper disposal of the product. No person, firm,
corporation, association or agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it
in a manner that is in violation of any applicable federal, state, local or
international law. Bently Nevada LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the
product at the end of its life or at the end of its use.
2.
General Information
General Information
The 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor accepts input from either
resistance temperature detectors (RTD) or thermocouples (TC) and uses these
inputs to drive alarms. The monitor can be programmed using the 3500 Rack
1.
2.
3.
4.
Status LEDs. Refer to Section 2.4 LED Descriptions.

3500/65 Monitor Main Card
I/O Module, Internal Termination. Refer to Section 4.1 Internal Termination I/O Module
I/O Module, External Termination. Refer to Section 4.2 External Termination I/O Module
Figure 4-1 Front and Rear View
General Information
The primary purpose of the 3500/65 monitor is to provide 1) machinery protection

by continuously comparing current machine temperature against configured
alarm setpoints to drive alarms and relays, and 2) essential machine temperature
information to both operator and maintenance personnel. Alarm setpoints are
configured using the 3500 Rack Configuration Software. Alarm and danger
setpoints can be configured for the active proportional value.
The 3500/65 ships from the factory unconfigured. A spare monitor can be reconfigured for different applications as needed. To configure a monitor install the
monitor in a 3500 rack and follow the instructions in Section 3 Configuration
Information.
2.1 Software/Firmware Revision Requirements

3500/22 Module Firmware - Revision 1.50
3500/01 Software - Version 3.85
3500/02 Software - Not Supported*
System1 - Revision 5.2 with Service Pack 2
*Note: Attempting to use this software with the /65 may prevent proper
operation of the software.
2.2 Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description

When used in a TMR configuration, 3500/65 Monitors and corresponding I/O
Modules must be installed adjacent to each other in groups of three. This
configuration uses two types of voting to ensure accurate operation and to avoid
single point failures.
The first level of voting occurs on the TMR Relay Module. This voting compares
the selected alarm outputs for the three modules in a 2 out of 3 method. Two
modules must agree before the relay is driven. Refer to the 3500/32 & 34 Relay
Module Operation and Maintenance Manual for more information on this voting.
The second type of voting is referred to as "Comparison" voting. This type of
voting compares the proportional value outputs of each module in the group with
each other. If the output of one module differs from the output of the other
modules in the group by a specified amount, that module will add an entry to the
System Event list. Configure comparison voting by setting Comparison and %
Comparison in the Rack Configuration Software.
For TMR applications, the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor requires three
redundant transducers at each measurement location on the machine. The input
from each transducer is connected to separate 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature
Monitors
2.3 Available Data

The 16 Channel Temperature Monitor returns process data proportional values
directly to the Communications Gateway Module and Display Interface Module,
3
General Information
and to the host software via the Rack Interface Module. The 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor also returns both module and channel statuses.
2.3.1 Statuses
The monitor provides the following statuses. This section describes the available
statuses and where they can be found.
2.3.1.1 Module Status

OK
This indicates if the module is functioning correctly. Any of the following conditions will
return a not OK status:
Module Hardware Failure
Transducer Failure
Slot ID Failure
Channel not OK
If the Module OK status goes not OK, then the system OK Relay on the Rack Interface I/O
Module will be driven not OK.
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether the module has entered Alert/Alarm 1. A module will enter the
Alert/Alarm 1 state when the process proportional value provided by the module exceeds its
configured Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint.
Danger/Alarm 2
This indicates whether the module has entered Danger/Alarm 2. A module will enter the
Danger/Alarm 2 state when the process proportional value provided by the module exceeds
its configured Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint.
Bypass
This indicates when the module has bypassed alarming the proportional value of a channel.
When a channel bypass status is set, this module bypass status will also be set.
Configuration Fault
This indicates if the monitor configuration is valid.
2.3.1.2 Channel Status

OK
This indicates whether or not the associated module channel has detected a fault. A not
OK status is returned under any of the following conditions:
Transducer Failure
Channel Specific Hardware Failure
Alert/Alarm 1
This indicates whether or not the associated module channel has entered Alert/Alarm 1. A
channel will enter the Alert/Alarm 1 state when any proportional value provided by the
channel exceeds its configured Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint.
Danger/Alarm 2
General Information
This indicates whether or not the associated module channel has entered Danger/Alarm 2.
A channel will enter the Danger/Alarm 2 state when any proportional value provided by the
channel exceeds its configured Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint.
Bypass
This indicates that the channel has bypassed alarming for one or more of its proportional
values. Any of the following conditions will result in a channel bypass status:
Temperature Monitor has never been configured
Temperature Monitor is in configuration mode
Temperature Channel has an invalid configuration
Temperature Monitor is in power up self-test
Fatal error found during self-test
Alarming is bypassed via a software switch
Rack Alarm Inhibit is enabled.
Off
This indicates whether or not the channel has been turned off. The monitor channels may
be turned off (inactivated) using the Rack Configuration Software.
The following table shows the locations of the statuses.
Communication
Gateway
Module
Rack
Configuration
Software
Module OK
Module Alert/Alarm 1
Module Danger/Alarm 2
Statuses
Module Bypass
Channel OK
Channel Bypass
Channel Off
Table 4-1 Module Statuses
2.3.2 Proportional Values

Proportional values are process measurements used to monitor the machine.
The 16 Channel Temperature Monitor returns process data proportional values.
Direct
5
General Information
The direct PPL returns temperature data from a single channel.

Composite
The composite PPL is a user configurable PPL that returns an average of the
Configured Direct PPLs selected in the Group Setup screen. See section 3.2.3
(Group Setup)
Differential
The differential PPL is a user configurable PPL that returns the difference
between the Channel Direct PPL and the composite value. See section 3.2.3
(Group Setup)
Note
The 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor does not support
simultaneous use of Composite and Differential PPL types on a single
channel. The user may select one or the other PPL, but not both.
General Information

The LEDs on the front panel of the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor indicate the
6.2 for all of the available LED conditions.
1. OK: Indicates that the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor and the 16 Channel
Temperature I/O Module are operating correctly.
2. TX/RX: Flashes at the rate that messages are received and transmitted
3. BYPASS: Indicates that some of the monitor functions are temporarily suppressed.
Figure 4-2 LEDs
3.
The 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor must have a valid configuration to
operate properly. This section lists the Monitor Options(Section 3.2), Available
Setpoints(Section 3.3), and Software Switches (Section 3.4) for the 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor.
To configure the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor, use this section to gather the
configuration information and then use the Rack Configuration Software to set
options and download the configuration to the module. The 3500 Monitoring
System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (part number 129777-01) shows
how to install and operate the Rack Configuration Software.
3.1 Hardware Considerations

The slots in the rack are numbered from 0 to 15, counting from left to right. Slot 0
is reserved for 1 or 2 power supplies. Slot 1 is reserved for an interface module,
either the 3500/22 Transient Data Interface or the 3500/20 Rack Interface
Module. Slots 2 through 15 are called monitoring positions. The 3500/65 16
Channel Temperature Monitor can be installed into any of the monitoring
positions. However, if the 3500/20 Rack Interface Module and Data Manager I/O
are to be used to interface to DDIX, TDIX or TDXnet, refer to the 3500/20 manual
for slot restrictions this may place on your configuration.
3.2 Monitor Options

This section describes the options available on the Temperature Monitor
configuration screens and discusses configuration considerations.
Channel
The channel that is currently selected for configuration(1 thru 16).
Slot
The location of the Temperature Monitor in the 3500 rack (2 through 15).
Rack Type
The type of Rack Interface Module installed in the rack (Standard or TMR).
Configuration ID
A unique six character identifier, which is entered when a configuration is downloaded to
the 3500 rack.

The I/O field lets you identify the type of I/O Module that is attached to the monitor. The
option selected must agree with the I/O module installed.
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (Internal Termination)

This I/O module is explained in section 4.1.1
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (External Termination)

This I/O module is explained in section 4.2.1
Active Channel Field

A tree view of all channels with a checkbox indicating if the channel is Active () or
Inactive ().
Copy
Use this button to copy the complete configuration of one channel to any or all of the other
channels.
Group Summary
Select this button to bring up a read-only summary showing how all the composite and
differential proportional values are configured.
Range Summary
This button shows all of the channels range and clamp values. Optionally this button can
display this information for all the channels that make up the composite proportional value for
a particular channel.
Point Names
Select this button to bring up a form to enter custom point names for each channel (20
character maximum point name length).
3.2.1 Transducer Setup Tab

Use this section to select which transducer will be used for the given channel.
Available choices are listed in section 3.2.2.1 Enable (Proportional Values).
3.2.1.1 Barriers
Select External or Galvanic Isolator if there are external barriers connected
between the monitor and the transducer. Barriers are used to restrict the amount
of energy that can flow into a hazardous area. This field is for information only
and does not affect monitor operation.
10
3.2.1.2 Transducer Orientation

This notes the location of the transducer on the machine. The range for
orientation angle is 0 to 180 degrees left or right as observed from the driver to
the driven end of the machine train. This field is for information purposes only
and may be left at its default setting. Refer to the following figure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shaft
Driver end
Driven end
0
90 right
180
90 left
Figure 5-3 Transducer Orientation
3.2.2 Variables + Alarms Setup Tab

This section describes the options available on the Variable and Alarms Setup
Tab.
3.2.2.1 Enable (Proportional Values)

The Enable field contains the units, full-scale range, and clamp value for the enabled
Temperature proportional value. Direct is always enabled, composite and differential can
be enabled by selecting the appropriate enable box next to the desired proportional value.
Proportional value selection is limited to either Composite(Group Average) OR Differential,
but not both.
Range Options
The Direct full-scale ranges are listed below in the following tables
11
Type of
Thermocouple
Type J
Full-scale Ranges
Temperature
Range
0 to 100
0 to 200
-18 to 760 C
0 to 150
0 to 300
(0 to 1400 F)
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 750
Custom*
Custom*
Type K
Type E
0 to 100
0 to 200
-18 to 1370 C
0 to 150
0 to 300
(0 to 2498 F)
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 750
0 to 1500
0 to 1000
0 to 2000
Custom*
Custom*
-100 to 100
-100 to 100
-100 to 1000 C
0 to 100
0 to 200
(-148 to 1832 F)
0 to 150
0 to 300
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 750
0 to 1500
0 to 1000
Custom*
Custom*
Type T
-100 to 100
-100 to 100
-160 to 400 C
0 to 100
0 to 200
(-256 to 752 F)
0 to 150
0 to 300
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
Custom*
Custom*
Table 5-2 Full Scale Ranges by Thermocouple Type
12
Type of RTD
100 ohm Platinum

(0.00392)
100 ohm Platinum

(0.00385)
10 ohm Copper
120 ohm Nickel
Full-scale Ranges
Temperature
Range
-200 to 200
-200 to 200
-200 to 700 C
-100 to 100
-100 to 100
(-328 to 1292 F)
0 to 100
0 to 200
0 to 150
0 to 300
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 1000
Custom*
Custom*
-200 to 200
-200 to 200
-200 to 850 C
-100 to 100
-100 to 100
(-328 to 1562 F)
0 to 100
0 to 200
0 to 150
0 to 300
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 750
0 to 1500
Custom*
Custom*
-100 to 100
-100 to 100
-100 to 260 C
0 to 100
0 to 200
(-148 to 500 F)
0 to 150
0 to 300
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
Custom*
Custom*
0 to 100
0 to 200
-80 to 260 C
0 to 150
0 to 300
(-112 to 500 F)
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 250
0 to 500
Custom*
Custom*
See Section 4 I/O Module Descriptions for a list of which transducers are supported on each
I/O module. Not all transducers are supported on every I/O module.
Table 5-3 Full Scale Ranges by RTD Sensor Type
13
For Composite and Differential proportional values the Rack Configuratin

Software will computer the available full-scale ranges based on the full-scale
ranges of the individual channels.
*Custom
The lower and upper limits of the range can be set to anything within the supported
transducer temperature range. The upper limit must be 100 greater than the lower limit.
Maximum, Minimum
If Composite and Differential proportional values are enabled, their full-scale range is
entered here. The Rack Configuration Sofware will computer the limits of the full-scale
range based upon the selected full-scale range on the direct values.
Clamp Value
This sets the proportional value that is reported when that channel or proportional value is
bypassed or defeated (for example, when a problem occurs with the transducer). The
selected value must be between the minimum and the maximum full-scale range value.
Only the values available from the Communication Gateway and Display Interface Module
are clamped to the specified value when the proportional value is invalid.
3.2.2.2 OK Mode
Options in the OK Mode group determine how the channel OK status is affected
when the channel goes Not OK and then returns to an OK state. This status
affects the state of the rack OK relay on the Rack Interface Module.
Latching
If a channel is configured for Latching OK, the status will remain not OK after going not OK
until a reset is issued. Reset a latched not OK by using one of the following methods:
Pushing the reset switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module
Closing the reset contact on the back of the Rack Interface Module
Selecting the Rack Reset command in the Rack Configuration or Operator Display
Software
Issuing the reset command through the Communication Gateway Module.
Issuing the reset command through the Display Interface Module.
Nonlatching
The channel OK status will return to an OK state once the not OK condition is removed.
3.2.2.3 TMR (TMR Configurations only)

Comparison
The enabled proportional value of the TMR monitor group that indicates how far apart the
values of the three monitors can be from each other before an entry is added to the System
Event List.
% Comparison
The highest allowed percent difference between the middle value of the three monitors in a
TMR group and the individual values of each monitor in the group.
14
3.2.2.4 Delay
The time which a proportional value must remain at or above an over alarm
setpoint, or at or below an under alarm setpoint, before an alarm is declared as
active.
Alert/Alarm 1
First level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected
Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint. The Alert/Alarm 1 time delay is set at one-second intervals (from 1
to 60 seconds) for the proportional value.
Danger/Alarm 2
Second level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint. The Danger/Alarm 2 time delay can be set in 0.5-second
intervals (from 1 to 60 seconds) or to the minimum alarm time delay for the proportional
value. The minimum alarm time delay for the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor is 0.225
Seconds.
3.2.2.5 Alarm Mode

Latching
Once a latching alarm is active it will remain active even after the proportional value drops
below the configured setpoint level. The channel will remain in alarm until reset by using
one of the following methods:
Pressing the reset switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module
Closing the reset contact on the Rack Interface I/O Module
Selecting the Rack Reset command in the Rack Configuration or Operator Display
Software
Issuing the reset command through the Communication Gateway or Display

Interface Module.
Nonlatching
When a nonlatching alarm is active, it will go inactive as soon as the proportional value
Alert/Alarm 1 should be the first level alarm that occurs when the transducer
signal level exceeds the selected value. Danger/Alarm 2 should be the second
level alarm that occurs when the transducer signal level exceeds the selected
value. The Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 values are set on the Setpoint
screen.
3.2.3 Group Setup

This section describes the group setup screen.
15
If a composite or differential PPL is selected, the user must define the PPL using the
Group Setup screen. Select the channels to be included in the PPL by clicking on
the desired Channel(s). The bottom portion of the screen will update with the
appropriate differential or composite calculation.
3.2.4 Group Summary

This section describes the read-only screen that gives the group summary.
View Mode
Show all
16
Lists all configured differential and composite proportional values.
Composite only
List only configured composite proportional values
Differential only
List only configured differential proportional values
Enabled only
List all calculated proportional values that are configured to be active.
3.2.5 Range Summary

This section describes the options available on the Range Setup screen.
View Mode
Show All
Displays and allows modification of all the full scale and clamp values for every enabled
proportional value.
Only Channel(s) in Grouping for [Channel #]

Displays and allows modification of all the full scale and clamp values for all the channels
that are a part of the composite proportional value for the chosen channel.
3.3 Available Setpoints

This section specifies the available setpoints for the Temperature channel. A
setpoint is the level within the full-scale range that determines when an alarm
occurs. The 3500 Monitoring System allows two Alert/Alarm 1 setpoints (one
over setpoint and one under setpoint) to be set on each Temperature
17
proportional value. The channel will drive an Alert/Alarm 1 indication if the

channel proportional value exceeds an Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint. The 3500
Monitoring System also allows two Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints (one over setpoint
and one under setpoint) to be set for each Temperature channel. The channel
will drive a Danger/Alarm 2 indication if the channel proportional value exceeds a
Note
Setpoint Over and Under limits can only be
placed within the valid range of the specified
transducer.
Use the following screen in the Rack Configuration Software to adjust Alert/Alarm 1 and
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints.
The following tables list the Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints for the 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor. The setpoint number is used in the Communication Gateway and
Display Interface Module.
18
Differential Temperature Channel Type

Setpoint
Temperature Setpoint
Number
1
Over Temperature
Alert/Alarm 1
Under Temperature
Alert/Alarm 1
Over Composite/Differential
Alert/Alarm 1
Under Composite/Differential
Alert/Alarm 1
Over Danger/Alarm 2
Under Danger/Alarm 2
Over Danger/Alarm 2
Under Danger/Alarm 2
Table 5-4 Setpoints for Differential Temperature Channel Type
19

The 16 Channel Temperature Monitor supports two module software switches
and four channel software switches. These switches let you temporarily bypass,
inhibit, or invoke monitor and channel functions. Set these switches on the
Software Switches screen under the Utilities Option on the main screen of the
3.4.1 Module Switches

Configuration Mode
This switch allows the monitor to be configured. To configure the monitor, enable () this
switch and set the key switch on the front of the Rack Interface Module to the PROGRAM
position. When downloading a configuration from the Rack Configuration Software, The
Rack Configuration Software will automatically enable and disable this switch. If the
software loses its connection to the rack during the configuration process, use this switch to
remove the module from Configuration Mode.

20
When this switch is enabled, the monitor does not perform alarming functions. All
proportional values are still provided.
The monitor switch number is used in the Communication Gateway and Display
Interface Module.
Switch Name
Configuration Mode
Table 5-5 Module Software Switches
3.4.2 Channel Switches

Alert Bypass
When this switch is enabled, the channel does not perform Alert alarming functions.
Danger Bypass
When this switch is enabled, the channel does not perform Danger alarming functions.
21
Bypass
When this switch is enabled, the channel provides no alarming functions and supplies no
The channel switch number is used in the Communication Gateway and Display
Interface Module.
Switch Name
Alert Bypass
Danger Bypass
Bypass
Table 5-6 Channel Software Switches
22
4.

The Temperature I/O Module receives and conditions signals from either
resistance temperature detectors (RTD) or Isolated Tip Thermocouple (TC)
transducers. These signals are then sent to the 16 Channel Temperature
Monitor for additional signal processing.
One I/O module is required for each 16 Channel Temperature Monitor. Install
the I/O module behind the monitor in a rack mount or panel mount rack, or above
the monitor in a Bulkhead rack configuration.
This section describes the connectors for these modules, lists which cables to
use, and shows the pin outs of the cables. The 3500 Field Wiring Diagram
Package (part number 130432-01) shows how to connect transducers to the I/O
module or External Termination Blocks.
4.1 Internal Termination I/O Modules

Internal Termination I/O modules require you to wire each transducer to the I/O
module directly. This section depicts the Internal Termination I/O modules and
shows how to connect the wires to the Euro Style connector.
23
4.1.1 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65,

internal termination)
This I/O module accepts 3-wire RTD, 4-wire RTD and thermocouple inputs. The
inputs to this I/O are referenced to 3500 system ground and as such the
transducers must be isolated from machine ground.
1. Connect the wire from the transducers associated with Channel 1 thru 4 to the I/O
module.
module.
module.
module
Figure 6-1 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, internal termination)
24
4.2 External Termination I/O Module

External Termination I/O modules simplify the wiring to the I/O modules in a 3500
rack by using multi-conductor cables to route the signals to and from the
transmitters to the I/O module. Each of these I/O modules requires an external
termination block (section 4.3 External Termination Blocks) and a cable (section
4.4 External Termination Cables)
4.2.1 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65,

external termination)
This I/O module accepts 3-wire RTD, 4-wire RTD and thermocouple inputs. The
inputs to this I/O are referenced to 3500 system ground and as such the
transducers must be isolated from machine ground.
1. Connect the I/O module to the External Termination Block using cable 134544-XXXX-XX
for Channels 1 thru 8.
2. Connect the I/O module to the External Termination Block using cable 134544-XXXX-XX
for Channels 9 thru 16.
Figure 6-2 RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, external
termination)
25

External Termination Blocks used with a 16 Channel Temperature I/O Module
(Euro style connectors).
4.3.1 External Termination Block (Euro style connectors)
1. Connect the wire from the transducers associated with Channel 1thru 16 to the External
Termination Block.
2. Connect the Transducer I/O module to the Transducers External Termination Block
using cables 134544-XXXX-XX.
using cable 134544-XXXX-XX for Channels 1,2,5,6,9,10,13,14.
using cable 134544-XXXX-XX for Channels 3,4,7,8,11,12,15,16.
Figure 6-3 External Termination Block (Euro style connectors)
26
4.4 External Termination Cables

Wiring Diagram
1
4
5
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3500 I/O Module

External termination block J3
External termination block J4
Shield to connector shell
TP = Twisted pair
NC = No connect
Figure 6-4 Transducer Signal to ET Block Cable, part number 134544-XXXX-XX
27
5.
Maintenance
Maintenance
This section shows how to verify the operation of channels in a 16
Channel Temperature Monitor (section5.1) and how to upgrade firmware (section
5.2).
5.1 Verifying a 3500 Rack 16 Channel Temperature

Monitor
Section
Number
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
Topic
Typical Verification Setup
Verifying RTD Temperature Channels
Verifying Thermocouple Temperature
Channels
Page
Number
28
29
29
30
32
37
44
5.1.1 Choosing a Maintenance Interval

-
The monitored machine is classified as critical
The 3500 rack operates in a harsh environment such as at extreme

temperatures, in high humidity, or in a corrosive atmosphere
28
Maintenance
At each interval, use the results of the previous verifications and ISO Procedure
10012-1 to adjust the interval.
5.1.2 Required Test Equipment

RTD list
-
Decade resistance (with an accuracy of 0.01 )
Thermocouple list
-
Precision millivolt source
Multimeter (with an accuracy of 0.001 mV)
A temperature meter with sensor (with an accuracy of 0.1 C (0.18 F))
5.1.3 Typical Verification Setup

The following figure shows the typical test setup for verifying a 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor. The test equipment is used to simulate the transducer
signal and the laptop computer is used to observe the output from the rack.
1.
2.
3.
4.

3500 Rack
Laptop Computer
RS-232 Communications
Figure 7-1 Typical Verification Setup

equipment to the monitor using one of the following methods:
29
Maintenance
1. Field wiring connectors

2. Internal Termination I/O module
3. External Termination Block with Euro connectors
Figure 7-2 Connect test equipment to input terminals
5.1.4 Using the Rack Configuration Software

The laptop computer in the test setup uses the Rack Configuration Software to
display output from the rack and to reset certain operating parameters in the
rack. To perform the test procedures in this section you must be familiar with the
following features of the Rack Configuration Software.
- Upload, Download, and Save configuration files
- Enable and disable channels and alarms
- Bypass channels and alarms
- Display the Verification screen
30
Maintenance
Note
maintenance and/or troubleshooting procedures. It may be necessary
during these procedures to change some configuration settings that
must be restored to their original values at the conclusion of the
procedures. At that time the original configuration should be
downloaded to the rack.
The following figures show how the Verification screen displays output from a
3500 rack:
1
3
5
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rack Status: Displays the status of the rack.

Module Status: Displays status of the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor.
Channel Status: Displays the status of the given channel.
OK Limit Verification Fields: These fields display output for verifying OK Limits.
CJC Value: Displays the Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) value for the given
channel (used for Thermocouple transducers only).
6. Group Settings: These fields show how the monitor calculates each proportional value.
31
Maintenance
7. Current Value Verification Fields: These fields display output for verifying channel
output. Setpoints are indicated by lines on the bargraph display:
Alarm Setpoints are indicated on the bar graph as follows:
-
Danger/Alarm 2 Over - Solid Red Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Over - Solid Yellow Line
Alert/Alarm 1 Under - Dashed Yellow Line
Danger/Alarm 2 Under - Dashed Red Line
The Alarm Setpoint value can be determined by selecting the line for the setpoint
with the mouse cursor. Any channel bar graph value that enters Alert/Alarm 1 or
Danger/Alarm 2 will cause the alarm lines in the Channel Status box to indicate
an alarm. Any channel that enters alarm will cause the alarm lines in the Module
Status box to indicate an alarm.
5.1.5 Verifying RTD Temperature Channels

limits for channels configured as RTD Temperature. The output values and
alarm setpoints are verified by varying the input temperature signal level and
observing that the Verification screen reports the correct results on the test
computer.
5.1.5.1 Test Equipment and Software Setup - RTD Temperature

needed for all the verification procedures (test alarms, verify channel proportional
values, verify OK status, and test OK limits).
CAUTION
High voltage present. Contact could cause
Do not touch exposed wires or terminals.
Application Alert
Tests will exceed alarm setpoint levels
causing alarms to activate. This could result in
a relay contact state change.
Application Alert
32
Maintenance
Disconnecting the field wiring will cause a not

OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - RTD Temperature
The monitor supports two RTD configurations, 3-Wire and 4-Wire. To simulate a
RTD signal connect the decade resistor to channel 1 as shown in the following
figure.
1. Decade Resistor, 4-Wire RTD

2. Decade Resistor, 3-Wire RTD
Figure 7-3 RTD Temperature Test Setup
equipment outputs connect to the external termination block. Make the lead
length between the decade resistor and the I/O module as short as possible.
Verification Screen Setup - Temperature
from the Utilities menu, choose the proper Slot number and Channel number,
and then click on the Verify button.
33
Maintenance
5.1.5.2 Test Alarms

Simulate the temperature signal with a decade resistor. Test the alarm levels by
varying the output from the test equipment and observing the results in the
Verification screen on the test computer. It is only necessary to test those alarm
parameters that are configured and being used. To test alarms adjust the test
signal to:
-
Exceed Over Alert/Alarm 1 and Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints,
Drop below Under Alert/Alarm 1 and Under Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints,
Produce a non-alarm condition.
When varying the signal from an alarm condition to a non-alarm condition, alarm
1. Disconnect all field wiring from the channel terminals on the Temperature I/O
Module.
(Test Equipment and Software Setup - RTD Temperature).
3. Adjust the decade resistor to provide a reading that is below the Temperature
over setpoints and above the Temperature Under setpoints.
Over Setpoints
5. Adjust the voltage/current source such that the input signal just exceeds the
alarm.
still indicates an alarm.
7. Adjust the voltage/current source such that the input signal just exceeds the
Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the alarm
color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an alarm.
indicates an alarm.
9. Adjust the voltage/current source such that the input signal reads below the
Current Value Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET
switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
Under Setpoints
34
Maintenance
Danger/Alarm 2 setpoints by adjusting the voltage/current source to drop
below the Under Alarm setpoint levels
11. If you cannot verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured setpoints.
12. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect all field wiring to the channel
terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK LED comes on.
Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK
LED.
5.1.5.3 Verify Channel Values RTD Temperature

Temperature input signal with a voltage/current source. Verify channel values by
varying the output from the test equipment and observing that the correct results
are reported in the Verification screen on the test computer.
Note
See Section 8 Specifications for the rated
accuracy for each transducer type.
Module.
3. Select a minimum of three verification resistance values that are within the
selected full-scale range and that correspond to the NIST standard value,
such as the tables in the MINCOs Bulletin TS-102 (G), Temperature
Sensors & Transmitters.
4. Adjust the decade resistor to the first verification value that was selected from
the tables.
5. Verify that the bar graph display and the Current Value Box have the
specified accuracy for that type of RTD for the verification values shown in
the tables.
6. Repeat the procedure in step 4 and 5 until all of the verification points have
been tested.
7. If a reading does not meet specifications, check that the input signal is
correct. Review the multimeter voltage reading. If the monitor still does not
meet specifications or fails any other part of this test, see section 5.1.7 If a
Channel Fails a Verification Test.
8. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the field wiring to the channel
terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK LED comes on.
35
Maintenance
Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset the OK
LED.
Example 1:
Some values for Platinum (=0.00392) have the following resistance values:
Verification value 1:
T1= 0 C
Resistance = 100.0
T1= 90 C
Resistance = 135.3
T1= 150 C
Resistance = 158.3
5.1.5.4 Test OK Limits RTD Temperature
Note
All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the OK relay
to be energized.
To test OK limits apply a simulated RTD signal (resistance value) and adjust it
above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This resistance value
will cause a not OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize).
The Upper and Lower OK limits are displayed in the Verification screen on the
test computer.
Module.
4. Adjust the decade box to a value in the middle of the OK Limits listed in Table
7-1 RTD Transducer OK Limits.
7. Increase the decade resistor (large value) until the OK LED just goes off
(upper limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the Channel Status
section reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify that the
Upper OK limit displayed on the Verification screen is equal to or less positive
than the input signal. Verify that any composite proportional values that
contains the channel goes not OK as well as the differential proportional
value.
8. Adjust the decade resistor to some value in the middle of the OK limits as
listed in Table 7-1 RTD Transducer OK Limits.
36
Maintenance
OK LED comes back on and that the OK relay energizes. Verify that the
Channel OK State line in the Channel Status section reads OK and any
composite proportional values containing the channel return to OK and the
differential proportional value also returns to OK.
10. Gradually decrease the decade resistor (small value) until the OK LED just
goes off (lower limit). Verify that the Channel OK State line in the Channel
Status section reads not OK and that the OK Relay indicates not OK. Verify
that the Lower OK limit displayed on the Verification screen is equal to or less
negative than the input voltage. Verify that any composite proportional values
that contains the channel goes not OK as well as the differential proportional
value.
11. Adjust the decade resistor to some value in the middle of the OK limits as
listed in Table 7-1 RTD Transducer OK Limits.
Channel OK State line in the Channel Status section reads OK and any
composite proportional values containing the channel return to OK and the
differential proportional value also returns to OK.
13. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the field wiring to the channel
terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK LED comes on
and that the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
14. If you cannot verify any configured OK limit, see section 5.1.7 If a Channel
Fails a Verification Test.
16. Return the bypass switch for all configured channels back to its original
setting.
RTD Type
Lower OK Limit
Upper OK Limit
(Ohms)
(Degrees)
(Ohms)
(Degrees)
Pt (=0.00392)
17.00
-200 C
350.17
+700 C
Pt (=0.00385)
18.40
-200 C
390.38
+850 C
Ni (=0.00672)
66.60
-80 C
380.31
+260 C
Cu (=0.00427)
5.13
-100 C
19.12
+260 C
Table 7-1 RTD Transducer OK Limits
5.1.6 Verifying Thermocouple Temperature Channels

limits for channels configured as Thermocouple Temperature. The output values
and alarm setpoints are verified by varying the input temperature signal level and
observing that the correct results are reported in the Verification screen on the
test computer.
37
Maintenance
5.1.6.1 Test Equipment and Software Setup - Thermocouple Temperature

Use the following test equipment and software setup for all the verification procedures (Test Alarms,
CAUTION
High voltage present. Contact could cause
Do not touch exposed wires or terminals.
Application Alert
Tests will exceed alarm setpoint levels
causing alarms to activate. This could result in
a relay contact state change.
Application Alert
Disconnecting the field wiring will cause a not
OK condition.
Test Equipment Setup - Thermocouple Temperature
Simulate the transducer signal by connecting the precision millivolt source to the
input terminal for channel 1 with polarity as shown in the following figure.
38
Maintenance
1. Precision millivolt source

2. Multimeter
3. RTD/TC Temp I/O Module
Figure 7-4 Thermocouple Temperature Test Setup
equipment outputs connect to the external termination block.
Verification Screen Setup - TC Temperature
39
Maintenance
5.1.6.2 Test Alarms - TC Temperature

Simulate the temperature signal with a precision millivolt source. Test the alarm
levels by varying the output from the precision millivolt source and observing the
Verification screen on the test computer. It is only necessary to test those alarm
parameters that are configured and being used. Adjust the test signal to:
-
Exceed the over Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints
Drop below any under Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 Setpoints
Produce a non-alarm condition
When varying the signal from an alarm condition to a non-alarm condition be

sure to consider alarm hysteresis. Adjust the signal well within the alarm setpoint
1. Disconnect all field wiring from the channel terminals on the Temperature
I/O Module.
2. Connect test equipment and run software as described in 15.1.6.1 Test
Equipment and Software Setup - Thermocouple Temperature
3. Adjust the precision millivolt source to produce a reading that is within the
setpoint levels on the bar graph display of the Verification screen.
4. Press the RESET switch on the Rack Interface Module (RIM). Verify that
the OK LED is on, the bar graph indicator for Direct is green, and the
Current Value Field has no alarm indication.
Over Setpoints
5. Adjust the precision millivolt source such that the signal just exceeds the
time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator changes color
the bar graph indicator remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
Over Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
alarm time delay expires and verify that the bar graph indicator changes
color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an
Alarm.
the bar graph indicator for Direct remains red and that the Current Value
9. Adjust the precision millivolt source such that the signal reads within the
Alarm setpoint levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe
that the bar graph indicator changes color to green and that the Current
Value Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on
the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
40
Maintenance
Under Setpoints
Under Alert/Alarm 1 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
Alarm.
the bar graph indicator remains yellow and that the Current Value Field
Under Danger/Alarm 2 setpoint level. Wait for 2 or 3 seconds after the
color from yellow to red and that the Current Value Field indicates an
Alarm.
the bar graph indicator for Direct remains red and that the Current Value
14. Adjust the precision millivolt source such that the signal reads within the
Alarm setpoint levels. If the nonlatching option is configured, observe
that the bar graph indicator changes color to green and that the Current
Value Field contains no indication of alarms. Press the RESET switch on
the Rack Interface Module (RIM) to reset latching alarms.
15. If you cannot verify any configured alarm, recheck the configured
setpoints. If the monitor still does not alarm properly or fails any other
part of this test, go to 5.1.7 If a Channel Fails a Verification Test.
16. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the all field wiring to the
channel terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK
LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on
5.1.6.3 Verify Channel Values - Thermocouple Temperature

Simulate the Temperature signal with a precision millivolt source. Verify channel
values by varying the output from the test equipment and observing the
Note
These parameters have an accuracy specification that depends
upon the physical configuration of the system. Reference
Section 8 Specifications of this manual.
1. Disconnect all field wiring from the channel terminals on the Temperature
I/O Module.
2. Connect test equipment and run software as described in 5.1.6.1 Test
Equipment and Software Setup - Thermocouple Temperature
41
Maintenance
3. The CJC value is available at all times in the CJC field of the verification
screen. Record the CJC temperature. This value is the CJC temperature
at the input terminal of the monitor at the start of the test.
4. Select a minimum of three verification voltage values (Vtable) that are
within the selected full-scale range and that corresponds to the NIST
standard value, such as those given in the tables in Omegas The
Temperature Handbook Vol. 28.
5. Using a Thermocouple Table, convert the CJC temperature value
recorded above to the CJC voltage (Vcjc).
6. Adjust the value for the verification value listed in the Thermocouple
Table to the voltage that is applied in the test configuration (Vtest).
7. Adjust the precision millivolt source to the first verification value that has
been adjusted (Vtest). Adjust the verification value using Equation 7-1
Adjusted Verification Temperature Value. Record the value in the Current
Value Box.
8. Repeat the steps 6 and 7 for the remaining verification values.
9. Record the CJC value at the end of the test. This temperature and the
temperature recorded in step 3 cannot vary by more the 1 C (1.8 F). If
it does vary, repeat steps 3 through 9.
10. Verify that the bar graph display and the Current Value Box is within 1
C (1.8 F) of the expected value.
11. Repeat the procedure in steps 9 and 10 until all of the verification points
have been tested.
12. Change the Proportional Value Display Option back to Return Direct
Value on the verification screen.
correct. If the monitor still does not meet specifications or fails any other
part of this test, go to 5.1.7 If a Channel Fails a Verification Test.
14. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect all the field wiring to the
channel terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK
LED comes on and the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on
Equation 7-1 Adjusted Verification Temperature Value
Vtest = Vtable -Vcjc
Example 1:
Some values for Type-J have the following voltage values:
T1= 0 C
Voltage = 0.000 mV
T1= 90 C
Voltage = 4.725 mV
T1= 150 C
Voltage = 8.008 mV
42
Maintenance
Example 2:
Assume that the CJC temperature measured in step 5 is 29 C, that the monitor is
configured for the type-J TC, and that the desired test verification value is 100 C.
For the CJC temperature of 29 C the Thermocouple Table indicates this corresponds to a
CJC voltage (Vcjc) of 1.484 mV.
From the same table, the test temperature of 100 C corresponds to a voltage (Vtable) of
5.268 mV.
Adjusted Verification Input Voltage Value is:
Vtest = 5.268 mV - 1.484 mV
Vtest = 3.784 mV
5.1.6.4 Test OK Limits - TC Temperature
Note
All other channels in the rack must be OK or bypassed for the OK relay
to be energized.
To test OK limits by applying a precision millivolt DC voltage and adjusting it to a
value above the Upper OK limit and below the Lower OK limit. This voltage will
cause a not OK condition and the OK Relay to change state (de-energize). The
computer.
Module.
2. Connect the test equipment and run the software as described 5.1.6.1 Test
Equipment and Software Setup - Thermocouple Temperature.
4. Adjust the precision millivolt source to some value in the middle of the OK
limits as listed in Table 7-2 Thermocouple Transducer OK Limit.
7. Increase the precision millivolt source (more positive) until the OK LED just
43
Maintenance
equal to or less positive than the input voltage.
Channel OK State line in the Channel Status section reads OK.
10. Gradually decrease the precision millivolt source (more negative) until the OK
screen is equal to or less negative than the input voltage.
Channel OK State line in the Channel Status section reads OK.
13. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect all field wiring to the channel
terminals on the Temperature I/O Module. Verify that the OK LED comes on
and that the OK relay energizes. Press the RESET switch on the Rack
14. If you cannot verify any configured OK limit, go to 5.1.7 If a Channel Fails a
Verification Test
16. Return the bypass switch for all configured channels back to its original
setting.
Thermocouple Transducer OK Limit
Thermocouple
Lower OK Limit
Upper OK Limit
(millivolts)
(Degrees)
(millivolts)
(Degrees)
Type-J
-0.896
-18 C
42.922
+760 C
Type-K
-0.701
-18 C
54.807
+1370 C
Type-E
-5.237
-100 C
76.358
+1000 C
Type-T
-4.865
-160 C
20.869
+400 C
Table 7-2 Thermocouple Transducer OK Limit
5.1.7 If a Channel Fails a Verification Test

Always be sure to adequately protect against damage from Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) when handling or replacing circuit boards. Always wear a
proper wrist strap and work on a grounded conductive work surface.
44
Maintenance
129766-01).
3. Return the faulty module to Bently Nevada for repair.
5.2 Performing Firmware Upgrades

Occasionally it may be necessary to upgrade the original firmware that is shipped
with the 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor. The following instructions
describe how to upgrade the existing firmware using the 3500 Configuration
software. The monitor will require reconfiguration using the 3500 Rack
Configuration software after its firmware upgrade. The following instructions are
valid if the existing firmware is revision 3.00 or higher. If the firmware revision is
lower than 3.00 contact Bently Nevada technical support for an alternate
procedure.
CAUTION
During the following procedure power to the rack
cannot be interrupted and the monitor that is
being upgraded cannot be removed from the
rack. If either of these occurs the monitor may
become inoperable.
1. Start the 3500 Configuration software and connect to the rack.

2. Upload and save the current configuration of the monitor, the upgrade
process will erase any configuration in the monitor.
3. Under the Utilities menu option select Upgrade Firmware.
45
Maintenance
4. Select the monitor to be updated and click on the OK button.

5. Select the file and click on the Open button when the software requests that
you download the file. The software will now download the file.
6. Download the configuration to the monitor after the firmware upgrade is
complete. If the process fails, depending on the failure mode, the module
may revert to its old firmware. See section 6.2 LED for an explanation of the
failure mode. Under no circumstances should the module be removed until it
has finished the process.
46
6.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor or the I/O module by using the information provided by the
self-test, the LEDs, System Event List, and the Alarm Event List.
6.1 Self-test
Application Alert
Machinery protection will be lost while self-test
is being performed.
To perform the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor self-test:
1. Connect the Rack Configuration Software computer to the 3500 rack (if
needed).
5. Select the slot that contains the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor and press
the OK button. The monitor will perform a full self-test and the System
Events screen will be displayed. The list will not contain the results of the
self-test.
to include the results of the self-test.
8. Verify if the monitor passed the self-test. If the monitor failed the self-test,
refer to Section 6.3.System Event List Messages for a description of the
failure.
47
Troubleshooting
6.2 LED Indication of Monitor Status

problems.
OK
1 Hz
TX/RX
BYPASS
Reconfigure the Monitor

or exit Configuration or
Calibration Mode.
Monitor error

List for severity.
Monitor is operating
correctly.
No action required.

correctly or the transducer
has faulted and has
stopped providing a valid
signal.

List and the Alarm Event
List.
The monitor was not OK

in the past and has now
returned to an OK state.
The not OK state was
caused by the monitor not
operating correctly or by a
transducer fault.
Press the Reset button

on the Rack Interface
Module. Check the
System Event List.

correctly.
Monitor is not executing

alarming functions.
Replace immediately.
OFF
Alarming Enabled
No action required.
ON

Disabled.
No action required.
Flashing
OFF
Action
Monitor is not configured,

is in Configuration Mode,
or in Calibration Mode.
1 Hz
5 Hz
ON
Scenario
ON
OFF
Not
Flashing
= Behavior of the LED is not related to the condition.
Table 8-1 LED Indication of Monitor Status
48
Troubleshooting

The Rack Interface Module will record system and alarm events from each
monitor. This section describes the System Event List Messages that are entered
by the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor.
Example:
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
Event
Date
DDMMYY
Event
Time
0000000123
Device Not
Communicating
32
02/01/90
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Slot
5L
Table 8-2 Sample System Event

Sequence Number
A number assigned by the Rack Interface Module designating the order the event was
received
Event Information
The name of the event
Event Number
Use this Number to investigate the significance of the event when using this Manual or
Bently Nevada personnel
Class
The severity of the event
Class Value
Classification
0
1
2
3
Severe/Fatal Event
Reserved
Table 8-3 System Event Class Value Descriptions

Event Date
Event Time
The date and time the event occurred, using the time as configured in the Rack Interface
Module
Event Specific
Provides additional information. For example, if the event affects a single channel the
channel number will be noted here.
Slot
Indicates the module that the event is associated with, 0-15. If half-height module are
installed events for the module in the lower slot will be logged as 0L to 15L.
The following System Event List Messages may be placed in the list by the 16
Channel Temperature Monitor and are listed in numerical order. Contact the
nearest Bently Nevada office to help solve any problem.
If an event marked with a star (*) occurs, the monitor will stop alarming
49
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
Events marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the
monitor will stop alarming if this event occurs.
All unexpected instances of these events
should be investigated immediately.
*Flash Memory Failure
Event Number: 11
Action:
*EEPROM Memory Failure

Event Number: 13
Event Classification: Potential Problem or Severe/Fatal Event
Action:
*Device Not Communicating

Event Number: 32
Action:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
Event Number: 33
Action:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
*Neuron Failure
Event Number: 34
Action:
*I/O Module Mismatch

Event Number: 62
50
Troubleshooting
Action:
Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches what was selected in the
software. If the correct I/O module is installed, there may be a fault with the Monitor Module
or the Monitor I/O module.

Event Number: 63
Action:
Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches what was selected in the
software. If the correct I/O module is installed, there may be a fault with the Monitor Module
or the Monitor I/O module.
Fail Main Board +5V-A (Fail Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 100
Action:
Problem may be caused by power fluctuations from the source. If power
source is known to be working properly check the following:
Monitor Module
Power Supply installed in the upper slot
Pass Main Board +5V-A (Pass Main Board +5V - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 101
Action:
Monitor Module
Fail Main Board +5V-B (Fail Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 102
Action:
Monitor Module
Power Supply installed in the lower slot
Pass Main Board +5V-B (Pass Main Board +5V - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 103
Action:
Monitor Module
51
Troubleshooting
*Fail Main Board +5V-AB (Fail Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 104
Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board +5V-AB (Pass Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 105
Action:
Monitor Module
*Fail Main Board +5VA-AB (Fail Main Board Analog +5V - upper and lower
Power Supplies)
Event Number: 122
Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board +5VA-AB (Pass Main Board Analog +5V - upper and lower
Power Supplies)
Event Number: 123
Action:
Monitor Module
52
Troubleshooting
*Fail Main Board -5V-AB (Fail Main Board -5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 128
Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -5V-AB (Pass Main Board -5V - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 129
Action:
Monitor Module
Fail Main Board +VA-A
(Fail Main Board +VA - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 130

Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board +VA-A
(Pass Main Board +VA - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 131

Action:
Monitor Module
Fail Main Board +VA-B
(Fail Main Board +VA - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 132

Action:
Monitor Module
53
Troubleshooting
Pass Main Board +VA-B
(Pass Main Board +VA - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 133

Action:
Monitor Module
*Fail Main Board +VA-AB (Fail Main Board +VA - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 134
Action:
Monitor Module
I/O Module
Pass Main Board +VA-AB (Pass Main Board +VA - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 135
Action:
Monitor Module
I/O Module
Fail Main Board -VA-A
(Fail Main Board -VA - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 136

Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -VA-A
(Pass Main Board -VA - upper Power Supply)
Event Number: 137
54
Troubleshooting

Action:
Monitor Module
Fail Main Board -VA-B
(Fail Main Board -VA - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 138

Action:
Monitor Module
Pass Main Board -VA-B
(Pass Main Board -VA - lower Power Supply)
Event Number: 139

Action:
Monitor Module
*Fail Main Board -VA-AB (Fail Main Board -VA - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 140
Action:
Monitor Module
I/O Module
Pass Main Board -VA-AB (Pass Main Board -VA - upper and lower Power
Supplies)
Event Number: 141
Action:
Monitor Module
I/O Module
55
Troubleshooting
Device Configured
Event Number: 300
Action:
No action required.
*Configuration Failure
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Monitor Module. If the problem still
exists, replace the Monitor Module immediately.
* Module Entered Cfg Mode (Module Entered Configuration Mode)

Event Number: 302
Action:
No action required.

Event Number: 305
Action: Download the software switches to the Monitor Module. If the software switches are
not correct, replace the Monitor Module as soon as possible.
Monitor TMR PPL Failed (Monitor TMR Proportional Value Failed)

Event Number: 310
Action:
Verify that the transducer is properly installed. If the transducer is properly
Transducer
I/O Module
Monitor Module
Monitor TMR PPL Passed (Monitor TMR Proportional Value Passed)

Event Number: 311
Action:
Verify that the transducer is properly installed. If the transducer is properly
Transducer
I/O Module
Monitor Module
*Module Reboot
56
Troubleshooting
Event Number: 320

Action:
Module.
Verify the Module reboot was intentionally caused. If not replace the Monitor
*Module Removed from Rack

Event Number: 325
Action:
No action required.

Event Number: 326
Action:
No action required.
*Device Events Lost

Event Number: 355
Action:
This means the 3500 Rack Interface Module was not able to log one or more
events from the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor. The cause of the loss of events should
be determined. Troubleshoot the proceeding events in the list to determine if any of the
missed events are severe. Possible Causes:
Rack Interface Module was removed or in a Not OK state when events occurred.
A change in the monitor status caused multiple events to be generated at such a

rate that not all could be logged.
Module Alarms Lost

Event Number: 356
Action:
This means the 3500 Rack Interface Module was not able to log one or more
events from the 16 Channel Temperature Monitor. The cause of the loss of events should
be determined to determine if any of the missed events are severe. Possible Causes:
Rack Interface Module was removed or in a Not OK state when events occurred.
A change in the monitor status caused multiple events to be generated at such a

rate that not all could be logged.

Event Number: 410
Action:
No action required.
*Enabled Ch Bypass (Enabled Channel Bypass)

Event Number: 416
57
Troubleshooting

Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.
Disabled Ch Bypass (Disabled Channel Bypass)

Event Number: 417
Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.
*Enabled Alert Bypass

Event Number: 420
Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.

Event Number: 421
Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.
*Enabled Danger Bypass

Event Number: 422
Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.

Event Number: 423
Event Specific:
Action:
Ch x
No action required.
*Enabled Monitor Alarm Bypass

Event Number: 426
58
Action:
Troubleshooting
No action required.
Disabled Monitor Alarm Bypass

Event Number: 427
Action:
No action required.
* Fail Slot Id Test

Event Number: 461
Action:
Verify that the Monitor Module is fully inserted in the rack. If the Monitor
Module is installed correctly, check to see if one of the following components is faulty:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
Pass Slot Id Test

Event Number: 462
Action:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
*Fail Comm Id Mismatch

Event Number: 463
Action:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
Pass Comm Id Mismatch

Event Number: 464
Action:
Monitor Module
Rack backplane
Setpoint Updated
59
Troubleshooting
Event Number: 511

Action:
No action required.
*I/O Module Removed

Event Number: 550
Action:
Re-install I/O Module.
*Possible Open Transducer

Event Number: 551
Action:
A possible open in the signal path between the transducer and where the
signal is conditioned. The possible location for the open may be:
Field Wiring
I/O Module
Monitor Module.
*Possible Transducer Wiring Fault

Event Number: 552
Action:
A possible open or short in the signal path between the transducer and
where the signal is conditioned. The possible location for the open or short may be:
Field Wiring
I/O Module
Monitor Module.
*I/O Calibration Failure

Event Number: 560
Action:
Replace the I/O Module as soon as possible.
* ADC Calibration Failure

Event Number: 561
Action:
Replace the Monitor Module Immediately.
60
Troubleshooting
* ADC Failure
Event Number: 562
Action:
* Fail CJC (Cold Junction Compensation) Temperature

Event Number: 563
Action:
All TC measurements will be in error and monitoring for channels using
thermocouples will be disabled. RTD measurements are unaffected. Check to see if one of
the following components is faulty:
I/O module (Internal Termination)
ET module (External Termination)
Main Module
Pass CJC (Cold Junction Compensation) Temperature

Event Number: 564
Action:
The CJC sensor failed in the past and has now recovered. All thermocouple
measurements were in error and monitoring for channels using thermocouples was
disabled for a period of time. RTD measurements were unaffected. Check to see if one of
the following components is faulty:
I/O module (If Internal Termination is used)
ET module (If external Termination is used)
Main Module
*Fail Rack Ambient Temperature

Event Number: 565
Action:
The ambient temperature of the rack is outside the operating temperature for the system
(normal operating temperature is: -30 to 65 C). Recommend running self-test on all
modules in the rack. Implement corrective action to insure the rated temperature of the rack
is no longer exceeded.
Passed Rack Ambient Rack Temperature

Event Number: 566
Action:
The ambient temperature of the rack has returned to an acceptable level, but was outside
the normal operating temperature in the past. Recommend running self test on all modules
61
Troubleshooting
in the rack. Implement corrective action to insure the rated temperature of the rack is no
longer exceeded.

The following Alarm Event List Messages are returned by the 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor.
A proportional value in the channel has entered Alert /

Alarm 1 and changed the channel Alert / Alarm 1
status.
A proportional value in the channel has left Alert / Alarm

1 and changed the channel Alert / Alarm 1 status.
A proportional value in the channel has entered Danger

/ Alarm 2 and changed the channel Danger / Alarm 2
status.
A proportional value in the channel has left Danger /

Alarm 2 and changed the channel Danger / Alarm 2
status.
Entered not OK
The channel went not OK.
Left not OK
The channel returned to the OK state.
Table 8-4 Alarm Event Message
6.5 Advanced Diagnostics

If you examine a number of events together, you can obtain a better picture of
the reason for the fault. The following list contains recommended action for the
following scenarios.
Note
Although the recommendations in this section provide the most probable solutions,
other faults may exist. When troubleshooting a 16 Channel Temperature Monitor,
carefully review all possible problems.
All Active Transducers are not OK

Action:
62
Troubleshooting
Replace the temperature module.

- or If the external termination I/O module is being used, check the cables between the I/O
monitor and the External Termination Block.
Four Adjacent Channels are not OK (Internal Termination IO Module)

Details:
Adjacent channels are defined as 1-4, 5-8, 9-12, or 13-16. This scenario applies only to I/O
modules with internal termination.
Action:
Check that the black connector is correctly installed into the I/O module.
Eight Adjacent Channels are not OK (External Termination IO Module)

Details:
Adjacent channels are defined as 1 thru 8 or 9 thru 16. This scenario applies only to I/O
modules with external termination.
Action:
Check that the 37 pin cables are correctly installed into the I/O module.
One of the Following Events Occur After Installing a Module in the Rack
Events:
Transducer Not OK (Wiring Shorted)
Transducer Not OK (Wiring Open)
Action:
Check the backplane for a bent or otherwise damaged pin.
The display shows excessive noise on the input signal

Action:
Check to make sure that there are no ground loops. A ground loop is when the transducer
is grounded at the sensor, and either a non-isolated I/O module is used or an isolated I/O
module is grounded at the rack.
63
7.
Note
Existing 3500 systems require he following minimum firmware and software versions
are to add the 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor . Where 2 versions are
nd
listed, the first is for minimum functionality. The 2 is the minimum version that
supports complete functionality as described in this manual.
3500/20 RIM Firmware Version 2.02
3500/01 Software - Version 3.85
System1 - Revision 5.2 with Service Pack 2
*Note: Attempting to use this software with the /65 may prevent proper operation of
the software.
7.1 Ordering Options 3500/65

Part number 3500/65- A - B
A
I/O Module Type
01
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (Internal Terminations)
02
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (External Terminations)
B
00
01

None
CSA-NRTL/C
7.2 Ordering Options - Cables

7.2.1 Transducer Signal to External Termination Block Cable
Part number 134544 -A -B
A
0005
0007
0010
0025
0050
0100
Cable Length
5 feet (1.5 metres)
7 feet (2.1 metres)
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
64
B
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
7.3 Spares 3500/65 16 Channel Temperature

Monitor
145988-02
172103-01
*172109-01
*172115-01
172931-01
3500/65 16 Channel Temperature Monitor

RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, internal termination)
RTD/Isolated Tip TC Temperature I/O Module (3500/65, external termination)
External Termination Block (Euro style connectors)
Operation and Maintenance Manual (this document)
*Note
When ordering I/O modules with External Terminations, the External Termination
Blocks and Cables must be ordered separately.
External Termination Blocks cannot be used with Internal Termination I/O Modules.
65
8.
Specifications
Specifications
INPUTS
Signal
Accepts any combination of 1 to 16 resistance

temperature detectors (RTD) or Isolated Tip
Thermocouples (TC)
Input Impedance
Power Consumption (3500/65)
1 M min
3.0 watts (typical)
OUTPUTS
OK LED
TX/RX LED
Bypass LED
RTD Current Source
Proportional Values
RESOLUTION
Sensor Input
Indicates when the 3500/65 is operating properly.

Indicates when the 3500/65 is communicating with other
modules in the 3500 rack.
Indicates when an alarming function has been disabled
either by the user or by a fault condition
912 25 A @ 25C (single supply for each 4-wire RTD
dual supply for each 3-wire RTD)
Up to 2 active per channel, Options are Direct,
Composite (Group Average) and Differential.
24 bit raw data, Averaged and filtered to 16 bit
ACCURACY
Specified at +25 C (77 F)
RTD Input
Thermocouple Input
Sensor Error (10 ohm Cu RTD)
Sensor Error (other RTDs)
Sensor Error (Thermocouple)
Total error = Sensor error + Monitor error.

Total error = Sensor error + Monitor error + CJC error.
3C without barriers, external barriers depends on model
Negligible without barriers, external barriers depends on
model
Follow this table to keep sensor error below 1 deg C
TC
100 ft
500 ft
1000 ft
20 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
20 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
20 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
20 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
Table 10-1 Maximum Thermocouple Wire Length by Gauge

Monitor error
+/-1 C
CJC Error
+/-2 C
67
Specifications
Composite
Total error = Average error of all Direct Proportional

Values used to create the Composite reading.
Differential
Total error = Difference of the Direct Proportional Value

error and the Composite Proportional Value error of a
channel.
ALARMS
Alarm Setpoints
Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 levels (setpoints) can be set for the

proportional values measured by the 16 Channel
Temperature Monitor. All alarm setpoints are set using
software configuration. Alarms are adjustable from 0 to
100% of full-scale for each proportional value.
Alarm time Delays
Alarm delays can be programmed using software, and

can be set as follows
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
From 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second intervals

From 1 to 60 seconds in 0.5 second intervals or to the
minimum alarm time delay of 0.225 Seconds.
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
-30 C to 65 C (-22 F to 149 F)

-40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F)
95% non-condensing
Note: The 3500 Monitoring System conforms to the specifications listed below.
The specific test setup, test levels, and pass criteria (monitor accuracy) for these
tests are defined in the 3500 Technical Construction File. For copies of this file,
contact your local Bently Nevada office.
EN61000:
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-6
Emission Testing
IEC60533
LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
Safety Requirements
EN 61010-01
HAZARDOUS APPROVALS
CSA-NRTL/C

68
Specifications
ZONE 2 ENTITY PARAMETERS

TC input, Pin B
TC input, Pin C
Voc = 0.43V, Isc = 5.2mA

Voc = 0.86V, Isc = 10.4mA
3-Wire RTD, Pin B

3-Wire RTD, Pin C
Voc = 0.51V, Isc = 6.1mA

Voc = 0.94V, Isc = 11.3mA
4-Wire RTD, Pin A

4-Wire RTD, Pin B
3-Wire RTD, Pin C
Voc = 0.091V, Isc = 0.91mA

Voc = 0.43V, Isc = 5.2mA
Voc = 0.86V, Isc = 10.4mA
PHYSICAL
Main Board
Dimensions
Weight
I/O Modules
Dimensions
Weight
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 241.8 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52 in)
0.82 kg (1.8 lbs)
241.3 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
0.20 kg (0.44 lbs)

Main Board
I/O Modules
69

Revision H, January 2006
3500/92
COMMUNICATION
MODULE
MANUAL
3500/92 COMMUNICATION MODULE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bently Nevada, LLC 2001

Data Subject to Change Without Notice
All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into
any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner,
Bently Nevada, LLC

Telephone (800) 227-5514 or (775) 782-3611
Fax (775) 782-9259
Copyright infringement is a serious matter under
the United States of America and foreign copyright laws.
Keyphasor and Proximitor are registered trademarks
ii
Notice:
This manual does not contain all the information required to operate and maintain the
3500/92 COMMUNICATION MODULE. Refer to the Following manuals for other
required information.
3500 Monitoring system Computer Hardware and Software Manual (128158-01)
iii
Contents
1.
Receiving and Handling Instructions ........................................1

1.1 Receiving Inspection .........................................................................................1
1.2 Handling and Storing Considerations ................................................................1
1.3 Disposal Statement ...........................................................................................1
2.
General Information ....................................................................2

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.
Configuration Information ..........................................................8

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.
Communications from 3500/92 to 3500 Configuration Software ........................3

Communications from 3500/92 to 3500 Data Acquisition Software....................4
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) Description....................................................5
Module and Channel Statuses...........................................................................5
LED Descriptions...............................................................................................7
Hardware Considerations ..................................................................................8

Setting Communication Parameters ..................................................................9
Configurable Modbus Registers.......................................................................13
Setting Software Switches ...............................................................................15
I/O Module Description .............................................................17

4.1 Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Description...................................................17
4.1.1 General Response Time...................................................................18
4.1.2 Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to the Host
(Display or Host Computer) via RS-232 .......................................................18
4.1.3 Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to the Honeywell
PLCG via RS-232 ........................................................................................19
4.1.4 Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to a Host (Display
or Host Computer) via RS-422 .....................................................................20
4.1.5 Daisy Chaining Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Ports via RS-422..21
4.1.6 Additional Information for Connecting an RS-232 I/O Module to a
Host Computer in an Intrinsically Safe Application .......................................22
4.2 Modbus RS-485 I/O Module Description..........................................................23
4.2.1 General Response Time...................................................................24
4.2.2 Four-Wire Connections....................................................................24
4.2.3 Two-Wire Connections .....................................................................25
4.2.4 Termination ......................................................................................25
4.3 Ethernet/RS-232 I/O ........................................................................................27
4.3.1 Ethernet - port 1 ...............................................................................28
4.3.2 RS-232 - port 2.................................................................................28
4.4 Ethernet/RS-485 I/O ........................................................................................29
4.4.1 Ethernet port 1 ..............................................................................30
4.4.2 RS-485 port 2................................................................................30
4.5 Cable Pin Outs ................................................................................................31
5.
Protocols ...................................................................................35
5.1 Modbus ...........................................................................................................35
5.1.1 General Information..........................................................................35
5.1.2 Supported Function Codes...............................................................35
iv
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
6.
DCS and Modbus Addressing Notation............................................ 36

General Register Layout .................................................................. 37
Data Type Details ............................................................................ 38
Configurable Registers .................................................................... 61
Scaling the Data .............................................................................. 61
Modbus Language Description ........................................................ 63
Maintenance .............................................................................. 87
6.1 Comm Gateway Port Test Utility ..................................................................... 87
6.2 Performing Firmware Upgrades ...................................................................... 87
6.2.1 Installation Procedure ...................................................................... 87
7.
Troubleshooting........................................................................ 91
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Self-test .......................................................................................................... 91
LED Fault Conditions ...................................................................................... 92
System Event List Messages .......................................................................... 92
Alarm Event List Messages............................................................................. 98
8.
Ordering Information ................................................................ 99
9.
Specifications.......................................................................... 103
vi
Section 1 Receiving and Handling Instructions
1.
1.1

apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada.
1.2

order given.
Application Alert
Communication with the external
device (DCS, PLC, remote display,
etc) will be lost when this module
is removed from the rack.
1.3

Disposal Statement
States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada is not
responsible for disposal of product at the end of its life or at the end of its use.
2.
General Information
The Communication Gateway Module provides serial communications
between the 3500 Monitor System and a plant information system such as a
distributed control system (DCS) or a programmable logic controller (PLC).
The Communication Gateway Module collects static data from the modules in
the rack over a high-speed internal network and sends this data to the
information system upon request.
The Communication Gateway is able to communicate via Ethernet with up to
six hosts. Hosts can be Modbus protocol based or computers with 3500
Rack Configuration and Data Acquisition software. Only one Comm Gateway
module per 3500 rack can be configured to accept Rack Configuration or
Data Acquisition hosts.
Front View
Rear View
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Status LEDs, refer to Section 2.5

Comm Gateway Module
RS485 I/O Module
RS232/422 I/O Module
Ethernet/RS232 I/O Module
Ethernet/RS485 I/O Module
Refer to Section 4 for all I/O Module information.
Section 2 General Information
The Communication Gateway Module can support a variety of protocols by using

a different I/O module for each protocol. The module also lets you optimize the
communications with external devices using the 3500 Rack Configuration
Software to assign the most important data to contiguous registers in the module.
The main part of this manual contains information about the LED states, the
module and channel statuses, and detailed configuration information for the
Communication Gateway Module. The appendices contain information about
using the different protocols to retrieve data from the rack.
2.1
Communications from 3500/92 to 3500

Configuration Software
After the 3500/92 has been properly configured, you can configure an entire
3500 rack through the Ethernet link on the 3500/92. This link provides broader
access than the serial port on the RIM. Establish this link by selecting connect
in the file pull down menu and then the network option.
Connect Password
Connect Password is the same password used for direct communications via the
RIM. This Password is set in the RIM configuration.
Connect
This button selects the device listed in the Network Device Name field. Upon
entering this screen, the previous device will be named. Simply click on connect
3
and connection to this device will be established. If this is not the device desired,
select browse, highlight the desired device, and click on connect; or, select
browse and double click on the desired device.
Browse
This button searches for 3500 racks on the local network (within the same
subnet).
Advanced
Settings that will assist in establishing network communications. Set these
parameters with the help of a network administrator.
2.2
Communications from 3500/92 to 3500 Data

Acquisition Software
To establish a link between a 3500/92 and 3500 Data Acquisition software:
1) Select Setup in the Data Acquistion Software. The following screen will
appear.
2) In the Connection Parameters tab, select the network connection type.

3) In the Rack Addresses and Passwords tab, select the appropriate rack
address.
If no rack address appears in the Rack Addresses and Passwords, you can
Browse the network and assign a networked rack to a rack address. If Browse
doesnt work than use the Advanced button and contact a network administrator
for assistance.
4
2.3

The Communication Gateway is considered a "Consumer" of data because it
receives data from other modules, formats it, and sends it on to an external
device. Since the module does not produce data or provide data to other
modules in the 3500 rack, redundant Communication Gateway Modules with
voting options are not required. For applications that require redundant
communication links, two or more Communication Gateway Modules can operate
in parallel in the same rack, provided that only one module is configured to allow
the "Bently Centurion Protocol" (see section 3.2). This configuration can be used
in both standard and TMR rack types.
2.4
Module and Channel Statuses

The Communication Gateway Module returns both module and channel statuses.
This section describes the available statuses and where they can be found.
Module Status
OK
Indicates if the Communication Gateway is functioning correctly. A not OK status
is returned under any of the following conditions:
Slot ID Failure
If the Module OK status goes not OK, the system OK Relay on the Rack
Configuration Fault
Indicates if the Communication Gateway Module configuration is invalid.
Bypass
Indicates whether the Communication Gateway Monitor is communicating. An
active module bypass may be caused by the following events:
The Communication Gateway Module has detected a serious internal fault.
The Bypass switch has been set for a channel in the Communication Gateway
Module.
Channel Status
OK
Indicates if the associated Communication Gateway Module communication port
has detected some internal fault. If the Communication Gateway Module goes
not OK, then all the channels are not OK.
Bypass
Indicates if the associated Communication Gateway Module communication port
has been bypassed. Channel Bypass can result from an internal fault or switch
setting and causes the Communication Gateway port to stop communicating.
5
Off
Indicates that the associated Communication Gateway Module communication
port has been turned off. The Communication Gateway Module communication
ports may be turned off (inactivated) in the Rack Configuration Software.
Statuses
Module OK
Communication
Gateway
Module
X
Rack
Configuration
Software
X
Module Bypass
Channel OK
Channel Bypass
Channel Off
Operator
Display
Software
2.5
LED Descriptions
The LEDs on the front panel of the Communication Gateway Module indicate the
7.2 for all the available LED conditions.
1) OK
Indicates that the Communication Gateway Module and the I/O
module are operating correctly
2) TX/RX
Flashes at the rate that messages are received from other 3500
modules.
3.
Configure a Communication Gateway Module by using the 3500 Rack
Configuration Software to complete the following tasks:
3.1
Set the communication parameters for the ports on the Communication

Gateway I/O Module.
Assign data from rack modules to reserved addresses (Configurable Modbus

Registers) in the Communication Gateway Module.
Set software switches.
The slots in the rack are numbered from 0 to 15, counting from left to right. The
power supplies go into slot 0 and the Rack Interface module goes into slot 1.
Slots 2 through 15 are called monitoring positions. The 3500/92 module can be
installed into any of the monitoring positions. However, if the 3500/20 Rack
Interface Module and Data Manager I/O are to be used to interface to DDIX,
TDIX, or TDXnet, refer to the manual on the 3500/20 for slot restrictions this may
place on your configuration.
Section 3 Configuration Information
3.2
Setting Communication Parameters

The Modbus Protocol Setup screen lets you set the communication parameters
for the HOST and RACK connectors on the Communication Gateway I/O
Module.
Slot
The location of the Communication Gateway Module in the 3500 rack.
Protocol
Selects which I/O card is being used. The I/O cards are ordered as an option to
the 3500/92.
Option
-01
-02
-03
-04
Protocol
Port 1
Modbus RS-232/422
Modbus RS-485
Ethernet TCP/IP
Ethernet TCP/IP
Port2
Modbus RS-232/422
Modbus RS-485
Modbus RS-232
Modbus RS-485
The Ethernet TCP/IP option allows for both Modbus and Bently Nevada 3500
software protocol. These protocols can run simultaneously on the same port.
Configurable Modbus Registers
This links into the dialog box that configures the programmable modbus
registers. Configurable Modbus Registers are programmed for both ports
together.
Active
Turns the Communication Port on () or off (). The port must be on to
respond to commands sent by the DCS.
Address
The address used by the Communication Protocol to talk to the Communication
Port. If the Communication Gateway Ports are daisy chained, all the ports in the
chain must have a unique address. The range of addresses is 1 to 255.
Connection
Direct is the only option available for the Modbus protocol.
Word Swapped
Switches the first sixteen bits of a 32-bit number with the last sixteen bits. This
switching applies only to the Modbus data that requires two registers. This
flexibility has been added to accommodate different number formats.
Config Allowed
Enables a Modbus user to change Monitor Setpoints, Rack Trip Multiply, Rack
Alarm Inhibit, software switches, Rack Reset, and Rack Date and Time.
Communication
Parity
Used for error checking.
None
No parity error checking is used.
Odd
Each word has an odd number of 1 bits.
10
Even
Each word has an even number of 1 bits.
Baud Rate
Rate of communication between the Communication Gateway Module and the
DCS. The available values are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2, and 38.4 kbaud
Stop Bits
Signifies the end of the character. One or two bits can be used.
Byte Timeout
The number of byte periods, which the communication line must be idle before a
communication, is considered complete. One byte period is a function of the
baud rate selected. The available values are 3, 10, 25, or 50 bytes.
Full Scale Data Range
A value between 1 and 65535 that is the maximum value in the full-scale range.
The Current Proportional Values and the Primary Values will be scaled between
0 and the selected value.
For example: If the Full Scale Data Range field is set to 4096, then the Current
Proportional Values and the Primary Values will be scaled between 0 and 4096.
Numeric Format
Hex
Base 16 numbering system used by the Modbus protocol to receive and transmit
values.
11
Network Device Name

Name assigned to the 3500/92. This name is often used to uniquely identify a
3500 rack on a network.
Rack IP Address
IP (Internet Protocol) Address is the unique address for an Ethernet network
device. The address is a string of 4 numbers each from 0 to 255. For networks
managed through an Information Systems department, consult the network
administrator for a valid IP address. Note that addresses 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255 are not valid.
Rack Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask identifies which bits of the IP address are address bits for the
physical network. Typically, the Subnet Mask is the same for the LAN (local area
network); however, consult the network administrator for valid settings.
Available Services
Different communication protocols available with the 3500/92. Ethernet networks
allow multiple protocols running at the same time.
Bently Centurion Protocol
Protocol used to communicate between the 3500/92 and a computer running
3500 Configuration and 3500 Data Acquisition software. If multiple 3500/92s
12
are present in a 3500 rack, only one may have Bently Centurion Protocol
enabled.
Modbus over Ethernet
Modbus Application Protocol communicates on Ethernet networks between
3500/92 and PLCs, DCSs, and MMIs also running TCP/IP.
3.3
Configurable Modbus Registers

Configurable Modbus Registers is a reserved area of the modbus register map
that consists of 500 registers starting at address 45000. These registers let you
assign important proportional values, statuses, and setpoints to consecutive
registers so that the communication with the 3500 rack is more efficient and the
need for supporting hardware is reduced.
Use the ComGateway92 Configuration screen to assign values to these
registers.
Assign values to registers by either double-clicking or by dragging and dropping.

As you assign values to registers, keep the following guidelines in mind:
To assign all values from a monitor to a set of consecutive registers, double-click
on the monitor or drag and drop the monitor to the appropriate starting register in
the REGISTERS | DATA box.
13
To assign specific values to a register, use the tree in the Monitor Options box.
Dragging and dropping a folder assigns all the data underneath the folder. To
maximize flexibility, folders have been arranged by specific register types,
channels, and a combination of both.
To control how data is assigned to registers, use Fixed or Moveable in the Mode
box. Fixed places the register or block of registers in the selected address and
overwrites any existing data in registers below the selected address. Moveable
places the register or block of registers in the selected address and moves any
existing registers down. Registers over the end of the 500 block will be lost.
Mode
Fixed
Places the register or block of registers from address selected and below, and will
overwrite existing registers.
Moveable
Places the register or block of registers from the address selected and will move the
existing registers down. Registers over the end of the 500 block will be lost.
Floating Point
Selects the data type that is being displayed either scaled integer or floating point. Both
data types are always available but at different addresses within the memory map. The
memory map for integer registers ranges from 45000 to 45499, and the floating point
registers range from 46000 to 46999. Floating point numbers can be read directly without
any scaling conversions; however, they are represented in two registers and take up twice
the memory space.
Print
Four functions are available with the printing features
of the 3500/92 configuration screens. These
functions are selected through the pop up menu
activated by moving the mouse cursor over the print
button. The print button within the pop up menu will
then execute the selected option.
Modbus Registers
To Screen
This prints the Modbus Register Map to WordPad for editing or document
formatting purposes. Saving this to a file after editing is completed within
WordPad.
To Printer
Simply prints the Modbus Register Map to a printer.
Modbus Cfg file
This feature activates a Save dialog box which will save rack configuration data
to a file. This aids in the configuration of PLCs, DCSs, and/or MMIs.
14
Print Form
Prints the active configuration screen to a printer.
3.4
Setting Software Switches

The Communication Gateway Module supports two software switches that let
you temporarily bypass the module and channel functions. Set these switches
on the Software Switches screen under the Utilities Option on the main screen
of the Rack Configuration Software.

Module Switches
Configuration Mode
A switch that allows the Communication Gateway Module to be configured.
To configure the module, enable () this switch and set the key switch on
the front of the Rack Interface Module in the PROGRAM position. When
downloading a configuration from the Rack Configuration Software, this
switch will automatically be enabled and disabled by the Rack Configuration
Software. If the connection to the rack is lost during the configuration
15
The module switch number is used in the Communication Gateway Module.

Switch Name
Configuration Mode
Channel Switches
Bypass
Turn the associated Communication Port on the Communication Gateway I/O
Module (Modbus) on () or off ().
The channel switch number is used in the Communication Gateway Module.
16
Switch Name
Bypass
Section 4 I/O Module Description
4.

This section describes the Communication Gateway Modbus RS-232/422,
Modbus RS-485, Ethernet RS-232, and Ethernet RS-485 I/O Modules. It also
contains the information needed to use the Communication Gateway I/O
Modules and a distributed control system (DCS), display, or host computer to
communicate with a 3500 rack using the Modicon Modbus protocol.
4.1
Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Description

The Communication Gateway Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module is used with a
DCS, display, or host computer to collect data from a 3500 rack and change
setpoints or switches using the Modicon Modbus protocol. The Communication
Gateway I/O Module must be installed behind the Communication Gateway
Module (in a Rack Mount or a Panel Mount rack) or above the Communication
Gateway Module (in a Bulkhead rack).
1) These connectors are used to connect Ports 1

and 2 of the Communication Gateway Modbus
RS-232/422 I/O Module to the host (DCS,
display, or host computer). This connection can
be RS-232 or RS-422. Refer to Sections 4.1.2,
4.1.3, 4.1.4.
2) These connectors are used to connect this
Communication Gateway Modbus RS-232/422
I/O Module to the next Communication Gateway
Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module in the chain.
Only RS-422 can be used for this connection.
Refer to Section 4.1.5.
17
4.1.1
General Response Time

The Communication Gateway Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module has a general
response time of less than 0.5 seconds with a 3 byte time out.
4.1.2
Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to the

Host (Display or Host Computer) via RS-232
The communication rate is limited by the baud rate selected between the host
(display or host computer) and the first Communication Gateway Modbus RS232/422 I/O Module port.
1) Cable 130419-XXXX-XX is available in various lengths up to 30 meters (100 ft).

Refer to Section 8 for the specific options.
18
4.1.3
Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to the

Honeywell PLCG via RS-232
The communication rate is limited by the baud rate selected between the
Honeywell PLCG and the first Communication Gateway Modbus RS-232/422 I/O
Module port.
1) Cable 130420-XXX-XX is available in various lengths up to 30 meters

(100 ft). Refer to Section 8 for the specific options.
19
4.1.4
Connecting a Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Port to a

Host (Display or Host Computer) via RS-422
The baud rate selected between the host (display or host computer) and the first
Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) port limit the communication rate.
1) For lengths of 150 meters (500 ft) or less, use
cable 130530-XXXX-XX (PVC insulation) or
cable 131109-XXXX-XX (Teflon insulation).
For lengths greater than 150 meters (500 ft), use
one cable 130530-XXXX-XX (PVC insulation) or
cable 131109-XXXX-XX (Teflon insulation) along
with as many RS-422 extension cables 130531-XXXX (150 meters (500 ft) standard length) to create a
cable up to the maximum 1220 meters (4000 ft).
2) RS-232/422 Converter.
For 110 VAC use part number 02230411. For 220
VAC use part number 02230412. A converter is not
necessary if the host computer is equipped with an
RS422 port.
3) Cable 130119-01 is available in a 3 meter (10 ft)
length.
4) Display or host computer
Refer to Section 8 for the specific options of the

cables listed above.
20
4.1.5
Daisy Chaining Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module Ports via

RS-422
This section shows how to daisy chain Communication Gateway Modbus RS232/422 I/O Module ports together.
To host (see
Sections
4.1.2, 4.1.3,
4.1.4).
Take note of the following items when daisy chaining Communication Gateway
Modbus RS-232/422 I/O Module ports:
Use the HOST port to connect to the DCS, display or host computer, or the
rack in the daisy chain that is closer to the host.
Use the RACK port to connect to the rack that is farther from the host.
Use the following cables for the connection between the racks in the daisy
chain:
-
For lengths of 150 metres (500 ft) or less, use cable 129665-XXXXXX (PVC Insulation) or cable 131108-XXXX-XX (Teflon Insulation).
For lengths greater than 150 metres (500 ft), use one cable 129665XXXX-XX (PVC Insulation) or cable 131108-XXXX-XX (Teflon
Insulation) along with as many RS-422 extension cables 130531-XXXX (150 metres (500 ft) standard length) to create a cable up to 1220
metres (4000 ft).
Refer to Section 8 for the specific options of the cables listed above.
21
4.1.6
Additional Information for Connecting an RS-232 I/O

Module to a Host Computer in an Intrinsically Safe
Application
To avoid ground loops, the system must provide a single point ground. In Intrinsically Safe
applications the 3500 Rack is floated and referenced to an intrinsically safe ground instead
of earth ground. RS-232 communications are referenced to earth ground, and therefore to
keep the rack isolated from earth ground, a serial data isolator must be used. RS-485 uses
an isolated ground and hence no additional isolation is required.
1) Host Computer
2) Cable 130118-XXXX-XX is available in various lengths up to 30
meters (100 ft).
3) Serial Data Isolator P/N 02200633
22
4.2
Modbus RS-485 I/O Module Description

The Communication Gateway Modbus RS-485
I/O Module is used with a DCS, display, or
host computer to collect data from a 3500 rack
and change setpoints or switches using the
Modicon Modbus protocol. The
Communication Gateway I/O Module must be
installed behind the Communication Gateway
Module (in a Rack Mount or a Panel Mount
rack) or above the Communication Gateway
Module (in a Bulkhead rack). The RS-485
interface allows up to 32 devices multidropped on up to 4000 feet of cable.
1) These connectors are used to connect Ports 1 and 2

of the Communication Gateway Modbus RS-485 I/O
Module to the host (DCS, display, or host computer).
2) These connectors are used to connect
Communication Gateway Modbus RS-485 I/O
Modules together. Refer to Section 4.2.2 and the
drawing in Section 4.2.3.
3) These switches are used for RS-485 line termination.
23
4.2.1
General Response Time

The Communication Gateway Modbus RS-485 I/O Module has a general
response time of less than 0.5 seconds with a 3 byte time out.
4.2.2
Four-Wire Connections
When connecting the Modbus RS-485 I/O Module to a host device or to another
I/O module, the connections are made per the diagram below. See the following
table for connector designations.
Signal
GND
TXB
TXA
RXB
RXA
Name
Host Connector
(15 Pin) Pin #
Ground
Transmit Positive
Transmit Negative
Receive Positive
Receive Negative
8
7
15
13
6
Rack Connector
(9 pin) Pin #
5
3
9
4
6
1) Distributed Control System

2) Remote Display or Host Computer
3) Terminate these devices
4) For lengths of 150 metres (500 ft) or less, use cable 129665-XXXXXX (PVC Insulation) or cable 131108-XXXX-XX (Teflon Insulation).
For lengths greater than 150 metres (500 ft), use one cable 129665XXXX-XX (PVC Insulation) or cable 131108-XXXX-XX (Teflon
24
Insulation) along with as many RS-422/RS-485 extension cables

130531-XX-XX (150 metres (500 ft) standard length) to create a total
RS-485 cable run up to 1220 metres (4000 ft).
5) Terminate these devices
4.2.3
Two-Wire Connections
Bently Nevada recommends using 4 wire communications when possible. In
order to use 2 wire communications the devices in the 485 chain must meet the
following conditions:
All devices must automatically tri-state the line
At least one device must have proper biasing to ensure the line remains in a
known state during idle conditions (see section 4.2.4)
The master device in the Modbus chain must have a configurable delay
between the time it receives its response and when it requests data again.
This delay must give sufficient time for every device in the chain to transition
into tri-state mode. 10ms delay is recommended.
If these conditions cannot be met 4 wire must be used to ensure a reliable

connection.
When using the Modbus RS-485 I/O Module in a 2-wire configuration, the wiring
between the host device and the I/O module is shown below.
4.2.4
Termination
Proper termination is critical for reliable communications. Improper termination
can result in a loss of communication. In normal 4 wire applications the last
device of each end of the chain should be terminated. The transmitting pair
should use a standard termination and the receiving pair should use a bias
termination (also called a fail-safe termination or a power termination). Biasing
prevents the appearance of a false bit being received at a device when
communications are idle. In normal 2 wire applications the Modbus master
25
should have a bias termination and the farthest device should have a standard
termination. If the Modbus master does not provide a bias termination another
device in the chain must provide the bias. With long distances or in noisy
environments it may be necessary to provide a bias at additional devices
regardless of termination. The I/O provides 4 switches that allow configuration of
a termination scheme.
1) This switch provides a 120-ohm termination across the transmitting lines

2) This switch provides a 120-ohm termination across the receiving lines
3&4) These switches add bias to the receiving lines and when used with switch 2
provide a bias termination across the receiving lines.
Suggested switch settings (X indicates switch depressed)
Standard 4 Wire
installation
3&4
Standard 2 Wire
installation
2 wire with
master not
providing bias
Unterminated
Unterminated
with biasing
Older RS485 I/O's use a single "Term/Unterm" switch that provides a normal 4 wire
termination. For these older I/O's in a 2 wire installation, use a discrete120 ohm resistor
between RX+ and RX- to terminate; always leave the switch in the "UNTERM" position.
26
4.3
Ethernet/RS-232 I/O
This I/O provides for Ethernet network communications and PLC/DCS network
communications at the same time.
1) Port 1 Ethernet
2) Port 2 RS-232
27
4.3.1
Ethernet - port 1
This port connects to networks running TCP/IP. The connector, RJ45, is a singledrop connector and is standard in most applications. For multi-drop applications a
network hub is required. This port allows for communication to six devices
running either 3500 software or Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP). Cable
number 138131-xxx connects to this port
4.3.2
RS-232 - port 2
RS-232 port is a 9 pin sub D connector. The standard pins are listed below:
Signal
GND
TXD
RXB
Name
Connector (9-pin) Pin #
Ground
Transmit
Receive
5
3
2
Additional pins are provided for the Modbus Master devices with this capability:
Signal
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
CD
Name
Connector (9-pin) Pin #
Ground
Data Transmit Ready
Data Send Ready
Ready To Send
Clear To Send
Carrier Detect
1
4
6
7
8
9
Standard 9 pin RS-232 cabling will work with this port.

For information about using this I/O in an intrinsically safe environment see
section 4.1.6
Note, the RS-232 port is not intended to be connected to a multiple device
network. Instead, the RS-485 with a Y cable is a better solution (see below).
28
4.4
Ethernet/RS-485 I/O
This I/O is used for Ethernet network communications and PLC/DCS network
communications.
1) Port 1 Ethernet
2) Port 2 RS-485
29
4.4.1
Ethernet port 1
This port connects to networks running TCP/IP. The connector, RJ45, is a
single-drop connector and is standard in most applications. For multi-drop
applications a network hub is required. This port allows for communication to six
devices running either 3500 software or Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP).
Cable number 138131-xxx connects to this port
4.4.2
RS-485 port 2
RS-485 port is a 9-pin sub-D connector with the following pin outs
Signal
GND
TXB
TXA
RXB
RXA
Name
Connector (9 pin) Pin #
Ground
Transmit Positive
Transmit Negative
Receive Positive
Receive Negative
5
3
9
4
6
RS485 is preferred for a multiple device network. The multi-drop connection

allows devices on the chain to continue to communicate when other devices are
not operating. A Y connection provides multi-drop capability.
Use cable number 139036-01 for the Y connection.
Cable number 131179-AAAA-BB-CC connects to this port.
See sections 4.2.3 and 4.2.4 for important information regarding installation and
termination for this I/O.
30
4.5 Cable Pin Outs

Cable Number 129665-XXXX-XX (PVC Insulation)
Cable Number 131108-XXXX-XX (Teflon Insulation)
RS-422/RS-485 - 3500/92 to 3500/92 Cable

Cable Number 130119-01
Host Computer to RS-232/422 Converter Cable
31

RS-232 Host Computer to 3500/92 Cable
32

RS-232 Honeywell PLCG to 3500/92 Cable
Cable Number 130530-XXXX-XX (PVC Insulation)

Cable Number 131109-XXXX-XX (Teflon Insulation)
RS-232/422 Converter to 3500/92 Cable RS-422
33
Cable Number 130531-XX-XX

RS-422 Extension Cable - 3500/92
Cable Number 139036-XX-XX

RS-485 Y Cable - 3500/92
34
Section 5 -- Protocols
5.
Protocols
5.1
Modbus
5.1.1
General Information
This section describes the Modbus Interface and shows how it relates to the
Communication Gateway Module. Before you begin programming, use the
following document to become familiar with the basics of the Modbus protocol:
AEG Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide, Publication PI-MBUS-300

Rev E - March 1993
This section does not tell you how to program your DCS computer to access the
Communication Gateway Module nor how to configure the interface database.
You must refer to the DCS computer or controller manuals for this information.
5.1.2
Supported Function Codes

Modbus Function Code
Code

Data
Meaning
02
Read Input Status
Rack, Module, and Channel Statuses
03
Read Holding Registers
Setpoint Configuration, Switch Settings,

Configuration Lock, Alarm Event List,
System Event List, Rack Date and Time,
Rack Reset, Rack Trip Multiply Software,
Rack Trip Multiply - Hardware,
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Software,
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Hardware,
Last Command Success,
Full-scale Data Range, Port Number,
Data Ready,
Repeated Read Input Status Data,
Repeated Read Input Register Data and
Configurable Registers
04
Read Input Registers
Current Proportional Values, Last Read

Proportional Time Stamp
06
and
16
Preset Single Register

And
Preset Multiple
Registers
Setpoint Configuration, Switch Settings,

Configuration Lock, Alarm Event List,
System Event List, Rack Date and Time,
Rack Reset, Rack Trip Multiply Software,
Rack Alarm Inhibit Software,
35
Modbus Function Code

Code
Meaning
08
Loopback/Maintenance
Diagnostic Codes:
0
Query Data
Diagnostic Register
10
Clear Counters
11
Message Count
12
Communication Error Count
13
Exception Count
18
Character Overrun Count
Report Slave ID
Family ID and current revision number of

the Communication Gateway Module's
firmware
17
5.1.3

Data
DCS and Modbus Addressing Notation

The following table shows the notation used to refer to the function code
addresses in the DCS computer database and in the Modbus queries.
Data Type
Modbus Programmable
Controller Register
(1-based)
Query Address
(zero-based)
Format
Range
Format
Input Status
1XXXX
10001-19999
XXXX
0000-9998
Holding Registers
4XXXX
40001-49999
XXXX
0000-9998
Input Registers
3XXXX
30001-39999
XXXX
0000-9998
4XXXX
40001-49999
XXXX
0000-9998
Preset Multiple
Registers
4XXXX
44001-49999
XXXX
0000-9998
36
Range
Note
Addresses are listed in this section using 2 formats: the Modbus
Programmable Controller format (1-based) and the query address format
(zero-based). Use whichever format is appropriate for your host.
5.1.4
General Register Layout

The Communication Gateway Module uses fixed protocol addresses for the
starting locations of data in the rack. The data addresses are used in the
protocol messages to access data that is available from the module and are not
the physical data addresses in the Communication Gateway Module. The
protocol starting addresses and Modicon PC Registers are as follows:
Data Type
Function
Code
Address Ranges
Query
Address
Format
(zero-based)
Modbus
Programmable
Controller
Format
(1-based)
Not Used
Current Proportional Values
Last Read Proportional Time Stamp
4
4
0-447
500-947
950-956
30001-30448
30501-30948
30951-30957
Module Statuses (Input Status Format)

Channel Statuses
Rack Status
2
2
2
0-95
100-3683
3684-3692
10001-10096
10101-13684
13685-13693
Setpoint Configuration
Switch Settings
Configuration Lock
3, 6
3, 6
3, 6
0-5
6-10
11
40001-40006
40007-40011
40012
Alarm Event List

System Event List
Rack Date and Time
3, 6
3, 6
3, 6
12-29
30-63
80-93
40013-40030
40031-40064
40081-40094
Rack Reset
Trip Multiply Group
Rack Trip Multiply Software
3, 6
3, 6
3, 6
94
95
96
40095
40096
40097
Rack Trip Multiply - Hardware

Rack Alarm Inhibit - Software
Rack Alarm Inhibit Hardware
3
3, 6
3
97
98
99
40098
40099
40100
3
3
100-112
113
Last Command Success

Full-scale Data Range
40101-40113
40114
37
Data Type
Function
Code
Address Ranges
Query
Address
Format
(zero-based)
Modbus
Programmable
Controller
Format
(1-based)
40115
Port ID
114
Data Ready
*Unused
*Repeated Current Proportional Values
3
3
115
1000-1447
1500-1947
40116
41001-41448
41501-41948
*Repeated Last Read Time Stamp

*Repeated Module Statuses
*Repeated Channel Statuses
3
3
3
1950-1956
2000-2005
2006-2229
41951-41957
42001-42006
42007-42230
*Repeated Rack Status

*Repeated Current Proportional Values
Floating Point
*Repeated Setpoint Configuration
Floating Point
2230
2500-3395
42501-43396
3,6, or 16
4000-4007
44001-44008
3,6, or 16
3
5000-5499
45001-45500
3,6, or 16
3
6000-6999
46001-47000
Setpoints
Otherwise
Configurable Registers Floating Point
Setpoints
Otherwise
42231
*The repeated data registers contain duplicated data in different registers for
some Modbus devices that only support the 4XXXX series registers. Status data
is bit packed in the 4XXXX registers such that the least significant bit (bit 0) of
register 42001 corresponds to register 10001 and the most significant bit (bit 15)
of register 42001 corresponds to register 10016.
5.1.5
Data Type Details

This section describes each data type in detail and describes what each register
is used for. For more information about these data types, refer to the following
pages:
38
Data Type
Primary Values
39
40
42
42
Channel Statuses
46
Rack Status
47
48
Switch Settings
51
Configuration Lock
52
Alarm Event List
53
System Event List
54
Rack Date and Time
56
Rack Reset
56
Rack Group
57
Rack Trip Multiply - Software
57
58
58
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Hardware
59
59
59
Port Number
60
Data Ready
Group New Mode
5.1.5.1
Page Number
60
60
Primary Values
The primary values are not used in the 3500/92. Instead, the configurable
registers were added to accomplish this (see page 60). Because of this
difference, the 3500/92 is not completely compatible with the 3500/90. Users will
need to reconfigure their DCS or PLC with the addresses of the configurable
registers. In addition the configurable registers will need to be mapped using the
39
3500 Configuration software. All proportional values can be configured,

expanding the scope and adding flexibility to the contiguous register set.
5.1.5.2

The current proportional values include monitor values such as direct (overall
vibration amplitude), probe gap, and 1X and 2X amplitude and phase lag. These
values are different for each channel pair type. Page 77, lists the proportional
values for each module. Use the READ INPUT REGISTERS command (function
code 4) to read the Current Proportional Values. Current proportional values
have space available for 32 values per monitor slot. Each slot can return from 0
to 32 channels and 0 to 8 values per channel, but not more than 32 values total
per slot. Each value is sent high byte to low byte. The value returned is scaled
to the value set for Full Scale Data Range in the Rack Configuration Software
(see Section 3.3). The Current Proportional Values are fixed with 32 addresses
for each slot. If a full-height monitor does not use all 32 proportional values, then
the addresses are filled with zeros.
Note
These values are repeated in the 4XXXX address
range. Refer to page 37 for register layout.
Starting Addresses for Current Proportional Values
3500 Rack
Slot Number
Starting Address
Full Height Module or
Upper Half-height Module
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
Lower Half-height Module
Modbus PC
Format
Query
Format
Modbus PC
Format
Query
Format
30501
30533
30565
30597
30629
30661
30693
30725
30757
30789
30821
30853
30885
30917
500
532
564
596
628
660
692
724
756
788
820
852
884
916
30517
30549
30581
30613
30645
30677
30709
30741
30773
30805
30837
30869
30901
30933
516
548
580
612
644
676
708
740
772
804
836
868
900
932
For example, for a 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor installed in slot 3 with channel 1
and 2 optioned as Thrust Position and channel 3 and 4 optioned as Radial
Vibration, the proportional values for this monitor will be setup as follows:
Addresses for Sample 3500/40 Proximitor Monitor
Proportional Value
Number
Name
Address
Query
Format
(zero-based)
Modbus
Programmable
Controller Format
(1-based)
1
2
3
4
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
532
533
534
535
30533
30534
30535
30536
5
6
7
8
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
536
537
538
539
30537
30538
30539
30540
9
10
11
12
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
540
541
542
543
30541
30542
30543
30544
13
14
15
16
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase Lag
544
545
546
547
30545
30546
30547
30548
17
18
19
20
2X Amplitude
2X Phase Lag
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
548
549
550
551
30549
30550
30551
30552
21
22
23
24
0
0
0
0
552
553
554
555
30553
30554
30555
30556
25
26
27
28
0
0
0
0
556
557
558
559
30557
30558
30559
30560
29
30
31
32
0
0
0
0
560
561
562
563
30561
30562
30563
30564
41
If half-height modules are installed, then each module is fixed with 16 addresses.
Similar to a full-height module, a half-height module will fill unused addresses
with zeros. In addition, the topmost half-height module will send the entire 16
proportional values, including zeros, before the bottom module sends its block of
16 proportional values, including zeros.
5.1.5.3

This set of registers is a time stamp of when the last read proportional value was
last updated. All the proportional values in one channel are updated at the same
time and therefore have the same time stamp. When a proportional value is
read, the time stamp for that proportional value is put into the Last Read
Proportional Time Stamp Registers. To find the time that proportional values
were obtained, first read a single proportional value or multiple proportional
values in the same channel by following the directions for Current Proportional
Values or Primary Values, then use the READ INPUT REGISTERS command
(function code 4) to read the time stamp at the addresses shown in the table
below. If a single read command requests proportional values from more than
one channel, then the time stamp data will be the time stamp of the last
requested register. The format for the Last Read Proportional Time Stamp
Registers is shown in the table below.
Note
Last Read Proportional Value

or Status Time Stamp Address
Query Format
Modbus PC
Format
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
30951
30952
30953
30954
30955
30956
30957
Field Name
Code
Range
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
1/100 Second
00 99*
1 - 12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59
0 - 99
Notes
Months are in
sequential order
(e.g. 1 = Jan)
24-hour clock: 12
= Noon and 00 =
Midnight
* Year = 00 implies the year 2000
5.1.5.4

The Module Statuses have a value of "1" for true and "0" for false. Each half-slot
module has three status bits associated with it, Alert/Alarm 1, Danger/Alarm 2,
and not OK. (Full-height modules will not use the Lower Slot statuses.) For
relay modules, the Alert/Alarm 1 status bit indicates that a relay has tripped. The
42
Alert/Alarm 1 and Danger/Alarm 2 status bits have no meaning for Keyphasor

Modules and Communication Gateway Modules and so are always false (status
bit equals "0"). The Power Supplies and Rack Interface Module only use the not
OK status so the other statuses are not used. If the Power Supply is faulted or
not installed, then the status for that power supply will be not OK ("1"). If the
Rack Interface Module is not OK then the not OK status will be set to "1". If the
state of the Module Status is unknown then it will be defaulted to "0" for false.
Use the READ INPUT STATUS command (Function code 2) to read the Module
Statuses. A simple formula to compute the starting address in zero-based format
for any slot status is:
Upper Slot Starting Address = 6 * slot number
Lower Slot Starting Address = (6 * slot number) + 3
Note
Module Status Addresses
Slot
Module Status
Address
Query
Format
Modbus
PC Format
0 Upper
0 Upper
0 Upper
Rack OK Relay (0=ok, 1=not ok)

(not used)
Power Supply 1 not OK
0
1
2
10001
10002
10003
0 Lower
0 Lower
0 Lower
(not used)
(not used)
Power Supply 2 not OK
3
4
5
10004
10005
10006
1 Upper
1 Upper
1 Upper
(not used)
(not used)
RIM not OK
6
7
8
10007
10008
10009
1 Lower
1 Lower
1 Lower
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
9
10
11
10010
10011
10012
2 Upper
2 Upper
2 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
12
13
14
10013
10014
10015
2 Lower
2 Lower
2 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
15
16
17
10016
10017
10018
3 Upper
3 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
18
19
10019
10020
43
Slot
44
Module Status
Address
Query
Format
20
Modbus
PC Format
10021
3 Upper
not OK
3 Lower
3 Lower
3 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
21
22
23
10022
10023
10024
4 Upper
4 Upper
4 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
24
25
26
10025
10026
10027
4 Lower
4 Lower
4 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
27
28
29
10028
10029
10030
5 Upper
5 Upper
5 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
30
31
32
10031
10032
10033
5 Lower
5 Lower
5 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
33
34
35
10034
10035
10036
6 Upper
6 Upper
6 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
36
37
38
10037
10038
10039
6 Lower
6 Lower
6 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
39
40
41
10040
10041
10042
7 Upper
7 Upper
7 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
42
43
44
10043
10044
10045
7 Lower
7 Lower
7 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
45
46
47
10046
10047
10048
8 Upper
8 Upper
8 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
48
49
50
10049
10050
10051
8 Lower
8 Lower
8 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
51
52
53
10052
10053
10054
9 Upper
9 Upper
9 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
54
55
56
10055
10056
10057
Slot
Module Status
Address
Query
Format
Modbus
PC Format
9 Lower
9 Lower
9 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
57
58
59
10058
10059
10060
10 Upper
10 Upper
10 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
60
61
62
10061
10062
10063
10 Lower
10 Lower
10 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
63
64
65
10064
10065
10066
11 Upper
11 Upper
11 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
66
67
68
10067
10068
10069
11 Lower
11 Lower
11 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
69
70
71
10070
10071
10072
12 Upper
12 Upper
12 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
72
73
74
10073
10074
10075
12 Lower
12 Lower
12 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
75
76
77
10076
10077
10078
13 Upper
13 Upper
13 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
78
79
80
10079
10080
10081
13 Lower
13 Lower
13 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
81
82
83
10082
10083
10084
14 Upper
14 Upper
14 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
84
85
86
10085
10086
10087
14 Lower
14 Lower
14 Lower
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
87
88
89
10088
10089
10090
15 Upper
15 Upper
15 Upper
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
90
91
92
10091
10092
10093
45
Slot
Module Status
15 Lower
15 Lower
15 Lower
5.1.5.5
Address
Query
Format
Modbus
PC Format
93
94
95
10094
10095
10096
Alert/Alarm 1
Danger/Alarm 2
not OK
Channel Statuses
Channel statuses are only available for slot 2 through slot 15. The
Communication Gateway stores a true or false value for the channel statuses for
each channel. A "0" indicates false and a "1" indicates true. Each slot is fixed
with 32 channels. If a full-height monitor does not have all 32 channels, then the
Channel Status bits for the unused channels will be zero. Use the READ INPUT
STATUS command (Function Code 2) to access the Channel Status values for
the Rack. Refer the specific module's Operation and Maintenance Manual to
determine what channel statuses it returns. (Half-height modules can only have
up to 16 channels with 8 status values each.) The status bits for each channel is
in the following order:
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Channel Statuses
Channel not OK
Channel Alert / Alarm 1
Channel Danger / Alarm 2
Channel In Bypass Mode
Channel Off
Channel Trip Multiply Mode
Channel Not Communicating
Note

46
Starting Addresses for Channel Statuses

3500 Rack Slot
Number
Starting Address
Full Height Module or
Upper Half-height Module
Lower Half-height Module
Modbus PC
Format
Query Format
Modbus
PC
Format
Query Format
10101
10357
10613
10869
11125
11381
11637
11893
12149
12405
12661
12917
13173
13429
100
356
612
868
1124
1380
1636
1892
2148
2404
2660
2916
3172
3428
10229
10485
10741
10997
11253
11509
11765
12021
12277
12533
12789
13045
13301
13557
228
484
740
996
1252
1508
1764
2020
2276
2532
2788
3044
3300
3556
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
The equation for the upper not OK address is the following:

address for upper not OK = 100 + ( (slot # - 2) * 256 ) + ( (channel # - 1) * 8 )
For example: calculate the address for not OK of upper slot 3, channel 1 as
follows:
address = 100 + ( (3 - 2) * 256 ) + ( (1 - 1) * 8 )
address = 356
The equation for the lower not OK address is the following:
address for lower not OK = 228 + ( (slot # - 2) * 256 ) + ( (channel # - 1) * 8 )
For example: calculate the address for not OK of lower slot 2, channel 1 as
follows:
address = 228 + ((2 - 2) * 256 ) + ( (1 - 1) * 8 )
address = 228
5.1.5.6
Rack Status
The rack status is a range of registers that summarize the channel status
registers for all modules. Register 3684 corresponds to channel status bit 0 (rack
not OK) and register 3692 corresponds to channel status bit 7 (rack not
communicating). Registers between 3684 and 3692 are used similarly for the
47
remaining channel statuses. If any module in the rack sets a channel status bit,
the corresponding rack status register will also be set.
The repeated rack status register (address 2230) is a single register with 8 bits.
Each bit summarizes the channel status registers for all modules in the rack.
The least significant bit (LSB) corresponds to channel status bit 0 (channel not
OK) and the remaining bits are used similarly for the remaining channel statuses.
If any module in the rack sets a channel status bit, the corresponding repeated
rack status bit will also be set.
Note
5.1.5.7
Monitor setpoints may be either read or written. The setpoints are acquired one
at a time. The following information is required to read or write setpoints:
Setpoint Information
Refer to...
Setpoint types
Page 75 of this manual
Setpoint number
Operation and maintenance manual

for the monitor
Proportional value full-scale range
Channel Option screens in the Rack

Take the following precautions when you use the Communication Gateway
Module to adjust setpoints:
Adjust setpoints so that the over setpoint is greater than the under setpoint.
Refer to page 49 for additional information about 1X and 2X phase setpoints.
Since the Communication Gateway requires that you adjust one setpoint at a
time, turn channel bypass on before you change setpoints for proportional
values that have over and under setpoints.
Check that adjusted setpoints are within the linear range of the transducer.
To read a setpoint:
1. Use the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command (function code 16) or
PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command (function code 6) to write to the Slot
Number, Channel Number, and Setpoint Number Registers at addresses 0,
1, and 2 (Modicon PC Registers 40001 to 40003) to specify which setpoint is
desired. Once these registers have been written, the Setpoint Value,
Setpoint Type, and Setpoint Enabled will be loaded into addresses 3, 4, and
5 (Modicon PC Registers 40004 to 40006).
48
2. Use the READ HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3) to read

addresses 0 to 5 (Modicon PC Registers 40001 to 40006). Reading those
addresses before they have been updated will yield the previous setpoint
value from the previous setpoint request.
To write a new setpoint value:
1. Acquire Configuration Lock - Write a "1" to the Configuration Lock Register
using a function code 6 or 16 to request the Configuration Lock.
2. Verify Configuration Lock is granted - Read the Configuration Lock
Register using function code 3. A "0" means the Configuration Lock is
granted to another port and a "1" means the Configuration Lock is granted
Note
The Configuration Lock will not be granted and setpoint values can not be
changed if any other port has the Configuration Lock. Also, if the
Communication Gateway is configured to not allow changing configuration,
then writing to the Configuration Lock Register will cause an illegal address
response. For details, refer to page 52 (Configuration Lock).
3. Write new setpoint value - Use the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS
command (function code 16) or PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command
(function code 6) to write to the Slot Number, Channel Number, Setpoint
Number, and Setpoint Value Registers at addresses 0 to 3 (Modicon PC
Registers 40001 to 40004) to specify which setpoint is to be changed and the
new value it is to be changed to. You may change multiple setpoints in the
same slot by repeating step 3.
Application Alert
The Communication Gateway Module allows the Under
setpoint to be set above the Over Setpoint. Reversing
the Over and Under setpoints results in different
acceptance regions as shown in the following 4
scenarios.
49
Scenarios 1 through 4
1) Acceptance Region
2) Over Setpoint for Scenarios 1 through 4
3) Under Setpoint for Scenarios 1 through 4
Note
Phase acceptance regions define the areas for a nonalarm state. The
endpoints (setpoints) are included in the nonalarm state.
For 1X and 2X Phase Lag, the Over Setpoint does not have to be greater
than the Under Setpoint.
The acceptance region is always from the Under Setpoint to the Over
Setpoint in a counter-clockwise direction.
If the Under Setpoint equals the Over Setpoint, then there is full
acceptance (no alarms).
4. Verify new setpoint value - If you did not receive an error code when the
setpoint was written, you can verify the new setpoint value by either following
the read setpoint steps to read back the setpoint value (the value read back
may be slightly different from what was written due to scaling), or read the
Last Command Success registers (see page 59).
5. Relinquish the Configuration Lock - Write a "0" to the Configuration Lock
Register using a function code 6 or 16 to relinquish the Configuration Lock.
50
Note
Setpoint
Configuration
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Slot Number
Channel Number
Setpoint Number
Setpoint Value
0
1
2
3
40001
40002
40003
40004
Setpoint Type
Setpoint Enabled
4
5
40005
40006
5.1.5.8
Floating
Point
Registers
44001
44002
44003
44004
44005
44006
44007
Read or
Write
Data Range
(Decimal)
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
2 - 15
1 - 32
1 - 20
0 65535
Read Only
Read Only
0 - 255
0 = FALSE
1 = TRUE
Switch Settings
Use the Switch Setting to read or write channel settings. Setup which Switch
Setting is desired by writing to the Slot Number, Upper/Lower, Channel Number,
and Switch Number registers. Refer to the switch section of the module
operation and maintenance manual for the switch numbers.
To read Channel Settings:
1. Use the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command (function code 16) or
PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command (function code 6) to write to the Slot
Number, Upper/Lower, Channel Number, and Switch Number registers to
specify which Switch Setting is desired. Once these registers have been
written, the Channel Setting information will be loaded into the Switch Value
register.
2. Use the READ HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3) to read
the Slot Number, Upper/Lower, Channel Number, Switch Number, and
Switch Value. Reading those addresses before they have been updated will
yield the previous Channel Settings from the previous Switch Setting request.
To write a new Switch Setting value:
1. Acquire Configuration Lock - Requisition the configuration lock by writing a
"1" to the Configuration Lock Register using a function code 6 or 16.
2. Verify that the Configuration Lock is granted - Read the Configuration
Lock Register using function code 3. A "0" means the Configuration Lock is
not granted and a "1" means the Configuration Lock is granted.
51
Note
The Configuration Lock will not be granted and switch values can not be
changed if any other port has the Configuration Lock. Also, if the
Communication Gateway is configured to not allow changing configuration,
then writing to the Configuration Lock Register will cause an illegal address
response. For details, see page 52 (Configuration Lock).
3. Write the new Channel Setting - Use the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS
command (function code 16) or PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command
(function code 6) to write to the Slot Number, Upper/Lower, Channel Number,
Switch Number, and Switch Setting Registers to specify which Channel
Setting is to be changed and the new value it is to be changed to. (To
change the module switches, then specify Channel 0.) You may change
Switch Settings on different channels in the same slot by repeating step 3.
4. Verify new Switch Setting - If you did not receive an error code when the
switch was written, you can verify the new switch value by either following the
read Switch Setting steps to read back the switch value or read the Last
Command Success registers (see page 59).
5. Relinquish the Configuration Lock - Relinquish the Configuration Lock by
writing a "0" to the Configuration Lock Register using a function code 6 or 16.
Switch Setting
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(Decimal)
Slot Number
Upper/Lower
6
7
40007
40008
Read/Write
Read/Write
Channel Number
Switch Number
Switch Value
8
9
10
40009
40010
40011
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
0 - 15
0 = UPPER
1 = LOWER
0 - 32
1 - 16
0 = OFF
1 = ON
5.1.5.9
Configuration Lock
The Configuration Lock allows only one device to configure the 3500 rack at a
time. To acquire the Configuration Lock, write a "1" to the Configuration Lock
Register using the PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command (function code 6) or
the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command (function code 16).
To see if the Configuration Lock has been granted, read the Configuration Lock
Register using the READ HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3).
A "0" means that the Configuration Lock is granted to another port and a "1"
means the Configuration Lock is granted.
To relinquish the Configuration Lock, write a "0" to the Configuration Lock
Register using the PRESET SINGLE REGISTER command (function code 6) or
the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command (function code 16). To verify
52
that the Configuration Lock was relinquished, you can read the Last Command
Success registers (see page 59).
The Configuration Lock will not be granted if the following conditions are true:
Another port in the rack has the lock
The Config Allowed box on the Modbus Protocol Setup screen of the Rack
Configuration Software is cleared ()
Writing to the Configuration Lock Register when one of these conditions is true
will cause an illegal address response.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(Decimal)
Configuration Lock
11
40012
Read/Write
0-1
5.1.5.10 Alarm Event List

The Alarm Event List contains the latest 1000 Alarm Events. Each Alarm Event
is identified with a unique 32 bit sequence number. The Last Posted Alarm
Event Register contains the sequence number of the latest Alarm Event. To
request an Alarm Event, first write the desired sequence number to the
Requested Alarm Event Registers using the PRESET SINGLE REGISTER
command (function code 6) or the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command
(function code 16). The specified event can then be read using the READ
HOLDING REGISTERS command (Function code 3).
If you read the holding register before the registers are updated, the last
requested event will be returned. If the event requested is more than 999 events
older than the last posted alarm event sequence number, then the exception
code "ILLEGAL DATA VALUE" will be returned.
53
Alarm Event List

Description
Query
Address
Modicon
PC
Register
Data Range
(decimal)
Read or
Write
Requested Alarm Event

Sequence Number
12 - 13
40013 40014
0 - 4,294,967,245
Read/Write
Last Posted Alarm Event

Sequence Number
14 - 15
40015 40016
0 - 4,294,967,245
Read Only
Alarm Event Sequence No.
16 - 17
0 - 4,294,967,245
Read Only
0 - 15
0 = UPPER
1 = LOWER
0 - 32
0 = Alert
1 = Danger
2 = not OK
3 = Relay Trip
0 = Entered Alarm
1 = Exit Alarm
00 99*
1 - 12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59
0 - 99
Read Only
Read Only
Slot Number
Upper/Lower
18
19
40017 40018
40019
40020
Channel
Alarm Type
20
21
40021
40022
Alarm Direction
22
40023
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
1/100 Second
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
40024
40025
40026
40027
40028
40029
40030
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
5.1.5.11 System Event List

The System Event List contains the latest 500 System Events. Each System
Event is identified with a unique 32 bit sequence number. The Last Posted
System Event Register contains the sequence number of the latest System
Event. To request a System Event, first write the desired sequence number to
the Requested System Event Registers using the PRESET SINGLE REGISTER
command (function code 6) or the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command
(function code 16). The specified event can then be read using the READ
HOLDING REGISTERS command (Function code 3).
If you read the holding registers before the registers are updated, the last
requested event will be returned. If the event requested is 499 events older than
the last posted alarm event sequence number, then the exception code
"ILLEGAL DATA VALUE" will be returned.
54
System Event List

Description
Query
Address
Modicon
PC
Register
Data Range
(Decimal)
Read or
Write
Requested System
Event Sequence
Number
30 - 31
40031 40032
0 - 4,294,967,295
Read/Write
Last Posted System

Event Sequence
Number
32 - 33
40033 40034
0 - 4,294,967,295
Read Only
Sequence Number
34 - 35
Event Classification
36
40035 40036
40037
System Event Number

Source Slot
Upper/Lower
37
38
39
40038
40039
40040
Destination Slot*
Upper/Lower*
40
41
40041
40042
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
1/100 Second
Event Specific String
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49 - 51
Event String
52 - 63
40043
40044
40045
40046
40047
40048
40049
40050 40052
40053 40064
0 - 4,294,967,295
Read Only
0= Severe/Fatal
Event
1 = Potential
Problem Event
2 = Typical logged
Event
3 = Reserved
0 - 65535
0 - 15
0 = Upper Slot
1 = Lower Slot
0 - 15
0 = Upper Slot
1 = Lower Slot
00 - 99*
1 - 12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59
0 - 99
ASCII text
Read Only
ASCII text
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only

Refer to the module's operation and maintenance manual for the System Event
List Messages. The Source Slot number is the module that caused the action
(for example if the Communication Gateway Module changed the module's
setpoint the Communication Gateway Module would be listed as the source slot).
* Refer to the operation and maintenance manual for the module installed in this
slot (upper or lower).
55
5.1.5.12 Rack Date and Time

The rack date and time can be either read or written. To read the actual rack
date and time, use READ HOLDING REGISTER command (function code 3) and
the Actual Rack Date and Time Registers shown in the table below.
To write a new rack date and time, write the desired time using PRESET
SINGLE REGISTERS command (function code 6) or PRESET MULTIPLE
REGISTERS command (function code 16) to the Write and Verify Rack Date and
Time Registers shown in the table below. The Write and Verify Rack Date and
Time Registers can be read back to verify what you entered. You can preload
the date and time except for the 1/100 second register. When the 1/100 second
register is written to, the new rack date and time will be stored.
To verify the new rack date and time, you can either read the rack date and time
using the Actual Rack Date and Time Registers, or you can read the Last
Rack
Date/Time
Address
Modicon
PC
Register
Field
Name
Code
Range
Notes
Read or Write
Actual Rack Date and Time Registers

80
81
82
83
84
85
86
40081
40082
40083
40084
40085
40086
40087
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
1/100
Second
00 - 99*
1 - 12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59
0 - 99
Months are in sequential order

(e.g. 1 = Jan)
24-hour clock: 12 = Noon and
00 = Midnight
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Write and Verify Rack Date and Time Registers

87
88
89
90
91
92
93
40088
40089
40090
40091
40092
40093
40094
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
1/100
Second
00 - 99*
1 - 12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59
0 99
Months are in sequential order

(e.g. 1 = Jan)
24-hour clock: 12 = Noon and
00 = Midnight
(Writing to the 1/100 Second
register causes the time stored in
the Write/Verify Rack date and
Time Registers to be written to
the Actual Rack Date and Time
Registers)
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
5.1.5.13 Rack Reset

Before you perform this command, use the 3500 Rack Configuration Software to
verify that the Config Allowed box on the Modbus Protocol Setup screen is
checked (). If you attempt to write a "1" to the software Rack Reset software
address when the Config Allowed box is cleared (), an ILLEGAL DATA
ADDRESS will be returned. To enable the software Rack Reset for that group
with the Modbus protocol, write a the group number of the monitor or 255 for all
56
monitors to software Rack Reset address using the PRESET MULTIPLE

REGISTERS command (function code 16) or PRESET SINGLE REGISTER
(function code 6).
To verify that the software Rack Reset was enabled, you can read the Last
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Reset
94
40095
Read/Write
1 - 16 or 255
5.1.5.14 Rack Group

This register controls the group referred in the software Rack Trip Multiply
register. Groups are set in the RIM. The default value, 255, means all groups; in
other words the entire rack.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Group
95
40096
Read/Write
1 16 or 255
5.1.5.15 Rack Trip Multiply (Software)

checked (). If you attempt to write a "1" to the software Rack Trip Multiply
software address when the Config Allowed box is cleared (), an ILLEGAL
DATA ADDRESS will be returned. First, set the Rack Group Register. To
enable the software Rack Trip Multiply for that group with the Modbus protocol,
write a "1" to software Rack Trip Multiply address using the PRESET MULTIPLE
(function code 6).
To disable the software Rack Trip Multiply with the Modbus protocol, write a "0"
to the Rack Trip Multiply using the PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command
(function code 16) or PRESET SINGLE REGISTER (function code 6).
To verify that the software Rack Trip Multiply was either enabled or disabled, you
can read back the software Rack Trip Multiply register using the READ
HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3) or read the Last Command
Success registers (see page 59).
57
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Trip Multiply

(Software)
96
40097
Read/Write
0-1
5.1.5.16 Rack Trip Multiply (Hardware)

To see if the Rack Trip Multiply contact on the Rack Interface I/O Module is
enabled or disabled, read the hardware Rack Trip Multiply register using the
READ HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3). If the value in the
register is a "1" then the hardware Rack Trip Multiply is enabled. If the value in
the register is a "0", the hardware Rack Trip Multiply is disabled.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read
or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Trip Multiply

(Hardware)
97
40098
Read
Only
0-1
5.1.5.17 Rack Alarm Inhibit (Software)

checked (). To enable the software Rack Alarm Inhibit with the Modbus
protocol, write a "1" to the software Rack Alarm Inhibit register using the
PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS command (function code 16) or PRESET
SINGLE REGISTER (function code 6).
To disable the software Rack Alarm Inhibit with the Modbus protocol, write a "0"
to the software Rack Alarm Inhibit register using the PRESET MULTIPLE
(function code 6).
To verify that the software Rack Alarm Inhibit was either enabled or disabled,
read back the software Rack Alarm Inhibit register using the READ HOLDING
REGISTERS command (function code 3) or read the Last Command Success
registers (see page 59).
58
Register
Query
Address
Modicon
PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Alarm Inhibit

(Software)
98
40099
Read/Write
0-1
5.1.5.18 Rack Alarm Inhibit (Hardware)

To see if the Rack Alarm Inhibit contact on the Rack Interface I/O Module is
enabled or disabled, read the hardware Rack Alarm Inhibit register using the
READ HOLDING REGISTERS command (function code 3). If the value in the
register is a "1", then the hardware Rack Alarm Inhibit is enabled. If the value is
a "0", the hardware Rack Alarm Inhibit is disabled.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Rack Alarm Inhibit

(Hardware)
99
40100
Read Only
0-1
5.1.5.19 Last Command Success

The Last Command Success Error Code indicates if
the last command was executed successfully
the last command was not completed
an error was detected
The Last Command Success String contains a message that
explains the error
states if the command was successful or unsuccessful
indicates if the register is busy

Register

Error Code
Status String
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Data Range
(decimal)
100
101 - 112
40101
40102 - 40113
0 - 65535
text
5.1.5.20 Full-scale Data Range

The Full-scale Data Range register indicates the maximum size for values that
are returned from the port. Typical values for this register are 12 bits (4095), 16
bits (65535), etc
59
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Data Range
(decimal)
Read/Write
Full-scale
Data Range
113
40114
1 - 65535
Read Only
Data is scaled between zero and the number entered for the Full-scale Data
Range in the Rack Configuration Software. The Full-scale Data Range value is
equivalent to 100% of full-scale.
Refer to Page 61(Scaling the Data) for examples.
5.1.5.21 Port Number

The port number will return which of the two comm ports that you are connected
to and talking on.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read
or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Port Number
114
40115
Read
Only
0-1
5.1.5.22 Data Ready

The data ready register indicates whether or not a request for any of the multiple
registers (setpoints, switch settings, events, or date/time) have completed
fetching the information from the rim. This register can be set manually if the
transition from zero to one is desired to be seen or it will toggle automatically
upon request for the information.
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read
or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Data Ready
115
40116
Read/
Write
0-1
5.1.5.23 Group New Mode

This command changes the mode of any monitor supporing the multimode
command. The data range is 2 bytes long, where the lower byte is the mode and
the upper byte is the group. For example, 256 would set group 1 to mode 0. 257
60
would set group 1 to mode 1, and so on. The range of groups is 1-16. The range
of modes is 0-7. Also note that a 3500/22 TDI is required the 3500/20 RIM
does not support the multimode command.
5.1.6
Register
Query
Address
Modicon PC
Register
Read
or
Write
Data Range
(decimal)
Group New Mode
116
40117
Write
0 65,535
Configurable registers are user selected proportional values, channel status,
module status, and setpoints. This data is a subset of what is available in the
rack. Selecting only the important registers and packing them together allows a
faster, more efficient map. Two register maps, each capable of storing 500,
values are duplicated for the configurable registers: integer mapped from 45001
to 45500; floating point mapped from 46001 to 47000 if needed. Floating point
(IEEE 32 bit standard) values span across 2 registers. In the case of a setpoint
both registers can be written to at once because both registers make up one
value.
Channel Status
Bits 0-7 are described in Channel Statuses page 46.
Bits 8-15 are specific to the monitor. Details can be reviewed from the printed
register map in the 3500 Config Software.
Module Status
This is specific to the monitor. Details can be reviewed from the printed register
map in the 3500 Config Software.
PPL Status
This is specific to the monitor. Details can be reviewed from the printed register
map in the 3500 Config Software.
Proportional Values
All proportional values are available to be configured and are described
throughout this document. Specific proportional values for each monitor are
listed on page 77
Setpoints
Setpoints can be read (function code 3) or written (function code 6,16). In a
Modbus command only one setpoint can be set at a time.
5.1.7
Scaling the Data

To scale the data, you must do one of the following:
set the full-scale range for the proportional value or the setpoint in the Rack
61
5.1.7.1
know the full-scale range for the proportional value or the setpoint
Proportional Value Example

Use the following equation to convert the output of the ports on a Communication
Gateway I/O Module to engineering units:
Upper
Lower Lower
Scaled Value
Proportional Value
(engineering =
Monitor Monitor + Monitor
Gateway Full-Scale Value Range Range Range
units)
For example, for a monitor channel that is operating as shown in the following
table...
Parameter
Value
Direct Full-scale range

Measured value
0 - 10 mil
39321
65535
...calculate the output as follows:

Scaled Value
39321
=
(10 - 0) + 0 = 6 mil
(engineering units) 65535
5.1.7.2
Setpoint Example
Calculate the setpoint value to send to the Communication Gate Module using
the following equation:
Scaled
setpoint value
Lower
Gateway
Desired
setpoint value Monitor Range Full - scale

Upper
Lower
Monitor Range Monitor Range
For example, for a monitor channel that is operating as shown in the following
table...
Parameter
Direct Full-scale range
Desired Setpoint Value
62
Value
25-0-25 mil
8.2 mil
65535
...calculate the setpoint to input to the Communication Gateway Module as

follows:
Scaled
( 8.2 - ( -25)) 65535 = 43515
=
setpoint value
25 - ( -25)
If 43515 is successfully sent to the Communication Gateway Module, the data

read back may be a few counts off because of scale differences.
5.1.8
Modbus Language Description

The Modbus interface complies with EIA standard RS-232C, interface type D.
The communications transactions are carried out in a half-duplex mode. A
transaction consists of a master sending a command and a slave device
returning a response. The commands and responses are communicated
asynchronously via a bit serial protocol. By design, Modbus can support multiple
stations with one master and up to 255 responder stations. The Communication
Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) supports 255 daisy chained Communication
Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) stations when using any available baud rate.
Assign each responder a unique fixed device address in the range of 1 to 255 by
setting the address in the Rack Configuration Software.
In Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) connections, the
Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) will behave as a slave on the
communication link. A separate interfacing device, called a gateway, will serve
as the master on this connection and usually as a protocol converter between
Modbus protocol and a higher level Data Highway system. This section is
concerned only with the Modbus communication link and does not discuss any
special features or requirements of the gateway or the data highway.
5.1.8.1
Message Definition
When the word status or point is used in the Modbus context, it means alarm
status or control bit status. This status is discrete data, which usually is
represented as a single bit in a 16-bit word. When the word register is used in
Modbus, it represents a 16-bit word of memory.
5.1.8.2
Byte Layout of Modbus Commands (RTU Framing)

Each Modbus transaction consists of the transmission of a query and response
frame. These frame types are all similar and are subdivided into four fields:
slave address, function code, information, and error check.
Order of Transmission
SLAVE ADDRESS
(first)
FUNCTION CODE
INFORMATION
CRC
(last)
The length of each field is an integral multiple of 8-bit bytes. The slave address
field is sent first and the other fields follow in the order shown.
63
Slave Address
The slave address field of both the query and the response frames contain the
slave address of the affected responder station. Since there is only one initiator
station, the initiator is not addressed explicitly.
The slave address field is one byte long and is defined for the values 0 to 255 as
follows:
0
Signifies Broadcast frame, all stations are selected. Communication

Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) lets you set the time for all the 3500
racks in a daisy chain with this message. No response will be given.
1 to 255
Selects the corresponding Communication Gateway I/O Module

(Modbus).
Function Code
A one-byte long portion of the command that identifies the command type. The
Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) supports the following values:
Code
2
3
4
6
8
16
17
Function
Read Input Status
Read Holding Register
Read Input Register
Loopback/Maintenance
Preset Multiple Registers
Report Slave ID
Information Field
Contains all other information necessary to specify a required function or its
response.
CRC Error Check Field
A field that is appended to the frame to detect transmission errors between the
sending and receiving stations. The field contains no application information.
The error check field is cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16) and is 2-bytes long.
Its value is a function of the preceding data in the frame. The transmitter uses
the following method to calculate the CRC value:
1. Load the 16-bit CRC register with FFFF hex (all 1s).
2. Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the message with the low-order byte of the
16-bit CRC register and place the result in the CRC register.
3. Shift the CRC register one bit to the right (toward the LSD) and insert a zero
in the MSB.
4. Extract and examine the LSB:
64
If LSB = 0:
repeat Step 3
If LSB = 1:
exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001

hex (1010 0000 0000 0001).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until 8 shifts have been performed. When this is done,
a complete 8-bit byte will have been processed.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the message. Continue
doing this until all bytes have been processed.
The final contents of the CRC register is the CRC value. As each additional byte
is transmitted, it is included in the value in the register the same way. The
receiver also calculates the CRC value and compares it to the received CRC
value to verify the accuracy of the data received.
5.1.8.3
Read Input Status Command

Use this command (function code 02) to obtain the discrete (True or False)
Module Statuses and Channel Statuses from the Communication Gateway I/O
Module (Modbus). The query frame is shown below:
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
02
Start Addr
High Byte
Start Addr
Low Byte
No. of Points
High Byte
No. of Points
Low Byte
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
The data fields and their meanings are described in the following paragraphs.
The slave address and the CRC Check have the same format and meaning as
described in earlier sections.
Start Address
Start Address is the Modbus address of the first input status in the group to be
read. Note that each discrete input is allocated a Modbus Status Address. The
higher order byte is transmitted first followed by the lower order byte. The
allowed ranges are 0 to 3683 (Zero referenced). Any address outside this range
for which a status is requested will result in the exception response "ILLEGAL
ADDRESS". See Section Error! Reference source not found. for the mapping
of the Modicon PC Registers to the Communication Gateway I/O Module
(Modbus) data.
Number of Points
This 16-bit field contains the discrete points beginning at the "Start Address".
The Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) has a limit of 2000 readable
discrete points at one time. The maximum number of discrete inputs may also
be limited by the DCS controller. Refer to the appropriate DCS controller manual
for more information.
65
Example
Slave
Address
Function
Code
Start Addr
High Byte
Start Addr
Low Byte
01
02
00
00
No. of
Points
High Byte
00
No. of
Points
Low Byte
60
CRC
High
Byte
78
CRC
Low
Byte
22
The above example shows a Read Input Status Command (the byte values are
in Hex) that retrieves 96 Module Statuses starting at address zero.
5.1.8.4
Read Input Status Response

The format of the Read Input Status response is shown below. The response
includes the slave address, function code, number of bytes of packed discrete
points being sent and the CRC check. The discrete points are packed into bytes
with 1 bit for each status ("1" = True/ON "0" = False/OFF). The lower order bit of
the first byte of data contains the first addressed input (point) and the remainder
follows. For input quantities not a multiple of eight, the last byte will be filled with
zeros in the high order bit positions.
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
02
Byte
Count
First 8
Points
Next
8 Points
...
Last
8 Points
CRC
High
Byte
XX
CRC
Low
Byte
XX
Queries containing requests for data from outside the valid ranges 0 to 3683
(Zero referenced) will result in an "ILLEGAL ADDRESS" exception response.
5.1.8.5
Read Holding Registers Command

Use this command (function code 03) to obtain the following data from the
Communication Gateway I/O Module:
Switch Settings
Configuration Lock
Alarm Event List
System Event List
Rack Date and Time
Rack Reset
Rack Trip Multiply - Software
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Hardware
Repeated 3XXXX and 1XXXX Data
The data for each register is a 16-bit word. The query frame is shown below:
66
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
03
Start
Address
High Byte
Start
Address
Low Byte
No. of
Registers
High Byte
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
CRC
High
Byte
XX
CRC
Low
Byte
XX
The slave address and the CRC check have the same format and meaning as
Start Address
Start Address is the 16-bit Modbus holding register address corresponding to the
starting value. The higher order byte is transmitted first followed by the lower
order byte. The allowed ranges are 0 to 6999 (Zero referenced). Any address
outside this range will result in the exception response "ILLEGAL ADDRESS".
See page 37 for the mapping of the Modicon PC Registers to the Communication
Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) data.
Number of Registers
This 16-bit field is the number of values to be obtained beginning at the "Start
Address". The maximum number of input registers read in a single query is
limited to 114 registers by the Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus)
and may be limited by the DCS controller. Refer to the appropriate DCS
controller manual for more information.
Example
Slave
Address
Function
Code
01
03
Start
Address
High Byte
00
Start
Address
Low Byte
06
No. of
Registers
High Byte
00
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
05
CRC
High Byte
CRC
Low Byte
65
C8
The above example shows a Read Holding Registers Command (the byte values
are in Hex) that retrieves five values starting at address six.
5.1.8.6
Read Holding Registers Response

The format of the response to Read Holding Registers is shown below. The
response includes the slave address, function code, number of bytes of data
being sent, and the CRC check. The contents of the registers requested are two
bytes each: the first byte is the high order and the second byte is the lower order.
Note that the Byte Count is the number of bytes in the data portion of the
response or two times the number of registers.
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
03
Byte
Count
Data
Reg. 1
High | Low
.....
Data
Reg. N
High | Low
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
67
Queries containing requests for data from outside the valid range will result in an
"ILLEGAL ADDRESS" exception response.
5.1.8.7
Read Input Registers Command

Use this command (function code 04) to obtain the following data from the
Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus): the Primary Values, Current
Proportional Values, and the Last Read Proportional Time Stamp. The data for
each register is a 16-bit word. The query frame is shown below:
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
04
Start
Address
High Byte
Start
Address
Low Byte
No. of
Registers
High Byte
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
CRC
High
Byte
CRC
Low
Byte
Start Address
Start address is the 16-bit Modbus input data register address corresponding to
the first register. The higher order byte is transmitted first followed by the lower
order byte. The allowed ranges are 0 to 956 (Zero referenced). Any address
Number of Registers
Address". The maximum number of input registers read in a single query is
limited to 125 registers by the Communication Gateway I/O Module and may be
limited by the DCS controller. Refer to the appropriate DCS controller manual for
more information.
Example
Slave
Address
Function
Code
01
04
Start
Address
High Byte
02
Start
Address
Low Byte
01
No. of
Registers
High Byte
00
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
06
CRC
High
Byte
20
CRC
Low
Byte
70
The above example shows a Read Input Register Command (the byte values are
in Hex) that retrieves six values starting at address 513.
5.1.8.8
Read Input Registers Response

The format of the response to Read Input Register is shown below. The
response includes the slave address, function code, number of bytes of data
being sent, and the CRC check. The contents of the registers requested are two
bytes each: the first byte is the high order and the second byte is the lower order.
Note that the Byte count is the number of bytes in the data portion of the
response or two times the number of registers.
68
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
04
Byte
Count
Data
Reg. 1
High | Low
........
Data
Reg. N
High | Low
CRC
High
Byte
XX
CRC
Low
Byte
XX
Queries containing requests for data from addresses outside the valid range 0 to
956 will result in an "ILLEGAL ADDRESS" exception response.
5.1.8.9
Preset Single Register Command

Use this command (function code 06) to preset a value in the Setpoint
Configuration, Switch Settings, Configuration Lock, Alarm Event List, System
Event List, Rack Date and Time, Rack Reset, Rack Trip Multiply - Software and
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Software. The data for each register is a 16-bit word. The
query frame is shown below:
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
06
Address
High Byte
Address
Low Byte
Data
High Byte
Data
Low Byte
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
The data fields and their meaning are described in the following paragraph. The
slave address and the CRC check have the same format and meaning as
Address
Address is the 16-bit Modbus address corresponding to the register. The higher
order byte is transmitted first followed by the lower order byte. The allowed
ranges are 0 -3, 6 -13, 30 - 31, 87 - 96, and 98 (Zero referenced). Any address
Data
Data is the 16-bit word that will be written to the address.
Example
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
06
Address
High Byte
00
Address
Low Byte
62
Data
High Byte
00
Data
Low Byte
01
CRC
High Byte
E9
CRC
Low Byte
D4
The above example shows a Preset Single Register Command (the byte values
are in Hex) that sets the address 98 to one.
5.1.8.10 Preset Single Register Response

The format of the response to Preset Single Register is shown below. The
response includes the slave address, function code, the address, the preset
value and the CRC check.
69
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
06
Address
High Byte
00
Address
Low Byte
62
Data
High Byte
00
Data
Low Byte
01
CRC
High Byte
E9
CRC
Low Byte
D4
Queries containing addresses outside the valid ranges will result in an "ILLEGAL
ADDRESS" exception response. The valid ranges are as follows: 0 -3, 6 -13, 30
- 31, 87 - 96, and 98 (Zero referenced).
5.1.8.11 Preset Multiple Registers Command

Use this command (function code 16 [10 Hex]) to preset a value in the Setpoint
Configuration, Switch Settings, Configuration Lock, Alarm Event List, System
Event List, Rack Date and Time, Rack Reset, Rack Trip Multiply - Software and
Rack Alarm Inhibit - Software. The data for each register is a 16-bit word. The
query frame is shown below:
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
10
Start
Address
High Byte
Start Address
Low Byte
No. of
Registers
High Byte
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
Byte
Count
8 bits
(continued)
Data Reg. 1
High Byte
Data Reg. 1
Low Byte
.....
Data Reg.
N
High Byte
Data Reg. N
Low Byte
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
Start Address
Start Address is the 16-bit Modbus address corresponding to the starting value.
The higher order byte is transmitted first followed by the lower order byte. The
allowed ranges are 4000 4003, 5000 5500, and 6000 - 6999 (Zero
referenced). Any address outside this range will result in the exception response
"ILLEGAL ADDRESS". See page 37 for the mapping of the Modicon PC
Registers to the Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) data.
Number of Registers
Address". The maximum number of registers preset in a single query is limited
to the number of continuous write registers by the Communication Gateway I/O
Module (Modbus) and may be limited by the DCS controller. Refer to the
appropriate DCS controller manual for more information.
70
Example
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
10
Start Address
High Byte
00
Start Address
Low Byte
57
No. of Registers
High Byte
00
No. of Registers
Low Byte
07
Data Reg. 2
High Byte
00
Data Reg. 2
Low Byte
05
(continued)
Byte Count
Data Reg. 1
High Byte
00
0E
Data Reg. 1
Low Byte
5F
(continued)
Data Reg. 3
High Byte
00
Data Reg. 3
Low Byte
12
Data Reg. 4
High Byte
00
Data Reg. 4
Low Byte
16
Data Reg. 5
High Byte
00
Data Reg. 5
Low Byte
09
Data Reg. 6
Low Byte
02
Data Reg. 7
High Byte
00
Data Reg. 7
Low Byte
5E
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
(continued)
Data Reg. 6
High Byte
00
The above example shows a Preset Multiple Registers Command (the byte
values are in Hex) that preset seven values starting at the address 87.
5.1.8.12 Preset Multiple Registers Response

The format of the response to Preset Multiple Registers is shown below. The
response includes the slave address, function code, starting address, and the
number of registers.
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
10
Start
Address
High Byte
Start
Address
Low Byte
No. of
Registers
High Byte
No. of
Registers
Low Byte
CRC
High Byte
XX
CRC
Low Byte
XX
Queries containing addresses outside the valid ranges 4000-4003, 5000-5500,

and 6000-6999 will result in an "ILLEGAL ADDRESS" exception response.
5.1.8.13 Loopback/Maintenance Function Code 8

A Diagnostic function code causes the slave to echo the data regardless of the
status of the associated device. The code also restarts or interrogates the
communication option in the slave without affecting the associated slave device.
The query frame format is shown below:
Slave
Address
01
Function
Code
08
Diagnostic
Code
High Byte
Diagnostic
Code
Low Byte
Data 1
Byte
Data 2
Byte
CRC
High Byte
CRC
Low Byte
71
Response
The same as the query except that the DATA field depends on the Diagnostic
code.
The following table lists the Diagnostic codes.
Code
Meaning
DATA
Return query register
Data 1 = echoes query data

Data 2 = echoes query data
Return diagnostic register
**
10*
Clear counters and diagnostics

registers
16-bit response (This echoes the

query data.)
11
Return message count
16-bit count response
12
Return communication error count
13
Return exception count
18
Return char overrun count
* Only power-up or diagnostic code 10 clears counters and diagnostic registers.

All counters count modulo 65536.
** The following bit pattern will be returned in the response.
72
Address
01
Function
08
Diagnostic Code
00 | 02
Data 1
00
Data 2
XX
CRC
?? | ??
RAM
ROM
NODE VOLTAGE
COMMUNICATION
GATEWAY I/O
MODULE
SLOT
IDENTIFICATION
CONFIG
DATA
COMMUNICATION
FLASH
Bit Pattern
A logic "1" in the bit pattern represents a FAILURE in the respective area.
5.1.8.14 Exception Conditions

If the addressed Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) receives a query
frame without a communications error and if some condition stops the
Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) from responding, the interface
returns an exception response containing the appropriate error code to the
master.
The high order bit (Hex 80) of the function code field is set to "0" in a query or
normal response frame and "1" in an exception response. And regardless of the
function code, the information field of all exception response frames is one byte
long. This byte contains the exception code, defined below.
Code
Exception Condition
Illegal function. The function code received in the query is not

supported.
Illegal data address in the information field.
Illegal data value in the information field.
Slave Device Busy
The Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus) implements exception codes

1, 2, 3, and 6.
73
5.1.8.15 Report Slave ID Function Code 17

Use function code 17 to obtain device dependent status and configuration
information from the Communication Gateway I/O Module (Modbus).
Query:
Address
01
Function
11
CRC
C0 | 2C
Response:
Address
01
Function
11
Byte Count
6
Family ID
MSB
Family ID
LSB
(continued)
Communication Gateway I/O
Module (Modbus)
Major Revision Number
Communication Gateway I/O

Module (Modbus)
Minor Revision Number
CRC
CRC
High Byte
Low Byte
Family ID MSB
Most significant byte of the 3500 monitoring system in HEX (0D).
Family ID LSB
Least significant byte of the 3500 monitoring system in HEX (AC).
Major Rev Number
Changed when a major firmware revision occurs.
Minor Rev Number
Changed when a minor firmware revision occurs.
5.1.8.16 Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP)

MBAP is the implementation of the Modbus protocol on TCP/IP Ethernet
network. MBAP is the same as the Modbus protocol with a few minor
exceptions. These exceptions are necessary to properly operate on a nondeterministic network.
MBAP supports function code 2,3, 4, 6, and 16. All data can be read through
function codes 2, 3, and 4. All data can be written through function codes 6 and
16; however, only one value can be changed per command. Using function code
16 to write two registers is only valid for floating point values. All other writes are
for single registers.
74
5.1.8.17 Monitor Setpoints

When writing to the query registers, you will send the slot number (2 to 15), the
channel number (1 to 32) and the setpoint number. Refer to the setpoint section
of the operation and maintenance manuals of the monitor for the setpoint
numbers and values.
The setpoint types are structured in an 8-bit (byte) format. Each bit in the byte
has a specified meaning. The byte is broken down as shown below.
Setpoint Types
LSB
MSB
WW X YYYYY
where WW is alarm type

X is alarm level
YYYYY is type of proportional value
Meaning of the Bits in the Setpoint Byte

Decimal
Value
WW
0
1
2
3
X
0
1
Meaning
Over / From
Under / To
Differential
Unused
Alert / Alarm 1
Danger / Alarm 2
75
Decimal
Value
YYYYY
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
76
Meaning
No Type
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Max Value
Min Value
Peak To Peak
Speed
Prime Spike
Power
Peak Torque
Peak Speed
Peak Power
Seismic
Acceleration
Composite
nX Amplitude
nX Phase
Shaft Absolute - 1X Ampl
Shaft Absolute - 1X Phase
Not 1X Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Bandpass
Shaft Absolute - Direct
Num Reverse Rotations
Zero Speed
Speed Band
Position
Differential
5.1.8.18 Module Proportional Values

The following tables list the order of the proportional values for each module.
These are provided as examples and not all modules are provided. Refer to
section 5.1.5 for a detailed explanation of the proportional value addressing
scheme.
3500/25 Keyphasor Module

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Rpm
Rpm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/40(M) Radial Vibration Channels

Channel
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Proportional
Value Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Applies to monitors with or without the "M".
3500/40(M) Eccentricity Channels

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct Max
Direct Min
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct Max
Direct Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
77
3500/40(M) Thrust Position

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/42 Velocity Channels
78
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/40(M) Differential Expansion

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/42M Velocity Channels

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
Proportional
Value Name
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
0
0
3500/42(M) Radial Vibration

Channels
3500/42(M) Eccentricity
Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
Proportional
Value Name
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
Proportional
Value Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct Max
Direct Min
Peak to Peak
Gap
Direct Max
Direct Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Smax Amplitude
3500/42 Acceleration Channels

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/42M Acceleration II Channels

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
Proportional
Value Name
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
Direct
Gap
1X Amplitude
1X Phase
2X Amplitude
2X Phase
Not 1x Amplitude
0
0
79
3500/42(M) Thrust Position

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3500/42(M) Differential Expansion

Channels
Proportional
Value Name
3500/42M Shaft Absolute, Radial

Vibration Channels
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
80
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Channel
Channel
Proportional
Value Name
RV Direct
RV Gap
RV 1X Amplitude
RV 1X Phase
RV Direct
RV Gap
RV 1X Amplitude
RV 1X Phase
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/42M Shaft Absolute, Velocity

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional Value
Name
Shaft Abs Direct
Shaft Abs 1X Amplitude
Shaft Abs 1X Phase
Velocity Direct
Velocity 1X Amplitude
Velocity 1X Phase
Shaft Abs Direct
Shaft Abs 1X Amplitude
Shaft Abs 1X Phase
Velocity Direct
Velocity 1X Amplitude
Velocity 1X Phase
0
0
0
0
3500/44(M) Aeroderiviative
Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
Proportional
Value Name
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Direct
1X Amplitude
Band-pass
Direct
1X Amplitude
Band-pass
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Thrust Position

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Differential Expansion

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Gap
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
3500/45 Ramp Differential

Expansion Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Composite
Direct
Gap
Composite
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Case Expansion - Paired
82
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Composite
Position
Direct
Composite
Position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Complementary Input

Channels
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Composite
Direct
Gap
Composite
Direct
Gap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Case Expansion - Single

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
3
3
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Position
Direct
Position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/45 Valve Position

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Position
Direct
Position
Direct
Position
Direct
Position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/50 Rotor Acceleration

Channel
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Rotor Accel
Speed
Peak Speed
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/50 Zero Speed Channel

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Zero Speed
Speed
Peak Speed
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
83
3500/50 Rotor Speed Channel

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Speed
Speed Band
Peak Band
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/53 Overspeed Channel
84
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Speed
Peak Speed
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/60 Temperature Channels

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Composite
Differential
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Applies if Composite or Differential are

enabled.

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Composite
Differential
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Applies if Composite or Differential are

enabled.
85
3500/62 Process Variable

Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3500/64M Dynamic Pressure
86
Channel
Proportional
Value
Number
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Proportional
Value Name
Direct
Direct
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6.
Maintenance
When performed properly, this module may be installed into or removed from the
rack while power is applied to the rack. Refer to the Rack Installation and
This section shows how to verify that the Communication Gateway Module is
operating correctly.
6.1
Comm Gateway Port Test Utility

Use the Communication (Comm.) Gateway Port Test Utility to verify that the Port
1 HOST connector and the Port 2 HOST connector on the Communication
Gateway RS-232/422 I/O Module are operating properly. Before running the
Communication Gateway Port Test Utility, connect cable 130419-01 (RS-232
Host to 3500/92) between the HOST connector on the Communication Gateway
I/O Module and the computer that has the utility installed.
Refer to the 3500 Monitoring System Rack Configuration and Utilities Guide (part
number 129777-01) for more information about this utility.
6.2

with the 3500/92 Communication Gateway Module. The following instructions
describe how to remove the existing firmware and replace it with upgrade
firmware. The Monitor will need to be reconfigured using the 3500 Rack
Configuration software after having its firmware upgraded.
The following items will be required to perform a firmware upgrade to the
Communications Gateway:
Small Flathead Screwdriver
Upgrade Firmware ICs.*
*Refer to Section 8(Ordering Information) for part numbers. Users may use their
6.2.1
Installation Procedure
The following steps will need to be followed to complete the Communication
Gateway Module firmware upgrade:
87
Ensure that the Modules configuration is saved using the 3500 Rack
Remove the two original firmware ICs from the monitor PWA.
Install the two upgrade firmware ICs into the sockets on the monitor PWA.
Top Shield Removal
1) Top Shield.
2) Standoff.
3) Screwdriver.
Step 1. Place the large flathead screwdriver under the top shield and on the
ridge of the rear standoffs and lift upward on the screwdriver to pop the cover
loose from the rear standoffs.
standoffs.
88

Step 1. Insert the small flathead screwdriver under the lip of either end of U5 or
the ODD word IC which is situated above the other firmware IC. The diagram
shows the approximate location of the chip to be removed, but not necessarily its
orientation.
Step 2. Slightly lift the one end of the chip by gently prying with the screwdriver.
Move to the other end of the chip and repeat. Continue this process until the chip
comes loose from the socket.
Step 3 Repeat the first two steps for U6, or the EVEN word IC, which is situated
below the other firmware IC.
89
Install the upgrade firmware ICs into the PWA.

Step 1. Install the U5 upgrade. Place part number 137495-01 into the top socket
on the PWA. Be sure that the notched end of the IC is matched to the notched
end of the socket. Ensure that the IC is firmly seated in the socket.
Step 2. Install the U6 upgrade. Place part number 137494-01 into the bottom
socket on the PWA. Be sure that the notched end of the IC is matched to the
notched end of the socket. Ensure that the IC is firmly seated in the socket.
90
7.
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem with the Communication
Gateway Module or the I/O module by using the information provided by the selftest, the LEDs, the System Event List, and the Alarm Event.
7.1
Self-test
To perform the Communication Gateway Module self-test:
Connect a computer running the Rack Configuration Software to the 3500 rack (if
needed).
Select Utilities from the main screen of the Rack Configuration Software.
Select System Events/Module Self-test from the Utilities menu.
Press the Module Self-test button on the System Events screen.
Application Alert
Communication will be
lost while the self-test is
being performed.
Select the slot that contains the Communication Gateway Module and press the
OK button. The Communication Gateway Module will perform a full self-test
and the System Events screen will be displayed. The list will not contain the
results of the self-test.
Wait 30 seconds for the module to run a full self-test.
Press the Latest Events button. The System Events screen will be updated to
include the results of the self-test.
Verify that the Communication Gateway Module passed the self-test. If the
module failed the self-test, refer to Section 7.3
91
7.2

problems.
OK
LED
TX/RX
1 HZ
1HZ
5 HZ
ON
Flashing
OFF
Not
Flashing
Condition
Solution

is not configured.
Reconfigure the
Communication
Gateway Module.

is Not OK.
Check the System

Event List.

is operating correctly.
No action required.

is not operating correctly.
Check the System

Event List.

is not communicating correctly or
there are no monitors in the rack.
Check the System

Event List.
7.3

Communication Gateway Module and gives an example of one.
92
Sequence
Number
Event
Information
Event
Number
Class
Event Date
DDMMYY
Event
Time
0000000123
Device Not
Communicating
32
02/01/90
12:24:31:99
Event
Specific
Sequence Number:

example 123).
Event Information:

Communicating).
Event Number:
Slot
5L
Class:

Class Value
Classification
Severe /Fatal Event
Reserved
Event Date:
Event Time:
Event Specific:

this field.
Slot:

full-height module is installed, the field will be 0 to 15.
If a half-height module is installed in the lower slot,
then the field will be 0L to 15L. For example, a module
installed in the lower position of slot 5 would be 5L.
The following System Event List Messages are associated with the
Communication Gateway Module and are listed in numerical order. If an event
marked with a star (*) occurs, both ports on the Communication Gateway I/O
Module will stop communicating. If you are unable to solve any problems,
contact your nearest Bently Nevada office.
Event Number: 11
Action:
Replace the Communication Gateway Module as soon as
possible.
Internal Network Failure
Event Number: 30
Action:
Replace the Communication Gateway Module immediately.

Event Number: 32
Action:
the Communication Gateway Module
the rack backplane
93
Event Number: 33
Action:
the rack backplane
I/O Module Mismatch
Event Number: 62
Action;
Verify that the type of I/O module installed matches the
protocol selected in the software. If the correct
Communication Gateway I/O Module is installed, there may be
a fault with the Communication Gateway Module or the
Communication Gateway I/O Module.
Event Number: 100
Action:
Event Number: 101
Action:
Event Number: 102
Action:
Event Number: 103
Action:
94

Supplies)
Event Number: 104

Action:
(Pass Main Board +5V - upper and lower Power

Supplies)
Event Number: 105

Action
Event Number: 106
Action:
Event Number: 107
Action:
Event Number: 108
Action:
95

Event Number: 109
Action:
Fail Main Board +15V-AB

Supplies)
Event Number: 110

Action:
(Pass Main Board +15V - upper and Power

Power Supplies)
Event Number: 111

Action:
Device Configured
Event Number: 300
Action:
No action required.
Event Number: 301
Action:
Download a new configuration to the Communication Gateway
Module. If the problem still exists, replace the Communication
Gateway Module immediately.
Module Entered Cfg Mode
Event Number: 302
Action:
No action required.
96

Event Number: 305
Action:
Download the software switches to the Communication
Gateway Module. If the software switches are not correct,
replace the Communication Gateway Module.
Module Reboot
Event Number: 320
Action:
No action required.
Module Removed from Rack
Event Number: 325
Action:
No action required.
Event Number: 326
Action:
No action required.
Device Events Lost
Event Number: 355
Action:
No action required.
Module Alarms Lost
Event Number: 356
Action:
No action required.
I/O Module Detect Fault
Event Number: 399
Action:
Verify that the Communication Gateway Module and the
Communication Gateway I/O Module are plugged into the
3500 rack correctly. If that does not solve the problem, check
to see if one of the following components is faulty:
Communication Gateway I/O Module
Event Number: 410
Action:
No action required.
Enabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 416
Event Specific:
Ch x
The specified channel has been bypassed.
Action:
No action required.
97
Disabled Ch Bypass
Event Number: 417
Event Specific:
Ch x
The specified channel has been taken out of bypass.
Action:
No action required.
Fail Slot Id Test
Event Number: 461
Action:
Verify that the Communication Gateway Module is fully
inserted in the rack. If the Communication Gateway Module is
installed correctly, check to see if one of the following
the rack backplane
Pass Slot Id Test
Event Number: 462
Action:
Verify that the Communication Gateway Module is fully
inserted in the rack. If the Communication Gateway Module is
installed correctly, check to see if one of the following
the rack backplane
Flash Contents Corrupted
Event Number: 666
Action:
Replace the Communication Gateway Module as soon as
possible.
7.4

The following Alarm Event List Messages are returned by the Communication
Gateway Module.
98
Entered not OK
module went not OK
Left not OK
8.
A
Part number 3500/92

A
B
-
C
-
I/O Module Type

01
02
03
04
MODBUS RS-232/422 I/O Module

MODBUS RS-485 I/O Module
Ethernet/MODBUS RS-232
Ethernet/MODBUS RS-485
Memory Option
00
01
C
Not Available
Low Memory
00
01
None
CSA-NRTL/C
Note
If the 3500/92 Communications Gateway Module is added to an existing 3500 Monitoring

System, the following (or later) hardware and software versions are required:
3500/20 Main PWA Revision N (if using a 3500/92 Ethernet option)
TMR 3500/20 Main PWA Revision P (if using a 3500/92 Ethernet option)
Spares
MODBUS I/O Module RS-232/422
MODBUS RS-485 I/O Module
Ethernet/MODBUS RS-232 I/O Module
Ethernet/MODBUS RS-485 I/O Module
Communication Gateway Module Manual
Firmware IC (ODD)
Firmware IC (EVEN)
136180-01
125736-01
133323-01
136188-01
136188-02
138629-01
04425545
137495-01*
137494-01*
*Note: The firmware ICs must be ordered and installed as a set when performing a firmware
upgrade.
Cables
Host Computer to RS-232/422 Converter Cable RS-232
RS-232 to RS-422 Converter 110 VAC
RS-232 to RS-422 Converter 220 VAC
RS-485 Y
130119-01
02230411
02230412
139036-01
99
Ethernet RJ45 Cable

A
Cable Length
006
010
025
040
050
075
085
100
120
150
200
250
320
6 feet (1.8 metres)

10 feet (3 metres)
75 feet (23 metres)
200 feet (61 metres)
Fiber Optic Cable

A
Cable Length
0XXX
10 ft - 500 ft. (3 metres to 152.4 metres) in 10 ft (3

metere) increments only
500 ft - 6500 ft. (152.4 metres to 1981.2 metres) in 100
ft (30.5 metere) increments only
XX00
Host to 3500/92 Cable RS-232

A
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
01
02
100
Not Assembled
Assembled
RS-232/422 Converter to 3500/92 Cable RS-422 PVC Insulated

A
B
-
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
0250
0500
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
RS-232/422 Converter to 3500/92 Cable RS-422 Teflon Insulated

A
B
-
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
0250
0500
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
Honeywell PLCG to 3500/92 RS-232

A
B
-
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
101
3500/92 to 3500/92 Cable RS-422/RS-485 PVC Insulated

A
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
0250
0500
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
3500/92 to 3500/92 Cable RS-422/RS-485 Teflon Insulated

A
Cable Length
0010
0025
0050
0100
0250
0500
10 feet (3 metres)
50 feet (15 metres)
00
01
Not Assembled
Assembled
Extension Cable RS-422/RS-485
A
Part number 130531A
01
02
Not Assembled
Assembled
Insulation
01
02
102
PVC Insulated
Teflon Insulated
(Used with Cables 129665, 131108,

130530, and 131109 for lengths greater
than 152 metres (500 feet))
9.
Specifications
INPUTS
Power Consumption:
5 watts Typical
Data:
Collects data, such as current values and

current alarm statuses, via a high speed
internal network.
OUTPUTS
Front Panel LEDs:
OK LED:
TX/RX LED:
Protocols:
Modbus:
3500 Software:

properly.
Indicates when the 3500/92 is communicating
with other modules in the 3500 rack.
Based on AEG PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
Reference Manual
Bently Nevada Proprietary Protocol for 3500
Configuration and Data Acquisition
Temperature:

Humidity:
95% non-condensing
CE MARK DIRECTIVES:
EMC Directives:
EN50081-2:
Radiated Emissions:
EN 55011, Class A
EN 55011, Class A
EN50082-2:

Surge Capability:
Magnetic Field:
Power Supply Dip:
103
Radio Telephone:

EN 61010-01

CSA-NRTL/C
PHYSICAL
Main Board:
Width x Depth)
Weight:
241 mm x 24.4 mm x 242 mm

(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 9.52 in)
0.82 kg (1.8 lbs)
I/O Module (Modbus RS-232/422 and Modbus RS-485):

241 mm x 24.4 mm x 99.1 mm
Width x Depth)
(9.50 in x 0.96 in x 3.90 in)
Weight:
0.44 kg (0.96 lbs)

Main Board:
I/O Modules:
104


Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Vibration Monitoring System

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Vibration Monitoring System

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

g GE Oil & Gas